Automation and control Soft starters and variable speed drives. Catalogue September

Transcription

1 Automation and control Soft starters and variable speed drives Catalogue September 4

2 Art MKTED473EN Art MKTED3EN Safety solutions using Preventa 4 Ethernet TCP/IP Transparent Factory Art MKTED34EN 4 AS-Interface cabling system 3 Human/Machine dialogue Communication Control and Protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue Control and Protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue, Communication Control and signalling units Art MKTED994EN Telemecanique Components for Human-Machine interfaces Terminals and display units Art MKTED44EN Automation and control Human/Machine interfaces An overview of the product range Control and protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue, Communication, Supervision, Panel-building and cabling accessories 4 To be issued Automation and control Mounting systems Art MKTED33EN 4 Automation and control Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies 3 3 Art MKTED4EN Automation and control Automation and relay functions Human/Machine dialogue Supervision Panel-building and cabling accessories Automation

3 AUTC84EN Distributed I/O Advantys STB AUTC44EN 3 Modicon Momentum automation platform 4 Art MKTED47EN Automation and control Automation platform Modicon Quantum and Unity - Concept Proworx software Art MKTED47EN Automation and control Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software 4 Automation platform Modicon TSX Micro and PL7 software 4 Art MKTED4EN Art DIAED456EN 4 Automation and control Telemecanique The essential Automation, Communication Art DIA7ED36EN Art DIA7ED39EN 4 Motion control Lexium Art MKTED49EN 3 Twin Line Motion control Soft starters and variable speed drives Art MKTEDEN 4 Art MKTED33EN 3 Global Detection Electronic and electromechanical sensors Motor starter solutions Control and protection components Control and protection Detection

4 tico 73 E R Automation solutions An overview of the product range Products listed in this catalogue Product listed in other catalogues (see previous pages) Control and protection Contactors from6to6a Contactors Contactors from9to5a from85to8a Modular contactors Circuit-breakers Rotary switch disconnector Thermal overload relays Measurement and Motor starters open version Contactor and reversing control relays contactor breakers Direct on-line starters, enclosed version Star-delta starters, enclosed version Control and protection Soft starters open and enclosed version Soft start-soft stop units for asynchronous motors Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled variable speed drives Power supplies and transformers Detection Photo-electric detectors Inductive, capacitive, magnet and ultrasonic proximity sensors Limit switches Limit switches for safety applications Electromechanical pressure and vacuum switches Electronic pressure and vacuum switches Connectors Encoders Inductive identification system Automation Twido programmable controllers Nano programmable controllers Micro automation platform Premium automation platform Quantum automation platform Momentum automation platform TBX distributed I/O Advantys STB distributed I/O IP 67 splitter boxes Telefast pre-wired system Interfaces Control relays Electronic timing relays Zelio Logic smart relays Preventa safety modules Human-Machine dialogue Control and signalling units Cam switches Control stations Pendant control stations Magelis operator dialogue terminals Illuminated beacons and indicator banks Totalising timers and counters Foot switches Emergency stop stations Emergency stop trip wire switches Communication Modbus TCP/X-Way communication architecture: TCP/IP Ethernet network, Modbus Plus network, Fipway network, CANopen bus, AS-Interface cabling system, Fipio bus, INTERBUSbus, Profibus DP, Modbus serial link, Uni-Telway serial link, Jnetseriallink, asynchronous serial links FactoryCast Web solutions FactoryCast HMI Web solutions Web and Internet technologies Supervision Magelis ipc industrial PC Vijeo Look supervisory software Monitor Pro supervisory software Panel building and cabling accessories Wall-mounted enclosures Floor-standing enclosures Uprights, mounting plates, mounting rail, cable ducting and cable clips Prefabricated busbar systems and power distribution systems Tego Dial Tego Power Profil front panel Terminal blocks Cable ends Marking accessories Tools Power distribution Prefadis service poles and posts, lighting poles Canalis busbar trunking for lighting distribution Canalis busbar trunking for low and medium power distribution Canalis busbar trunking for high power distribution Mobile distribution: Canalis track section and cable carriers Services Product reference index Technical information Schneider Electric worldwide

5 4

6 General contents Soft starters and variable speed drives Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart...page/8 Altistart U and TeSys model U...page/4 Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units...page/4 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors. Altivar...page/. Altivar 3...page/38.3 Altivar 38...page/88.4 Altivar 58 - standard...page/3 - ready-assembled...page/8 - Altivar 58F - Flux Vector Control with sensor...page/4.5 Altivar 68 - standard...page/46 - Altivar 68F - Flux Vector Control with sensor...page/47 - ready-assembled...page/89 3 PowerSuite software workshop PowerSuite software workshop...page3/ 4 Communication Starters, drives and communication...page4/ 5 Technical appendices and substitution Technical appendices - speed drive....page5/ - electronic speed drive....page5/ Substituting starters...page5/4 Substituting variable speed drives...page5/6 6 Services Technical information...page6/ Product reference index...page6/8 Schneider Electric wordwide...page6/ 5

7 /

8 Contents -Soft starters for asynchronous motors Selectionguide...page/ Altistart b Soft starters for.37 to 5.5 kw motors... page/8 b Soft start/soft stop units for.75 to 75 kw motors.... page/8 b Combinations v 4 V power supply, type coordination.... page/8 v 69 V power supply, type coordination.... page/9 Altistart U and TeSys model U b Soft start/soft stop units for.75 to 5 kw motors.... page/4 b TeSys model U starter and soft start unit combinations... page/4 Altistart 48 b Selection criteria... page/36 b Line voltage 3/45 V v Connection in the motor supply line.... page/4 v Connection to the motor delta terminals... page/4 b Line voltage 8/69 V v Motor power in HP... page/4 v Motor power in KW... page/43 b Options v Remote terminal... page/45 v Line chokes... page/45 v Protective covers... page/45 v Documentation.... page/45 v Communication options... page/47 b Combinations.... page/58 b Functions... page/58 /

9 Selection guide Soft starters for asynchronous motors Applications Starting simple machines Soft starting and deceleration of simple machines Power range for 5 6 Hz supply (kw) Single phase 3 V (kw) phase 4 V (kw) phase 48 V (kw) phase 3 45 V (kw) 3-phase 8 69 V (kw) 3-phase 3 69 V (kw) phase V (kw) phase 4 V (kw) 45 Drive Output frequency Type of control Transient overtorque Functions Number of functions Number of preset speeds Number of I/O Analog inputs Logic inputs Analog outputs Logic outputs Relay outputs Communication Integrated Available as an option Combined with TeSys model U controller-starter Standards and certifications IEC/EN / C-TICK, CSA, UL, CE, CCC References ATS NppFT ATS Npppp Pages /8 /

10 Soft starting and deceleration of pumping and ventilation machines TCS (Torque Control System) 36 PTCprobe 4 3 Modbus Fipio, Profibus DP, DeviceNet, Ethernet TCP/IP IEC/EN , EMC class A and B DNV, C-TICK, GOST, CCIB, NOM, UL, CE, CCC, CSA ATS 48pppQ ATS 48pppY /4 to /43 /3

11 Presentation Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart Presentation The Altistart soft starter operates either as a torque limiter on starting or as a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. Using the Altistart starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous motors by allowing the motor to start gradually and smoothly in a controlled manner. Using it can also prevent mechanical shocks, which lead to wear and tear, maintenance work and production downtime. The Altistart limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting on machines which do not require a high starting torque. These starters are designed for the following simple applications: b conveyors b conveyor belts b pumps b fans b compressors b automatic doors b small cranes b belt-drive machines, etc. The Altistart is compact, easy to install and can be mounted horizontally next to another unit, complies with standards IEC/EN , UL and CSA certifications, and has e marking. The Altistart soft starter offer comprises 3 product ranges: DF56389 b ATS Nppp soft starters v Control one phase of the motor power supply (single phase or 3-phase) to limit the starting torque. v Internal Bypass relay v Motor power ratings range from.37 kw to 5.5 kw. v Motor supply voltages range from V to 48 V, 5/6 Hz. An external power supply is required for controlling the starter. A contactor is always required to switch off the motor b ATS Nppp soft start/soft stop units v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for deceleration. v Internal Bypass relay v Motor power ratings range from.75 kw to 75 kw. v The motor supply voltages are as follows: 3 V, 4 V, 48 V and 69 V, 5/6 Hz. The use of a line contactor is not necessary on machines where electrical isolation is not required. 9 b ATSU Nppp soft start/soft stop units See pages / to /7. Description b Altistart soft starters (ATS Nppp) are equipped with: v a potentiometer for controlling the starting time v a potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor load v inputs 3: -z 4 V input or a 4 V input for powering the control part that controls the motor b Altistart soft start/soft stop units (ATS Nppp) are equipped with: v a potentiometer 6 for controlling the starting time v a potentiometer 8 for controlling the deceleration time v a potentiometer 7 for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor load v greenindicatorled4: device switched on v yellow indicator LED 5: motor powered at nominal voltage v a connector 9: - logic inputs for Run/Stop commands - logic input for the BOOST function - logic output to indicate the end of starting - relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has reached a standstill at the end of the deceleration stage. Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages / to /7 /4

12 Presentation (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart Functions Description (continued) Equivalence table for contact reference Functions ATS NppLU/QN/RT ATS NppLY ATS NppQ Relay outputs RA 4 4 RC 5 5 V external power supply CM Stop command LI Run command LI 3 3 Control power supply LI + (+ 4 V positive logic) ( V negative logic) BOOST BOOST End of starting LO 5 V external power supply 6 7 ( V negative logic) Functions b -wire control: The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State of logic input LI controls the run process and state controls the stop process. ATS NppLU/QN/RT ATS NppLY/Q Altistart control terminals LI + LI LI Altistart control terminals 3 Wiring diagram for -wire control Wiring diagram for -wire control b 3-wire control: The run and stop commands are controlled by different logic inputs. Stopping is achieved when logic input LI opens (state ). The pulse on input LI is stored until input LI opens. Altistart control terminals LI + LI LI Altistart control terminals 3 DF U % Un 5 % Un Voltage ramp Wiring diagram for 3-wire control Wiring diagram for 3-wire control b Starting time Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the motor can be adjusted and a gradual starting time achieved, which is dependent on the motor load. b Voltage BOOST function via logic input: Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction. When the input is at state, the function is active (input connected to the + 4 V) and the starter supplies a fixed voltage to the motor for a limited time before starting. initial voltage ms Application of a voltage BOOST equal to % of the nominal motor voltage t b End of starting v Application function via logic output LO Soft start/soft stop units ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp are equipped with an open collector logic output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal speed. v Application function via an option For ATSNppLY/Q soft start/soft stop units end of starting information can be obtained by adding the option LAD 8N with N/O+N/C contacts. The option can be easily connected to the bypass contactor of the electronic(s) unit without dismantling the product. b Fault relay Soft start/soft stop units ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp have a relay which opens when a fault is detected. Relay contact RA-RC (4-5 for ATS NppLY/Q) closes with the LI command (-3 for ATS NppLY/Q) and opens when the motor voltage is around with a deceleratedstoporstopimmediatelyonafault. This information can be used for controlling the line contactor and achieving deceleration (by maintaining the line contactor until the motor has stopped). Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages / to /7 /5

13 Characteristics Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart Environment characteristics Type of starter ATS NppFT, ATS NppLU (), ATS NppQN, ATS NppRT ATS NppLY and ATS NppQ Conforming to standards Altistart electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Conducted and radiated emissions CISPR level B, IEC , level B CISPR level B (only with Bypass), IEC , level B Harmonics IEC -3-, IEC -3-4 EMC immunity EN 58-, EN 58- Electrostatic discharge IEC 6-4- level 3 Immunity to radiated radio-electrical IEC level 3 interference Immunity to electrical transients IEC level 4 Voltage/current impulse IEC level 3 Immunity to conducted interference IEC level 3 caused by radio-electrical fields Micro-cuts and voltage fluctuation IEC 6-4- Damped oscillating waves IEC 6-4- level 3 e marking Bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives IEC/EN Product certifications UL, CSA and C-Tick B44.-96/ASME A7.5 for starter wired to the motor delta terminal Degree of protection IP IP on front panel Degree of pollution conforming to IEC/EN conforming to IEC and UL 58 Vibration resistance.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 3 Hz, gn gnfrom3to5hzconformingto IEC/EN Shock resistance 5 gn for ms conforming to IEC/EN gn for ms conforming to IEC/EN Relative humidity % without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC/EN Ambient air temperature around the device Storage C conforming to IEC/EN Operation C without derating, up to 5 C with current derating of % per C above 4 C Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by.% per additional m) Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position conforming to IEC/EN without derating (above this, derate the current by.5% per additional m) Electrical characteristics Type of starter ATS NppFT NppLU NppQN NppRT NppLY NppQ Category of use Conforming to IEC Ac-53b Rated operating voltage Three-phase voltage V - 5% to 48 + % - 5% to 4 + % 38-5% to 45 + % 44-5% to 48 + % Frequency Hz 5-5% to 6 + 5% Output voltage Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage. Control power supply voltage V a... ± % z 4 ± % 3-5% to 69 + % Built into the starter a ±% % Built into the starter Rated operating current A Adjustable starting time s Adjustable deceleration time s Starting torque % 3...8% of starting torque of motor connected directly on the line supply () For the V range, ATS NppLV starters can be connected to the motor delta terminals to reduce the starter rating. Type of starter ATS N6pp to Npp N3pp NppLY/NppQ Use I Starting time Starting time s 5 5 Full voltage status or starter at standstill Maximum number of cycles per hour Operating cycle t Presentation: pages /4 and /5 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages / to /7 /6

14 Characteristics (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart Electrical characteristics (continued) Type of starter ATS N 3FT 6FT 9FT/FT Control power supply consumption z 4 V, 5 ma, a V, 3 ma a 4 V, 65 ma z 4 V, 3 ma, a V, 35 ma, a 4 V, 8 ma Power dissipated At full load at end of starting W 4 In transient state W Current at nominal load () A Type of starter ATS N 6LU/QN/RT 9LU/QN/RT LU/QN/RT LU/QN/RT 3LU/QN/RT Power dissipated At full load at end of starting W In transient state W Current at nominal load () A Type of starter ATS N 3LY/Q 44LY/Q 7LY/Q 85LY/Q Power dissipated At full load at end of starting W 3 3 In transient state W Current at nominal load () A Type of starter ATS N pplu/qn/rt pply/q Logic input power supply: For LI, LI and BOOST only (electrically isolated between power and control) LI +, COM Logic inputs LI, LI, BOOST (,, 3 for ATS Npp LY/Q) Stop, run and boost on start-up functions Logic output LO Endofstartingsignal Relay outputs RA RC (4, 5 for ATS Npp LY/Q) 4 V power supply Max. current available ma. No short-circuit and overload protection Logic inputs with impedance 7 kω 4 V power supply (U max. 4 V) Max. current consumption 8 ma State if U < 5 V and I <. ma State if U > 3 V and I >.5 ma Open collector logic output External 4 V power supply (min. 6 V, max. 3 V) Max. current ma Normally open (N/O) contact (contact open in fault mode) Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 6 V Max. switching capacity on inductive load (cos ϕ =.5 and L/R = ms): A for a 5 V or c 3 V (AC-5) Max. operating voltage 44 V LED signalling Green LED Starter powered up Yellow LED Nominal voltage reached () Acceleration current complying with the maximum conditions of use (see page /6). Connections (Maximum connection capacity and tightening torque) Input with internal control relay, internal 4 V power supply Max. current 8 ma StateifI<=3mA StateifI>=mA Operating category AC-5: Ie 3 A, Ue 5 V, DC-3: Ie A, Ue 4 V, Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 7 V Maximum operating voltage 5 V Type of starter ATS N3FT, N6FT N9FT, NFT, N6pp to N3pp NppLY and NppQ Power circuit Cage type connector Connection via Ø 4 mm screw clamp Flexible wire without cable conductor mm.5 4 AWG.5 8AWG end conductors mm 7 AWG.5 6 AWG Flexible wire with cable end conductor mm.5 4 AWG 6 AWG conductors mm.75 8 AWG 6 AWG Rigid wire conductor mm.5 4 AWG 8AWG conductors mm 7 AWG 6 AWG Tightening torque N.m Control circuit Cage type connector Screw connector Flexible wire without cable end Flexible wire with cable end conductor mm.5 4 AWG AWG conductors mm 7 AWG AWG conductor mm.5 4 AWG AWG conductors mm.75 8 AWG AWG Rigid wire conductor mm.5 4 AWG AWG conductors mm 7 AWG.5 7 AWG Earth connection Tinned connector. Fixed usingø6screws Tightening torque N.m Torque characteristics (typical curves) T The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in U relation to the supply voltage. 3 Tn The torque varies in line with the square of the voltage at a fixed frequency. The gradual increase in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on Tn,85 U power-up. Tn,6 U Tr,5,5,75 N/Ns Presentation: pages /4 and /5 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages / to /7 /7

15 References Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart DF5639 DF56393 DF5639 ATS N3FT ATS NQN ATS N3LY Soft starter for.37 to 5.5 kw motor Motor Motor power () Starter Nominal current Reference Weight Single phase 3-phase 3 V V 3 V 3 V 4 V 46 V kw HP kw HP kw HP A kg Single phase 3 V or 3-phase 48 V supply voltage, 5/6 Hz ATS N3FT.6 6 ATS N6FT ATS N9FT ATS NFT.8 Soft start/soft stop unit for.75to5kwmotor Motor Motor power () Starter Nominal current Reference Weight kw HP A kg 3-phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz.75/. /.5 6 ATS N6LU ATS N9LU.4./3 3/ ATS NLU.4 4/5.5 5/7.5 ATS NLU ATS N3LU.56 3-phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz.5/./3 6 ATS N6QN ATS N9QN ATS NQN.4 7.5/ ATS NQN ATS N3QN.56 3-phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz /3 6 ATS N6RT ATS N9RT ATS NRT.4 /5 ATS NRT.56 3 ATS N3RT.56 Soft start/soft stop unit for5to75kwmotor 3-phase supply voltage: 3 69 V 5/6 Hz Motor Starter Motor power () Nominal Reference Weight 3 V 3 V 4 V 4 V 46 V 575 V 69 V current kw HP kw HP HP HP kw A kg ATS N3LY ATS N44LY ATS N7LY ATS N85LY phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz Motor Motor power () Starter Nominal current Reference Weight kw HP A kg 5 44 ATS N44Q ATS N7Q ATS N85Q 3.8 Accessories Description Used for starter Reference Weight kg Plate for quick mounting on DIN rail ATS N3LY, VY H4 ATS N44p Adaptor for mounting on 4 DZ5 MB rail ATS N3FT, ATS N6FT RHZ 66.5 Auxiliary contact, provides information that the motor is at full voltage ATS NpppLY, ATS NpppQ LAD 8N () Standard power ratings of motors, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL 58. Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages / to /7 /8

16 Dimensions Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart ATS N3FT, ATS N6FT Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail or 4 rail with adaptor RHZ 66 ATS N9FT, ATS NFT Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail 3,7,8 45 Screw fixing 3, (),4, ,5 45 5,7 () () Retractable fixings ATS N6pp to ATS Npp ATS Npp to ATS N3pp Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail Screw fixing Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail Screw fixing 3,7,8 45 3, () 3,7,8 45 3, () 5,7 4 3, ,5 75 7, () () () Retractable fixings () Retractable fixings ATS N3LY, ATS N44LY, ATS N44Q ATS N7LY, ATS N85LY, ATS N7Q, ATS N85Q Quick mounting on 5 rail (35 or 7 mm) using plate VY H4 () 4xM , () xM4 8 Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Schemes: pages / to /7 /9

17 Schemes Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For.37 to 5.5 kw motors ATS NppFT soft starters Single-phase or 3-phase power supply 48 V 3 5 /L 3/L 5/L3 a V, V Q F F S KM () KM S A 4 V /L 3/L 5/L3 CL CL/ KM /T 4/T 6/T3 M 3 Note : For single-phase motors, use the ATS NppFT without connecting the nd phase 3/L, 4/T. Wait 5 seconds after switching the soft starter off before switching it on again. () A line contactor must be used in the sequence. Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft starter Q GV ME circuit-breaker KM LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses S, S XB4BorXB5Bpushbuttons Function chart Power supply voltage Control supply voltage Green LED Yellow LED Motor voltage t Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /

18 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For.75to5kWmotors ATS NppLU/QN/RT soft start/soft stop units Manual control without deceleration (freewheel), Automatic control with reversal of operating direction, without deceleration with GV and GV3 motor circuit-breaker (freewheel) ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp /L 3/L 5/L3 Q F3 () /T 4/T 6/T3 /L 3/L 5/L3 Q V, V F F F3 () S A RA RC /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS N /T 4/T 6/T3 BOOST COM LO LI + LI LI S3 KM3 S KM KM KM3 M 3 KM KM3 KM3 KM A RA RC /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS N /T 4/T 6/T3 BOOST COM LO LI + LI LI M 3 () For type coordination. Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft start/soft stop unit Q GV ME circuit-breaker KM, KM, KM3 LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses F3 3 fast-acting fuses S, S, S3 XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /

19 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For.75to5kWmotors ATS NppLU/QN/RT soft start/soft stop units Automatic control with or without deceleration Automatic control with or without deceleration (freewheel), with contactor (freewheel), without contactor ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp /L 3/L 5/L3 z 5 V max. /L 3/L 5/L3 Q F F Q KM F3 () /T 4/T 6/T3 3-wire control () -wire control Q F4 F4 /T 4/T 6/T3 A RA RC /L 3/L 5/L3 BOOST ATS N /T 4/T 6/T3 COM LO LI + LI LI S S S3 S S KM A RA RC /T /L 4/T 3/L 6/T3 5/L3 BOOST COM LO LI + LI LI S3 S M 3 M 3 () Use shielded wires above m. () For type coordination. Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft start/soft stop unit Q GV ME circuit-breaker Q Fuse switches F4 Thermal overload relay KM LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses F3 3 fast-acting fuses S, S, S3 XB4BorXB5Bpushbuttons Function charts -wire control with deceleration 3-wire control with deceleration Power supply voltage Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI Green LED Logic input LI Logic input LI Relay output R Logic output LO Relay output R Logic output LO Motor voltage Yellow LED s t Motor voltage Yellow LED s t Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /

20 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For.75to5kWmotors ATS NppLU/QN/RT soft start/soft stop units Automatic control without deceleration (freewheel), with a maintaining function ATS N6pp to ATS N3pp /L 3/L /T 5/L3 Q z 5 V max. F F F3 () KM S 4/T 6/T3 S KM A RA RC /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS N /T 4/T 6/T3 BOOST COM LO LI + LI LI KM M 3 () For type coordination. Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft start/soft stop unit Q GV ME circuit-breaker KM LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses F3 3 fast-acting fuses S, S XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /3

21 Schemes Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For5to75kWmotors ATS NppLY and ATS NppQ softstart/softstopunits(compatible components, see page /5) Manual control without deceleration (freewheel), with GV3 and GV7 motor circuit-breaker ATS N3LY to ATS N85LY ATS N44Q to ATS N85Q 5 V 3 69 V 4 V F F /L 3/L 5/L3 /L 3/L 5/L3 Q Q F3 () F3 () A 4 /T 4/T 6/T3 /L 3/L 5/L3 A 4 /T 4/T 6/T3 /L 3/L 5/L ATS NppLY /T 4/T 6/T3 3 5 ATS N /T 4/T Q 6/T3 3 () For type coordination. () For type coordination. Automatic control with reversal of operating direction, without deceleration (freewheel) ATS N3LY to ATS N85LY ATS N44Q to ATS N85Q 5 V 3 69 V a V, V 4 V F F /L 3/L 5/L3 F F /L 3/L 5/L3 Q Q F3 () S F3 () S KM KM3 S3 KM3 S KM KM KM3 S3 KM3 S KM KM KM3 KM KM3 KM3 KM KM KM3 KM3 KM A /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS NppLY /T 4/T 6/T3 3 A 4 5 /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS NppQ /T 4/T 6/T3 3 () For type coordination. () For type coordination. Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /4

22 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For5to75kWmotors ATS NppLY and ATS NppQ soft start/soft stop units Automatic control with or without deceleration (freewheel), without contactor ATS N3LY to ATS N85LY ATS N44Q to ATS N85Q 5 V /L 3/L 5/L3 /L 3/L 5/L3 F F Q Q F3 () F3 () A /L 3/L ATS N /T 4/T 5/L3 LY 6/T3 3 3-wire control () S S -wire control S3 A 4 5 /L 3/L ATS N /T 4/T 5/L3 Q 6/T3 3 3-wire control () S S -wire control S3 () Use shielded wires above m. () For type coordination. () Use shielded wires above m. () For type coordination. Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft start/soft stop unit Q GV3 or GV7 circuit-breaker KM, KM3 LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses F3 3 fast-acting fuses S, S, S3 XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /5

23 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For5to75kWmotors ATS NppLY and ATS NppQ softstart/softstopunits (continued) Automatic control with or without deceleration (freewheel), with contactor ATS N3LY to ATS N85LY ATS N44Q to ATS N85Q 5 V z 5 V max. F F /L 3/L 5/L3 F F /L 3/L 5/L3 Q Q KM KM F4 F4 F4 F4 S S KM A 4 /L 3/L 5/L3 KM A 4 /L 3/L 5/L3 KM S 5 ATS NppLY S3 S 5 ATS NppQ S3 KM 6 7 /T 4/T 6/T3 3 S KM /T 4/T 6/T3 3 S Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft start/soft stop unit Q GK disconnector KM LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses F4 LR D thermal overload relay S, S, S3 XB4BorXB5Bpushbuttons Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /6

24 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart For5to75kWmotors ATS NppLY and ATS NppQ soft start/soft stop units (continued) Automatic control without deceleration (freewheel), with a maintaining function ATS N3LY to ATS N85LY ATS N44Q to ATS N85Q 5 V /L 3/L 5/L3 z 5 V max. /L 3/L 5/L3 F F F F Q Q F3 () F3 () S KM KM S KM S KM KM A /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS NppLY /T 4/T 6/T3 3 S KM KM A 4 5 /L 3/L 5/L3 ATS NppQ /T 4/T 6/T3 3 () For type coordination. Compatible components (for full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components.) Code Description A Soft starter Q GV3 circuit-breaker KM LC ppp +LA4DAU F, F Control protection fuses F3 3 fast-acting fuses S, S XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 /7

25 Combinations Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart 4 V power supply, type coordination Components to be combined in accordance with standards IEC and IEC Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses I t Thermal Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Reference Rating overload relay disconnector (base unit) kw A A A A s M A Q KM, KM, KM3 Q F ATS N3FT GV ME5 LC K6 or LC D ATS N3FT GV ME6.6 LC K6 or LC D9.75 ATS N3FT GV ME7.5 LC K6 or LC D9..5 ATS N3FT GV ME8 4 LC K6 or LC D9 ATS N6QN GV ME8 4 LC K6 or LC D ATS N6FT GV ME8 4 LC K6 or LC D9 ATS N6QN GV ME8 4 LC K6 or LC D9. 5 ATS N6FT GV ME 6.3 LC K6 or LC D9 ATS N6QN GV ME 6.3 LC K9 or LC D ATS N6FT GV ME4 9 LC K9 or LC D9 ATS N6QN GV ME4 9 LC K9 or LC D ATS N9FT GV ME4 9 LC K9 or LC D9 ATS N9QN GV ME4 9 LC K9 or LC D9 5.5 ATS NFT GV ME6 3 LC K or LC D ATS NQN GV ME6 3 LC K or LC D LS D53 DF CA 65 LR K36 LRD 5 LS D53 DF CA 65 LR K37 LRD 6 LS D53 DF CA 65 LR K38 LRD 7 LS D53 DF CA LR K38 LRD 8 LS D53 DF CA LR K38 LRD 8 LS D53 DF CA LR K3 LRD 8 LS D53 DF CA LR K3 LRD 8 LS D53 DF CA LR K3 LRD LS D53 DF CA LR K3 LRD LS D53 DF CA 65 LR K34 LRD LS D53 DF CA 65 LR K34 LRD LS D53 DF CA 6 LR K36 LRD 4 LS D53 DF CA 6 LR K36 LRD 4 LS D53 DF CA6 6 6 LR K3 LRD 6 LS D53 DF CA6 6 6 LR K3 LRD ATS NQN GV ME 7 LC D8 LS D53 DF CA 65 LRD 9 8. ATS NQN GV ME LC D5 LS D53 DF CA LRD ATS NQN GV ME 3 LC D5 LS D53 DF CA LRD ATS N3QN GV ME3 3 LC D3 GK EM DF EA4 4 7 LR D ATS N44Q GV3 ME4 4 LC D38 GK EM DF EA4 4 8 LR D ATS N44Q GV3 ME63 63 LC D5 GK FM DF FA LR D ATS N7Q GV3 ME63 63 LC D65 GK FM DF FA LR D ATS N7Q GV3 ME8 8 LC D8 GK FM DF FA8 8 9 LR D ATS N85Q GV7 RE LC D95 GK FM DF FA 9 LR D3365 Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages / to /7 /8

26 Combinations (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart 69 V power supply, type coordination Components to be combined in accordance with standards IEC and IEC Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses I t Thermal Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Reference Rating overload relay disconnector (base unit) kw A A A A s M A Q KM Q F ATS N3LY GV3ME LC D5 GK EM DF EA4 4 7 LR D3355 GV3 A 37 4 ATS N44LY GV3ME LC D65 GK FM DF FA LR D3359 GV3 A ATS N7LY GV3ME LC D5 GK FM DF FA8 8 9 LR D3363 GV3 A ATS N85LY GV7 RE + GV7 A 6 LC D5 GK FM DF FA 9 LR D3365 Presentation: pages /4 and /5 Characteristics: pages /6 and /7 References: page /8 Dimensions: page /9 Schemes: pages/to/7 /9

27 Presentation Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U Presentation The Altistart U is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed primarily for combinations with TeSys model U controller-starters. When combined with a TeSys model U controller by means of a connector, the Altistart U 3 is a power option which provides the Soft start/soft stop function. The result is a unique, innovative motor starter. DF56396 Using the Altistart U starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous motors by allowing the motor to start gradually, smoothly and in a controlled manner. It can also prevent mechanical shocks which lead to wear and tear, and limits the amount of maintenance work and production downtime. The Altistart U limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting, on machines which do not require a high starting torque. The Altistart U is designed for the following simple applications: b conveyors b conveyor belts b pumps b fans b compressors b automatic doors b small cranes b belt-driven machines, etc. The Altistart U is compact, easy to install and complies with standards IEC/EN , with UL, CSA and C-Tick certifications, and has e marking. b ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for deceleration. v Internal Bypass relay. v Motor power ratings range from.75 kw to 5 kw. v Motor supply voltages range from V to 48 V, 5/6 Hz. An external power supply is required for controlling the starter. Description b Altistart U soft start/soft stop units are equipped with: v a potentiometer for controlling the starting time 6 v a potentiometer for controlling the deceleration time 8 v a potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor load 7 v green indicator LED 4: device switched on v yellow indicator LED 5: motor powered at nominal voltage v a connector 9: - logic inputs for Run/Stop commands - logic input for the BOOST function - logic output to indicate the end of starting - relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has stopped at the end of the deceleration ramp. Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 Schemes: pages /6 and /7 /

28 Presentation (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U Description of a TeSys model U controller-starter Please consult our TeSys model U Starters-open version specialist catalogue. ATSU NppLT soft start unit functions b -wire control: The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State of logic input LI controls the run process and state controls the stop process. Altistart U control terminals + 4 V LI LI Wiring diagram for -wire control b 3-wire control: The run and stop commands are controlled by different logic inputs. Stopping is achieved when logic input LI opens (state ). The pulse on input LI is maintained until input LI opens. Altistart U control terminals + 4 V LI LI Wiring diagram for 3-wire control b Starting time Thestartingtimesettingcanbeusedtoadjustthevoltageramptimeappliedtothe motor and to obtain a gradual starting time depending on the motor load. b Voltage BOOST function via logic input: Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction. When the input is at state, the function is active (input connected to the + 4 V) and the starter supplies a fixed voltage to the motor for a limited time before starting. U % Un 5 % Un Voltage ramp Initial voltage ms Application of a voltage BOOST equal to % of the nominal motor voltage b End of starting v Logic output LO application function ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal speed. b Fault relay ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units have a relay which opens when a fault is detected. The contact of relay RA-RC closes when the LI run command is sent and opens when the motor voltage approaches V on a decelerated stop or instantly in the event of a fault. This information can be used for controlling the line contactor and achieving motor deceleration (by maintaining the line contactor until the motor has stopped). t Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 Schemes: pages /6 and /7 /

29 Characteristics Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U Environment characteristics Type of starter Conforming to standards ATSU NppLT Altistart U electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Conducted and radiated CISPR level B, IEC , level B emissions Harmonics IEC -3-, IEC -3-4 EMC immunity EN 58-, EN 58- Electrostatic discharge IEC 6-4- level 3 Immunity to radiated radioelectrical IEC level 3 interference Immunity to electrical transients IEC level 4 Voltage/current impulse IEC level 3 Conducted and radiated IEC level 3 emissions Immunity to conducted IEC 6-4- interference caused by radioelectrical fields Damped oscillating waves IEC 6-4- level 3 e marking The starters bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives IEC/EN Product certification UL, CSA and C-Tick Degree of protection IP Degree of pollution conforming to IEC/EN Vibration resistance.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 3 Hz, gn from 3 to 5 Hz conforming to IEC/EN Shock resistance 5 gn for ms conforming to IEC/EN Relative humidity % without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC/EN Ambient temperature around the unit Storage C conforming to IEC/EN Operation C without derating, up to 5 C with current derating of % per C above 4 C Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by.% per additional m) Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position Electrical characteristics Type of starter ATSU NppLT Category of use Conforming to IEC Ac-53b Rated operating voltage 3-phase a voltage V - 5% to 48 + % Frequency Hz 5-5% to 6 + 5% Output voltage Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage. Control supply voltage c 4 V, ma ± % Rated operating current A Adjustable starting time s... Adjustable deceleration time s... Starting torque % 3...8% of starting torque of motor connected directly on the line supply Type of starter ATSU N6LT N9LT NLT NLT N3LT Control power supply consumption c 4 V, 65 ma c 4 V, ma Power dissipated At full load at end of starting W In transient state at 5 times the rated operating current W Type of starter ATSU N6LT to ATSU NLT ATSU N3LT Use I Starting time Starting time s 5 5 Maximum number of cycles per hour 3 8 Full voltage status or starter at standstill Operating cycle t Presentation: pages / and / References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 Schemes: pages /6 and /7 /

30 Characteristics (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U Electrical characteristics (continued) Logic input power supply (electrically isolated between power and control) +4V,COM Logic inputs LI, LI, BOOST Stop, run and boost on start-up functions Logic output LO Endofstartingsignal Relay output RA RC LED signalling Green LED Starter powered up Yellow LED Nominal voltage reached 4 V ±% Isolated Max. current ma Logic inputs with impedance 7 kω ; 4 V power supply (U max 4 V) Max current 8 ma State if U < 5 V and I <. ma State if U > 3 V and I >.5 ma Open collector logic output External 4 V power supply (minimum 6 V maximum 3 V) Max current ma Normally open (N/O) contact (contact open in fault mode) Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 6V Max. switching capacity on inductive load (cos ϕ =.5 and L/R = ms): Afora 5 V or c 3 V (AC-5) Max. operating voltage 44 V Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque) Power circuit Connection onto Ø 4 mm screw terminals Flexible wire without cable end conductor mm.5 8AWG conductors mm.5 6 AWG Flexible wire with cable end conductor mm 6 AWG conductors mm 6 AWG Rigid wire conductor mm 8AWG conductors mm 6 AWG Tightening torque N.m.9.5 Control circuit Flexible wire without cable end Screw connector conductor mm AWG conductors mm AWG Flexible wire with cable end conductor mm AWG conductors mm AWG Rigid wire conductor mm AWG conductors mm.5 7 AWG Tightening torque N.m.5 Torque characteristics (typical curves) T 3 Tn Tn U,85 U The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the supply voltage. The torque varies in line with the square of the voltage at a fixed frequency. The gradual increase in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up. Tn,6 U Tr,5,5,75 N/Ns Presentation: pages / and / References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 Schemes: pages /6 and /7 /3

31 References Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U DF5374 Soft start/soft stop unit for.75 to 5 kw motors (can be combined with the TeSys model U starter) Motor Motor power () Starter Nominal current Reference Weight 3 V 3 V 4 V 46 V kw HP kw HP A kg 3-phase supply voltage: 48 V 5/6 Hz ATSU N6LT.34 9 ATSU N9LT ATSU NLT ATSU NLT.49 DF536 ATSU NLT LUBpBL ATSU N3LT.49 Accessorie Description Used for starter Reference Weight kg Power connector between ATSU NppLT and TeSys model U ATSU NppLT VW3 G44. TeSys model U starter and soft start unit combinations Numerous possibilities for combinations and options are offered. Please consult the TeSys model U Starters-open version specialist catalogue. 3 LUCM ppbl Motor power Soft starter TeSys model U Voltage Power base Control unit () 3 V kw/hp 4 V kw 46 V HP.75/.5 ATSU N6LT LUB LUCp 5BL./.5./3 3 ATSU N6LT LUB LUCp BL.5/ ATSU N9LT LUB LUCp BL 4 5 ATSU N9LT LUB LUCp BL./3 ATSU NLT LUB LUCp BL 3/ ATSU NLT LUB 3 LUCp 8BL 4/5 7.5 ATSU NLT LUB 3 LUCp 8BL 5.5/7.5 5 ATSU NLT LUB 3 LUCp 3BL 7.5/ 5 ATSU N3LT LUB 3 LUCp 3BL 4 Example of a starter-motor combination with: non-reversing power base for DOL starting (LUBpBL) control unit (LUCM ppbl) 3 power connector (VW3 G44) 4 Altistart Usoft start/soft stop unit (ATSU NppLT) ATSU NppLT () Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL 58. () Depending on the configuration of the chosen TeSys model U starter, replace the p with A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction. Presentation: pages / and / Characteristics: pages / and /3 Dimensions: page /5 Schemes: pages /6 and /7 /4

32 Dimensions Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U TeSys model U combination (non-reversing power base) and ATSU N6LT to ATSU NLT Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G44 connector 45 TeSys model U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base) and ATSU N6LT to ATSU NLT Side by side mounting , 9 9 TeSys model U combination (non-reversing power base) and ATSU NLT to ATSU N3LT Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G44 connector TeSys model U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base) and ATSU NLT to ATSU N3LT Side by side mounting , 9 9 VW3 G44 connector 44,8 6 46,6 8 Presentation: pages / and / Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Schemes: pages /6 and /7 /5

33 Schemes Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U For.75to5kWmotors ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units Power wiring Power wiring with reversing unit /T 4/T 6/T3 /T 4/T 6/T3 /L 3/L 5/L3 QF CU TeSys model U TeSys model U /L 3/L 5/L3 A ATSU NppLT /T 4/T 6/T3 /L 3/L M 3 /T 4/T 6/T3 /L 3/L 5/L3 QF CU TeSys model U TeSys model U with reversing unit 5/L3 A ATSU NppLT M 3 Compatible components (For full references, see pages /8 and /9 or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components ) Code Description A Soft start/soft stop unit QF TeSys model U controller-starter CU TeSys model U control unit Presentation: pages / and / Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 /6

34 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U For.75to5kWmotors ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued) Automatic -wire control Without deceleration c 4 V + LUA C S QF A A 8 7 RA Functional diagrams Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI Pushbutton S ATSU NppLT RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO A With and without deceleration c 4 V + LUA C S S Power supply voltage Green LED Stop Run Stop Run QF Logic input LI Pushbutton S Pushbutton S 7 8 A A RA ATSU NppLT RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO A Logic output LO Logic output LO Yellow LED U s Yellow LED U s Motor voltage t t Motor voltage t t t Automatic 3-wire control Without deceleration With deceleration c 4 V + LUA C S 8 7 RA ATSU NppLT RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO A c 4 V + LUA C 7 8 RA ATSU NppLT RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO A S QF A A 4 3 QF S QF A A QF 4 3 S Functional diagrams Power supply voltage Green LED Pushbutton S Pushbutton S Logic input LI Logic output LO 5 ms Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI Pushbutton S Logic input LI Pushbutton S Logic output LO Yellow LED U s Yellow LED s Motor voltage t t Motor voltage t t A: Soft start/soft stop unit S, S: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons QF: TeSys model U controller-starter t: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer t: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer U : Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer Presentation: pages / and / Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 /7

35 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U For.75to5kWmotors ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued) Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit Without deceleration With deceleration QF A QF A LUB pbl ATSU NppLT LUB pbl ATSU NppLT A3 B3 A B A RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO Run direction Run S direction S Stop S3 7 LUA C 8 A3 B3 A B A RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO Run direction Run S direction S Stop S3 7 LUA C 8 + c 4 V + c 4 V QF: TeSys model U controller-starter with reversing unit A: Soft start/soft stop unit S, S, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons S3: minimum depression time 5 ms Boostonstartingandendofstartingsignal QF: TeSys model U controller-starter with reversing unit A: Soft start/soft stop unit S, S, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons A ATSU N LT RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO To PLC A: Soft start/soft stop unit Presentation: pages / and / Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 /8

36 Schemes (continued) Soft starters for asynchronous motors Altistart U and TeSys model U For.75to5kWmotors ATSU NppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued) Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration Without reversing unit With reversing unit A A A A ATSU NppLT LUL C3 Modbus Module ATSU NppLT LUL C3 Modbus Module RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO LU9B NC Pre-wired coil LO COM D(B) D(A) Gnd c 4 V 4 V Aux RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO COM OA OA3 LO COM D(B) D(A) Gnd c 4 V 4 V Aux c 4 V c 4 V QF LUB pbl A3 B3 A B A Function Register Bit Value Function Register Bit Value Powering down TeSys U and ATSU Powering up TeSys U and ATSU 74 Forward 74 Reverse 74 Automatic control without deceleration Powering down TeSys U and ATSU Run 7 Forward 74 Stop 74 Reverse 74 Automatic control with deceleration Automatic control without deceleration Run 7 Run 7 Soft stop 7 Stop forward 74 Stop reverse 74 Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse) Run 7 Soft stop 7 A: Soft start/soft stop unit A: Soft start/soft stop unit QF: TeSys model U controller-starter with reversing unit Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration Without reversing unit With reversing unit A A ATSU NppLT ATSU NppLT RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO RA RC COM LI LI + 4 V BOOST LO 3 QF ASI LUFC5 4 LUB pbl ASI LUFC5 LU9B NC Pre-wired coil c 4 V + AS-Interface + + c 4 V A3 B3 A B A COM OA OA3 c 4 V + AS-Interface + + c 4 V Function Bit Value Function Bit Value Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Run D Run forward D Stop D Stop D Run reverse D Stop D A: Soft start/soft stop unit A: Soft start/soft stop unit QF: TeSys model U controller-starter with reversing unit Presentation: pages / and / Characteristics: pages / and /3 References: page /4 Dimensions: page /5 /9

37 Presentation Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units /3

38 Presentation (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Applications The Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit is a controller with 6 thyristors which is used for the torque-controlled soft starting and stopping of three-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors in the power range between 4 and kw. It offers soft starting and deceleration functions along with machine and motor protection functions as well as functions for communicating with control systems. These functions are designed for use in state-of-the-art applications in centrifugal machines, pumps, fans, compressors and conveyors, which are primarily to be found in the construction, food and beverages and chemical industries. The highperformance algorithms of the Altistart 48 contribute significantly to its robustness, safety and ease of setup. The Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit is a cost-effective solution which can: b reduce machine operating costs by reducing mechanical stress and improving machine availability, b reduce the stress placed on the electrical distribution system by reducing line current peaks and voltage drops during motor starts. The Altistart soft start - soft stop unit offer comprises ranges: b three-phase voltages 3 to 45 V, 5/6 Hz, b three-phase voltages 8 to 69 V, 5/6 Hz. In each voltage range, the Altistart soft start - soft stop units are dimensioned for standard and severe applications. Functions The Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit ( ) is supplied ready for use in a standard application with motor protection class (see page /7). It comprises a built-in terminal ( ) which can be used to modify programming, adjustment or monitoring functions in order to adapt and customise the application to meet individual customer requirements. b Drive performance functions: v exclusive Altistart torque control (patented by Schneider Electric), v constant control of the torque supplied to the motor during acceleration and deceleration periods (significantly reducing pressure surges), v facility for adjusting the ramp and the starting torque, v thestartercanbebypassedusingacontactor( 3 )attheendofthestartingperiod whilst maintaining electronic protection (by-pass function), v wide frequency tolerance for generator set power supplies, v the starter can be connected to the motor delta terminals in series with each winding. b Machine and motor protection functions: v built-in motor thermal protection, v processing of information from PTC thermal probes, v monitoring of the starting time, v motor preheating function, v protection against underloads and overcurrents during continuous operation. b Functions facilitating the integration of the unit into control systems: v 4 logic inputs, logic outputs, 3 relay outputs and analogue output, v plug-in I/O connectors, v function for configuring a second motor and easy-to-adapt settings, v display of electrical values, the state of the load and the operating time, v RS 485 serial link for connection to Modbus. Options A remote terminal ( 4 ) can be mounted on the door of a wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure. PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions: b PowerSuite Pocket PC with PPC type terminal ( 5 ), b PowerSuite software workshop ( 6 ). A range of wiring accessories for connecting the starter to PLCs via a Modbus connection ( 7 ). Bus communication and Ethernet, Fipio, DeviceNet and Profibus DP network communication options. Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /3

39 Characteristics Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Environment characteristics Conforming to standards The electronic starters have been developed and performance tested in accordance with international standards, in particular with the starter product standard EN/IEC e marking Products have e marking in accordance with the harmonised standard EN/IEC Product certifications UL, CSA Pending: DNV, C-Tick, Gost, CCIB Degree of protection Starters ATS 48D7p to 48Cp IP (IP in the absence of connections) Starters ATS 48C4p to 48Mp IP () Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC mm from to 3 Hz gnfrom3tohz Shock resistance Conforming to IEC gn for ms Starter noise level () Starters ATS 48D3p to D47p dba 5 Starters ATS 48D6p to Cp dba 58 Starters ATS 48C4p to C7p dba 5 Starters ATS 48Cp to C3p dba 54 Starters ATS 48C4p to C66p dba 55 Starters ATS 48C79p to Mp dba 6 Fans Starters ATS 48D7p and Dp Natural convection Starters ATS 48D3p to Mp Forced convection. The fans are activated automatically when a temperature threshold is reached. For flow rate: see page /5. Ambient temperature around the unit Operation C without derating (between + 4 and + 6, derate the nominal current of the Altistart by %foreach C). Storage, conforming to C IEC Maximum relative humidity Conforming to IEC % without condensation or dripping water Maximum ambient pollution Conforming to IEC Level 3 Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the nominal current of the Altistart by. % for each additional m). Limit to m Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position Electrical characteristics Operating category Conforming to IEC AC-53a Three-phase supply voltage Starters ATS 48pppQ V 3-5 % to 45 + % Starters ATS 48pppY V 8-5 % to 69 + % Frequency Hz 5/6 ± 5 % (automatic) 5 or 6 ± % (must be set) Nominal starter current Starters ATS 48pppQ A 7... Starters ATS 48pppY A 7 to Motor power Starters ATS 48pppQ kw 4 to 63 Starters ATS 48pppY kw/hp 5.5 to 9/5 to Voltage indicated on the motor rating plate Starters ATS 48pppQ V 3 to 45 Starters ATS 48pppY V 8 to 69 Starter control circuit supply voltage Starters ATS 48pppQ V - 5 % to 45 + %, 5/6 Hz Starters ATS 48pppY V - 5 % to 3 + %, 5/6 Hz Maximum control circuit consumption (with fans operating) Relay output ( configurable outputs) Starters ATS 48D7p to C7p W 3 Starters ATS 48Cp to C3p W 5 Starters ATS 48C4p to Mp W 8 3 relay outputs (R, R, R3), normally open contacts "N/O" Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 6V Maximum switching capacity on inductive load:.8 A for a 3 V and c 3 V (cos ϕ=.5 and L/R=ms). Maximum nominal operating voltage a 4 V Factory setting: R assigned as the "fault relay" (configurable) R assigned as the "end of starting relay" to control the starter bypass relay R3 assigned as "motor powered" (configurable) () Protective covers can be fitted to the power terminals of ATS 48C4p to C3p starters. ATS 48C4p to 48Mp starters have protection on the front panel and on the sides. () Starters located m away. The noise levels may change depending on the characteristics of the fans. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /3

40 Characteristics (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Electrical characteristics (continued) Logic inputs LI ( configurable inputs) 4 logic inputs, impedance 4.3 kω, isolated: Stop, Run, LI3, LI4 + 4 V power supply (maximum 3 V) I max. 8 ma State if U < 5 V and I < ma StateifU>VandI>5mA Internal source available x + 4 V output, isolated and protected against short-circuits and overloads Accuracy ± 5%. Max. current ma Logic outputs LO (configurable) logic outputs LO and LO with V common, compatible with level PLC, according to standard IEC 65A V power supply (minimum: + V, maximum: + 3 V) Maximum output current: ma if supplied externally Analogue output AO (configurable) Current output - ma or 4- ma Maximum load impedance: 5 Ω Accuracy ± 5% of the maximum value Input for PTC probe Total resistance of probe circuit 75 Ω at 5 C, according to IEC A Maximum I/O connection capacity.5 mm (AWG ) Communication RS 485 multidrop serial link integrated in the starter, for Modbus, with RJ45 type connector Transmission speed 48, 96 or 9 bps Maximum number of Altistart 48 connected: 8 Other uses: - connection to a remote terminal, or - connection to a PC, or - connection to other buses and networks via communication options. Protection Thermal Built-in, starter and motor (calculated and/or thermal protection with PTC probes) Line protection Phase failure, indicated by output relay Current settings The nominal motor current In can be adjusted from.4 to.3 times the starter nominal current. Adjustment of the maximum starting current from.5 to 7 times the motor In, limited to 5 times the starter nominal current. Starting mode By torque control with starter current limited to 5 In maximum Factory setting: 4 In for standard operation on 5 s torque ramp Stopping mode Freewheel stop "Freewheel" stop (factory setting) Controlled stop on torque ramp Programmed between.5 and 6 s (for pump applications) Braked stop Controlled dynamically by the flux Electromagnetic compatibility EMC () Standards Test levels Examples (sources of interference) Summary of immunity tests carried out with the Altistart 48 IEC 6-4- level 3 Electrostatic discharge: - by contact, - in the air. IEC level 3 Radiated electromagnetic fields IEC level 4 Rapid electrical transients: - power supply cables, - control cables. IEC level 3 Shock wave: - phase/phase, - phase/earth. IEC 6-4- level 3 Damped oscillating waves 6kV 8kV Contact off an electrically charged individual V/m Equipment transmitting radio frequencies 4kV kv kv kv Opening/closing of a contactor Oscillating circuit on the line supply kv-mhz Radiated and conducted emissions According to IEC , class A, on all starters According to IEC , class B, on starters up to 7 A: ATS 48D7p to 48C7p. Must be bypassed at the end of starting () The starters conform to product standard IEC , in particular with regard to EMC. This standard ensures a level of immunity for products and a level of emitted interference. In steady state, the interference emitted is below that required by the standard. During acceleration and deceleration phases, low level loads may be affected by low frequency interference (harmonics). To reduce this interference, connect chokes between the line supply and the Altistart 48 (see page /45). - Note: b Power factor correction capacitors can only be used upstream of the Altistart and only powered up at the end of starting. b The starter must be earthed to conform to the regulations concerning leakage currents (y 3 ma). When the use of an upstream "residual current device" for protection is required by the installation standards, an AS-Interface type device must be used. Check its compatibility with the other protective devices. If the installation involves several starters on the same line supply, each starter must be earthed separately. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /33

41 Characteristics (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Torque characteristics Starting current Direct line starting current Starting current limited to Is Curves indicating changes in the torque depending on the starting current of a threephase asynchronous motor. Curves : direct line starting. Curves : starting in current limiting mode. Torque curve Ts indicates the total torque range available depending on the limiting current Is. Limiting the starting current Is to a preset value Is will reduce the starting torque Ts to a value which is almost equal to the square of currents Is/Is. Example: for motor characteristics: Ts = 3 Tn for Is = 6 In, limitthecurrenttois=3in(.5is) resultinginastartingtorquets=tsx(.5)²=3tnx.5=.75tn I/In Id,5,5,75 N/Ns Starting torque Direct line starting torque Starting torque with current limited to Is C/Cn Cd Cr,5,5,75 N/Ns Presentation: pages /3 and /3 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /34

42 Characteristics (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Conventional starting using current limitation or voltage ramp With current limitation Is, the accelerating torque applied to the motor is equal to the motor torque Ts minus the resistive torque Tr. The accelerating torque increases in the starting range as the speed changes and is at its highest at the end of acceleration (curve ). This characteristic means that the load is taken up very abruptly, which is not recommended for pump type applications. Example of speed curve for starting with current limitation Current applied to the motor (I/In) Motor speed N/Ns I/In 4 N/Ns 3,5 Starting with the Altistart 48 Example of speed curve for starting with torque control Current applied to the motor (I/In) Motor speed N/Ns Torque control on the Altistart 48 applies the torque to the motor during the entire starting phase if the current required (curve ) does not exceed the limiting current. The accelerating torque can be virtually constant over the entire speed range (curve ). ItispossibletosettheAltistartinordertoobtainahightorqueonstartingforarapid motor speed rise whilst limiting its temperature rise, and a lower accelerating torque at the end of starting for gradual loading. This control function is ideal for centrifugal pumps or for machines with high resistive torque on starting. I/In N/Ns 4 t 3,5 Stopping with the Altistart 48 b Freewheel stop: the motor comes to a freewheel stop. b Decelerated stop: this type of stop is ideal for pumps and can be used to effectively reduce pressure surges. Torque control on the Altistart 48 reduces the effect of hydraulic transients even if the load increases. This type of control makes adjustment easy. b Braked stop: this type of stop is suitable for high inertia applications as it reduces the stopping time of the machine. t Presentation: pages /3 and /3 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /35

43 Selection criteria Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Selection criteria for an Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit The Altistart 48 must be selected on the basis of 3 main criteria: b Two line power supply voltage ranges are available for selection: v three-phase a.c. voltage: 3-45 V, v three-phase a.c. voltage: 8-69 V. b The power and the nominal current indicated on the motor name plate. b The type of application and the operating cycle. To simplify selection, the applications are categorised into types: v standard applications, v severe applications. Standard or severe applications define the limiting values of the current and the cycle for motor duties S and S4. Standard application In standard applications, the Altistart 48 is designed to provide: b Starting at 4 In for 3 seconds or at 3 In for 46 seconds from a cold state (corresponding to motor duty S). b Starting at 3 In for 3 seconds or at 4 In for seconds with a load factor of 5 % and starts per hour or a an equivalent thermal cycle (corresponding to motor duty S4). The motor thermal protection must conform to protection class (see page /7). Example: centrifugal pump. Severe application In severe applications, the Altistart 48 is designed to provide: b Starting at 4 In for 48 seconds or at 3 In for 9 seconds from a cold state (corresponding to S motor duty). b Starting at 4 In for 5 seconds with a load factor of 5 % and 5 starts per hour or a an equivalent thermal cycle (corresponding to S4 motor duty). The motor thermal protection must conform to protection class (see page /7). Example: grinder. Motor duties S motor duty corresponds to starting followed by operation at constant load enabling the thermal equilibrium to be reached. S4 motor duty corresponds to a cycle comprising starting, operation at constant load andanidleperiod. This cycle is characterised by a load factor of 5 %. Selecting the starter Once the appropriate application has been selected from the following page, select the starter from pages /4 to /43 according to the supply voltage and the motor power. Caution: if the Altistart 48 is installed inside an enclosure, observe the mounting and derating recommendations (see page /5). /36

44 Selection criteria (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Application areas Depending on the type of machine, the applications are categorized as standard or severe based on the starting characteristics, which are given as examples only, in the table below. Type of machine Application Functions performed by the Altistart 48 Starting current (% In) Centrifugal pump Standard Deceleration (reduction in pressure surges) Protection against underloads or inversion of the phase rotation direction Starting time (s) 3 5 to 5 Piston pump Standard Control of running dry and direction of rotation of the pump 35 5 to Fan Standard Severe if > 3 s Detection of overloads caused by clogging or underloads (motor fan transmission broken) Braking torque on stopping 3 to 4 Cold compressor Standard Protection, even for special motors 3 5 to Screw compressor Standard Protection against inversion of direction of phase rotation Contact for automatic draining on stopping 3 3 to Centrifugal compressor Standard Severe if > 3 s Protection against inversion of direction of phase rotation Contact for automatic emptying on stopping 35 to 4 Piston compressor Standard Protection against inversion of direction of phase rotation Contact for automatic emptying on stopping Conveyor, transporter Standard Overload control for detecting faults or underload control for detecting breaks Lifting screw Standard Overload control for detecting hard spots or underload control for detecting breaks Drag lift Standard Overload control for detecting jamming or underload control for detecting breaks Lift Standard Overload control for detecting jamming or underload control for detecting breaks Constant starting with variable load 35 5 to 3 3 to 3 3 to 4 to 35 5 to Circular saw, band saw Standard Severe if > 3 s Braking for fast stop 3 to 6 Pulper, butchery knife Severe Torque control on starting 4 3 to Agitator Standard The current display indicates the density of the product Mixer Standard The current display indicates the density of the product Grinder Severe Braking to limit vibrations during stopping, overload control to detect jamming Crusher Severe Braking to limit vibrations during stopping, overload control to detect jamming 35 5 to 35 5 to 45 5 to 6 4 to 4 Refiner Standard Torque control on starting and stopping 3 5 to 3 Press Severe Braking to increase the number of cycles 4 to 6 /37

45 Selection criteria (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Special uses Other criteria can influence the selection of the Altistart 48: Starter wired to the motor delta terminal (see the recommended application diagram on page /54) In addition to the most frequently encountered wiring layouts, where the starter is installed in the line supply of the motor and the motor is connected in star or delta configuration, the Altistart 48 ATS 48pppQ can be wired to the motor delta terminal in series with each winding (see the application diagram below). The starter current is lower than the line current absorbed by the motor by a ratio of 3. Thistypeof installation enables a starter with a lower rating to be used. Example: for a 4 V/ kw motor with a line current of 95 A (nominal current for the delta connection), the current in each winding is equal to 95/3, i.e. 4 A. Select the starter rating with a maximum permanent nominal current just above this current, i.e. 4A (ATS 48C4Q for a standard application). To avoid making this calculation, simply use the table on page /4. This type of installation only permits freewheel stopping and is not compatible with the cascade and preheating functions. ATS 48pppQ Motor Starter wired in series with the motor windings Note: the nominal current and limiting current settings as well as the current displayed during operation are on-line values (so do not have to be calculated by the user). Caution: for this type of installation, observe the wiring scheme and the associated recommendations on page /54. Starter bypassed by a contactor (see the recommended application diagram on page /53) Thestartercanbebypassedbyacontactorattheendofstarting(tolimittheheat dissipated by the starter). The bypass contactor is controlled by the starter and the current measurements and protective mechanisms remain active when the starter is bypassed. The starter is selected on the basis of the 3 main criteria and one of the following criteria: b If the starter is bypassed at the end of starting, the motor is always started from cold state and the starter can be oversized by one rating. Example: select an ATS 48D7Q for an kw motor in a standard 4 V application. b If the starter must be able to operate without the bypass contactor at the end of starting, it does not have to be derated. Example: select an ATS 48D7Q for a 7.5 kw motor in a standard 4 V application. /38

46 Selection criteria (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Special uses (continued) Motors in parallel Motors may be connected in parallel provided that the power limit of the starter is not exceeded (the sum of the motor currents must not exceed the nominal current of the starter selected depending on the type of application). Provide thermal protection for each motor. Brush motor The Altistart 48 can operate with a bypassed rotor resistance motor or with a resistancelug.thestartingtorqueismodifiedinaccordancewiththerotor resistance. If necessary, maintain a low resistance in order to obtain the required torque to overcome the resistive torque on starting. A bypassed brush motor has a very low starting torque. A high stator current is required to obtain the sufficient starting torque. Oversize the starter in order that the value of the limiting current is 7 times that of the nominal current. Note: ensure that the starting torque of the motor, equal to 7 times the nominal current, is greater than the resistive torque. Note: the Altistart 48 torque control enables excellent soft starting despite the limiting current being 7 times the nominal current required to start the motor. Dahlander motor and -speed motor The Altistart 48 can operate with a -speed motor. A motor demagnetisation period must elapse before changing from low speed to high speed in order to avoid antiphases between the line supply and the motor, which would generate very high currents. Select the starter using the 3 main criteria. Very long cable Very long motor cables cause voltage drops due to the resistance of the cable. If the voltage drop is significant, it could affect the current consumption and the torque available. This must therefore be taken into account when selecting the motor and the starter. Starters in parallel on the same line supply If several starters are installed on the same line supply, line chokes should be installed between the transformer and the starter (see page /45). Recommendations for use Caution: do not use the Altistart 48 upstream of loads other than motors (for examples transformers and resistors are forbidden). Do not connect power factor correction capacitors to the terminals of a motor controlled by an Altistart 48. /39

47 References Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Line voltage 3/45 V Connection in the motor supply line ATS 48D7Q For standard applications Motor Starter 3/45 V - 5/6 Hz Motor power () Nominal current (IcL) () Factory setting current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference Weight 3 V 4 V kw kw A A W kg ATS 48D7Q ATS 48DQ ATS 48D3Q ATS 48D38Q ATS 48D47Q ATS 48D6Q ATS 48D75Q ATS 48D88Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C7Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C5Q ATS 48C3Q ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C48Q ATS 48C59Q ATS 48C66Q ATS 48C79Q ATS 48MQ ATS 48MQ ATS 48C4Q ATS 48MQ For severe applications Motor Starter 3/45 V - 5/6 Hz Motor power Nominal () current (3) Factory setting current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference Weight 3 V 4 V kw kw A A W kg ATS 48D7Q ATS 48DQ ATS 48D3Q ATS 48D38Q ATS 48D47Q ATS 48D6Q ATS 48D75Q ATS 48D88Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C7Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C5Q ATS 48C3Q ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C48Q ATS 48C59Q ATS 48C66Q ATS 48C79Q ATS 48MQ ATS 48MQ 5. () Value indicated on the motor rating plate. () Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. IcL corresponds to the starter rating. (3) Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. (4) The factory setting current corresponds to the value of the nominal current of a standard 4-pole, 4 V, class motor (standard application). Adjust the settings in accordance with the motor nominal current. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 Dimensions: pages /48 and /49 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /4

48 References (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Line voltage 3/45 V Connection to the motor delta terminals ATS 48pppQ Motor Figure Special use: starter connected to the motor delta terminal in series with each winding For standard applications according to figure Motor Starter 3/45 V - 5/6 Hz Motor power () Nominal current () Reference Factory setting current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Weight 3 V 4 V kw kw A A W kg ATS 48D7Q ATS 48DQ ATS 48D3Q ATS 48D38Q ATS 48D47Q ATS 48D6Q ATS 48D75Q ATS 48D88Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C7Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C5Q ATS 48C3Q ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C48Q ATS 48C59Q ATS 48C66Q ATS 48C79Q ATS 48MQ ATS 48MQ 5. For severe applications according to figure Motor Starter 3/45 V - 5/6 Hz Motor power () Nominal current (3) Reference Factory setting current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Weight 3 V 4 V kw kw A A W kg ATS 48D7Q ATS 48DQ ATS 48D3Q ATS 48D38Q ATS 48D47Q ATS 48D6Q ATS 48D75Q ATS 48D88Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C7Q ATS 48CQ ATS 48C5Q ATS 48C3Q ATS 48C4Q ATS 48C48Q ATS 48C59Q ATS 48C66Q ATS 48C79Q ATS 48MQ ATS 48MQ 5. () Value indicated on the motor rating plate. () Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. (3) Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. (4) For this type of connection, the factory setting current must be adjusted in accordance with the nominal motor current. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 Dimensions: pages /48 and /49 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /4

49 References (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Line voltage 8/69 V Motor power in HP ATS 48D7Y For standard applications Motor Starter 8/69 V - 5/6 Hz Motor power () Nominal Factory Power Reference Weight 8 V 3 V 46 V 575 V current (IcL) () setting current (4) dissipated at nominal load HP HP HP HP A A W kg ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY ATS 48MY ATS 48C4Y ATS 48MY For severe applications Motor Starter 8/69 V - 5/6 Hz Motor power () Nominal current (3) Factory setting current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference Weight 8 V 3 V 46 V 575 V HP HP HP HP A A W kg ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY ATS 48MY 5. () Value indicated on the motor rating plate. () Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. IcL corresponds to the starter rating. (3) Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. (4) The factory setting current corresponds to the value of the nominal current of a standard motor according to NEC, 46 V, class (standard application). Adjust the settings in accordance with the motor nominal current. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 Dimensions: pages /48 and /49 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /4

50 References (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Line voltage 8/69 V Motor power in kw For standard applications Motor Motor power () Starter 8/69 V - 5/6 Hz Nominal Factory current setting (IcL) current () (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference Weight 3 V 4 V 44 V 5 V 55 V 66 V 69 V kw kw kw kw kw kw kw A A W kg ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY ATS 48MY 5. For severe applications Motor Motor power () Starter 8/69 V - 5/6 Hz Nominal current (3) Factory setting current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference Weight 3 V 4 V 44 V 5 V 55 V 66 V 69 V kw kw kw kw kw kw kw A A W kg ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY ATS 48MY 5. () Value indicated on the motor rating plate. () Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. IcL corresponds to the starter rating. (3) Corresponds to the maximum permanent current in class. (4) The factory setting current corresponds to the value of the nominal current of a standard motor according to NEC, 46 V, class (standard application). Adjust the settings in accordance with the motor nominal current. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 Dimensions: pages /48 and /49 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /43

51 Presentation Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Options: remote terminal, line chokes Remote terminal The terminal can be mounted on the door of a wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure. It has the same signalling display and configuration buttons as the terminal integrated in the starter. A switch to lock access to the menu is located at the rear of the terminal. The option comprises: - the remote terminal - a mounting kit containing a cover, screws and an IP 54 seal on the front panel - a 3 m connecting cable with a 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting to the terminal and an RJ45 connector for connecting to the Altistart 48 ESC ENT 3 4 Information is displayed in the form of codes or values in three "7-segment" displays Buttons for scrolling through the menus or modifying values 3 "ESC": Button for exiting the menus (cannotbeusedforvalidation purposes) 4 "ENT": Validation button for entering a menu or confirming the new value selected Line chokes The use of line chokes is recommended in particular when installing several electronic starters on the same line supply. The values of the chokes are defined for a voltage drop between 3% and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Install the line choke between the line contactor and the starter. References: page /45 /44

52 References Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Options: remote terminal, line chokes, protective covers, documentation Remote terminal Description Reference Weight kg Remote terminal VW3 G Line chokes For starters Value of the choke mh Nominal current Degree of Reference protection Weight A kg ATS 48D7p.7 5 IP VZ L5UM7T. ATS 48Dp.8 3 IP VZ L3U8T 4. ATS 48D3p and 48D38p.6 4 IP VZ L4U6T 5. VW3 G48 ATS 48D47p and 48D6p.35 7 IP VZ L7U35T 8. ATS 48D75p to 48C4p.7 5 IP VZ L5U7T 4.9 ATS 48C7p to 48C5p. 5 IP VZ L5UT 4.3 ATS 48C3p IP VZ L35U75T 8.9 ATS 48C4p and 48C48p IP VZ L53U45T 37. ATS 48C59p to 48Mp.4 5 IP VZ LMU4T 66. ATS 48Mp IP VZ LM4U6T Nota : line chokes with IP degree of protection must be fitted with a protective bar to protect personnel against electrical contact. Protective covers for power terminals To be used with tags closed For starters Number of covers per set Reference Weight kg ATS 48C4p and ATS 48C7p 6 () LA9 F7.5 () The starters have 9 unprotected power terminals. LA9 F7 Documentation Description Format Reference Weight kg Altistart 48 user's manual A5 VVD ED Modbus user's manual A5 VVD ED 33.5 International technical manual CD-ROM DCI CD (ITM) () () Library containing: - manuals and quick reference guides for starters and speed drives, - user's manuals for communication gateways. Presentation: page /44 /45

53 Presentation Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Communication options Modbus communication bus Connections via splitter blocks and RJ45 type connectors The Altistart 48 is connected directly to the Modbus bus via its RJ45 type connector port. This port supports the RS 458 (-wire) standard and the Modbus RTU protocol. The communication function provides access to the configuration, adjustment, control and signalling functions of the starter PLC () Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC 3 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 4 Modbus drop cable VW3A836Rpp 5 Line terminators VW3A836RC 6 Modbus T-junction box VW3A836TFpp (with cable) ATS 48 Connections via junction boxes PLC () Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC 3 Modbus cable TSX CSA p 4 Junction box TSX SCA 5 5 Subscriber sockets TSX SCA 6 6 Modbus drop cable VW3 A Modbus drop cable VW3A836D3 6 7 ATS 48 Connections via screw terminals In this case, use a Modbus drop cable VW3A836D3and line terminators VW3A836DRC. Other communication buses Connection via modules TheAltistart48canalsobeconnectedtoEthernet, Fipio, Profibus DP and DeviceNet networks via a module (bridge or gateway). Communication on the network is used for: b controlling b monitoring and b configuring the Modbus products connected to the network ATS 48 To network Communication modules 3 Cables VW3A836Rpp, VW3 P7 36 R or VW3A836D3 4 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 5 Modbus drop cable VW3A836Rpp 6 Line terminator VW3 A8 36 RC ATS 48 () Please consult our "Modicon Premium automation platform" and "Modicon TSX Micro automation platform" catalogues. References: page /47 /46

54 References Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Communication options TSX SCA 5 Modbus communication bus Connection accessories Description Unit reference Weight kg Junction box 3 screw terminals, RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 36 D3 Subscriber sockets x female 5-way SUB-D connectors and screw terminals, RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 36 Modbus splitter block 8 RJ45 type connectors and screw terminal TSX SCA 5.5 TSX SCA 6.57 LU9 GC3.5 Line terminators () For RJ45 connector R=Ω, C =nf VW3 A8 36 RC. R=5Ω VW3 A8 36 R. TSX SCA 6 For screw terminals R=Ω, C =nf VW3 A8 36 DRC. R=5Ω VW3 A8 36 DR. Modbus T-junction boxes With integrated cable (.3 m) VW3 A8 36 TF3 With integrated cable ( m) VW3 A8 36 TF Connecting cables Description Length m Cables for Modbus bus Connectors Reference Weight kg 3 RJ45 connector and one end stripped VW3 A8 36 D3.5 3 RJ45 connector and male VW3 A way SUB-D connector for TSX SCA 6.3 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 36 R3.5 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 36 R.5 3 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 36 R3.5 Cables for RJ45 connectors VW3P736R.5 Profibus DP RS 485 double Supplied without connector TSX CSA shielded twisted pair cables Supplied without connector TSX CSA 5 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 5 Other communication buses Description Ethernet/Modbus bridge with x Ethernet baset port (RJ45 type) Fipio/Modbus gateway (3) Cables to be connected Reference Weight kg VW3A836D3 74 CEV 3 ().5 VW3A836Rpp LUF P.4 DeviceNet/Modbus gateway (3) VW3A836Rpp LUF P9.4 Profibus DP/Modbus gateway Parameters set using standard Profibus DP configurator, Hilscher Sycon type (4) Profibus DP/Modbus gateway Parameters set using ABC Configurator software (3) VW3P736R LA9 P37.4 VW3A836Rpp LUF P7.4 LUF P LA9 P37 ()Soldinlotsof. () Please consult our "Modicon Premium automation platform and PL7 software" catalogue. (3) See pages 4/ and 4/3. (4) See pages 4/4 and 4/5. Presentation: page /46 /47

55 Dimensions Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units ATS 48D7p to ATS 48D47p 75 4x 7 M6 6 6,6 ATS 48D6p to ATS 48Cp 9 4x 7 5 M6 7 M6 9 = = Maximum connection capacity: Earth connections: mm (AWG 8) Power terminals: 6 mm (AWG 8) 6 35 Maximum connection capacity: Earth connections: 6 mm (AWG 4) Power terminals: 5 mm (AWG /) M6 9 ATS 48C4p to ATS 48C7p = 6 = 4 8 M6 4x 7 /L 3/L 5/L3 4 3 Maximum connection capacity: Earth connections: mm (busbar) Power terminals: 95 mm (AWG /) 5 6, M x 8 ATS 48Cp to ATS 48C3p 5 36,5 = = M 9x 4x 9 Maximum connection capacity: Earth connections: mm (busbar) Power terminals: 4 mm (busbar) 5 36,5 5 96, /L 3/L 5/L3 M Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 and /33 References: pages /4 to /43 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /48

56 Dimensions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units ATS 48C4p to C66p = 3 = Maximum connection capacity: Earth connections: 4 mm (busbar) Power terminals: x 4 mm (busbar) x 9 69 L M 3L 5L ,5,5 5,5 M ATS 48C79p to Mp = = Maximum connection capacity: Earth connections: x 4 mm (busbar) Power terminals: 4 x 4 mm (busbar) 64 3,5 9, x 9 8x 4 M ,5 96, M Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 and /33 References: pages /4 to /43 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /49

57 b Dimensions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Chokes VZ-L5UM7T to L7U35T VZ-L5U7T to LM4U6T a c a c b G H c G H c VZ- a b c c G H Ø VZ- a b c c G H Ø L5UM7T / L5U7T / L3U8T / L5UT /8 5.5 L4U6T / 76 7 L35U75T / L7U35T / 97 7 L53U45T LMU4T LM4U6T Mounting the remote terminal VW3 G Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 and /33 References: pages /4 to /43 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /5

58 Mounting Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Mounting recommendations mm b Install the Altistart vertically, at ±. b DonotplacetheAltistartclosetooraboveheatingelements. b Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. 5 mm 5 mm Caution: theipversionofthealtistart48mustbefittedwithaprotectivebarto protect personnel against electrical contact. Protective covers are available for the ATS 48C4p to ATS 48C3p. They should be ordered separately. mm Mounting in a metal wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure with degree of protection IP 3 or IP 54 b Observe the mounting recommendations above. b To ensure proper air circulation in the starter: v fit ventilation grilles, v ensure that there is sufficient ventilation. If there is not, install forced ventilation with a filter ; the openings and/or fans must provide a flow rate at least equal to that of the starter fans (see the table below). b UsespecialfilterswithIP54protection. Fan flow rate depending on the starter rating ATS 48 starter Flow rate m 3 /hour ATS48 D3p and D38p 4 ATS48 D47p 8 ATS48 D6p to Cp 86 ATS48 C4p and C7p 38 ATS48 Cp to C3p 8 ATS48 C4p to C66p 6 ATS48 C9p to Mp Metal wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure with IP 54 degree of protection For non-ventilated Altistart units (ATS 48D7p and 48Dp), install a fan y 5 mm below the starter to circulate the air inside the enclosure in order to avoid hot spots. Calculating the size of the enclosure Maximum thermal resistance Rth ( C/W) θ = maximum temperature inside enclosure in C θ θe θe = maximum external temperature in C Rth = P P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W The starter/motor combinations on pages /4 and /4 can only be used in ambient temperatures y 4 C. For temperatures between 4 C and 6 C, derate the maximum permanent current of the starter by % for every degree above 4 C. Power dissipated by the starter: see pages /4 and /4. If the starts are infrequent, it is advisable to bypass the Altistart at the end of starting in order to reduce heat dissipation. The power dissipated will then be between 5 and 3 W. Add the power dissipated by the other equipment components. Effective exchange surface area of enclosure S (m ) (sides + top + front panel if wall-mounted) K SS = Rth K is the thermal resistance per m of casing. For ACM type metal enclosures: K =. with internal fan, K =.5 without fan. Caution: do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 and /33 References: pages /4 to /43 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /5

59 Schemes Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Recommended application diagram for non-reversing unit with line contactor, type and type coordinations /T 4/T 6/T3 3 STOP 5 RUN LI3 /L 3/L 5/L3 CL +4V LO+ LO LO AO COM RA RC RA RC R3A R3C 4 6 KM U V W 3 Q 4 S T S KM 3 A 4 RA () 4 6 RC A 3 5 Q Emergency stop Q3 () (3) KM A A CL LI4 PTC PTC KM M 3 Select the components to connect, according to the descriptions on page /53, from the association tables on pages /58 to /67. () For type coordination (according to IEC ), install fast-acting fuses to ensure that the starter will be protected in the event of a short-circuit. () Assign relay R as the "isolating relay". Beware of the operating limits of the contacts (see Characteristics page /3), for example when connecting to high rating contactors. (3) Insert a transformer if the line voltage is different to that defined for the control circuit (see page /3). Types of coordination The standard defines tests for different current levels which are designed to expose the device to extreme conditions. Based on the state of the components after a short-circuit test, the standard defines types of coordination. b Type coordination: damage to the contactor and the starter is acceptable under conditions: v no risk is posed to the operator, v elements other than the contactor and the starter are not damaged. Maintenance must be carried out after a short-circuit. b Type coordination: minor soldering of the contactor contacts is permissible if they can be separated easily. The starter must not be damaged beyond repair. The protection and control devices remain operational after type coordination tests. Once the fuses have been replaced, check the contactor. Nota : the starter will protect the motor and the cables against overloads. If this protection function is disabled, external thermal protection must be provided. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 /5

60 Schemes (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Recommended application diagram for non-reversing unit with starter line and bypass contactors, type and type coordinations /T A 4/T B 6/T3 C STOP RUN LI3 LI4 +4V LO LO AO COM /L 3/L 5/L3 CL RA RC RA RC R3A R3C T KM U V W PTC PTC Q 4 Q RA A RA RC RC Q3 () KM3 A A KM A A 3 CL KM3 5 A 4 6 LO+ 3 5 Emergency stop () (3) S S 3-wire control (4) M 3 STOP RUN + 4 V STOP + 4 V S -wire control (4) When controlled via a PC or PLC, the STOP input remains active Select the components to connect, according to the descriptions below, from the association tables on pages /58 to /67. () For type coordination (according to IEC ), install fast-acting fuses to ensure that the starter will be protected in the event of a short-circuit. () Assign relay R as the "isolating relay". Beware of the operating limits of the contacts (see Characteristics page /3), for example when connecting to high rating contactors. (3) Insert a transformer if the line voltage is different to that defined for the control circuit (see page /3). (4) -wire and 3-wire control (see page /74). Components to connect depending on the types of coordination and voltages Designation Description M Motor A Starter (standard applications and severe applications) Q Circuit-breaker or switch/fuses Q3 3 FA fuses KM, KM3 Contactor S, S Control (separate parts XB or XB M) Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 /53

61 Schemes (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Recommended application diagram for connection to the motor delta terminals, non-reversing, freewheel stop, with starter line and bypass contactors, type and type coordinations This type of wiring enables the starter rating to be reduced. ATS 48pppQ - Q 3 - Q S3 4 Emergency stop /L 3/L T RA A RA (3) () - KM RC RC 4 6 Q3 () (4) - KM3 A A - KM A A 3 5 A 5/L3 CL CL - KM3 4 6 /T A 4/T B 6/T3 C STOP RUN LI3 LI4 +4V LO+ LO LO AO COM PTC PTC RA RC RA RC R3A R3C S S 3-wire control (5) W U V M 3 a U V W STOP RUN +4V STOP +4V S -wire control (5) When controlled via a PC or PLC, the STOP input remains active. Select the components to connect according to the descriptions on page /55 and the association tables on pages /58 to /67. () A line contactor must be used in the sequence. () For type coordination (according to IEC ), install fast-acting fuses to ensure that the starter will be protected in the event of a short-circuit. (3) R must be assigned as the "isolating relay" to control contactor KM. Beware of the operating limits of the contacts (see Characteristics page /3), for example when connecting to high rating contactors. (4) Insert a transformer if the line voltage is different to that defined for the control circuit (see page /3). (5) -wire and 3-wire controls (see page /74). Types of coordination The standard defines tests for different current levels which are designed to expose the device to extreme conditions. Based on the state of the components after a short-circuit test, the standard defines types of coordinations. b Type coordination: damage to the contactor and the starter is acceptable under conditions: v no risk is posed to the operator, v elements other than the contactor and the starter are not damaged. Maintenance must be carried out after a short-circuit. b Type coordination: minor soldering of the contactor contacts is permissible if they can be separated easily. The starter must not be damaged beyond repair. The protection and control devices remain operational after type coordination tests. Once the fuses have been replaced, check the contactor. Nota : the starter will protect the motor and the cables against overloads. If this protection function is disabled, external thermal protection must be provided. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 /54

62 Schemes (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Recommended application diagram for LSP/HSP motor, non-reversing with starter line and bypass contactors /L 3/L 5/L3 CL /T A 4/T B 6/T3 C RUN STOP LI3 LI4 +4V LO+ LO LO AO COM PTC PTC KM CL - KM Q - T Q3 () () A RA RC RA RC R3A R3C (3) KA KM - KM5 - KM U V W M 3 U V W Select the components to connect, according to the descriptions below, from the association tables on pages /58 to /67. () For type coordination (according to IEC ), install fast-acting fuses to ensure that the starter will be protected in the event of a short-circuit. () Insert a transformer if the line voltage is different to that defined for the control circuit (see page /3). (3) Assign logic input LI3 to "activate the adjustment functions of the nd motor". (4) Assign relay R as the "isolating relay". Beware of the operating limits of the contacts (see Characteristics page /3), for example when connecting to high rating contactors. V KM S Emergency stop S Q S4 KM KM5 A RC RA (4) S3 KA A RC RA (4) KM5 KM KA KM KM KM5 KM3 S4 : = low speed S4 : = high speed Components to connect depending on the types of coordination and voltages Designation Description M Motor A Starter (standard applications and severe applications) Q Circuit-breaker or switch/fuses Q3 3 FA fuses KM, KM, KM3, KM5, KA Contactors and relays S, S, S3 Control (separate parts XB or XB M) Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 /55

63 Schemes (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Recommended application diagram for starting and decelerating several motors cascaded with a single Altistart 48, non-reversing and line contactor The diagram is given as an example only. For more details, refer to the Altistart 48 user's manual. A KA KALI KALIT - Q 3 5 KAT KALIT 4 6 A - KM - KM KM () - T 4 6 A /L 3/L 5/L /T 4/T 6/T3 - KM - Q U V W KM V KMn - Q U V W KMn RUN 3 5 LI3 - Qn Un Vn Wn CL CL STOP - Q3 () B M 3 M 3 Mi 3 Mn 3 Motor Motor Motor i Motor n Select the components to connect, according to the designations below, from the association tables on pages /58 to /67. () For type coordination (according to IEC ), install fast-acting fuses to ensure that the starter will be protected in the event of a short-circuit. () Insert a transformer if the line voltage is different to that defined for the control circuit (see page /3). Important: b One Altistart 48 logic input must be configured as a "cascading" input. b In the event of a fault, it will not be possible to decelerate or brake any motors that may be running at that time. b Adjust the thermal protection of each circuit-breaker Q n for the corresponding nominal motor current. Components to connect depending on the types of coordination and voltages Designation Description M, M, Mi, Mn Motor A Starter (standard applications and severe applications) KM, KM,..., KMi, KMn Contactor Q Circuit-breaker or switch/fuses Q3 3 FA fuses Q, Q,..., Qn Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers KA, KAT, KALI, KALIT Control (separate parts XB or XB M) Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 /56

64 Schemes (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Recommended application diagram for starting and decelerating several motors cascaded with a single Altistart 48, non-reversing and line contactor (continued) Motor n control A... C KM (n-) contacts KM ARn SHUNT KT KMi KMn BPMn KAT ACDEC KMn SHUNT BPAn BPAn ART KMn KAMn KMn KMn ARn KAMn KMn ARn KAMn ARn KMn KMn B... D Cascade control C MST KM n contacts MHT AR AR ARi ARn Q ncontacts Q KA K KALI KALIT A RC RA () RC RA n contacts Qi Qn KAM KAM KAMi KAMn KAT KT KALIT ART ACDEC SHUNT KM KA K KALI D () Assign relay R as the "isolating relay". Beware of the operating limits of the contacts (see Characteristics page /3), for example when connecting to high rating contactors. BPMn: "Run" button motor n BPAn: "Stop" button motor n MST: General "Run" button MHT: General "Stop" button Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 /57

65 Combinations Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 3 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter () Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses Class Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Unit reference (3) Size Rating Merlin Gerin disconnector Standard Severe Without With striker (bare unit) kw A applications applications A striker A M A Q KM, KM, KM3 3.5 ATS 48D7p GV L 8 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA.5 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x ATS 48D7p ATS 48Dp GV L 8 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA 5 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x ATS 48Dp ATS 48D3p GV L 5 LC D5 LS D3 DF CA5 x 38 5 NS8H MA 5 LC D5 LS D3 DF CA5 x ATS 48D3p ATS 48D38p GV L3 3 LC D3 GK EK DF EA3 DF3 EA3 4 x 5 3 NS8H MA 5 LC D3 GK EK DF EA3 DF3 EA3 4 x ATS 48D38p ATS 48D47p GK3 EF4 4 LC D38 GK EK DF EA4 DF3 EA4 4 x 5 4 NS8H MA 5 LC D38 GK EK DF EA4 DF3 EA4 4 x ATS 48D47p ATS 48D6p GK3 EF65 65 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x 58 5 NS8H MA 5 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x ATS 48D6p ATS 48D75p GK3 EF65 65 LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x 58 8 NS8H MA 8 LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D75p ATS 48D88p GK3 EF8 8 LC D8 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x 58 8 NS8H MA 8 LC D8 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D88p ATS 48Cp NSp MA () LC D5 GK FK DF FA DF3 FA x ATS 48Cp ATS 48C4p NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF4 FA5 x ATS 48C4p ATS 48C7p NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GS L DF GA6 DF4 GA ATS 48C7p ATS 48Cp NS5p MA () LC F85 GS N DF HA DF4 HA 55 8 ATS 48Cp ATS 48C5p NS5p MA () LC F5 GS N DF HA DF4 HA 75 4 ATS 48C5p ATS 48C3p NS4p MA () 3 LC F65 GS QQ DF JA5 DF4 JA ATS 48C3p ATS 48C4p NS4p MA () 3 LC F33 GS QQ DF JA3 DF4 JA ATS 48C4p ATS48C48p NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 GS S DF KA4 DF4 KA ATS 48C48p ATS 48C59p NS63p MA () 5 LC F5 GS S DF KA5 DF4 KA ATS 48C59p ATS 48C66p NS63bp () 63 LC F63 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC F63 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA STR35 ME ATS 48C66p ATS 48C79p NS8p () 8 LC F8 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC F8 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA STR35 ME 7 ATS 48C79p ATS 48Mp NS8p () 8 LC F8 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC F8 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 STR35 ME 5 8 ATS 48Mp ATS 48Mp NSp () LC BM33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 Micrologic 5. Cp () STR35 ME LC BM33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA ATS 48Mp NS5p () 5 LCBP33 DF LA5 DF4 LA5 4 5 Micrologic 5. C5p () STR35 ME 5 LCBP33 DF LA5 DF4 LA5 4 5 Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter according to standard IEC () Replace p with Q or Y according to the starter voltage range. () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see table below). (3) DF CA, DFp EA, DFp FA: sold in lots of. DFp GA, DFp KA: sold in lots of 3. DFp LA:soldinlotsof. Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC Starter Iq (ka) 3 V Icu (ka) ATS 48D7p to ATS 48C3p 5 GV L, GK3 EF4, NS8 ATS 48C4p to ATS 48Mp 7 GV L, GV L3, GK3 EF65, GK3 EF8 5 3 V Icu (ka) N H L NS, NS6, NS5, NS4, NS NS8, NS NS5 5 7 C8, C 85 5 C5 85 Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /58

66 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 3 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) circuit-breakers, contactors, fast-acting fuses, starters Combination: circuit-breaker, contactor, starter Motor Starter () Type of circuit-breaker Type of contactor Class Class Telemecanique Rating kw A Standard applications Severe applications Merlin Gerin A M A Q KM, KM, KM3 3.5 ATS 48D7p GV L 8 LC D4 NS8H MA.5 LC D ATS 48D7p ATS 48Dp GV L 8 LC D4 NS8H MA 5 LC D4 5.5 ATS 48-Dp ATS 48D3p GV L 5 LC D4 NS8H MA 5 LC D ATS 48D3p ATS 48D38p GV L3 3 LC D8 NS8H MA 5 LC D8 9 3 ATS 48D38p ATS 48D47p GK3 EF4 4 LC D8 NS8H MA 5 LC D8 39 ATS 48D47p ATS 48D6p GK3 EF65 65 LC D8 NS8H MA 5 LC D8 5 5 ATS 48D6p ATS 48D75p GK3 EF65 65 LC D8 NS8H MA 8 LC D ATS 48D75p ATS 48D88p GK3 EF8 8 LC D8 NS8H MA 8 LC D8 75 ATS 48D88p ATS 48Cp NSp MA () LC D5 3 3 ATS 48Cp ATS 48C4p NS6p MA () 5 LC D ATS 48C4p ATS 48C7p NS6p MA () 5 LC D ATS 48C7p ATS 48Cp NS5p MA () LC F ATS 48Cp ATS 48C5p NS5p MA () LC F ATS 48C5p ATS 48C3p NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C3p ATS 48C4p NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C4p ATS 48C48p NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C48p ATS 48C59p NS63p MA () 5 LC F5 6 5 ATS 48C59p ATS 48C66p NS63bL Micrologic LC F63 66 ATS 48C66p ATS 48C79p NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC F8 7 ATS 48C79p ATS 48Mp NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC F8 5 8 ATS 48Mp ATS 48Mp NSL Micrologic 5. LC BM ATS 48Mp NS5p () Micrologic 5. (3) 5 LC BP33 () Replace p with Q or Y according to the starter voltage range. () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see the breaking capacity table on the previous page). (3) Type coordination is only possible if the fast-acting fuses remain in the motor supply circuit and are not bypassed at the end of starting. Maximum prospective short-circuit current of Fast-acting fuse (essential for type coordination), starter combinations the starter according to standard IEC Starter Fast-acting fuses with micro-contact Starter Iq (ka) Reference Unit reference (4) Size Rating I t ATS 48D7p to ATS 48C79p 5 A ka.s ATS 48Mp and ATS 48Mp 85 A Q3 ATS 48D7p DF3 ER5 4 x ATS 48Dp and ATS 48D3p DF3 FR8 x ATS 48D38p and ATS 48D47p DF3 FR x 58 ATS 48D6p and ATS 48D75p DF ATS 48D88p and ATS 48Cp DF ATS 48C4p and ATS 48C7p DF ATS 48Cp to ATS 48C3p DF ATS 48D75p DF ATS 48C48p and ATS 48C59p DF ATS 48C66p DF4 334 x 33 4 ATS 48C79p DF ATS 48Mp and ATS 48Mp DF (4) DF3 ER, DF3 FR: sold in lots of DF4: sold in lots of. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages/5to/57 /59

67 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 38 V, 4 V, 45 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter () Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses Class Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Unit reference (3) Size Rating disconnector Standard Severe Merlin Gerin Without With striker (bare unit) kw A applications applications A striker A M A Q KM, KM, KM3 5.5 ATS 48D7p GV L 8 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA.5 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x ATS 48D7p ATS 48Dp GV L 8 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA 5 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 ATS 48Dp ATS 48D3p GV L 5 LC D5 LS D3 DF CA5 x 38 5 NS8H MA 5 LC D5 LS D3 DF CA5 x ATS 48D3p ATS 48D38p GV L3 3 LC D3 GK EK DF EA3 DF3 EA3 4 x 5 3 NS8H MA 5 LC D3 GK EK DF EA3 DF3 EA3 4 x ATS 48D38p ATS 48D47p GK3 EF4 4 LC D38 GK EK DF EA4 DF3 EA4 4 x 5 4 NS8H MA 5 LC D38 GK EK DF EA4 DF3 EA4 4 x ATS 48D47p ATS 48D6p GK3 EF65 65 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x 58 5 NS8H MA 5 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x ATS 48D6p ATS 48D75p GK3 EF65 65 LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x 58 8 NS8H MA 8 LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D75p ATS 48D88p GK3 EF8 8 LC D8 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x 58 8 NS8H MA 8 LC D8 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D88p ATS48Cp NSp MA () LC D5 GK FK DF FA DF3 FA x ATS 48Cp ATS 48C4p NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF4 FA5 x ATS 48C4p ATS 48C7p NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GS L DF GA6 DF4 GA ATS 48C7p ATS 48Cp NS5p MA () LC F85 GS N DF HA DF4 HA 95 ATS 48Cp ATS 48C5p NS5p MA () LC F5 GS N DF HA DF4 HA 3 33 ATS 48C5p ATS 48C3p NS4p MA () 3 LC F65 GS QQ DF JA5 DF4 JA ATS 48C3p ATS 48C4p NS4p MA () 3 LC F33 GS QQ DF JA3 DF4 JA ATS 48C4p ATS 48C48p NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 GS S DF KA4 DF4 KA ATS 48C48p ATS 48C59p NS63p MA () 5 LC F5 GS S DF KA5 DF4 KA ATS 48C59p ATS 48C66p NS63bp () 63 LC F63 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC F63 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA STR35ME ATS 48C66p ATS 48C79p NS8p () 8 LC F8 GS V DF LA63 DF4 LA Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC F8 GS V DF LA63 DF4 LA STR35ME ATS 48C79p ATS 48Mp NS8p () 8 LC F8 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC F8 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 STR35ME ATS 48Mp ATS 48Mp NSp () LC BM33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 Micrologic 5. Cp () LC BM33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 STR35ME ATS48Mp NS5p () 5 LC BP33 DF LA5 DF4 LA5 4 5 Micrologic 5. C5p () 5 LC BP33 DF LA5 DF4 LA5 4 5 STR35ME () Replace p with Q or Y according to the starter voltage range. () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see table below) (3) DF CA, DFp EA, DFp FA: sold in lots of. DFp GA, DFp KA:sold in lots of 3. DFp LA:soldinlotsof. Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC according to IEC V, 4 V, 45 V Icu (ka) Starter Iq (ka) GV L, GV L, GV L3, GK3 EF4 5 ATS 48D7p to ATS 48C3p 5 GK3 EF65, GK3 EF8 35 ATS 48C4p to ATS 48Mp 7 NS V, 4 V, 45 V Icu (ka) N H L NS NS6, NS NS4, NS NS8, NS, C8, C NS5, C5 5 7 Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /6

68 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 38 V, 4 V or 45 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) circuit-breakers, contactors, fast-acting fuses, starters Combination: circuit-breaker, contactor, starter Motor Starter () Type of circuit-breaker Type of contactor Class Class Telemecanique Rating kw A Standard applications Severe applications Merlin Gerin A M A Q KM, KM, KM3 5.5 ATS 48D7p GV L 8 LC D4 NS8H MA.5 LC D ATS 48D7p ATS 48Dp GV L 8 LC D4 NS8H MA 5 LC D4 ATS 48Dp ATS 48D3p GV L 5 LC D4 NS8H MA 5 LC D ATS 48D3p ATS 48D38p GV L3 3 LC D8 NS8H MA 5 LC D ATS 48D38p ATS 48D47p NS8H MA 5 LC D8 4 ATS 48D47p ATS 48D6p NS8H MA 5 LC D ATS 48D6p ATS 48D75p NS8H MA 8 LC D ATS 48D75p ATS 48D88p NS8H MA 8 LC D ATS 48D88p ATS 48Cp NSp MA () LC D5 55 ATS 48Cp ATS 48C4p NS6p MA () 5 LC D ATS 48C4p ATS 48C7p NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 9 6 ATS 48C7p ATS 48Cp NS 5p MA () LC F85 95 ATS 48Cp ATS 48C5p NS 5p MA () LC F ATS 48C5p ATS 48C3p NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C3p ATS 48C4p NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C4p ATS 48C48p NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C48p ATS 48C59p NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C59p ATS 48C66p NS63bL Micrologic LC F ATS48C66p ATS48C79p NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC F ATS48C79p ATS48Mp NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC F ATS48Mp ATS48Mp NSL Micrologic 5. LC BM ATS48Mp NS5p () Micrologic 5. (3) 5 LC BP33 () Replace p with Q or Y according to the starter voltage range. () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see the breaking capacity table on the previous page). (3) Type coordination is only possible if the fast-acting fuses remain in the motor supply circuit and are not bypassed at the end of starting. Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter Fast-acting fuse (essential for type coordination), starter combinations according to standard IEC Starter Fast-acting fuses with micro-contact Starter Iq (ka) Reference Unit reference (4) Size Rating I t ATS 48D7p 5 A ka.s ATS 48Dp to ATS 48D47p 4 A Q3 ATS 48D6p to ATS 48C79p 5 ATS 48D7p DF3 ER5 4 x ATS 48Mp and ATS 48Mp 85 ATS 48Dp and ATS 48D3p DF3 FR8 x ATS 48D38p and ATS 48D47p DF3 FR x 58 ATS 48D6p and ATS 48D75p DF ATS 48D88p and ATS 48Cp DF ATS 48C4p and ATS 48C7p DF ATS 48Cp to ATS 48C3p DF ATS 48D75p DF ATS 48C48p and ATS 48C59p DF ATS 48C66p DF4 334 x 33 4 ATS 48C79p DF ATS 48Mp and ATS 48Mp DF (4) DF3 ER, DF3 FR: sold in lots of. DF4: sold in lots of. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages/5to/57 /6

69 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 44 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses Class Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Unit reference () Size Rating disconnector Standard Severe Merlin Gerin Without With striker (bare unit) kw A applications applications A striker A M A Q KM, KM, KM ATS 48D7Y NSp MA ().5 LC D LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY NSp MA () 5 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA. ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y NSp MA () 5 LC D5 GK EK DF EA5 DF3 EA5 4 x 5 5 NS8H MA ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y NSp MA () 5 LC D3 GK EK DF EA3 DF3 EA3 4 x 5 3 NS8H MA ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y NSp MA () 5 LC D4 GK EK DF EA4 DF3 EA4 4 x 5 4 NS8H MA 39 ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y NSp MA () 5 LC D4 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x 58 5 NS8H MA 3 5 ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y NS8H MA 8 LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y NS8H MA 8 LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY NSp MA () LC D5 GK FK DF FA DF3 FA x ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y NSp MA () LC D5 GS L DF GA DF4 GA ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GS L DF GA6 DF4 GA ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY NS5p MA () LC F85 GS N DF HA DF4 HA 78 ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y NS5p MA () LC F5 GS N DF HA5 DF4 HA ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y NS5p MA () LC F65 GS QQ DF JA3 DF4 JA ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F65 GS QQ DF JA4 DF4 JA ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 GS S DF KA5 DF4 KA ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 GS S DF KA5 DF4 KA ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y NS63bp () 63 LC F63 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y NS63bp () 63 LC F63 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY NS8p () 8 LC BM33 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC BM33 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 STR35ME ATS 48MY ATS 48MY NSp () LC BP33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 Micrologic 5. CL LC BP33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 STR35ME 7 75 ATS 48MY NS5p () 5 LC BP33 DF LA5 4 5 Micrologic 5. C5p () 5 LC BP33 DF LA5 4 5 STR35ME () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see table below). () DF CA, DFp EA, DFp FA: sold in lots of. DFp GA, DFp KA: sold in lots of 3. DFp LA:soldinlotsof. Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC according to standard IEC V Icu (ka) Starter Iq (ka) GV L, GV L, GV L3 ATS 48D7Y to ATS 48C3Y 5 GK3 EF4 3 ATS 48C4Y to ATS 48MY 7 GK3 EF65, GK3 EF8 5 NS V Icu (ka) N H L NS NS6, NS NS4, NS NS8, NS NS C8, C C Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /6

70 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 44 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) circuit-breakers, contactors, fast-acting fuses, starters Combination: circuit-breaker, contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of contactor Class Class Telemecanique Rating kw A Standard applications Severe applications Merlin Gerin A M A Q KM, KM, KM ATS 48D7Y NS8H-MA.5 LC D4 NSp MA ().5 LC D ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY NS8H-MA 5 LC D4 NSp MA () 5 LC D8. ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y NS8H-MA 5 LC D4 NSp MA () 5 LC D ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y NSp MA () NS8H-MA 5 LC D ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 5 LC D8 39 ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 5 LC D8 3 5 ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y NSp MA () LC D8 NS8H MA 8 LC D ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y NSp MA () LC D8 NS8H MA 8 LC D ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY NSp MA () LC D ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y NSp MA () LC D ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 9 5 ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 78 ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y NS5p MA () LC F ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 5 4 ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y NS63bL Micrologic LC F ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC F ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC F ATS 48MY ATS 48MY NSL Micrologic 5. LC BP ATS 48MY NS5p () Micrologic 5. () 5 LC BP33 () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see the breaking capacity table on the previous page). () Type coordination is only possible if the fast-acting fuses remain in the motor supply circuit and are not bypassed at the end of starting. Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter Fast-acting fuse (essential for type coordination), starter combinations according to standard IEC Starter Fast-acting fuses with micro-contact Starter Iq (ka) Reference Unit reference (3) Size Rating I t ATS 48D7Y 5 A ka.s ATS 48DY to ATS 48D47Y A Q3 ATS 48D6Y and ATS 48D75Y 5 ATS 48D7Y DF3 ER5 4 x ATS 48D88Y ATS 48C4Y 4 ATS 48DY and ATS 48D3Y DF3 FR8 x ATS 48CY to ATS 48C3Y 5 ATS 48D38Y and ATS 48D47Y DF3 FR x 58 ATS 48C48Y to ATS 48C79Y 5 ATS 48D6Y and ATS 48D75Y DF ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY 85 ATS 48D88Y and ATS 48CY DF ATS 48C4Y and ATS 48C7Y DF ATS 48CY to ATS 48C3Y DF ATS 48C4Y DF ATS 48C48Y and ATS 48C59Y DF ATS 48C66Y DF4 334 x 33 4 ATS 48C79Y DF ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY DF (3) DF3 ER, DF3 FR: sold in lots of DF4: sold in lots of. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages/5to/57 /63

71 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 5 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses Class Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Unit reference () Size Rating disconnector Standard Severe Merlin Gerin Without With striker (bare unit) kw A applications applications A striker A M A Q KM, KM, KM3 7.5 ATS 48D7Y NSp MA ().5 LC D LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA 9 4 ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY NSp MA () 5 LC D8 LS D3 DF CA6 x 38 6 NS8H MA 8.4 ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y NSp MA () 5 LC D5 GK EK DF EA5 DF3 EA5 4 x 5 5 NS8H MA ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y NSp MA () 5 LC D3 GK EK DF EA3 DF3 EA3 4 x 5 3 NS8H MA 33 ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y NSp MA () 5 LC D4 GK EK DF EA4 DF3 EA4 4 x 5 4 NS8H MA 3 45 ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y NSp MA () 5 LC D5 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x 58 5 NS8H MA ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y NSp MA () LC D65 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y NSp MA () LC D8 GK FK DF FA8 DF3 FA8 x ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY NSp MA () LC D8 GK FK DF FA DF3 FA x ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GS L DF GA DF4 GA ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 GS L DF GA6 DF4 GA ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY NS5p MA () LC F85 GS N DF HA DF4 HA 3 7 ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y NS5p MA () LC F65 GS N DF HA5 DF4 HA ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F65 GS QQ DF JA3 DF4 JA ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 GS QQ DF JA4 DF4 JA ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F4 GS S DF KA5 DF4 KA ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F5 GS S DF KA63 DF4 KA ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y NS63bp () 63 LC F63 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y NS63bp () 63 LC F8 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY NS8p MA () 8 LC BL33 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 Micrologic 5. Cp () LC BL33 GS V DF LA8 DF4 LA8 4 8 STR35 ME ATS 48MY ATS 48MY NSp () LC BP33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 Micrologic 5. Cp () LC BP33 GS V DF LA DF4 LA 4 STR35 ME 8 ATS 48MY NS5p () 5 LC BP33 DF LA5 4 5 Micrologic 5. C5p () 5 LC BP33 DF LA5 4 5 STR35 ME () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see table below). () DF CA, DFp EA, DFp FA: sold in lots of. DFp GA, DFp KA: sold in lots of 3. DFp LA:soldinlotsof Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC V Icu (ka) GV L, GV L, GV L3 GK3 EF4 GK3 EF65, GK3 EF8 5 NS8 5 5 V Icu (ka) N H L NS 8 5 NS6, NS5, NS NS4 3 5 NS8, NS, C8, C 4 5 NS5, C5 4 5 Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter according to standard IEC Starter Iq (ka) ATS 48D7Y to ATS 48C3Y 5 ATS 48C4Y to ATS 48MY 7 Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57 /64

72 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 5 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) circuit-breakers, contactors, fast-acting fuses, starters Combination: circuit-breaker, contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of contactor Class Class Telemecanique Rating kw A Standard applications Severe applications Merlin Gerin A M A Q KM, KM, KM3 7.5 ATS 48D7Y NS8H MA.5 LC D4 NSp MA ().5 LC D8 9 4 ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY NS8H MA 5 LC D4 NSp MA () 5 LC D8 8.4 ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y NS8H MA 5 LC D4 NSp MA () 5 LC D ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 5 LC D8 33 ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 5 LC D ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 5 LC D ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y NSp MA () LC D ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y NSp MA () LC D ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY NSp MA () LC D ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 9 3 ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y NS6p MA () 5 LC D5 56 ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY NS5p MA () LC F ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y NS5p MA () LC F ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F4 3 ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y NS63bL Micrologic LC F ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y NS63bL Micrologic LC F ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC BL ATS 48MY ATS 48MY NSL Micrologic 5. LC BP33 8 ATS 48MY NS5p () Micrologic 5. () 5 LC BP33 () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see the breaking capacity table on the previous page). () Type coordination is only possible if the fast-acting fuses remain in the motor supply circuit and are not bypassed at the end of starting. Fast-acting fuse (essential for type coordination), starter combinations Starter Fast-acting fuses with micro-contact Reference Unit reference (3) Size Rating I t A ka.s A Q3 ATS 48D7Y DF3 ER5 4 x ATS 48DY and ATS 48D3Y DF3 FR8 x ATS 48D38Y and ATS 48D47Y DF3 FR x 58 ATS 48D6Y and ATS 48D75Y DF ATS 48D88Y and ATS 48CY DF ATS 48C4Y and ATS 48C7Y DF ATS 48CY to ATS 48C3Y DF ATS 48C4Y DF ATS 48C48Y and ATS 48C59Y DF ATS 48C66Y DF4 334 x 33 4 ATS 48C79Y DF ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY DF Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter according to standard IEC Starter Iq (ka) ATS 48D7Y 5 ATS 48DY to ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y and ATS 48D75Y 5 ATS 48D88Y 4 ATS 48CY to ATS 48C3Y 5 ATS 48C4Y 4 ATS 48C48Y to ATS 48C79Y 5 ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY 85 (3) DF3 ER, DF3 FR: sold in lots of DF4: sold in lots of. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages/5to/57 /65

73 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 69 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) Combine either circuit-breaker (light blue columns), contactor, starter, or switches/fuses (dark blue columns), contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of Type of switch Am fuses Class Class Telemecanique Rating contactor or switch Unit reference () Size Rating Merlin Gerin disconnector Standard Severe Without With striker (bare unit) kw A applications applications A striker A M A Q KM, KM, KM3. ATS 48D7Y NSp MA () NS8H MA.5.5 LC D8 GK FK DF FA6 DF3 FA6 x ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY NSp MA () NS8H MA 8.5. ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 4. ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 3 33 ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y NSp MA () NS8H MA 37 4 ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y NSp MA () NS8H MA / LC D5 GK FK DF FA DF3 FA x 58 LC D3 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x 58 5 LC D4 GK FK DF FA3 DF3 FA3 x 58 3 LC D4 GK FK DF FA4 DF3 FA4 x 58 4 LC D65 GK FK DF FA5 DF3 FA5 x ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y NSp MA () LC D ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y NSp MA () LCD ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY NSp MA () LCD ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y NS6p MA () 5 LCD-5 3 ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y NS6p MA () 5 LCD ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY NS5p MA () LCF-65 3 ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y NS4p MA () 3 LCF ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y NS4p MA () 3 LCF ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y NS63p MA () 5 LCF ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y NS63bp () 63 LC BL33 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC BL33 STR35 ME ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y NS63bp () 63 LC BL33 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC BL33 STR35 ME ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y NS8p () 8 LC BP33 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC BP33 STR35 ME ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY NS8p () 8 LC BP33 Micrologic 5. C8p () 8 LC BP33 STR35 ME 9 88 ATS 48MY ATS 48MY NSp () LC BR33 Micrologic 5. CL STR35 ME LC BR33 95 ATS 48MY NS5p () 5 LC BR33 Micrologic 5. C5p () STR35 ME 5 LC BR33 Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter according to standard IEC Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see table below). () DFp FA: sold in lots of. Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC Starter Iq (ka) 69 V Icu (ka) ATS 48D7Y and ATS 48C3Y 5 GV L, GV L, GV L3 4 ATS 48C4Y to ATS 48MY 7 GK3 EF4, GK3 EF65, GK3 EF8, NS V Icu (ka) N H L NS 8 75 NS6, NS5 8 NS4 75 NS63 35 NS8, NS NS5 3 4 C8, C C5 5 4 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages /5 to /57

74 Combinations (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units 69 V power supply Type coordination Components for use together in accordance with standards IEC and IEC (see schemes on pages /5 to /57) circuit-breakers, contactors, fast-acting fuses, starters Combination: circuit-breaker, contactor, starter Motor Starter Type of circuit-breaker Type of contactor Class Class Telemecanique Rating kw A Standard applications Severe applications Merlin Gerin A M A Q KM, KM, KM3. ATS 48D7Y NSp MA ().5 LC D ATS 48D7Y ATS 48DY NSp MA () 5 LC D ATS 48DY ATS 48D3Y NSp MA () 5 LC D8 4. ATS 48D3Y ATS 48D38Y NSp MA () 5 LC D ATS 48D38Y ATS 48D47Y NSp MA () 5 LC D ATS 48D47Y ATS 48D6Y NSp MA () 5 LC D ATS 48D6Y ATS 48D75Y NSp MA () LC D ATS 48D75Y ATS 48D88Y NSp MA () LC D ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY NSp MA () LC D ATS 48CY ATS 48C4Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F65 3 ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C7Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C7Y ATS 48CY NS 4p MA () 3 LC F65 3 ATS 48CY ATS 48C5Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C5Y ATS 48C3Y NS4p MA () 3 LC F ATS 48C3Y ATS 48C4Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C4Y ATS 48C48Y NS63p MA () 5 LC F ATS 48C48Y ATS 48C59Y NS63bL Micrologic LC BL ATS 48C59Y ATS 48C66Y NS63bL Micrologic LC BL ATS 48C66Y ATS 48C79Y NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC BP ATS 48C79Y ATS 48MY NS8L Micrologic 5. 8 LC BP ATS 48MY ATS 48MY NSL Micrologic 5. LC BR33 95 ATS 48MY NS5p () Micrologic 5. () 5 LC BR33 () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity (see the breaking capacity table on the previous page). () Type coordination is only possible if the fast-acting fuses remain in the motor supply circuit and are not bypassed at the end of starting. Fast-acting fuse (essential for type coordination), starter combinations Starter Fast-acting fuses with micro-contact reference Unit reference (3) Size Calibre I t A ka.s A Q3 ATS 48D7Y DF3 ER5 4 x ATS 48DYand ATS 48D3Y DF3 FR8 x ATS 48D38Y and ATS 48D47Y DF3 FR x 58 DF3 ER5 DF ATS 48D88Y and ATS 48CY DF ATS 48C4Y and ATS 48C7Y DF ATS 48CY to ATS 48C3Y DF ATS 48C4Y DF ATS 48C48Y and ATS 48C59Y DF ATS 48D7Y DF4 334 x 33 4 ATS 48C79Y DF ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY DF Maximum prospective short-circuit current of the starter according to standard IEC Starter Iq (ka) ATS 48D7Y 5 ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY 5 ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY ATS 48D6Y and ATS 48D75Y 5 ATS 48D88Y ATS 48CY to ATS 48C3Y 5 ATS 48C4Y 5 ATS 48C48Y to ATS 48C79Y 5 ATS 48MY and ATS 48MY 85 (3) DF3 ER, DF3 FR: sold in lots of DF4: sold in lots of. Presentation: pages /3 and /3 Characteristics: pages /3 to /35 References: pages /4 to /43 Dimensions: pages /48 to /5 Schemes: pages/5to/57 /67

75 Functions Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Current setting with PowerSuite on PPC Summary of functions See pages Starter factory setting /68 Adjustment functions See pages Nominal motor current (maximum permanent current) /69 Limiting current /69 Acceleration ramp time /69 Initial starting torque /69 Selection of the type of stop /69 Protection functions See pages Calculated motor thermal protection /7 Reset motor thermal state /7 Motor thermal protection with PTC probes /7 Starter thermal protection /7 Motor underload protection /7 Excessiveaccelerationtimeprotection /7 Current overload protection /7 Protection against line phase inversion /7 Time before restarting /7 Motor phase loss detection /7 Automatic restart /7 Advanced adjustment functions See pages Torque limit /7 Voltage boost level /7 Connecting the starter to the motor delta terminals /7 Test on low power motor /7 Activation of the cascade function /7 Line frequency /7 Reset kwh or the operating time /7 Return to factory settings /7 nd motor adjustment functions /73 Communication functions /73 PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions /73 Application monitoring functions /73 Logic input application functions See pages -wire/3-wire control /74 Freewheel stop /74 External fault /74 Motor preheating /74 Force to local control mode /74 Inhibit all protection /74 Reset motor thermal fault /74 Activation of the cascade function /74 Reset all faults /74 Logic output application functions /75 Relay and analogue output application functions /75 Function compatibility table /75 Starter factory setting The starter is supplied ready for use in most applications. The main functions enabled and the default function values are as follows: - nominal motor current (depends on the starter rating), - limiting current: 4%, - acceleration ramp time: 5 s, - initial starting torque: %, - selection of the type of stop: freewheel stop, - motor thermal protection: class, - time before restarting: s, - motor phase loss threshold: %, - line frequency: automatic, - RUN and STOP logic inputs: -wire or 3-wire control via wiring, - logic input LI3: forced freewheel stop, - logic input LI4: local mode control (serial link disabled), - logic output LO: thermal motor alarm, - logic output LO: motor powered, - relay output R: fault relay, - relay output R3: motor powered, - analogue output: motor current. /68

76 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Adjustment functions b Nominal motor current (maximum permanent current) The nominal current of the starter can be adapted to the nominal motor current indicated on the rating plate. Adjustment range:.4 to.3 times the starter nominal current. b Limiting current The maximum starting current can be adjusted. Adjustment range: 5% to 7% of the nominal motor current set and limited to 5% of the maximum permanent current defined for the starter rating. % Cn 8 6 b Acceleration ramp time Duringthestartingphase,theAltistart48appliesatorqueramptothemotor.The time (ACC) set corresponds to the time taken by the ramp to reach the nominal torque(startingat).adjustmentrange:to6s. b Initial starting torque The initial torque tq applied to the motor can be used to instantly overcome any resistive starting torque. Adjustment range: to % of the nominal motor torque. 4 tq = 4 ACC t Acceleration ramp during time ACC with initial starting torque tq = 4% of the nominal motor torque % Cn 8 6 EdC 4 End Fin of de controlled décélération deceleration controlée b Selection of the type of stop Three types of stops are available for selection: v Freewheel motor stop v Motor stop by deceleration via torque control (pump application) This type of stop enables a centrifugal pump to be decelerated gradually on a ramp in order to avoid a sudden stop. It can be used to dampen the hydraulic transient in order to significantly reduce pressure surges. Thedecelerationramptime(dEC)canbeadjusted. During deceleration, the pump flow rate decreases and becomes negligible at a certain speed. To continue to decelerate would serve no purpose. A torque threshold (EdC) can be set at which the motor will change to freewheel stop mode, avoiding the unnecessary heating of the motor and the pump. dec t Decelerated stop by torque control during time dec with threshold Edc for changing to freewheel stop mode Edc = 4% of nominal motor torque % brc = v Dynamic braking motor stop (application: stopping high inertia machines) This type of stop will decelerate the motor if there is considerable inertia. The braking torque level (brc) can be adjusted. The dynamic braking time (T) corresponds to the time taken to decelerate from % to % of the nominal motor speed. To improve braking at the end of deceleration, the starter injects a d.c. current foranadjustableperiodoftime(t). brc = % T T t Dynamic braking stops for different braking torque levels brc /69

77 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units t(s) Class A Protection functions The Altistart 48 offers functions for protecting the motor and the machine. b Calculated motor thermal protection The starter continuously calculates the temperature rise of the motor based on the nominal current which has been set and the actual current absorbed. In order to adapt the Altistart to individual motors and applications, several protection classes are offered in accordance with standard IEC : class 3, class 5, class (severe application), class 5, class (standard application), class A, sub-class. Different protection classes are defined for the starting capacities of the motor: - cold start without thermal fault (corresponding to a stabilised motor thermal state, motor switched off), - warm start without thermal fault (corresponding to a stabilised motor thermal state, at nominal power). The motor thermal protection function can be disabled. After the motor has stopped or the starter has been switched off, the thermal state is calculated even if the control circuit is not energised. The Altistart thermal control prevents the motor from restarting if the temperature rise is too high. If special motors are used which do not have thermal protection via curves, provide external thermal protection via probes or thermal overload relays. The starter is factory-set to protection class. The tripping curves are based on the relationship between the starting current Is and the (adjustable) nominal motor current In.,5,, 3, 4, 5, Motor thermal protection curves (cold) 6, 7, Id/In 8, Trip time (cold) Trip time for a standard application (class ) Trip time for a severe application (class ) Is = 3 In Is = 4 In Is = 5 In Is = 3.5 In Is = 4 In Is = 5 In 46 s 3 s 5 s 63 s 48 s 9 s t(s) Trip time (warm) Trip time for a standard application (class ) Trip time for a severe application (class ) Is = 3 In Is = 4 In Is = 5 In Is = 3.5 In Is = 4 In Is = 5 In 3 s s 7.5 s 3 s 5 s 5 s b Reset motor thermal state Activating the function resets the motor thermal state calculated by the starter to zero. b Motor thermal protection with PTC probes The starter integrates the processing of PTC probes, thus avoiding the use of an external device. The "PTC probe thermal overshoot" fault or alarm can be indicated using a configurable logic output or displayed via the serial link. The function can be disabled. Note: the "PTC probe protection" and "calculated motor thermal protection" functions are independent and can be active simultaneously. Class b Starter ventilation The cooling fan on the starter is switched on as soon as the heatsink temperature reaches 5 C. It is switched off when the temperature returns to 4 C. b Starter thermal protection The starter is protected against thermal overloads by an analogue thermal probe. A,5,, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Id/In Motor thermal protection curves (warm) /7

78 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units C (Cn) % LUL + % LUL t < tul % Motor underload detection (ULL) tul ULL t Protection functions (continued) b Motor underload protection The starter detects a motor underload if the motor torque falls below a preset torque threshold (LUL) for a specific (adjustable) period of time (tul). The motor underload threshold can be set between % and % of the nominal motor torque. The permissible underload duration can be set between and 6 s. The detection function can trigger an alarm or a fault. The detection function can be disabled. The "motor underload detected" alarm can be indicated by a configurable logic output and/or displayed via the serial link in the state of the starter. The "motor underload detected" fault (ULF) locks the starter and can be displayed via the serial link. I 3 % b Excessive acceleration time protection This protection function can be used to detect a start which takes place in adverse conditions. Examples of such conditions include a locked rotor or a motor unable to reach its nominal rotation speed. If the start duration is greater than the value set (between and 999 s), the drive changes to fault mode. The function can be disabled. LOC LOC - % 5 % t < tol Motor overcurrent detection (OIL) tol OIL t b Current overload protection The starter detects a current overload if the motor current exceeds a preset overcurrent threshold (LOC) for a specific (adjustable) period of time (tol). The overcurrent threshold can be set between 5% and 3% of the nominal motor current. The permissible overcurrent duration can be set between. and 6 s. This function is only active in steady state. The detection function can trigger an alarm or a fault. It can also be disabled. The "current overload detected" alarm can be indicated by a configurable logic output and/or displayed via the serial link. The "current overload detected" fault (OLC) locks the starter and can be displayed via the serial link in the state of the starter. b Protection against line phase inversion This function can be used to detect the direction of rotation of the motor phases and, if it is enabled, to indicate a fault when the direction of rotation is reversed. b Time before restarting This function can be used to avoid several consecutive starts which may cause: - the thermal overheating of the application, which is not permitted, - a thermal fault which will require maintenance work to be carried out, - overcurrents (if the direction of rotation is reversed) or repeats (run/stop commands). Following a stop command, the motor can only restart once the preset time delay has elapsed. The motor is restarted once the time delay has elapsed if a run command is still valid or if a new run command is sent. Adjustment range: to 999 s. Configuring the starter overload and underload with PowerSuite on a PC b Motor phase loss detection The function is used to adjust the sensitivity of the protection function in order to detect a loss of current or a low current in one of the three motor phases for at least.5 s or in all three motor phases for at least. s. The value of the minimum current level can be set between 5% and % of the starter nominal current. b Automatic restart After locking on a fault, the function permits up to six restart attempts at intervals of 6 s if the fault has disappeared and the run commands are still present. After the sixth attempt, the starter will remain locked and the fault will have to be reset before a restart is permitted. If the function is active, the fault relay remains activated if line phase loss, motor phase loss or line frequency out of tolerance faults are detected. This function can only be used in -wire control. /7

79 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units C % Un 5 % Un Cd Torque ramp ms t Application of a voltage boost equal to % of the nominal motor voltage Advanced adjustment functions b Torque limit Designed primarily for high inertia and constant torque conveyor applications, the function restricts the torque ramp reference to the preset value. Forexample,thefunctioncanbeusedtolimitthetorquetoaconstantvalue throughout the starting period. Adjustment range: % to % of the nominal motor torque. b Voltage boost level The function can be used to avoid any "starting" torque (phenomenon caused by friction on stopping or by mechanical play). When a run command is sent, the starter applies a fixed voltage to the motor for a limited period of time before starting. The function can be disabled. The voltage setting value varies between 5% and % of the nominal motor voltage. b Connecting the starter to the motor delta terminal ATS48pppQ starters connected to motors with delta terminals can be wired in series in the motor windings. This type of connection reduces the current in the starter by a ratio of 3, which enables a lower rating starter to be used. The nominal current and limiting current settings as well as the current displayed during operation are on-line values and are indicated on the motor. For this application, the braking or decelerating stop functions are inactive. Only freewheel stopping is possible. The adjustment range of the nominal motor current and the limiting current are multiplied by 3 if the function is selected. This function is not compatible with the following functions: motor phase loss detection, motor preheating, cascade, decelerated stop and dynamic braking. Use the scheme recommended on page /54 for this type of configuration. b Test on low power motor This function can be used to test a starter on a motor whose power is very much lowerthatofthestarter.itcanbeused,forexample,tochecktheelectricalwiringof a device. The function is automatically cancelled when the starter is switched off. The next time the starter is switched on, the starter returns to its initial configuration. b Activation of the cascade function This function can be used to start and decelerate several cascaded motors with a single starter. In order to gain maximum benefit from torque control, it is advisable to use motors with powers between.5 and times the power of the motor. The wiring diagram for the cascaded motor function is shown on page 654/6. This function is not compatible with the following functions: motor preheating and connection to the motor delta terminal. b Line frequency The following frequencies can be selected for the function: - 5 Hz. The frequency fault monitoring tolerance is ± %, - 6 Hz. The frequency fault monitoring tolerance is ± %, - automatic detection of the line frequency by the starter. The frequency fault monitoring tolerance is ± 6%. v 5 Hz and 6 Hz are recommended if the power supply is provided by a generating set, given their high tolerance. b Reset kwh or the operating time Sets the value of the power in kw/h or the operating time value to. The calculation of the values is updated once the reset command has been sent. b Return to factory settings The function can be used to reset each setting to its initial value (starter factory setting, see page /68). /7

80 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units nd motor adjustment functions In order to access the nd motor adjustment functions, one logic input must be assigned to the second set of motor parameters function. The adjustment functions and ranges are identical for both sets of motor parameters. The settings are as follows (see page /69): - nominal motor current, - limiting current, - acceleration ramp time, - initial starting torque, - deceleration ramp time, - threshold for changing to freewheel stop mode at the end of deceleration, - maximum torque limit. Communication functions The Altistart 48 is supplied with an RS 485 multidrop serial link with Modbus protocol as standard. The serial link is configured in the Communication menu using: v the address of the starter, which can be set between and 3, v the communication speed, which can be set at: 48, 96 or 9 bps, v the format of the communication data. The following formats can be selected: - 8 data bits, odd parity, stop bit, - 8 data bits, even parity, stop bit, - 8 data bits, no parity, stop bit, - 8 data bits, no parity, stop bits. v the time-out, which can be set between and 6 s. PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions The PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions (see pages 3/ and 3/3) offer the following advantages: v connection to the Altistart 48 and access to the adjustment, monitoring and control functions, v display of messages in plain text in 5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian), v preparation and saving of settings to hard disk, v comparison and editing of settings using office automation tools, v downloading of starter settings to the PC and uploading from the PC to the starter. Displaying the commands and settings with PowerSuite on PC Monitoring the parameters with PowerSuite on PPC Application monitoring functions The monitoring functions provide the following information: b Cosineϕ, displayed between. and.. b Motor thermal state: % corresponds to the thermal state of the motor consuming the permanently set nominal current. b Motor current: displayed in amperes between and 999 A and in kilo amperes between and 9999 A. b The operating time corresponding to the total number of starter operating hours during heating, acceleration, steady state, deceleration, braking and continuous bypass operation. It is displayed in hours between and 999 hours and in kilo-hours between and hours. b The active power is displayed between and 55%, where % corresponds to the power at the set nominal current and at full voltage. b The motor torque is displayed between and 55%, where % corresponds to the nominal torque. b TheactivepowerconsumedisdisplayedinkW.Thelinevoltagevaluemustbe configured. The accuracy of this setting will depend on the error between the voltage configured and the actual voltage. b PowerinkWhdisplayedwithPowerSuite. b The following starter states are shown in the display of the current state: v starter without run command and power not supplied, v starter without run command and power supplied, v acceleration/deceleration in progress, v steady state operation, v braking in progress, v starter in current limiting mode, v starting time delay not elapsed. b Last fault. Displays the last fault which occurred. b Phase rotation direction. Displays the direction of rotation (direct or indirect). b Terminal locking code v An access code can be used to protect access to the adjustment and configuration parameters of the starter. Only the monitoring parameters will then be visible. /73

81 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Assigning the logic inputs with PowerSuite on PPC Logic input application functions The starter has 4 logic inputs: b logic inputs (RUN and STOP) are reserved for run/stop commands which can be sent in the form of stay-put contacts or as pulsed contacts. v -wire control: starting and stopping are controlled by a single logic input. State of the logic input controls starting and state controls stopping. v 3-wire control: starting and stopping are controlled by separate logic inputs. A stop is obtained on opening (state ) the STOP input. ThepulseontheRUNinputisstoreduntilthestopinputopens. b logic inputs (LI3 and LI4) can be configured with the following functions: v Freewheel stop: when combined with a braked stop or decelerated stop command, activating the logic input will stop the motor in freewheel mode. v External fault: enables the starter to detect an external user fault (level, pressure, etc). When the contact is open, the starter changes to fault mode. v Motor preheating: used to prevent the motor from freezing or to prevent temperature variations which may cause condensation. When the logic input is activated, an adjustable current flows through the motor after a time delay which can be set between and 999 s. This current heats the motor without causing it to rotate. This function is not compatible with the following functions: connection to the motor delta terminal and cascading. v Force to local control mode: if a serial link is used, this function can be used to change from line mode (control via serial link) to local mode (control via the terminal). v Inhibit all protection: enables the forced operation of the starter in an emergency by overriding the main faults (smoke extraction system for example). Warning: this type of use invalidates the starter warranty. v Reset motor thermal fault: enables the fault to be reset remotely. v Activation of the cascade function: in this case, the motor thermal protection is disabled and relay R is configured as the fault isolation relay. Can be used to start and decelerate several motors one after the other with a single starter (see application diagram on pages /56 and /57). v Reset all faults: enables all faults to be reset remotely. v Secondsetofmotorparameters: enables a second set of parameters to be selected to start and decelerate two different motors with a single starter. /74

82 Functions (continued) Soft starters Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop units Logic output application functions The starter has logic outputs (LO and LO) which, depending on their configuration, can be used for remote indication of the following states or events: b Motor thermal alarm: indicates that the motor thermal state has exceeded the alarm threshold and can be used for example to avoid starting a motor if the thermal reserve is insufficient. b Motor powered: indicates that there may be current in the motor. b Motor overcurrent alarm: the motor current is higher than the threshold set. b Motor underload alarm: the motor torque is lower than the threshold set. b Motor PTC probe alarm: indicates that the thermal state monitored by the PTC motor probe has been exceeded. b Second set of motor parameters activated Assigning the analogue output with PowerSuite on PC Relay and analogue output application functions The starter has 3 relays, of which are configurable. b End of starting relay R: cannot be configured. The end of starting relay controls the bypass contactor on the starter. It is activated when the motor has completed the starting phase. It is deactivated when a stop command is sent and in the event of a fault. The starter regains control when a braking or deceleration command is sent. b Relay R application functions Relay R can be configured as follows: v fault relay: relay R is activated when the starter is powered and there are no faults. It is deactivated when a fault occurs and the motor switches to freewheel mode, v isolating relay: the contact of relay R closes when a run command is sent and reopens when a stop command is sent, at the end of deceleration on a decelerated stop or in the event of a fault. The line contactor is deactivated and the motor is isolated from the line supply (see application diagram page /53). b Relay R3 application functions Relay R3 is configured to indicate the same states or events as logic outputs LO or LO(seeabove). b Analogue current output AO application functions v the analogue output AO provides an image of the following values: motor current, motor torque, motor thermal state, cosine ϕ, activepower. v the following settings are associated with the analogue output: - the type of signal supplied: - ma or 4- ma, - the scale setting of the signal. The function associates the maximum amplitude of the analogue output ( ma) with a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter, which can be set between 5% and 5%. Function compatibility table Functions Decelerating stop Dynamic braking stop Forced freewheel stop Thermal protection Motor phase loss detection Decelerating stop Dynamic braking stop Forced freewheel stop Thermal protection Motor phase loss detection Connection to the () motor delta terminal Tests on low power motor Cascaded motors Motor preheating () () Connection to the motor delta terminal Tests on low power motor Cascaded motors Motor preheating () () () Compatible functions Incompatible functions Not applicable () Motor phase loss not detected. () Thermal protection is not provided during motor preheating. /75

83 Curves Soft starters Conventional starting of three-phase asynchronous motors Direct starting I/In 6 C/Cn 3 b Starting current: 4 to 8 times the nominal current. 5,5 b Starting torque:.5 to.5 times the nominal torque. 4 3,5 Cr b Characteristics: v motor with 3 terminals, low and medium power, v on-load starting, v high current peak and voltage drop, v simple device, v sudden starting for the mechanism.,5,5,75 N/Ns Starting current "Star-delta" starting I/In N/Ns,5,5,75,5,5,5,75 N/Ns Starting torque C/Cn 3,5,5 Cr,5,5,5,75 N/Ns b No parameter adjustment. b Starting current:.8 to.6 times the nominal current. b Starting torque:.5 times the nominal torque. b Characteristics: v motor with 6 terminals, v no-load or low resistive torque starting, v high current peaks and torque when changing to "star-delta" mode, v a device requiring maintenance, v subject to mechanical stress when starting. b No parameter adjustment. Starting current Rheostatic stator starting Starting torque I/In 6 C/Cn 3 b Starting current: 4.5 times the nominal current. 5,5 b Starting torque:.5 to.75 times the nominal torque. 4 3,5 Cr b Characteristics: v motor with 3 terminals, high power, v starting with increasing resistive torque, v high current peak, v a large, bulky device requiring maintenance, v subject to mechanical stress when starting.,5,5,75 N/Ns,5,5,5,75 N/Ns b No parameter adjustment. Starting current Auto transformer starting Starting torque I/In 6 C/Cn 3 b Starting current:.7 to 4 times the nominal current. 5,5 b Starting torque:.4 to.85 times the nominal torque. 4 3,5 Cr b Characteristics: v motor with 3 terminals, high power, v large voltage drop and current peak when connected at full voltage, v a complex, bulky device requiring maintenance, v subject to mechanical stress when starting.,5 b No parameter adjustment.,5,5,75 N/Ns Starting current,5,5,75 N/Ns Starting torque /76

84 Curves (continued) Soft starters Progressive starting of three-phase asynchronous motors Conventional electronic starting with variable voltage and current limiting M 3 b A controller with 6 thyristors connected head to tail in each line phase is used to power the three-phase asynchronous motor by gradually increasing the voltage on start-up. v Depending on the firing time and angle of the thyristors, it can be used to supply a voltage which will gradually increase at a fixed frequency. Schematic diagram α v The gradual increase in the output voltage can either be controlled by the acceleration ramp, or by the value of the limiting current, or linked to both parameters. α Firing angle Id b Figure shows the behaviour of the torque in relation to the starting current. b Limiting the starting current Is to a preset value Is will reduce the starting torque Ts to a value which is almost equal to the ratio of the square of currents Is and Is. Example On a motor with the following characteristics: Ts = Tn for Is = 6In, current limiting at Is= 3 In or.5 Is results in a starting torque: Ts = Ts x (.5) =Tnx.5=.5Tn. Id Cd Cr Cd N/Ns Figure C b Figure shows the torque/speed characteristic of a squirrel cage motor in relation to the supply voltage. The torque varies like the square of the voltage at a fixed frequency. The gradual increase in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up. U.85 U.6 U Cr N/Ns Figure Advantages of starting with the Altistart 48 b Conventional electronic starting b Torectifyproblemscausedby: - mechanical stress when starting, - hydraulic transients during acceleration and deceleration in pump applications. Conventional electronic starting requires the use of several current limits or the switching of several voltage ramps. The settings become complicated and must be modified every time the load changes. b Starting with the Altistart 48 b The Altistart 48 torque control enables starting without mechanical stress and the smooth control of hydraulic transients with a single acceleration ramp. b The settings are simple and effective, whatever the load. /77

85 Contents -Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Selectionguide:variablespeeddrives...page/ Selection guide: motor starters with variable speed drives page /4. Altivar b Combinations...page/ b Europe range, from.8 to.75 kw....page/ b Americarange,from.8to.kWor.5to3HP...page/3 b Asia range, from.8 to. kw...page/4 b Options...page/5 b Electromagnetic compatibility...page/9 b Functions...page/. Altivar 3 b Forasynchronousmotorsfrom.8to5kWor.5toHP page /38 b Customisable enclosed drives...page/39 b Drive kits...page/4 b Options v Braking resistors...page/43 v Line chokes....page/45 v Additional EMC input filters....page/47 v Output filters and motor chokes...page/49 v Communication options...page/5 b Electromagnetic compatibility...page/59 b Combinations for motor starters...page/6 b Functions...page/66.3 Altivar 38 b For asynchronous motors from.75 to 35 kw...page/88 b Options v Dialogue...page/89 v Accessories....page/9 v Line chokes....page/9 v Radio interference input filters...page/9 v Output filters and motor chokes...page/94 b Electromagnetic compatibility...page/3 b Combinations for motor starters...page/4 b Functions...page/6 b Ready-assembled for asynchronous motors from 3 to 75 kw...page/8 b Combinations...page/.4 Altivar 58 b For asynchronous motors from.37 to 75 kw or.5 to HP v With heatsink and integrated EMC filters...page/3 v With heatsink and no EMC filters...page/33 /

86 b For asynchronous motors from.37 to 5 kw or.5 to HP v On base plate with integrated EMC filters... b Options page/34 v Accessories... page/35 v Dialogue.... page/38 v I/O extension cards, customer-specific cards... page/4 v Communication options... page/43 v Braking module and resistors... page/46 v Line chokes... page/49 v Additional radio interference suppression input filters... page/5 v Output filters and motor line chokes... page/53 b Compatibility... page/54 b Electromagnetic compatibility... page/7 b Combinations for motor starters... page/7 b Ready-assembled for asynchronous motors from.37 to 75 kw or.5 to HP... page/8 v Options... page/83 v Combinations.... page/84 b Functions... page/9 b Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor for asynchronous motors from.75 to 55 kw or to 75 HP... page/4 v Options... page/5 v Combinations.... page/6 v Electromagnetic compatibility... page/ v Functions... page/4.5 Controller inside programmable card b For Altivar 38, 58 and 58F... page/35.6 Altivar 68 b For asynchronous motors from 75 to 63 kw or to 5 HP v Standard Altivar page/46 v Altivar 68F Flux Vector Control with sensor.... page/47 b Options v Reduction of harmonic currents.... page/48 v Line chokes... page/49 v Additional radio interference input filters... page/5 v Additional motor chokes... page/5 v Braking units and resistors... page/5 v I/O extension card... page/58 v Communication cards... page/59 v Programming terminal support, PC-based setup software, DC bus connection... page/6 v External load circuit, earth protection and IT connection, air ducting kit, fan.... page/6 b Combinations....pages/6,/7,/73and/75 b Combinations for motor starters... b Dialogue: programming terminal... page/78 page/8 b Functions... page/83 b Altivar 68 ready-assembled in enclosure.... page/89 /

87 Selection guide Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Applications Variable speed drive of asynchronous motors Field of application Industry Building Type of machine Simple machines Pumps and fans Power range for 5 6 Hz supply (kw) Single phase V (kw).8.75 Single phase 4 V (kw) phase 3 V (kw).8. 3-phase 4 V (kw) phase V (kw) phase 38 5 V (kw) phase 55 6 V (kw).75 5 Drive Output frequency.5 Hz.5 5 Hz. 5 Hz Type of control Sensorless flux vector control Transient overtorque 5 7% of the nominal motor torque 7 % of the nominal motor torque % of the nominal motor torque for 6 sec. Functions Number of functions Number of preset speeds Number of I/O Analog inputs 3 to3 Logic inputs 4 6 4to6 Analog outputs to Logic outputs to Relay outputs Communication Integrated Modbus and CANopen Modbus Available as an option Ethernet TCP/IP, DeviceNet, Fipio, Profibus DP Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBus, Profibus DP, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, CANopen, DeviceNet, METASYS N, Lonworks Cards (optional) Pump switching Controller Inside programmable cards I/O extension card Standards and certifications EN 578, EN 68-3 EN 55, EN 55 class B and class A gr. NOM 7, C-TICK, CSA, UL, N998, CE EN 578, EN 68-3 EN 55, EN 55: class A, class B with option C-TICK, UL, N998, CE EN 578, EN 68-3 EN 55 class A EN 55 class B UL, N998, CE References ATV ATV 3 ATV 38 Pages / to /4 /38 and /39 /88 /

88 Industry Modular complex machines, infrastructures Machines requiring torque and precision at very low speed as well as a raised dynamic High-power machine (4 5 V). 5 Hz 3 Hz Sensorless flux vector control % of nominal motor torque for seconds, 7% for 6 seconds 8% of nominal motor torque in high torque configuration >6 8 8 to3 to4 4to6 4to8 to to to5 Modbus Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBus, Profibus DP, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, CANopen, DeviceNet Fipio, Modbus, Modbus Plus, Profibus DP Multi-motor Multi-parameter Simple positioning Controller Inside programmable card I/O extension card I/O extension card EN 578, EN 55, EN 55 class A, class B with option IEC 6-4//4-3/4-4/4-5, EN 68-3, DNV, GOST UL, CE, CSA, N998, NOM 7 EN 578, EN 68-3 CSA, UL, CE ATV 58 ATV 58F ATV 68, ATV 68F /3 to /35 /4 /46 and /47 /3

89 Selection guide Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Motor starters with variable speed drives Applications Motor starters for asynchronous motors Type of machine Simple machines Pumps and fans Power range for 5 6 Hz supply (kw) Single phase 4 V (kw).8. 3-phase 3 V (kw) 3-phase 38 5 V (kw) Control and protection functions associated with the drive Enclosure can be customized by the user Drive kit to be fixed at the back of the floorstanding or wallmounted enclosure Load break switch with padlockable front external control Line chokes -directional on-off switch Speed reference potentiometer Type of control Sensorless flux vector control Energy saving Yes Communication Integrated serial link Modbus, CANopen Modbus RS 485 Industrial buses and networks Ethernet, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBus, Profibus DP, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, CANopen, DeviceNet, N, Lonworks Degree of protection IP 55 IP IP 55 Dialogue Via integrated or remote display terminal Via removable terminal which can be used remotely PowerSuite software workshop Compatible References ATV 3C ATV 3K ATV 38ED ENERGY Pages /39 /4 /8 /4

90 Complex machines High-power machines (4 5 V) Protection circuit-breaker with padlockable front external control Load break switch with padlockable front external control Line chokes Speed reference potentiometer Downstream contactor Switch and fast-acting fuses. See the many possible combinations on pages /9 and /93. Sensor/sensorless flux vector control RS 3 C Fipio, Modbus Plus, Profibus DP, Modbus IP /IP 3/IP 54 depending on the version Via remote display terminal Incompatible ATV 58EU COMPACT ATV 58ED ENERGY ATV 68E, ATV 68EX /8 /83 /4 /5

91 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar /6

92 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Applications The Altivar is a frequency inverter for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors rated between.8 kw and. kw. There are three types of power supply: b V to V single phase. b V to 4 V single phase. b V to 3 V 3-phase. The Altivar incorporates specific features for local markets (Europe range, America range, Asia range) and has functions suitable for the most common applications, including: b Horizontal materials handling (small conveyors, etc). b Ventilation, pumping, access control, automatic doors. b Special machines (mixers, washing machines, centrifuges, etc). Functions The main functions incorporated in the Altivar drive are: b Starting and speed control. b Reversal of operation direction. b Acceleration, deceleration, stopping. b Motor and drive protection. b -wire/3-wire control. b 4 preset speeds. b Saving the configuration in the drive. b d.c. injection on stopping. b Ramp switching. b Catching a spinning load. b Local controls (Asia range only). Several functions can be assigned to one logic input. Standard versions The Altivar offer consists of 3 ranges designed for 3 different markets: b Europe range: ATV puppme (items, ) v power supply: 4 V single phase, v positive logic operation, v integrated class B EMC filter. b America range: ATV puppppu (items,, 3, 4 ) v power supplies: V single phase, 4 V single phase or 3 V 3-phase, v positive logic operation, v meets current requirement in standard NEC V. b Asia range: ATV puppppa (items 5, 6 ) v power supplies: V single phase, 4 V single phase or 3 V 3-phase, v positive or negative logic operation, v local controls: Run and Stop keys, and potentiometer. Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages / to /5 Altivar drives are supplied either with heatsink (items, 3, 5 ) for normal environments and ventilated enclosures, or on a base plate (items, 4, 6 )for mounting on a machine frame, when the size of the frame enables dissipation of the heat. Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of EMC filters in ATV puppme drives simplifies installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. ATV puppppu and ATV puppppa drives are available without EMC filter. Filters are available as an option for customer assembly, if conformity to EMC standards is required. Options The drive only communicates, in point-to-point mode, with the following tools and software: b PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions: v PowerSuite software workshop for configuring the drive (item 7 ), v PowerSuite for Pocket PC (item 8 ), v converter for connecting a PC or a Pocket PC. The following options can be used with the Altivar drive: b Braking module connected to the drive s DC bus. b Braking resistors, for dissipating the energy returned to the drive when the motor is operating as a generator. b EMC radio interference input filters. b Plates for mounting on 5 rail. b Adaptor plate for replacing an Altivar 8 drive. b Plate for EMC mounting, earthing the cable shielding. Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /7

93 Characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Environment characteristics Conforming to standards Altivar drives have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC,EN),inparticular: EN 578, EMC immunity and EMC conducted and radiated emissions. EMC immunity b IEC/EN 6-4- level 3 b IEC/EN level 3 b IEC/EN level 4 b IEC/EN level 3 (power access) b IEC/EN 68-3, environments and EMC emissions for drives Conducted and radiated emissions Conducted emissions All ATV pu5me to ATV pu8me ATV pu9me to ATV pu4me ATV HU5ME to ATV HU4ME ATV HU5ppU to ATV HU4ppU and ATV HU5ppA to ATV HU4ppA b IEC/EN 68-3, environments: (industrial supply) and (public supply) restricted distribution b EN 55, EN 55 class B, to khz for motor cable lengths y 5m andclassa(group),to6khzforlengthsy m b EN 55, EN 55 class B, 4 to 6 khz for motor cable lengths y 5 m andclassa(group),4to6khzforlengthsy m b With additional EMC filter: EN 55, class B, to 6 khz for motor cable lengths y m and class A (group ), to 6 khz for lengths y 5 m b With additional EMC filter: EN 55, class B, to 6 khz for motor cable lengths y 5 m and class A (group ), to 6 khz for lengths y 5 m e marking The drives bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage (73/3/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives Product certifications UL, CSA, NOM 7 and C-TICK Degree of protection IP Vibration resistance Drive without 5 rail option Conforming to IEC/EN : -.5 mm peak from 3 to 3 Hz - gn from 3 to Hz Shock resistance 5 gn for ms conforming to IEC/EN Relative humidity % 5 93 without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC Ambient Storage C temperature around the unit Operation C : removing the protective cover from the top of the drive Up to + 6 with current derating of. % per C above 5 C Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position Drive characteristics Output frequency range Hz Switching frequency khz 6 () Speed range Transient overtorque 5 7 % of the nominal motor torque Braking torque - % of the nominal motor torque without braking resistor at no-load with the deceleration ramp adaptation function enabled - 8 % of the nominal motor torque with braking resistor (available as an option) at no-load - Up to 5 % of the nominal motor torque with braking resistor (available as an option) at high inertia Maximum transient current - 5 % of the nominal drive current for 6 seconds for range E and A drives % for range U drives Voltage/frequency ratio Sensorless flux vector control with PWM type () motor control signal Factory-set for most constant torque applications Frequency loop gain Factory-set with the speed loop stability and gain Possible correction for machines with high resistive torque or high inertia, or for machines with fast cycles Slip compensation Factory-set, according to the rating of the drive (adjustment possible) () If operation above 4 khz needs to be continuous, the nominal drive current should be derated by % for 8 khz, % for khz and 3 % for 6 khz. () Pulse width modulation. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages / to /5 Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /8

94 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Electrical characteristics Power supply Voltage V - 5 % to 4 + % single phase for ATV puppmp - 5 % to % 3-phase for ATV puppm3p - 5 % to + % single phase for ATV puppfp Frequency Hz 5±5%or6±5% Isc A (prospective short-circuit current at the connection point) for single phase power supply 5 (prospective short-circuit current at the connection point) for 3-phase power supply Output voltage Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to: - the line supply voltage for ATV puppmpp - double the line supply voltage for ATV puppfp Maximum connection capacity Drives ATV pu5ppp,.5 mm (AWG 4) of the power supply, the motor U9ppp, UMpp, U8Mpp and the braking module Drives ATV p, U8Fp, U9ppp, U4ppp 4mm (AWG ) Max. length of motor cables m 5, shielded cable, non-shielded cable Electrical isolation Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, power supplies) Available internal supplies Short-circuit and overload protection: - one + 5 V (/+ 5 %) supply for the reference potentiometer (. to kω), maximum current ma - one + 5 V (± 5 %) supply for the control inputs, maximum current ma Analog input AI configurable analog input Max. sampling time: ms, resolution.4 %, linearity ± 5 %: - voltage -5 V (internal power supply only) or - V, impedance 4 kω - current - ma or 4- ma (without addition of a resistor), impedance 5 Ω Logic inputs LI 4 assignable logic inputs, impedance 5 kω + 5 V internal or 4 V external power supply (min. V, max. 3 V). Factory-set with -wire control in transition mode for machine safety, for Europe and America ranges: -LI:forward - LI: reverse - LI3/LI4: 4 preset speeds - local controls for the Asia range Multiple assignment makes it possible to mix several functions on one input (example: LI assigned to forward and preset speed, LI3 assigned to reverse and preset speed 3) DO output Positive logic E/U/A ranges Negative logic A range Insulation resistance to earth MΩ > 5 (electrical isolation) Frequency resolution Display units:. Hz Analog inputs: -bit A/D converter Time constant for reference change ms 5 () Pulse width modulation State if < 5 V, state if > V Max. sampling time: ms Available by programming on the Asia range only State if > V or logic input not wired, state if < 5 V Max. sampling time: ms Factory setting: -khzpwm() open collector output. Can be used for electromagnetic galvanometer - max. current ma - output impedance kω, linearity ± %, max. sampling time ms Assignable as logic output: - open collector logic output, output impedance Ω, 5mA max - internal voltage (see above, available internal supplies) - external voltage 3 V max: 5 ma Relay outputs (RA-RC) protected relay logic output (contact open on fault) Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 4 V Maximum switching capacity: b On resistive load (cos ϕ =andl/r=ms):5afora 5 V or c 3 V b On inductive load (cos ϕ =.4 and L/R = 7 ms): A for a 5 V or c 3 V Maximum I/O connection capacity.5 mm (AWG 4) Acceleration and deceleration ramps Ramp profiles: linear from. to 99.9 s Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp time if braking capacities exceeded, possible inhibition of this adaptation (use of braking module) Braking to a standstill By d.c. injection: automatically as soon as the estimated output frequency drops to <. Hz, period adjustable from. to 3 s or continuous, current adjustable from to. In Main protection and safety features of the drive b Thermal protection against overheating b Protection against short-circuits between output phases b Protection against overcurrent between output phases and earth, at power-up only b Line supply undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits b Line supply phase loss safety function, for 3-phase supply Motor protection (see page /4) Thermal protection integrated in the drive by continuous calculation of the l t. Thermal memory reset on power down. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages / to /5 Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /9

95 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for both force-cooled and self-cooled motors. The only difference is in the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed. T/Tn,9,7,6,5,3,8,5 4 3,5, , Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque 3 Transient overtorque in factory settings (UFR = 5), with motor characteristics 4 Transient overtorque at UFR = and motor characteristics N (Hz) 75 5 Hz supply 9 6 Hz supply Special uses Use with a motor with a different rating to that of the drive The device can supply any motor which has a power rating lower than that for which it is designed. For motor ratings slightly higher than that of the drive, check that the current taken does not exceed the continuous output current of the drive. Connecting motors in parallel The rating of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the motors to be connected to the drive. In this case, provide external thermal protection for each motor using probes or thermal overload relays. If the number of motors in parallel is greater than or equal to 3, it is advisable to install a3-phasechokebetweenthedriveandthemotors. Nota : please consult your Regional Sales Office for choke product references. Switching the motor at the drive output Switching is possible with the drive locked. The "catch-on-the-fly" (automatic catching a spinning load) function must be configured for this type of use. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages / to /5 Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /

96 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Combinations for customer assembly Function: to protect persons and equipment from any level of overcurrent which may be encountered (overload or short-circuit). Type coordination. Standard power Speed drive ratings of Reference () 3-phase 4-pole 5/6 Hz motors Circuit-breaker Telemecanique () Merlin Gerin Adjustment range Rating Contactor Maximum Reference shortcircuit current Icu kw A ka M A Q KM Single phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz.8 ATV HU5Fp GV ME > 5 LC K9 DT4 6 LC K9.37 ATV pu9fp GV ME > 5 LC K9 DT4 6 6 LC K9.75 ATV HU8Fp GV ME > 5 LC D5 DT4 6 LC D5 Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz.8 ATV HU5Mp GV ME > 5 LC K9 DT4 6 6 LC K9.37 ATV pu9mp GV ME > 5 LC K9 DT4 6 LC K9.55 ATV pume GV ME > 5 LC K9 DT4 6 LC K9.75 ATV pu8mp GV ME > 5 LC K DT4 6 6 LC K.5 ATV HU9ME GV ME > 5 LC D8 DT4 6 LC D8.5 ATV HU9MU GV ME > 5 LC D5 ATV HU9MA DT4 6 LC D5. ATV HU4Mp GV ME > LC D3 DT4 3 6 LC D3 3-phase supply voltage: 3 V 5/6 Hz.8 ATV HU5M3p GV ME > 5 LC K6 DT4 6 6 LC K6.37 ATV pu9m3p GV ME > 5 LC K6 DT4 6 6 LC K6.75 ATV pu8m3p GV ME > 5 LC K9 DT4 6 LC K9.5 ATV HU9M3p GV ME > 5 LC K DT4 6 6 LC K. ATV HU4M3p GV ME > 5 LC D8 DT4 6 LC D8 Combinations of circuit-breakers and add-on modules DT4 Vigi TG4 Rating (A) Rating (A) Type (3) Sensitivity 6 5 A "si" 3 ma 5 A "si" 3 ma 6 5 A "si" 3 ma 5 A "si" 3 ma 3 4 A "si" 3 ma Recommendations for special uses: b All RH/RH/RH99/RHU residual current protection devices with separate sensors are compatible as long as the type and sensitivity of the add-on modules given in the table above are observed. b It is advisable to connect one residual current differential safety device per drive. In this case a type B device must not be located downstream of a type A or AC device. () Replace the dots in the reference according to the type of drive required, see pages / to /4. () Replace "ME" with "P" for rotary knob control. Type coordination is provided by combining a GV circuit-breaker with an LC Dpp contactor. (3) For additional protection against direct contact, with a 3-phase power supply and access to the DC bus terminals (PA +/PC -), the add-on module must be type B with a sensitivity of 3 ma. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages / to /5 Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /

97 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar ATV ppppppe Europe range Drives with heatsink (frequency range from to Hz) Motor Power indicated on plate Line supply () Max. line current for prospective Isc ka Altivar Continuous Max. output transient current () current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4) Weight kw A A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz ATV HU5ME.9 ATV HU8ME ATV HU9ME ATV HUME ATV HU8ME ATV HU9ME (5) ATV HU4ME (5).8 ATV PU8ME Drives on base plate (frequency range from to Hz) Motor Power indicated on plate Line supply () Max. line current for prospective Isc ka Altivar Continuous Max. output transient current () current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4) Weight kw A A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz ATV PU9ME ATV PUME ATV PU8ME.9 ATV HU4ME () Line voltage 3 V. () The current value is given for a 4 khz switching frequency. If operation above 4 khz needs to be continuous, the nominal drive current should be derated by % for 8 khz, % for khz and 3 % for 6 khz. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) Drive supplied with an integrated EMC filter which cannot be disconnected. (5) With integrated fan. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /

98 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar ATV ppppppu America range ATV HU8MU ATV PU8MU ATV HU4MU ATV HU4M3U Drives with heatsink (frequency range from to Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar Power indicated on plate Max. line current () Continuous Max. output transient current () current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4) Weight kw/hp A A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz.8/ (6) ATV HU5FU.9.37/ (6) ATV HU9FU..75/ (6) ATV HU8FU (5).8 Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz.8/ ATV HU5MU.9.37/ ATV HU9MU..75/ ATV HU8MU. (5).5/ ATV HU9MU.8 (5)./ ATV HU4MU (5).8 3-phase supply voltage: 3 V 5/6 Hz.8/ ATV HU5M3U.9.37/ ATV HU9M3U..75/ ATV HU8M3U (5).5/ ATV HU9M3U (5)./ ATV HU4M3U (5) Drives on base plate (frequency range from to Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar Power indicated on plate Max. line current () Continuous Max. output transient current () current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4)..8.8 Weight kw/hp A A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz.37/ ATV PU9FU.9 Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz.37/ ATV PU9MU.9.75/ ATV PU8MU.9 3-phase supply voltage: 3 V 5/6 Hz.37/ ATV PU9M3U.9.75/ ATV PU8M3U.9 () The line current value is given for the measurement conditions indicated in the table below. Drive rating Prospective Isc Line voltage ATV pufu ka V ATV pumu ka 8 V ATV pum3u 5 ka 8 V () The current value is given for a 4 khz switching frequency. If operation above 4 khz needs to be continuous, the nominal drive current should be derated by % for 8 khz, % for khz and 3 % for 6 khz. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) Drive supplied without EMC filter. To order an EMC filter separately, see page /5. (5) With integrated fan. (6) Current given for the power supply for a 3 V 3-phase motor. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /3

99 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar ATV ppppppa Asia range ATV HU8MA ATV PU8MA ATV HU4MA ATV HU4M3A Drives with heatsink (frequency range from to Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar Power indicated on plate Max. line current () Continuous Max. output transient current () current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4) Weight kw A A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz (6). 4 ATV HU5FA (6) ATV HU9FA (6) 6 4 ATV HU8FA (5).8 Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz ATV HU5MA ATV HU9MA ATV HU8MA ATV HU9MA.8 (5) ATV HU4MA (5).8 3-phase supply voltage: 3 V 5/6 Hz ATV HU5M3A ATV HU9M3A ATV HU8M3A ATV HU9M3A (5) ATV HU4M3A (5) Drives on base plate (frequency range from to Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar Power indicated on plate Max. line current () Continuous Max. output transient current () current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4).8.8 Weight kw A A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz ATV PU9FA.9 Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz ATV PU9MA ATV PU8MA.9 3-phase supply voltage: 3 V 5/6 Hz ATV PU9M3A ATV PU8M3A.9 () The line current value is given for the measurement conditions indicated in the table below. Drive rating Prospective Isc Line voltage ATV pufa ka V ATV puma ka V ATV pum3a 5 ka V () The current value is given for a 4 khz switching frequency. If operation above 4 khz needs to be continuous, the nominal drive current should be derated by % for 8 khz, % for khz and 3 % for 6 khz. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) Drive supplied without EMC filter. To order an EMC filter separately, see page /5. (5) With integrated fan. (6) Current given for the power supply for a 3 V 3-phase motor. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /4

100 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Options Description For drives Reference Weight kg PowerSuite software workshop All ratings See page 3/3 VW3 A587p Converter, supplied without All ratings VW3 A3.7 cable or CD-ROM, for communicating with the PowerSuite software workshop (see page 3/3) EMC input filters ATV HU5ME, HU9ME VW3 A4.65 ATV HUME, HU8ME ATV HU5FU/A, HU9FU/A ATV HU5MU/A, U9MU/A ATV HU8MU/A ATV HU9ME, HU4ME VW3 A4.85 ATV HU8FU/A, HU9MU/A ATV HU4MU/A ATV HU5M3U/A, HU9M3U/A VW3 A43.65 ATV HU8M3U/A ATV HU9M3U/A, HU4M3U/A VW3 A44.85 Braking module connected to the DC bus All ratings VW3 A7.5 Description Braking resistors Not protected (IP ) (3) Ohmic value Power W Ω 3 ATV HU5ppp () ATV pu9ppp () ATV pume () ATV pu8ppp () ATV HU9ppp () For drives Reference Weight kg VW3 A Ω 3 ATV HU4ppp () VW3 A Braking resistors Protected (IP 3) (3) Ω 3 ATV HU5ppp () ATV pu9ppp () ATV pume () ATV pu8ppp () ATV HU9ppp () VW3 A5873. Accessories 68 Ω 3 ATV HU4ppp () VW3 A Description For drives Reference Weight kg Plates for mounting on 5 rail (width 35 mm) ATV HU5ppp ATV HU9ppp ATV HUME ATV HU8Mpp VW3 A85. ATV HU8Fp ATV HU9ppp ATV HU4ppp VW3 A85.3 VW3 A5873p Adaptor plate for replacing Altivar 8 ATV HU5Mp ATV pu9mp ATV pume ATV pu8mp VW3 A8. Earthing plate for EMC mounting All ratings VW3 A Fan kit (4) ATV HU8Fp ATV HU8MpU ATV HU9ppp ATV HU4ppp VW3 A8.7 () Minimum value of the resistor to be connected: 75 ohms. () Minimum value of the resistor to be connected: 5 ohms. (3) If a resistor other than those specified is being used, add a thermal protection device. (4) Low-noise" fan. VW3 A85 Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / Dimensions: pages /6 and /7 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /5

101 = Dimensions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar ATV HU5ppE/U/A, ATV PUppppE/U/A ATV HU9ME c b x = H = = G = a ATV a b c G H Ø HU5ppE/U, 7 4 6± 3± 4 PUppppE/U HU5ppA, PUppppA ± 3± 4 ATV HU9ppU/A c b x = H = = G = a ATV a b c G H Ø HU9ppU ± 3± 4 HU9ppA ± 3± 4 ATV HU8MpU/A 5 4 = 6 = 7 ATV HUME, ATV HU8ME 38 4 = 6 = 7 ATV HU8FU/A, ATV HU9MpE/U/A, ATV HU4MpE/U/A 6,5 5,5 6,5 5,5 c b x = H = = G = a c ATV a b c G H Ø ATV a b c G H Ø HU8MpU ± 3± 4 HU8FU, HU9MpE/U, HU4MpE/U ±,5 3± 4 HU8MpA ± 3± 4 HU8FA, HU9MpA, HU4MpA ±,5 3± 4 EMC input filters VW3 A4 to A44 b 4x Protected braking resistors VW3 A5873 and A58733 = G = a = H = Non protected braking resistors VW3 A587 and A5874 (-wire output, length.5 m) 8,5 b H = 4 = 6 c = G = a Braking module VW3 A7 (for mounting on AM-ED rail) VW3 a b c G H A A A A = = 85 = Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages / to /5 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /6

102 Dimensions (continued), mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar ATV 8 adaptor plate VW3 A8 Plates for mounting on 5 rail VW3 A85 and A ,6 43,6 3,9 77,5 37,9 77,5 39,9,8 EMC earthing plate VW3 A83 Ventilation kit VW3 A8 6 () () 59,9 5 67,6 () screws supplied for fixing the earthing plate. () 5 x Ø M4 mm screws for fixing EMC clamps. Mounting recommendations 3,3 59 b Install the unit vertically, at ±. b Do not place it close to heating elements. b Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate, by natural convection or by ventilation, from the bottom to the top of the unit. b Free space in front of unit: mm minimum. - Cto4 C d 5 mm: no special precautions. d = (mounted side by side): remove the protective cover from the top of the drive. 4 C to 5 C d 5 mm: remove the protective cover from the top of the drive. 5 C to 6 C d 5 mm: remove the protective cover from the top of the drive, and derate the nominal current of the drive by. % per C above 5 C. Recommendations for mounting on a machine frame (specific to ATV PUppppp drives) () () ATV PUppppp drives can be mounted on (or in) a steel or aluminium machine frame, observing the following conditions: b maximum ambient temperature: 4 C, b vertical mounting ±, b the drive must be fixed at the centre of a support (frame) which is a minimum of mmthickandwithaminimumcoolingareaof.m for steel and.9 m for aluminium, exposed to the open air, b support area for the drive (4 x 7 min) machined on the frame with a surface smoothness of µm max and an unevenness of 3. µm max, b mill the tapped holes lightly in order to remove any burrs, b coat the whole drive support area with thermal contact grease (or equivalent), When the operating conditions are close to the maximum limits (power, cycle and temperature), this type of use must be checked beforehand, by monitoring the thermal state of the drive. () x Ø M4 tapped holes. () Minimum machined area Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages / to /5 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /7

103 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Schemes with contactor 3-phase power supply ATV ppppm3p Single phase power supply ATV ppppfp and ATV ppppmp 4 V 5/6 Hz... V 5/6 Hz and...4 V 5/6 Hz Q KM (4) Q KM (4) A R/L S/L T/L3 4 6 () () (3) RA RC LI LI LI3 LI4 + 5 V DO A R/L 4 (6) RA () RC LI LI LI3 LI4 + 5 V () (3) U/T V/T W/T3 PA/+ DO PC/ U + 5 V AI V V U/T V/T W/T3 PA/+ PC/ + 5 V AI V M 3 W A Braking resistor + PA PB (5) Potentiometer speed reference -ma or 4-mA - V (external power supply) U V M 3 W A Braking resistor + PA PB (5) Potentiometer speed reference -ma or 4-mA - V (external power supply) -wire control 3-wire control Analog voltage input Analog current input External V use - ma or 4- ma ATV control terminals ATV control terminals ATV control terminals ATV control terminals + 5 V LI LIx + 5 V LI LI LIx AI V AI V LI: Forward LIx: Reverse LI: Stop LI: Forward LIx: Reverse Speed reference potentiometer.tokω Source -ma or 4-mA For combinations of KM, Q, etc, components (see the table on page /). () Fault relay contact: for remote signalling of drive status. () Internal +5 V. If an external +4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the V terminal, do not use the + 5 terminal on the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. (3) DO output: can be configured as an analog or a logic output. Internal voltage + 5 V or external + 4 V. (4) Galvanometer or low level relay. (5) Braking module VW3 A7, if braking resistor VW3 A587pp is used. (6) N for ATV ppppf, S/L for ATV ppppmp. Nota : fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages / to /5 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /8

104 Connection Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Electromagnetic compatibility Connections to meet the requirements of EMC standards Principle b Earths between the drive, the motor and the cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality. b Use shielded cables with shielding connected to earth at 36 at both ends for the motor cables, and if necessary the braking module and resistor and control-signalling cables. Conduit or metal ducting can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. b Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable. Installation diagram for ATV puppppe/u/a 4 3 Earthing plate VW3 A83 to be fitted on the drive. Altivar. 3 Non-shielded power supply cable. 4 Non-shielded cable for fault relay contacts output. 5 Fix and earth the shielding of cables 6 and 7 as close as possible to the drive: - strip the shielding, - use cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped, to attach them to the earthing plate, - the shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the earthing plate to ensure good contact, - types of clamp: non-oxidizing metal. 6 Shielded cable () for connecting the motor. 7 Shielded cable () for connecting the control/signalling system. For applications which require a large number of conductors, small cross-sections must be used (.5 mm ). 8 PE cable. 5 () The shielding of cables (6, 7 and 8) must be connected to earth at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and if intermediate terminals are used, they must be in EMC metal boxes Nota : if using an additional input filter, it must be mounted under the drive and connected directly to the line supply via a non-shielded cable. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable. Although there is an HF equipotential earth connection between the drive, the motor and the cable shielding, it is still necessary to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each of the devices. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages / to /5 Schemes: pages /8 and /9 /9

105 Functions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Summary of functions Operating speed range page / Acceleration and deceleration ramp times page / Second ramp page / Deceleration ramp adaptation page / Preset speeds page / Configuration of analog input AI page / Analog or logic output DO page / Forward/reverse operation page / -wire control page /3 3-wire control page /3 Automatic d.c. injection page /3 Switching frequency, noise reduction page /3 Fault relay, unlocking page /3 Fault reset page /4 Automatic restart page /4 Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection page /4 Controlled stop on loss of line supply page /4 Thermal protection of drive page /5 Motor thermal protection page /5 Monitoring page /5 Incompatible functions page /5 Functions specific to the Asia range page /5 Drive factory setting To facilitate the setting up of the drive, the functions have been programmed to the meet the requirements of the most common applications. Drive functions and I/O: b -wire control on transition: v logic input LI: forward, v logic input LI: reverse. b Preset speeds: v logic input LI3: preset speeds, v logic input LI4: preset speeds. b Analog input AI: -5 V speed reference. b Logic/analog output DO: motor frequency (analog). b Deceleration ramp adaptation. b Automatic d.c. current injection for.5 s to standstill. Functions of the display and the keys Altivar 3 ESC ENT 4 5 RUN STOP 6 7 Information is displayed in the form of codes or values in three "7-segment" displays Buttons for scrolling through the menus or modifying values 3 ESC : button for exiting the menus (no confirmation). 4 ENT : validation button for entering a menu or confirming the new value selected. b Only on the Asia range: 5 RUN : local control of motor operation. 6 STOP : local control of motor stopping. 7 Speed reference potentiometer. /

106 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b Operating speed range Used to determine the frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by the machine under actual operating conditions. f(hz) HSP LSP V V ma 4mA LSP: low speed, from to HSP, factory setting HSP: high speed, from LSP to Hz, factory setting 5/6 Hz Reference 5V V (external power supply) ma ma b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics. f (Hz) f (Hz) 5/6 5/6 t Linear acceleration ramp Adjustment of t:. to 99.9 s, factory setting 3 s. t t t Linear deceleration ramp Adjustment of t:. to 99.9 s, factory setting 3 s. b Second ramp Used to switch acceleration or deceleration ramp times, which can be adjusted separately. Enabled by means of reassignable logic input. It is suitable for machines with fast continuous speed correction and high speed lathes with acceleration and deceleration limiting above certain speeds. f(hz) HSP Acc Dec Acceleration (Acc ) and deceleration (Dec ): - adjustment. to 99.9 s - factory setting 3 s Acc Dec t Acceleration (Acc ) and deceleration (Dec ): - adjustment. to 99.9 s - factory setting 5 s Adjustment of second ramp with PowerSuite Pocket PC Forward or reverse t HSP: high speed LI4 t Example of switching using logic input LI4 b Deceleration ramp adaptation Used to automatically increase the deceleration ramp time if the initial setting is too low when the load inertia is taken into account. This function prevents the drive locking if there is an overvoltage on deceleration fault. If this function is disabled, an appropriate braking module and resistor can be used. /

107 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b Preset speeds Used to switch preset speed references. Choice between or 4 preset speeds. Enabled via or logic inputs. The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of. Hz from Hz to Hz. They take priority over the reference given via the analog input or, for the Asia range, on the drive s potentiometer. f(hz) The speed obtained with inputs LIx and LIy at state is LSP or the speed reference, depending on the level of analog input AI. Adjusting the preset speeds with the PowerSuite software workshop for PC LSP LI t t Factory settings: st speed : LSP (low speed or reference) th speed: Hz 3 th speed: 5 Hz 4 th speed: 5 Hz LIx t LIy Example of operation with 4 preset speeds. b Configuration of analog input AI This is used to modify the characteristics, for either voltage or current, of analog input AI. Factory setting: -5 V (internal power supply only). Other possible values via external power supplies: - V, - ma, 4- ma. Analog voltage input Analog current input Use with external V - ma or 4- ma use Altivar control terminals Altivar control terminals AI V AI V Speed reference potentiometer.tokω Supply -ma or 4- ma b Analog or logic output DO Output DO can be programmed to be a logic output or an analog output. It enables remote signalling of the following information as required: v frequency threshold reached (logic output), v reference reached (logic output), v current threshold reached (logic output), v current in the motor (analog output), v motor frequency (analog output). Diagram with internal power supply Diagram with external power supply Altivar control terminals Altivar control terminals DO + 5 V V DO Z Z V Power supply + U If it is a logic output: Z is a relay or a low level input. If it is an analog output: Z can be, for example, a galvanometer. For a galvanometer with resistance R, the maximum voltage supplied will be: R( Ω) Ux R( Ω) + ( Ω) b Direction of operation: forward/reverse In -wire control, forward operation cannot be reassigned to any logic input other than LI. In 3-wire control, stopping cannot be reassigned to any logic input other than LI, and forward operation cannot be reassigned to any logic input other than LI. Reverse operation can be disabled for applications with a single direction of motor rotation, by not assigning any logic input to reverse operation. /

108 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b -wire control Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact. Run (forward or reverse) and stop are controlled by the same logic input. Enabled by means of or logic inputs (one or two directions). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. 3 operating modes are possible: v detection of the state of the logic inputs, v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs, v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority over reverse. Altivar control terminals 5 V LI LIx LI: forward LIx: reverse Wiring diagram for -wire control Assignment of logic inputs with PowerSuite Pocket PC b 3-wire control Used to control the operating direction and stopping by means of pulsed contacts. Run (forward or reverse) and stop are controlled by different logic inputs. Enabled by means of or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. f(hz) t Stop t Forward t Reverse t Example of operation with 3-wire control Altivar control terminals 5 V LI LI LIx LI: Stop LI: Forward LIx: Reverse Wiring diagram for 3-wire control b Automatic d.c. injection Enables d.c. injection to standstill, which is adjustable from to. times the value of the drive nominal current (preset at.7 In), as soon as operation is no longer controlled and the motor speed is zero: v either for a period of time, which is adjustable from. to 3 s (preset at.5 s) v or continuously. Factory setting: function active with d.c. injection for.5 s. In 3-wire control, d.c. injection is only active if logic input LI is active (stop). Adjustment of the "d.c. injection" function using the PowerSuite software workshop for PC b Switching frequency, noise reduction High frequency switching of the intermediate d.c. voltage can be used to supply the motor with a current wave with low harmonic distortion. There are 3 ranges of switching frequency: v random switching frequency around or 4 khz (avoids resonance), v fixed low frequency adjustable to or 4 khz, v fixed high frequency adjustable to 8, or 6 khz. Factory setting: low frequency set at 4 khz. This function is suitable for all applications which require low motor noise. b Fault relay, unlocking The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty. It opens in the event of a fault or when the drive is powered down. The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways: v powering down the drive until the display disappears completely, then powering back up, v activating the logic input associated with the fault reset function, if the function is enabled, v enabling the automatic restart function. /3

109 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b Fault reset Used to clear the stored fault and restart the drive if the cause of the fault has disappeared. The fault is cleared by a transition of the logic input LI which is assigned to this function. Factory setting: function inactive. The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal power-up. The following faults can be reset: drive thermal overload, motor thermal overload, line supply overvoltage, overvoltage on deceleration, overspeed, line phase loss (), line supply undervoltage (). b Automatic restart Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart. This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: s, 5 s, s, then minute for the following periods. If the drive has not restarted after 6 minutes, the drive locks and the procedure is abandoned until the drive is powered down and back up again. Factory setting: function inactive. Restart authorised with the following faults: drive thermal overload, motor thermal overload, line supply overvoltage, overvoltage on deceleration, line phase loss (), line supply undervoltage (). If the function is enabled, the drive s safety relay remains activated until one of these faults appears. This function requires the speed reference and the direction of operation to be maintained, and is only compatible with -wire level control. This function is suitable for machines or installations in continuous operation or without monitoring, and where a restart will not endanger equipment or personnel in any way. b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection ("catch-on-the-fly") Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events: v loss of line supply or power off, v fault reset or automatic restart, v freewheel stop triggered by a fault. On restarting, the effective speed of the motor is detected in order to restart on the ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. The speed detection time can be up to s depending on the initial deviation. Factory setting: function inactive. This function requires the activation of -wire level control and is not compatible with the continuous d.c. injection function. This function is suitable for machines for which the loss of motor speed is negligible during the line supply loss time (machines with high inertia). b Controlled stop on loss of line supply Used to define the drive stopping modes at a "loss of line supply" fault. Three stopping modes are available for selection: v freewheel stop: the drive locks and the motor stops in accordance with the inertia and the resistive torque, v normal stop: stop with valid deceleration ramp time (deceleration or ), v fast stop: the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive. Factory setting: freewheel stop. f(hz) Fast stop Normal stop on deceleration ramp 3 Freewheel stop Adjustment of the behaviour at a fault with PowerSuite Pocket PC 3 () The "line supply phase loss" fault is only accessible on drives with 3-phase power supply, if monitoring of the fault has been enabled (factory setting: enabled). () The drive will restart as soon as the undervoltage fault disappears, whether or not the function is active. t /4

110 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b Thermal protection of drive Direct protection by thermistor, integrated in the drive s power module. This protects the components, even in the event of poor ventilation or excessive ambient temperature. When the fault is detected, it locks the drive. Adjusting the thermal protection with the PowerSuite software workshop for PC b Motor thermal protection Motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its theoretical temperature rise. The drive is locked on a fault if this temperature rise exceeds 8% of the nominal temperature rise. This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled motors and thermal derating based on the rotor frequency. Nota : the thermal state of the motor is not stored when the drive is powered down. K coefficient to be applied to the preset Ith (actual Ith = K x preset Ith) / Rotor frequency (Frs),5 5 5 Hz Frs setting = 5 b Monitoring The display shows the state of the drive or, if selected, one of the following values: v frequency reference, v output frequency applied to the motor, v motor current, v line voltage, v motor thermal state, v drive thermal state. Incompatible functions The choice of the last function configured is enabled, whatever the configuration of the previous functions. Application functions can be assigned to the same logic input, in which case one logic input enables a number of functions (for example: direction of operation and nd ramp). A check must be carried out to ensure that the functions are compatible. b Direction of operation and -wire control: forward operation can only be assigned to LI. b Direction of operation and 3-wire control: forward operation can only be assigned to LI. b Automatic restart: requires the configuration of -wire level control. Changing the configuration of the type of control disables automatic restart. b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection: v requires the configuration of -wire level control. Changing the configuration of the type of control disables automatic catching a spinning load. v not compatible with continuous d.c. injection braking to a standstill. Configuring this function disables automatic catching a spinning load. Functions specific to the Asia range b Local control: The keypad on the Asia range has additional keys (RUN and STOP) and a potentiometer (speed reference). v The keys and the potentiometer are active if local control is enabled. The logic and analog inputs are inactive if local control is enabled. v Reverse: if local control is active, the reverse function is not visible. Factory setting: function active. b Logic inputs: It is possible to choose the active level of the logic input. Positive logic: the inputs are active if the signal is V. Negative logic: the inputs are active if the signal is 5V. Factory setting: positive logic. /5

111 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 ESC ENT 3 FWO REV RUN stop reset /6

112 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Applications The Altivar 3 drive is a frequency inverter for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors. The Altivar 3 is robust, compact, easy to use and conforms to EN 578, IEC/EN 68-, IEC/EN 68-3 standards, UL/CSA certification and to e marking. It incorporates functions that are suitable for the most common applications, including: b Materials handling (small conveyors, hoists, etc), b Packing and packaging machines, b Specialist machines (mixers, kneaders, textile machines, etc.), b Pumps, compressors, fans. Altivar 3 drives communicate on Modbus and CANopen industrial buses. These two protocols are integrated as standard into the drive. Altivar 3 drives are supplied with a heatsink for normal environments and ventilated enclosures. Multiple units can be mounted side by side 3 to save space. Drives are available for motor ratings between.8 kw and 5 kw, with four types of power supply: b V to 4 V single phase,.8 kw to. kw b V to 4 V 3-phase,.8 kw to 5 kw b 38 V to 5 V 3-phase,.37 kw to 5 kw b 55 V to 6 V 3-phase,.75 kw to 5 kw Altivar 3 drives are available with a choice of two different Human/Machine interfaces: b ATV 3Hpppp withdisplaysandmenunavigationkeys b ATV 3HppppA with displays, menu navigation keys and local control (Run/ Stop and speed reference set by a potentiometer). Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 3HppM and ATV 3HppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. ATV 3HppM3X and ATV 3HppS6X drives are available without EMC filter. Filters are available as an option for customer assembly, if conformity to EMC standards is required. Functions The Altivar 3 drive has six logic inputs, three analog inputs, one logic/analog output and two relay outputs. The main functions integrated in the drive are as follows: b Motor and drive protection b Linear, S, U and customised acceleration and deceleration ramps b +/- speed b 6 preset speeds b PI references and regulator b -wire/3-wire control b Brake sequence b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection and automatic restart b Fault configuration and stop type configuration b Saving the configuration in the drive Several functions can be assigned to one logic input. Options and accessories The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 3 drive: b Braking resistors b Line chokes b EMC radio interference input filters and output filters b Plates for mounting on 5 rail b UL Type conformity kit b Adaptor plate for replacing an Altivar 8 drive Various dialogue and communication options 4, 5, 6, 7 canbeusedwiththedrive, see pages /3 and /3. Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /7

113 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Enclosed drives ESC ENT FWO REV RUN stop reset /8

114 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Enclosed drives Applications The enclosed Altivar 3 drive is suitable for applications requiring: - IP 55 degree of protection in a hostile environment - a drive that is ready for use in a motor starter Onceithasbeencustomised,theenclosurecanbeinstallednexttothemotor. Enclosed drives are available in power ratings from.8 kw to 4 kw. There are two types of power supply: b V to 4 V single phase,.8 kw and. kw b 38 V to 5 V 3-phase,.37 kw and 4 kw Customisable enclosed drive This range allows full customisation of the Human/Machine interface of an enclosure. The IP 55 enclosure includes: b adrive with external heatsink b removable covers for installation of the following components: 6 Vario switch disconnector or GV circuit-breaker 7 3 buttons and/or LEDs with plastic flange Ø, and speed reference potentiometer 8 button for the RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable 9 cable glands for cable routing The combinations (drive, circuit-breaker, contactor) required for the motor starter function can be found on pages /6 and /63. Example references: - 3-pole Vario switch disconnector (Vpp +KCp pz) - Selector switch with 3 fixed positions XB5 D33 -LEDXB5AVpp -.kω potentiometer These references can be found in our specialist catalogues. All components must be ordered separately and wired by the customer. Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 3CppM and ATV 3CppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. Options and accessories The following options and accessories can be used with the enclosed Altivar 3 drive: b Braking resistors b Line chokes b RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable Various dialogue and communication options, 3, 4, 5 canbeusedwiththedrive, see pages /3 and /3. Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /9

115 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Drive kits ESC ENT FWO REV RUN stop reset /3

116 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Drive kits Applications ThedrivekitisanewadditiontotheAltivar3drivesrange. The drive kit comprises: b Altivar 3 drive elements (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) b EMC filter b Mechanical fittings b Seals required for use in difficult environments (IP 55) The kit is mounted on a metal fixing support with no flange or protective cover. TheAltivar3drivekitcanbebuiltintoafloor-standingorwall-mountedenclosure or a machine frame. Thedrivekitisavailableforpowerratingsfrom.8kWto5kW. There are two types of power supply: b V to 4 V single phase,.8 kw to. kw b 38 V to 5 V 3-phase,.37 kw to 5 kw Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 3KppM and ATV 3KppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. The drives have been sized to conform to the following standard: IEC/EN68-3, domestic and industrial environments. Description b Drive kit for power ratings y 4 kw The Altivar 3 drive components (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) are fixed by mechanical adaptors and protective fittings. The unit is supported by a metal plate 3 fixed to the heatsink. The plate is sealed on all sides 4. Once the support has been cut out, the drive kit is fixed to the base of the floorstanding or wall-mounted enclosure by means of this plate. The power terminals 5 are protected (IP ). b Drive kit for power ratings u 5.5 kw 6 The Altivar 3 drive components (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) are fixed by mechanical adaptors and protective fittings. The metal support plate 3 for the components is fitted with brackets 8 for mounting in a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure. The plate is sealed on all sides 4. Two fans are fitted behind the plate under the heatsink. Additional fixing holes 7 are provided for component mounting (GV circuit-breaker, Vario switch disconnector, additional plate, etc.). Drive kits are supplied with: b A drilling and cutting template to assist with installation b A user s manual with installation instructions and safety precautions. Options and accessories The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 3 drive kit: b Braking resistors b Line chokes Various dialogue and communication options 9,,, can be used with the drive, see pages /3 and /3. Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /3

117 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Dialogue options The Altivar 3 drive communicates with the following options: b Remote terminal b PowerSuite software workshop b Ethernet/Modbus bridge b Communication gateways The communication function provides access to the drive s configuration, adjustment, control and signalling functions. Remote terminal The Altivar 3 can be connected to a remote terminal. The remote terminal can be mounted on the door of an enclosure with IP 65 protection on the front panel. The terminal provides access to the same functions as the display and integral keys on the drive (see page /67). It can be used: b to control, adjust and configure the drive remotely b for visible remote signalling b to save and download configurations (4 configuration files can be saved) 563 Description Display v Four 7-segment displays visible at 5 m v Displays numeric values and codes v The display flashes when a value is stored. v The display flashes to indicate a fault on the drive. FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset Use of keys: v Navigation arrows and ENT, ESC for settings and configurations v FWD/REV key: reverses the direction of rotation of the motor v RUN key: motor run command v STOP/RESET key: motor stop command or drive fault reset Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /3

118 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Communication options 5639 PowerSuite software workshop PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions offer the following advantages: b Display messages in plain text and multiple languages b Prepare work in design office without connecting the Altivar to the PC b Save configurations and settings to floppy disk or hard disk and download them to the drive b Print out settings b Read and import Altivar 8 files into the Altivar 3. See pages 3/ and 3/3. Ethernet/Modbus bridge The Altivar 3 can be connected to an Ethernet network via an Ethernet/Modbus bridge. Ethernet communication is primarily intended for the following applications: b Coordination between PLCs b Local or centralised supervision b Communication with production management software b Communication with remote I/O b Communication with industrial control products See pages /5 and / Communication gateways The Altivar 3 can connect to other communication buses by means of the following gateways: b Fipio/Modbus, b DeviceNet/Modbus b Profibus DP/Modbus See pages /5 and /5. LUF P 5638 LA9 P37 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /33

119 Characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Environment characteristics Conforming to standards Altivar 3 drives have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC,EN),inparticular: low-voltage EN 578, EMC immunity and EMC conducted and radiated emissions. EMC immunity b IEC/EN 6-4- level 3 b IEC/EN level 3 b IEC/EN level 4 b IEC/EN level 3 (power access) b IEC/EN 68-3, environments and EMC conducted and radiated emissions for drives All b IEC/EN 68-3, environments: (industrial supply) and (public supply) restricted distribution e marking Product certifications Degree of protection ATV 3H8M...HU5M, ATV 3C8M...CU5M, ATV 3H37N4...HU4N4, ATV 3C37N4...CU4N4 ATV 3HUM, ATV 3CUM, ATV 3HU55N4...HD5N4. ATV 3H8M3X...HD5M3X, ATV 3H75S6X...HD5S6X ATV 3HpppM, ATV 3HpppN4, ATV 3HpppM3X, ATV 3HpppS6X b EN 55 class A group, EN 68-3 category C With additional EMC filter: b EN 55 class B group, EN 68-3 category C b EN 55 class A group, EN 68-3 category C3 With additional EMC filter (): b EN 55 class A group, EN 68-3 category C b EN 55 class B group, EN 68-3 category C With additional EMC filter (): b EN 55 class A group, EN 68-3 category C b EN 55 class B group, EN 68-3 category C The drives bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage (73/3/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives UL, CSA, NOM 7 and C-Tick b IP 3 and IP 4 on upper part and IP on connection terminals b IP without cover plate on upper part of cover ATV 3CpppM, ATV 3CpppN4 b IP 55 Degree of pollution Climatic treatment TC Vibration resistance Drive without 5 rail option Conforming to IEC/EN :.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 3 Hz, gn from 3 to 5 Hz Shock resistance 5 gn for ms conforming to IEC/EN Relative humidity % 5 95 without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC Ambient temperature around the unit Storage C Operation ATV 3Hppp C without derating, with protective cover on top of the drive with derating, without protective cover on top of the drive (see derating curves, page /58) ATV 3Cppp, ATV 3Kppp C without derating Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position Drive characteristics Output frequency range Hz 5 Switching frequency khz 6 adjustable during operation Speed range 5 Transient overtorque 7-% of nominal motor torque (typical value) Braking torque With braking resistor % of nominal motor torque continuously and up to 5% for 6 s Without braking resistor Value of nominal motor torque (typical value) according to ratings: 3% for > ATV 3pU5pp 5% for y ATV 3pU5pp % for y ATV 3p75pp 5% for y ATV 3p8M Maximum transient 5% of the nominal drive current for 6 seconds (typical value) current Voltage/frequency ratio Sensorless flux vector control with PWM (pulse width modulation) type motor control signal. Factory-set for most constant torque applications. Possible options: specific ratios for pumps and fans, energy saving or constant torque U/f for special motors. Frequency loop gain Factory-set with the speed loop stability and gain Possible options for machines with high resistive torque or high inertia, or for machines with fast cycles. Slip compensation Automatic whatever the load. Can be suppressed or adjusted. () See table on page /47 to check authorised cable lengths Presentation: pages /6 to /33 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /34

120 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Electrical characteristics Power supply Voltage V - 5% to 4 + % single phase for ATV 3ppppMp - 5% to 4 + % 3-phase for ATV 3ppppM3X 38-5% to 5 + % 3-phase for ATV 3ppppN4p 55-5% to 6 + % 3-phase for ATV 3ppppS6X Frequency Hz 5-5%to6+5% Prospective short-circuit current ICC Output voltage For drives ATV 3ppppM A (ICC at connection point) for single phase power supply ATV 3H8M3X...HU4M3X, A 5 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply ATV 3p37N4...pU4N4, ATV 3H75S6X...HU4S6X ATV 3HU55M3X...HD5M3X, ATV 3HU55N4...HD5N4, ATV 3KU55N4...KD5N4, ATV 3HU55S6X...HD5S6X A (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage. Maximum connection capacity For drives and tightening torque of the ATV 3H8M...H75M, power supply terminals, motor, ATV 3H8M3X...HU5M3X braking module and DC bus ATV 3HUM...HUM, ATV 3HUM3X...HU4M3X, ATV 3H37N4...HU4N4, ATV 3H75S6X...HU4S6X ATV 3HU55M3X, HU75M3X, ATV 3HU55N4, HU75N4, ATV 3HU55S6X, HU75S6X ATV 3HDM3X, HD5M3X, ATV 3HDN4, HD5N4, ATV 3HDS6X, HD5S6X Electrical isolation Internal supplies available Configurable analog inputs Analog output configurable for voltage, current and logic output.5 mm (AWG 4).8 Nm 5mm (AWG ). Nm 6 mm (AWG 6). Nm 5 mm (AWG 3) 4Nm Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, power supplies) Short-circuit and overload protection: - One + V (/+ 8%) supply for the reference potentiometer (. to kω), maximum current ma - One + 4 V supply (min. 9 V, max. 3 V) for logic inputs, maximum current ma 3 configurable analog inputs AI, AI, AI3. b AI: analog voltage input to +V, impedance 3 kω (maximum safe voltage 3 V) b AI: analog bipolar voltage input ± V, impedance 3 kω (maximum safe voltage 3 V) b AI3: analog current input X-Y ma by programming X and Y from to ma, with impedance 5 Ω AIP: potentiometer reference for ATV3pppA only Max. sampling time: 8 ms -bit resolution Precision ± 4.3% Linearity ±.% of maximum value Use: - m maximum with shielded cable - 5 m maximum with unshielded cable analog output configurable for voltage, current. b AOC: analog current output to ma, maximum load impedance 8 Ω b AOV: analog voltage output to +V, minimum load impedance 47 Ω 8-bit resolution Precision ± % Linearity ±.% Only analog output AOC is configurable as a logic output. b AOC: operation as logic output 4 V ma max. Max. sampling time: 8 ms Configurable relay outputs RA, RB, RC relay logic output, one N/C contact and one N/O contact with common point. Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 5V. Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos ϕ = and L/R = ms): 5 A for a 5 V or c 3 V b on inductive load (cos ϕ =.4 and L/R = 7 ms): A for a 5 V or c 3 V Max. sampling time: 8 ms Switching:, operations RA, RB relay logic output, one N/C contact, contact open on fault. Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 5V. Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos ϕ = and L/R = ms): 5 A for a 5 V or c 3 V b on inductive load (cos ϕ =.4 and L/R = 7 ms): A for a 5 V or c 3 V Max. sampling time: 8 ms Switching:, operations Presentation: pages /6 to /33 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /35

121 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Electrical characteristics (continued) Logic inputs LI 6 programmable logic inputs Impedance 3.5 kω + 4 V internal or 4 V external power supply (min. 9 V, max. 3 V) Max. current: ma Max. sampling time: 4 ms Multiple assignment makes it possible to configure several functions on one input (example: LI assigned to forward and preset speed, LI3 assigned to reverse and preset speed 3) Positive logic State if < 5 V or logic input not wired, state if > V Negative logic State if > 9 V or logic input not wired, state if < 3 V CLI position Connection to PLC output (see diagram page /58) Maximum I/O connection capacity and tightening torque.5 mm (AWG 4).6 Nm Acceleration and deceleration ramps Ramp profiles: b linear, can be adjusted separately from. to s b S, U or customised Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp time if braking capacities exceeded, possible inhibition of this adaptation (use of braking resistor). Braking to a standstill By d.c. injection: b by a signal on a programmable logic input b automatically as soon as the estimated output frequency drops to <.5 Hz, period adjustable from to 3 s or continuous, current adjustable from to. In Main protection and safety features of the drive b Thermal protection against overheating b Protection against short-circuits between motor phases b Protection against input phase breaks b Protection against motor phase breaks b Protection against overcurrent between output phases and earth b Line supply undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits b Line supply phase loss safety function, for 3-phase supply Motor protection Thermal protection integrated in the drive by continuous calculation of the l t (see page /7) Dielectric strength Insulation resistance to earth Signalling Between earth and power terminals Between control and power terminals c 4 V for ATV 3ppppM and M3X, c 4 V for ATV 3ppppN4, c 55 V for ATV 3ppppS6X a 88 V for ATV 3ppppM and M3X, a 34 V for ATV 3ppppN4, a 36 V for ATV 3ppppS6X >5MΩ (electrical isolation) c 5 V for minute red LED on front: LED lit indicates the presence of drive voltage Display coded by four 7-segment display units displaying the CANopen bus status (RUN and ERR). Frequency resolution Display units Hz. Analog inputs Hz. to Hz (calculate (high speed low speed) /4) Time constant for reference change ms 5 Communication Modbus and CANopen are integrated into the drive and available via an RJ45 connector Modbus RS 485 multidrop serial link b Modbus in RTU mode b Services supported: decimal function codes 3, 6, 6, 3 and 43 b Broadcasting b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal from to 47 b Maximum number of Altivar 3 drives connected: 3 (two 47 Ω master pulldown resistors) b Transmission speed: 48, 96 or 9 bps Used for connecting: b the remote terminal (option) b the PowerSuite software workshop b aplc b a microprocessor card b apc CANopen To connect the ATV3 drive on the CANopen bus, use the VW3 CANTAP adapter. b Services supported: v Implicit exchange of Process Data Object - PDOs depending on DSP 4 velocity mode - configurable PDOs (data and transmission type) - PDOs can be exchanged between slaves. v Explicit exchange of Service Data Object - receivesdoandtransmitsdo v Boot-up messages, emergency messages, node guarding and producer and consumer heartbeat, sync and NMT b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal from to 7 b Maximum number of Altivar 3 drives connected: 7 b Transmission speed:,, 5, 5, 5, 5 kbps or Mbps Presentation: pages /6 to /33 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /36

122 Characteristics (continued), special uses Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Tn,5,75,7,5,5,95,75,5,5 3 5/3 5/6 75/9 / Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque () Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque 3 Transient overtorque.7 to Tn 4 Torque in overspeed at constant power () 4 Hz Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for both force-cooled and self-cooled motors. The only difference is in the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed Special uses Use with a motor with a different rating to that of the drive The device can supply any motor which has a power rating lower than that for which it is designed. For motor ratings slightly higher than that of the drive, check that the current taken does not exceed the continuous output current of the drive. Test on a low power motor or without a motor In a testing or maintenance environment the drive can be checked without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives). This use requires deactivation of motor phase loss detection. Connecting motors in parallel The rating of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the motors to be connected to the drive. In this case, external thermal protection must be provided for each motor using probes or LR thermal bimetal overload relays designed for a. In motor. If the number of motors in parallel is greater than or equal to 3, it is advisable to install a 3-phase choke between the drive and the motors. N t t t Switching the motor at the drive output Thedrivecanbeswitchedwhenlockedorunlocked.Ifthedriveisswitchedon-thefly (drive unlocked), the motor is controlled and accelerates until it reaches the reference speed smoothly following the acceleration ramp. This use requires configuration of automatic catching a spinning load ( catch on the fly ) and activation of the function which manages the presence of a downstream contactor. KM t Example: breaking of downstream contactor Altivar 3 KM M t: deceleration without ramp (freewheel) t: acceleration with ramp Typical applications: breaking safety circuit at drive outputs, "bypass" function, switching of motors connected in parallel. () For power ratings 5 W, motor derating is less important (% instead of 5% at very low frequencies). () The nominal frequency of the motor and the maximum output frequency can be adjusted between 4 and 5 Hz. Note: Check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the manufacturer. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /37

123 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar ATV 3H37M Drives with heatsink (frequency range from.5 to 5 Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar 3 Power indicated on rating plate () Line current () Apparent power Max. prospective line Isc (4) Nominal current Max. transient current for 6 s Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (5) Weight at U at U (3) 4kHz kw HP A A kva ka A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz, with integrated EMC filters ATV 3H8M (6) ATV 3H37M (6 ) ATV 3H55M (6) ATV 3H75M (6) ATV 3HUM (6) ATV 3HU5M (6) ATV 3HUM (6) ATV 3HU4M3X 3-phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz, without EMC filters (7) ATV 3H8M3X (6) ATV 3H37M3X (6) ATV 3H55M3X (6) ATV 3H75M3X (6) ATV 3HUM3X (6) ATV 3HU5M3X (6) ATV 3HUM3X (6) ATV 3HU3M3X (6) ATV 3HU4M3X (6) ATV 3HU55M3X (6) ATV 3HU75M3X (6) ATV 3HDM3X (6) ATV 3HD5M3X (6) ATV 3HU75N4 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V 5/6 Hz, with integrated EMC filters ATV 3H37N4 (6) ATV 3H55N4 (6) ATV 3H75N4 (6) ATV 3HUN4 (6) ATV 3HU5N4 (6) ATV 3HUN4 (6) ATV 3HU3N4 (6) ATV 3HU4N4 (6) ATV 3HU55N4 (6) ATV 3HU75N4 (6) ATV 3HDN4 (6) ATV 3HD5N4 (6) phase supply voltage: 55 6 V 5/6 Hz, without EMC filters (7) ATV 3H75S6X ATV 3HU5S6X ATV 3HUS6X ATV 3HU4S6X ATV 3HU55S6X ATV 3HU75S6X ATV 3HDS6X ATV 3HD5S6X. ATV 3HD5N4A () These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 khz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from to 6 khz. Above 4 khz, derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page /6. () Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 khz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) Nominal supply voltages, min. U, max. U (-4 V; 38-5 V; 55-6 V). (4) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page /45). (5) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference. (6) The drive can also be ordered complete with potentiometer. In this case add the letter A to the reference for the drive you require (e.g. ATV 3H8MA). (7) Optional EMC filter, see pages /46 and /47. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /38

124 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Enclosed drives 535 Customisable enclosed drives (frequency range from.5 to 5 Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar 3 Power Line current () Apparent Max. Nominal indicated on rating plate () power prospective line Isc (3) current Max. transient current for 6 s Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4) Weight at U at U 4kHz kw HP A A KVA ka A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V (5) 5/6 Hz with integrated EMC filters ATV 3C8M ATV 3C37M ATV 3C55M ATV 3C75M ATV 3CUM 8.8 ATV 3C/Hpppp ATV 3CU5M ATV 3CUM.7 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (5) 5/6 Hz with integrated EMC filters ATV 3C37N ATV 3C55N ATV 3C75N ATV 3CUN ATV 3CU5N ATV 3CUN ATV 3CU3N ATV 3CU4N4.7 Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from.5 to 5 Hz) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. () These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 khz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from to 6 khz. Above 4 khz, derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page /6. () Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 khz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page /45). (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference. (5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U, max. U (-4 V; 38-5 V). Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /39

125 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Drive kits DF5354 Drive kits (frequency range from.5 to 5 Hz) Motor Line supply Altivar 3 Power Line current () Apparent Max. Nominal indicated on rating plate () power prospective line Isc (3) current Max. transient current for 6 s Power dissipated at nominal load Reference (4) Weight at U at U 4kHz kw HP A A KVA ka A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V (5) 5/6 Hz with integrated filters ATV 3K8M ATV 3K37M ATV 3K55M ATV 3K75M 6.3 ATV 3Kppppp ATV 3KUM ATV 3KU5M ATV 3KUM.7 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (5) 5/6 Hz with integrated filters ATV 3K37N4 8.8 DF ATV 3K55N ATV 3K75N ATV 3KUN ATV 3KU5N ATV 3KUN ATV 3KU3N ATV 3KU4N ATV 3KU55N4 6.5 ATV 3Kppppp ATV 3KU75N ATV 3KDN ATV 3KD5N4 3. () These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 khz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from to 6 khz. Above 4 khz, derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page /6. () Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 khz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page /45). (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference. (5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U, max. U (-4 V; 38-5 V). Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /4

126 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Accessories Plates for mounting on 5 rail Description For drives Reference Weight kg Plate for mounting on 5 rail, width 35 mm ATV 3H8M,ATV 3H37M, ATV 3H55M, ATV 3H75M, ATV 3H8M3X, ATV 3H37M3X, ATV 3H55M3X, ATV 3H75M3X ATV 3HUM, ATV 3HU5M, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU5M3X, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3H37N4, ATV 3H55N4, ATV 3H75N4, ATV 3HUN4, ATV 3HU5N4, ATV 3H75S6X, ATV 3HU5S6X VW3 A85. VW3 A385. ULTypeconformitykits() Description For drives Reference Weight kg Mechanical device fixing to the underside of the Altivar 3 ATV 3H8M,ATV 3H37M, ATV 3H55M, ATV 3H75M VW3 A38.4 ATV 3H8M3X, ATV 3H37M3X, VW3 A38.4 ATV 3H55M3X, ATV 3H75M3X ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU5M3X VW3 A383.4 ATV 3HUM, ATV 3HU5M, VW3 A384.5 ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3H37N4, ATV 3H55N4, ATV 3H75N4, ATV 3HUN4, ATV 3HU5N4, ATV 3H75S6X, ATV 3HU5S6X ATV 3HUM, ATV 3HU3M3X, VW3 A385.5 ATV 3HU4M3X, ATV 3HUN4, ATV 3HU3N4, ATV 3HU4N4, ATV 3HUS6X, ATV 3HU4S6X ATV 3HU55M3X, ATV 3HU75M3X, VW3 A386.9 ATV 3HU55N4, ATV 3HU75N4, ATV 3HU55S6X, ATV 3HU75S6X ATV 3HDM3X, ATV 3HD5M3X, ATV 3HDN4, ATV 3HD5N4, ATV 3HDS6X, ATV 3HD5S6X VW3 A387. () This device allows cables to be connected directly to the drive using conduits or cable glands. Altivar 8 substitution kits Description For drives Reference Weight kg Mechanical adapters allowing an ATV 3 to be used in place of an ATV 3H8M,ATV 3H37M, ATV 3H55M, ATV 3H75M ATV 3H8M3X, ATV 3H37M3X, VW3 A38 ATV 8 of the same rating ATV 3H55M3X, ATV 3H75M3X (using the same fixing holes) ATV 3HUM, ATV 3HU5M, VW3 A38 ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU5M3X, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3H37N4, ATV 3HU5N4 ATV 3H75S6X, ATV 3HU5S6X ATV 3HU55N4, ATV 3HU75N4, ATV 3HU55M3X, ATV 3HU75M3X, ATV 3HU55S6X, ATV 3HU75S6X VW3 A383 Remote terminal Description Reference Weight kg For ATV 3 drives of all ratings, assembly comprising: - terminal, cable fitted with connectors - seal and screws for IP 65 mounting on an enclosure door VW3 A3 FWO REV RUN VW3 A3 ESC ENT stop reset Documentation Description Reference Weight kg Simplified ATV 3 user s manual and CD-ROM, comprising: - a User s manual for the drives - a User s manual for Modbus and CANopen Supplied with the drive International Technical Manual (ITM) CD-ROM DCI CD398.5 Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /4

127 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: braking resistors Presentation Characteristics Type of drive VW3 A587 to VW3 A5874 Ambient air temperature C 4 Degree of protection of enclosure The resistor enables the Altivar 3 drive to operate while braking to a standstill or in braked operation, by dissipating the braking energy. Two types of resistor are available: - enclosed model (IP 3 enclosure) designed to comply with EMC regulations and protected by a temperature-controlled switch or thermal relay - non-protected model (IP) for low power ratings only They are designed for machine applications with high inertia, driving loads, machines with fast cycles. VW3 A5873 to VW3 A58735 VW3 A58736 and VW3 A58737 IP IP 3 IP 3 VW3 A6674 Resistor protection None By temperature-controlled switch () By thermal relay () Temperature-controlled switch Load factor of resistors Load factor of drives Trip temperature C 3 ± 5% 6 ± 4% Max. voltage - max. current a V -.3 A a V - 6 A Min. voltage - min. current c 4 V -. A Maximum contact resistance mω 5 5 The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure at 4 C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of common applications: - braking for seconds with a torque of.6 Tn every 4 seconds - braking for.8 second with a torque of.5 Tn every 4 seconds The internal circuits for drives used for braking on external resistors are sized for the following cycles. If they are exceeded, the drive will lock and display a fault. -.5 Tn for 6 seconds per 4-second cycle - Tn continuously () The contact must be connected in sequence (used for signalling or for controlling the line contactor). () To be ordered separately, 8 A rating. Load factor and determining the nominal power Speed The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure at 4 C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of common applications. This load factor is defined above. Time t For a specific application (e.g. handling), the nominal resistor power has to be T redefined by taking account of the new load factor. t Load factor: --- T t: braking time in s T:cycletimeins Chart Graph of the average power as a function of the braking torque for a load factor. K,,6,,, Example: Motor of power Pm = 4 kw Motor efficiency η =.85 BrakingtorqueTb=.6Tn Braking time t = s CycletimeT=5s t Load factor Lf = -- = % T,5,6,5 6% 4% % % UsecharttodeterminethecoefficientK corresponding to a braking torque of.6 Tn and a load factor of %. K =.6 5% % Tb/Tn Chart Permissible resistor overload as a function of time (characteristic curve). K t (s) Use chart to determine the coefficient K corresponding to a braking time of seconds. K = 7 The nominal resistor power (Pn) must be greater than: Pn Pm K η + K Lf 4, 3 = =,6, , = 35W /4

128 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: braking resistors VW3 A587 For drives Min. resistor value Ohmic value Average power available at Reference Weight () 4 C() 5 C Ω Ω W W kg Non-protected braking resistors ATV 3H/C/K8M, ATV 3H/C/K37M, ATV 3H/C/K55M, ATV 3H/C/K75M ATV 3H/C/KUM, ATV 3H/C/KU5M, ATV 3H8M3X, ATV 3H37M3X, ATV 3H55M3X, ATV 3H75M3X, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU5M3X, ATV 3H/C/K37N4, ATV 3H/C/K55N4, ATV 3H/C/K75N4, ATV 3H/C/KUN4, ATV 3H/C/KU5N4, ATV 3H/C/KUN4 ATV 3H75S6X ATV 3HU5S6X, ATV3HUS6X ATV 3H/C/KU3N4, ATV 3H/C/KU4N4 ATV 3HU4S6X ATV 3H/C/KUM, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU3M3X Protected braking resistors ATV 3H/C/K8M, ATV 3H/C/K37M, ATV 3H/C/K55M, ATV 3H/C/K75M, ATV 3H/C/KUM, ATV 3H/C/KU5M, ATV 3H8M3X, ATV 3H37M3X, ATV 3H55M3X, ATV 3H75M3X, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU5M3X, ATV 3H/C/K37N4, ATV 3H/C/K55N4, ATV 3H/C/K75N4, ATV 3H/C/KUN4, ATV 3H/C/KU5N4, ATV 3H/C/KUN4 ATV 3H/C/KUM, ATV 3HUM3X, ATV 3HU3M3X ATV 3H/C/KU3N4, ATV 3H/C/KU4N4 ATV 3H/KU55N4, ATV 3H/KU75N4 ATV 3HU55S6X ATV 3HU75S6X ATV 3HU4M3X ATV 3H/KDN4, ATV 3H/KD5N4 ATV 3HDS6X, ATV 3HD5S6X VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A ATV 3HU55M3X, ATV 3HU75M3X VW3 A ATV 3HDM3X, ATV 3HD5M3X VW3 A6674 (3) 7. VW3 A5873p () Depends on the drive rating. () Power that can be dissipated by the resistor at the maximum temperature of 5 C, corresponding to a maximum temperature rise of 75 C in a 4 C environment. (3) The various ohmic values are obtained as a function of the connection, described in the resistor instructions. /43

129 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: line chokes Presentation These chokes provide improved protection against overvoltages on the line supply and reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive. The recommended chokes are used to limit the line current. They have been developed to conform to standard EN 578 (VDE 6 level high energy overvoltages on the line supply). The values of the chokes are defined for a voltage drop between 3% and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. The use of line chokes is recommended in particular under the following circumstances: b Line supply with significant disturbance from other equipment (interference, overvoltages) b Line supply with voltage imbalance between phases >.8 % of nominal voltage b Drive supplied with power by a line with very low impedance (in the vicinity of power transformers times more powerful than the drive rating) The prospective short-circuit current at the point of connection of the drive must not exceed the maximum value indicated in the tables of references. The use of line chokes allows connection on the following networks: -Max.IsckAfor/4V - Max. Isc 65 ka for 38/5 V and 55/6 V b Installation of a large number of frequency converters on the same line b Reduction of overload in cos ϕ correction capacitors, if the installation has a power factor correction unit Type of line choke Characteristics Conforming to standards VZ L 4M VZ L 7UM5 VZ L 8UM VW3 A6 65 VW3 A6 65 VW3 A6 653 VW3 A6 654 EN 578 (VDE 6 level high energy overvoltages on the line supply) VW3 A6 655 VW3 A6 656 Voltage drop Between 3 and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. Degree of protection Choke IP Terminals IP IP IP Value of choke mh Nominal current A Loss W /44

130 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: line chokes VW3 A665p Altivar 3 Choke Single phase or Line current Reference Weight 3-phase without choke with choke at U min. at U max. at U min. at U max. A A A A kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V () 5/6 Hz ATV 3H/C/K8M VZ L4M.63 ATV 3H/C/K37M ATV 3H/C/K55M VZ L7UM5.88 ATV 3H/C/K75M ATV 3H/C/KUM VZ L8UM.99 ATV 3H/C/KU5M ATV 3H/C/KUM phase supply voltage: 4 V () 5/6 Hz ATV 3H8M3X..9.9 VW3 A665.5 ATV 3H37M3X ATV 3H55M3X ATV 3H75M3X ATV 3HUM3X VW3 A ATV 3HU5M3X ATV 3HUM3X VW3 A ATV 3HU3M3X ATV 3HU4M3X VW3 A ATV 3HU55M3X ATV 3HU75M3X ATV 3HDM3X VW3 A6655. ATV 3HD5M3X phase supply voltage: 38 5 V () 5/6 Hz ATV 3H/C/K37N VW3 A665.5 ATV 3H/C/K55N ATV 3H/C/K75N ATV 3H/C/KUN ATV 3H/C/KU5N ATV 3H/C/KUN VW3 A ATV 3H/C/KU3N ATV 3H/C/KU4N ATV 3H/KU55N VW3 A ATV 3H/KU75N ATV 3H/KDN VW3 A ATV 3H/KD5N phase supply voltage: 55 6 V () 5/6 Hz ATV 3H75S6X VW3 A665.5 ATV 3HU5S6X ATV 3HUS6X ATV 3HU4S6X VW3 A ATV 3HU55S6X ATV 3HU75S6X VW3 A ATV 3HDS6X ATV 3HD5S6X VW3 A () Nominal supply voltage: U min. U max. /45

131 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: additional EMC input filters Presentation Function The Altivar 3 has built-in radio interference input filters to meet EMC "product" standards for variable speed drives IEC/EN 68-3 and to comply with the European EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) directive. The additional filters enable the drives to meet more stringent requirements: these filters are designed to reduce conducted emissions on the line supply below the limits of standards EN 55 class A () or EN 55 class B. These additional filters are installed underneath ATV 3H drives. They can be installed at the side of the product in the case of ATV 3C and K drives. They act as supports for the drives and are fixed to them via tapped holes. Useaccordingtothetypeofnetwork Use of these additional filters is only possible on TN (neutral connection) and TT (neutral to earth) type networks. The standard IEC 68-3, annex D., indicates that on IT (impedance earthed or isolated neutral) networks the filters can randomise the operation of insulation monitors. The efficiency of additional filters on this type of network also depends on the nature of the impedance between neutral and earth and is therefore unpredictable. If a machine is to be installed on an IT network, one solution is to insert an isolation transformer and to connect locally to the machine on a TN or TT network. () See page /47. Characteristics Conforming to standards EN 33 Degree of protection IP and IP 4 on upper part Maximum relative humidity 93% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC Ambient air temperature around the device Operation C Storage C Maximum operating altitude Without derating m (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC mm peak to peak from 3 to 3 Hz gnpeakfrom3to5hz Shock resistance Conforming to IEC gn for ms Max. nominal voltage 5/6 Hz single phase V 4 + % 5/6 Hz 3-phase V 4 + % 5 + % 6 + % /46

132 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: additional EMC input filters For drives Reference Filter Maximum length of shielded cable EN 55 EN 55 class A () class B () In () Il (3) Reference Weight m m A ma kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz ATV 3H/C/K8M 5 9 VW3 A34.6 ATV 3H/C/K37M ATV 3H/C/K55M ATV 3H/C/K75M ATV 3H/C/KUM VW3 A ATV 3H/C/KU5M ATV 3H/C/KUM 5 8 VW3 A phase supply voltage: 4 V 5/6 Hz ATV 3H8M3X VW3 A34.65 ATV 3H37M3X ATV 3H55M3X ATV 3H75M3X ATV 3HUM3X VW3 A344. ATV 3HU5M3X ATV 3HUM3X ATV 3HU3M3X VW3 A ATV 3HU4M3X ATV 3HU55M3X VW3 A ATV 3HU75M3X ATV 3HDM3X VW3 A ATV 3HD5M3X 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V 5/6 Hz ATV 3H/C/K37N VW3 A344. ATV 3H/C/K55N4 ATV 3H/C/K75N4 ATV 3H/C/KUN4 ATV 3H/C/KU5N4 ATV 3H/C/KUN VW3 A ATV 3H/C/KU3N4 ATV 3H/C/KU4N4 ATV 3H/KU55N VW3 A ATV 3H/KU75N4 ATV 3H/KDN VW3 A ATV 3H/KD5N4 () The filter selection tables show the length limits for the shielded cables connecting the motors to the drives for a switching frequency of to 6 khz. These limits are given as examples only as they vary depending on the interference capacity of the motors and the cables used. If motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account. () In: Nominal filter current. (3) II: Maximum earth leakage current at 5 Hz. /47

133 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: output filters and motor chokes Presentation Byinsertinganoutputfilterbetweenthedriveandthemotor,itispossibleto: b Limit the dv/dt at the motor terminals (5 to 5 V/µs), for cables longer than 5 m b Filter interference caused by opening a contactor placed between the filter and the motor b Reduce the motor earth leakage current When using a downstream contactor between the drive and the motor, ferrite suppressors should be fitted to each motor cable for certain drive ratings supplied with a single phase or 3-phase V supply. LR filter cell This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3resistors. Principle LC filter cell This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3 capacitors. Altivar 3 LR filter U V W M 3 Altivar 3 LC filter U V W C C C Motor choke For standard motor cables longer than m (5 m for shielded cables), a choke can be used to limit overvoltages at the motor terminals. Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening Altivar 3 M 3 Altivar 3 Contactor M 3 Characteristics () LR filter cells LC filter cells Motor chokes () VW3 A5845p VW3 A664p VW3 A665p Drive switching frequency khz or4 4 max. Length of motor cable Shielded cables m y y y 5 y Unshielded cables m y y Degree of protection IP IP IP IP () Filter performance is ensured if the cable lengths between the motor and the drive given in the above table are not exceeded. For an application with several motors connected in parallel, the cable length must include all tap-offs. If a cable longer than that recommended is used, the filters may overheat. () Please consult your Regional Sales Office for frequencies greater than 4 khz or cables longer than m. /48

134 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Options: output filters and motor chokes 545 VW3 A5845 LR filter cells For drives Loss Nominal Reference Weight current W A kg ATV 3H/C/K8M 5 VW3 A ATV 3H/C/K37M ATV 3H/C/K55M ATV 3H/C/K75M ATV 3H/C/KUM ATV 3H/C/KU5M ATV 3H8M3X ATV 3H37M3X ATV 3H55M3X ATV 3H75M3X ATV 3HUM3X ATV 3HU5M3X ATV 3H/C/K37N4 ATV 3H/C/K55N4 ATV 3H/C/K75N4 ATV 3H/C/KUN4 ATV 3H/C/KU5N4 ATV 3H/C/KUN4 ATV 3H/C/KU3N4 ATV 3H/C/KU4N4 ATV 3H/KDN4 ATV 3H/KD5N4 ATV 3H75S6X ATV 3HU5S6X, ATV 3HUS6X ATV 3HU4S6X, ATV 3HU55S6X ATV 3H/C/KUM 8 6 VW3 A ATV 3HUM3X ATV 3HU3M3X ATV 3H/KU55N4 ATV 3HU75S6X ATV 3HU4M3X ATV 3HU55M3X ATV 3HU75M3X ATV 3H/KU75N4 ATV 3HDS6X ATV 3HD5S6X 33 VW3 A LC filter cells For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 3HDM3X ATV 3HD5M3X VW3 A Motor chokes For drives Loss Nominal Reference Weight current W A kg ATV 3H/C/KUN4 65 VW3 A ATV 3H/C/KU3N4 ATV 3H/C/KU4N4 ATV 3HU4S6X, ATV 3HU55S6X ATV 3H/C/KUM, ATV 3HUM3X 75 6 VW3 A ATV 3HU3M3X, ATV 3H/KU55N4 ATV 3HU75S6X ATV 3HU4M3X 9 3 VW3 A ATV 3HU55M3X ATV 3HU75M3X ATV 3H/KU75N4 ATV 3H/KDN4 ATV 3HDS6X ATV 3HD5S6X ATV 3H/KD5N4 8 6 VW3 A6655. ATV 3HDM3X ATV 3HD5M3X VW3 A Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening For drives Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg ATV 3H8M 3 VW3 A345 ATV 3H37M, ATV 3H8M3 3 VW3 A345 ATV 3H37M3 ATV 3H55M, ATV 3H75M ATV 3HUM, ATV 3HU5M ATV 3H55M3, ATV 3H75M3 3 VW3 A3453 /49

135 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Communication options Modbus and CANopen communication buses The Altivar 3 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector, which supports both protocols. The communication function provides access to the drive s configuration, adjustment, control and monitoring functions. CANopen Modbus Connections via splitter blocks and RJ45 connectors Connections via junction boxes ATV 3 ATV 3 ATV 3 PLC () CANopen trunk cable 3 CANopen tap junction VW3 CAN TAP 4 CANopen drop cable VW3 CAN CA RRpp PLC () PLC () Modbus cable depending on the type of Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC controller or PLC 3 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 3 Modbus cables TSX CSAp 4 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 36 Rpp4 T-junction box TSX SCA 5 5 Line terminators VW3A836RC 5 Subscriber socket TSX SCA 6 6 Modbus T-junction boxes 6 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 36 VW3A836TFpp (with cable) 7 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 36 D3 Connections via screw terminals In this case, use a Modbus drop cable VW3A836D3and line terminators VW3A836DRC. Other communication buses The Altivar 3 can also be connected to the following networks via a module (bridge or gateway): b Ethernet b Fipio b Profibus DP b DeviceNet The communication function provides access to the drive s configuration, adjustment, control and monitoring functions ATV 3 To network Communication modules 3 Cables VW3A836Rpp, VW3P736Ror VW3A836D3, depending on the type of module. 4 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 5 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 36 Rpp 6 Line terminator VW3 A8 36 RC ATV 3 () Please consult our specialist catalogues. /5

136 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Communication options Modbus and CANopen communication buses Connection accessories Description Unit reference Weight kg CANopen bus junction box VW3 CAN TAP 5638 TSX SCA 5 Modbus junction box 3 screw terminals, RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 36 D3 Modbus subscriber socket female 5-way SUB-D connectors and screw terminals, RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 36 TSX SCA 5.5 TSX SCA 6.57 Modbus splitter block RJ45 connectors and screw terminal LU9 GC Modbus line terminators () For RJ45 connector R=Ω, C =nf VW3 A8 36 RC. R=5Ω VW3 A8 36 R. TSX SCA 6 For screw terminals R=Ω, C =nf VW3 A8 36 DRC. R=5Ω VW3 A8 36 DR. Modbus T-junction boxes With integrated cable (.3 m) VW3 A8 36 TF3 With integrated cable ( m) VW3 A8 36 TF Connecting cables Description Length m Cables for CANopen bus Cables for Modbus bus Connectors Reference Weight kg.3 m RJ45 connectors VW3 CAN CA RR3.5 m RJ45 connectors VW3 CAN CA RR.5 3 RJ45 connector and one end stripped VW3 A8 36 D3.5 3 RJ45 connector and male VW3 A way SUB-D connector for TSX SCA 6.3 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 36 R3.5 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 36 R.5 3 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 36 R3.5 Cables for RJ45 connectors VW3P736R.5 Profibus DP gateway LA9 P37 RS 485 double Supplied without connector TSX CSA shielded twisted pair cables Supplied without connector TSX CSA 5 Supplied without connector TSX CSA Other communication buses Description Cables to be connected Reference Weight kg Ethernet/Modbus bridge VW3A836D3 74 CEV 3 ().5 with x Ethernet baset port (RJ45) Fipio/Modbus gateway VW3A836Rpp LUF P.4 (3) DeviceNet/Modbus gateway VW3A836Rpp LUF P9.4 (3) Profibus DP/Modbus gateway Parameters set using standard Profibus DP configurator (4) VW3P736R LA9 P37.4 LUF P LA9 P37 Profibus DP/Modbus gateway VW3A836Rpp LUF P7.4 Parameters set using ABC Configurator software (3) () Sold in lots of. () Please consult our specialist catalogue. (3) See pages 4/ and 4/3. (4) See pages 4/4 and 4/5. /5

137 Dimensions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 ATV 3HppM3X/MXA, ATV 3HppM/MA Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) xø5 5 45,5 xm5 screw ATV 3H c 8M3X, 37M3X 8 () = 6 = 55M3X, 75M3X 3 c 7 8M, 37M 3 55M, 75M 4 M5 4xM4 () Only for drives whose reference ends in A. ATV 3HUppM/MA, ATV 3HUpM3X/M3XA to ATV 3HU4pM3X/M3XA, ATV 3HppN4/N4A to ATV 3HU4N4/N4A, ATV 3H75S6X to ATV 3HU4S6X Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) 8 () c b Ø 8,5 J K H = G = a ATV 3H a b c d G H J K Ø UpM3X x5 UpM, UM3X x5 37N4 to U5N4 U75S6X, U5S6X UM, HUpM3X UN4 to U4N4 US6X, U4S6X x5 () Only for drives whose reference ends in A. ATV 3HU55M3X/M3XA, ATV 3HU75M3X/M3XA, ATV 3HU55N4/N4A, ATV 3HU75N4/N4A, ATV 3HU55S6X, ATV 3HU75S6X Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) M5 5 d xm5 screw 4xM4 3 4xØ5 7 5 xm5 screw 8 () 7 = 6 8 = 75 () Only for drives whose reference ends in A. ATV 3HDpM3X/M3XA, ATV 3HDpN4/N4A, ATV 3HDpS6X 4xØ6 4xM4 M5 Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) 39, xm5 screw 8 () 9 = 5 = 45 7,5 4xM4 M5 75 () Only for drives whose reference ends in A. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /5

138 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Enclosed drives ATV 3CppM 4xØ5, ATV 3CUM, ATV 3CU5M, ATV 3CppN4, ATV 3CUN4, ATV 3CU5N4 4xØ5, ATV 3CUM, ATV 3CUN4, ATV 3CU3N4, ATV 3CU4N4 4xØ5, Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /53

139 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Drive kits ATV 3KpppM, ATV 3KppN4, ATV 3KUN4, ATV 3KUpN4 Mounting a a E K H b H K b c c F G F G 7xØ5,5 ATV 3K a a b b c c E F G H K ppm UpM, ppn4, UpN UM, UppN Note: product supplied with drilling template. ATV 3KU55N4, ATV 3KU75N4, ATV 3KDpN4/pM Mounting c a 8xØ8 3 G a J b b 7 a E Ø 9 F F 9 H K K K H ATV 3K a a a b b c E F G H J K K Ø U55N4, U75N x 6 DN4, D5N x 6 Note: product supplied with drilling template. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /54

140 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Plates for mounting on 5 rail VW3 A85 VW3 A385 43,6 37,9 77, ULNEMATypeconformitykits VW3 A38 to VW3 A387 () b () VW3 b A38 77 A383 and A384 7 A A A () Drive () Kit for VW3 A38p Remote terminal VW3 A3 Mounting 55,6 4 79,6 5 4xØ3,5 Ø36 Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /55

141 = Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Bare braking resistors VW3 A587 and A5874 VW3 A5873 -wire output, length.5 m 4xØ5 -wire output, length.5 m 6 3 = 4 = = = 6 Protected braking resistors VW3 A5873 to VW3 A58734 VW3 A58735 to VW3 A58737 c a 7,5 = = 8, xø5 H b 6 = = = 3xØ5,5 85 = 77,5 = VW3 a b c H A A58736, A VW3 A xØ Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /56

142 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Single phase chokes VZ Lppppppp 3-phase chokes VW3 A665 to VW3 A6656 Ø b b H c G a H c c 8xØ G G a VZ a b c G H Ø VW3 a b c c G G H Ø L4M x 9 A x 9 L7UM x 9 A x L8UM x A x A x A x A x Additional EMC input filters Mounting of filter underneath the drive Mounting of filter adjacent to drive b Ø H = b Ø = b c = G = a a c VW3 a b b c G H Ø A34, A x M4 A343, A x M4 A345, A x M4 A x M4 A348, A x M5 Output filters VW3 A5845 to VW3 A58453 Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening VW3 A345 to VW3 A345 4xØ b c Ø a H b c G a VW3 a b c G H Ø VW3 a b c Ø A5845 A A A A A Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 Functions: pages/66to/8 /57

143 Schemes, combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 ATV 3ppppM3X, ATV 3ppppN4, ATV 3ppppS6X 3-phase power supply ATV 3ppppM Single phase power supply Q 4 6 () (3) U V W P PA/+ PB + AI COM AI3 AI AOV AOC 3 5 Q KM 3 5 Q T Q3 S S Q A KM RA RC 3 4 KM A A KM Q T Q3 S S Q A KM RA RC 3 4 KM A A 4 6 () (3) A L L L3 RA RC () RB RA RC LI LI LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 + 4 CLI RA RC () U V W PC/- PC/- P PA/+ RB RA RC LI LI LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 + 4 CLI PB + AI COM AI3 AI AOV AOC A L L U V W M 3 Braking resistor Reference potentiometer SZ RV X-Y ma ± V U V W M 3 Braking resistor Reference potentiometer SZ RV X-Y ma ± V () Line choke (single phase or 3-phase). () Fault relay contacts. For remote signalling of drive status. (3) Shared connection of the logic inputs depends on the position of a switch, see diagrams below. Note: all terminals are located at the bottom of the drive. Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Compatible components (for full references, please consult our specialist catalogue) Code Description Q GV L or Compact NS (see pages /6 to /65) KM LC ppp + LA4 DAU (see pages /6 to /65) S, S XBBorXABpushbuttons T VA transformer V secondary Q GV L rated at twice the nominal primary current of T Q GB CB5 Examples of recommended circuit diagrams Logic input switches AOC output Source position Sink position CLI position with PLC transistor outputs Wired as logic output V LI + 4 V 4 V LI COM COM CLI V PLC LI -wire control 3-wire control Analog voltage inputs Analog current input + V external ± V external - ma, 4- ma, X-Y ma 4 V COM CLI LI V 4 V PLC ATV 3 control terminals 4 V relay ma AOC V + 4 V ATV 3 control terminals LI LIx + 4 V ATV 3 control terminals LI LI LIx ATV 3 control terminals AI V ATV 3 control terminals AI V ATV 3 control terminals AI3 V LI: Forward LIx: Reverse LI: Stop LI: Forward LIx: Reverse + V Speed reference potentiometer.tokω ± V Source - ma 4- ma X-Y ma Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /58

144 Schemes, connections Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Electromagnetic compatibility Schemes Additional radio interference suppression input filters VW3 A34p 3-phase power supply Single phase power supply L' L L L' L3 L'3 VW3 A34 L' L' L L L L VW3 A34 L3 ATV 3 L L ATV 3 Connections to meet the requirements of EMC standards Principle b Grounds between the drive, motor and cable shielding must have high frequency equipotentiality. b Use shielded cables with the shielding connected to ground throughout 36 at both ends for the motor cable, the braking resistor cable and the control/command cables. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. b Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable. Installation diagram for ATV 3Hppp drives Steelplatesuppliedwiththedrive,tobefittedonit(machineground) Altivar 3 3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable 4 Non-shielded wires for the output of the safety relay contacts. 5 Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive: - strip the shielding, - use cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped, to attach them to the plate. The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure good contact. Cable clamps must be made from stainless steel. 6 Shielded cable for connecting the motor. 7 Shielded cable for connecting the control/command wiring. For applications requiring several conductors, use cables with a small cross-section (.5 mm ). 8 Shielded cable for connecting the braking resistor. 6, 7, 8, the shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal cases. 9 Ground screw for the motor cable with low ratings, as the screw on the heatsink is inaccessible. Note: the HF equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit. If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted beneath the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable. Operation on an IT system IT system: isolated or impedance earthed neutral. Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads, e.g. Merlin Gerin type XM. ATV 3pppM and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. There are two ways of isolating these filters from ground for operation on an IT system: b ATV 3H8M to ATV 3HUM and ATV 3H37N4 to ATV 3HU4N4, pull out a jumper to disconnect the filter. b ATV 3HU55N4 to ATV 3HD5N4, move the cable tag to disconnect the filter. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Functions: pages/66to/8 /59

145 Mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Depending on the conditions in which the drive is to be used, its installation will require certain precautions and the use of appropriate accessories. Mounting recommendations for ATV 3H drives Install the unit vertically, at ±. b Do not place it close to heating elements. b Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. 5 mm d d 5 mm Types of mounting b Type A mounting mm 5 mm 5 mm b Type B mounting b Type C mounting 5 mm 5 mm Removing the protective cover Removing the protective cover from the top of the drive (as shown opposite) changes thedegreeofprotectiontoip. Derating curves for the nominal drive current (In) as a function of the temperature, switching frequency and type of mounting. I / In % 9 % 8 % 7 % 6 % 5 % 4 % In - 5 % - % - 5 % - 5 % - 35 % - % - % 4 C Mounting types A and B - 5 % - 3 % - 35 % 5 C Mounting type C - 4 % - 45 % 5 C Mounting types A and B - 5 % - 55 % 6 C Mounting type C - 65 % 6 C Mounting types A and B 3 % 4 khz 8 khz khz 6 khz Switching frequency For intermediate temperatures (e.g. 55 C), interpolate between curves. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Functions: pages /66 to /8 /6

146 Mounting (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Specific recommendations for mounting ATV 3 drives in a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure Observe the mounting recommendations on the opposite page. To ensure proper air circulation in the drive: b Fit ventilation grilles. b Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation. If there is not, install forced ventilation with a filter. The openings and/or fans must provide a flow rate at least equal to that of the drive fans (see the table below). b UsespecialfilterswithIP54protection. b Remove the protective cover from the top of the drive. Fan flow rate depending on the drive rating ATV 3 Flow rate m 3 /min H8M, H37M, H55M, H8M3X,.3 H37M3X, H55M3X, H37N4, H55N4, H75N4, HUN4, H75S6X, HU5N6X H75M, HUM, HU5M, H75M3X,.55 HUM3X, HU5M3X, HU5N4, HUN4, HUS6X, HU4N6X HUM, HUM3X, HU3M3X, HU4M3X,.55 HU3N4, HU4N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X HU55M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HDS6X.7 HU75M3X, HDM3X, HDN4, HD5N4,.8 HD5S6X HD5M3X 3.6 Dust and damp proof metal wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (IP54degreeofprotection) The drive must be mounted in a dust and damp proof enclosure in certain environmental conditions: dust, corrosive gases, high humidity with risk of condensation and dripping water, splashing liquid, etc. Thisenablesthedrivetobeusedinanenclosurewherethemaximuminternal temperature can reach 5 C. Calculating the size of the enclosure Maximum thermal resistance Rth ( C/W) θ = maximum temperature inside enclosure in C θ θe Rth = θe = maximum external temperature in C P P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W Power dissipated by drive: see page /38. Add the power dissipated by the other equipment components. Useful heat dissipation surface of enclosure S (m ) (sides + top + front panel if wall-mounted) K S = K = thermal resistance per m of enclosure. Rth For metal enclosures: K =. with internal fan, K =.5 without fan Note: do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity. mm Mounting recommendations for ATV 3 drives Install the unit vertically, at ±. Do not place it close to heating elements. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. mm Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Functions: pages/66to/8 /6

147 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Motor starters GV L + LC K + ATV 3Hpppppp Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker, a contactor and an Altivar 3 variable speed drive. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation, and padlocking if required. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. The Altivar 3 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth; it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor. Motor starter for drive with heatsink Variable speed drive Reference Standard power rating of 4-pole 5/6 Hz motors () Circuit-breaker () Reference Rating Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor (3) Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (4) kw HP A ka Single phase supply voltage: 4 V ATV 3H8M.8.5 GV L8 4 LC K6pp ATV 3H37M.37.5 GV L 6.3 LC K6pp ATV 3H55M GV L4 LC K6pp ATV 3H75M.75 GV L4 LC K6pp ATV 3HUM..5 GV L6 4 LC K6pp ATV 3HU5M.5 GV L 8 LC K6pp ATV 3HUM. 3 GV L 5 LC D9pp 3-phase supply voltage: 4 V ATV 3H8M3X.8.5 GV L7.5 5 LC K6pp ATV 3H37M3X.37.5 GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3H55M3X GV L LC K6pp ATV 3H75M3X.75 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HUM3X..5 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU5M3X.5 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HUM3X. 3 GV L 8 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU3M3X 3 GV L 5 5 LC D9pp ATV 3HU4M3X 4 5 GV L 5 5 LC D9pp ATV 3HU55M3X NS8HMA 5 LC D3pp ATV 3HU75M3X 7.5 NS8HMA 5 LC D3pp ATV 3HDM3X 5 NS8HMA 8 LC D4pp ATV 3HD5M3X 5 NSHMA LC D4pp 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V ATV 3H37N GV L7.5 5 LC K6pp ATV 3H55N GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3H75N4.75 GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HUN4..5 GV L LC K6pp ATV 3HU5N4.5 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HUN4. 3 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU3N4 3 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU4N4 4 5 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU55N GV L 5 LC D9pp ATV 3HU75N4 7.5 GV L3 3 LC D8pp ATV 3HDN4 5 NS8HMA 5 LC D3pp ATV 3HD5N4 5 NS8HMA 5 LC D3pp () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). () NS8HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. (3) Composition of contactors LC-K6: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact LC-D9/D3/D4: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact (4) Usual control circuit voltages. a.c. control circuit Volts a LC-D 5 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 6 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 4 48 /3 3 3/4 LC-K 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. /6

148 Combinations (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Motor starters Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker, a contactor and an Altivar 3 variable speed drive. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation, and padlocking if required. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. The Altivar 3 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth; it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor. Motor starter for drive with heatsink 5466 Variable speed drive Reference Standard power rating of 4-pole 5/6 Hz motors () Circuit-breaker () Reference Rating Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor (3) Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (4) GV L + LC K + ATV 3Hpppppp kw HP A ka 3-phase supply voltage: 55 6 V ATV 3H75S6X.75 GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU5S6X.5 GV L LC K6pp ATV 3HUS6X. 3 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU4S6X 4 5 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HU55S6X GV L 8 LC K6pp ATV 3HU75S6X 7.5 GV L 5 LC K6pp ATV 3HDS6X 5 GV L3 3 LC D9pp ATV 3HD5S6X 5 NS8HMA 3 LC D9pp () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). () NS8HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. (3) Composition of contactors LC-K6: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact LC-D9/D3/D4: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact (4) Usual control circuit voltages. a.c. control circuit Volts a LC-D 5 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 6 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 4 48 /3 3 3/4 LC-K 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. /63

149 Combinations (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Motor starters Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker, a contactor and an Altivar 3 variable speed drive. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation, and padlocking if required. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. The Altivar 3 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth; it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor. Motor starter for customisable enclosed drive 5466 Variable speed drive Reference Standard power rating of 4-pole 5/6 Hz motors () Circuit-breaker Reference Rating Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference () kw HP A ka Single phase supply voltage: 4 V ATV 3C8M.8.5 GV L8 4 LC K6pp ATV 3C37M.37.5 GV L 6.3 LC K6pp ATV 3C55M GV L4 LC K6pp ATV 3C75M.75 GV L4 LC K6pp ATV 3CUM..5 GV L6 4 LC K6pp ATV 3CU5M.5 GV L 8 LC K6pp ATV 3CUM. 3 GV L 5 LC D9pp 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V ATV 3C37N GV L7.5 5 LC K6pp ATV 3C55N GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3C75N4.75 GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3CUN4..5 GV L LC K6pp ATV 3CU5N4.5 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3CUN4. 3 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3CU3N4 3 3 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3CU4N4 4 5 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). () Usual control circuit voltages. a.c. control circuit Volts a LC-D 5 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 6 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 4 48 /3 3 3/4 LC-K 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. GV L + LC K + ATV 3Cppppp /64

150 Combinations (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Motor starters Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker, a contactor and an Altivar 3 variable speed drive. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation, and padlocking if required. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. The Altivar 3 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth; it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor. Motor starter for drive kit Variable speed drive Reference Standard power rating of 4-pole 5/6 Hz motors () Circuit-breaker Reference Rating Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference () kw HP A ka Single phase supply voltage: 4 V ATV 3K8M.8.5 GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3K37M.37.5 GV L LC K6pp ATV 3K55M GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3K75M.75 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3KUM..5 GV L4 4 LC K6pp ATV 3KU5M.5 GV L 8 LC K6pp ATV 3KUM. 3 GV L 5 LC D9pp 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V ATV 3K37N GV L7.5 5 LC K6pp ATV 3K55N GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3K75N4.75 GV L8 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3KUN4..5 GV L LC K6pp ATV 3KU5N4.5 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3KUN4. 3 GV L4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3KU3N4 3 3 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3KU4N4 4 5 GV L6 4 5 LC K6pp ATV 3KU55N GV L 5 LC D9pp ATV 3KU75N4 7.5 GV L3 3 LC D8pp ATV 3KDN4 5 NS8 HMA 5 LC D3pp ATV 3KD5N4 5 NS8 HMA 5 LC D3pp () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). () Usual control circuit voltages. a.c. control circuit Volts a LC-D 5 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 6 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 4 48 /3 3 3/4 LC-K 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. /65

151 Functions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar PowerSuite for PC welcome screen PowerSuite for Pocket PC identification screen Summary of functions Drive factory setting page /67 Functions of the display and keys page /67 Remote display terminal option page /68 Menu access levels page /68 Menu access code page /68 Operating speed range page /68 Acceleration and deceleration ramp times page /68 Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile page /69 Ramp switching page /69 Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp page /7 Voltage/frequency ratio page /7 Auto-tuning page /7 Switching frequency, noise reduction page /7 Skip frequencies page /7 Speed reference page /7 Analog inputs page /7 Preset speeds page /7 +/- speed page /7 Save reference page /7 Step by step (JOG) page /73 Control and reference channels page /73 Reference switching page /73 Summing inputs page /73 PI regulator page /74 Spooling page /74 Current limit switching page /75 Limiting low speed operating time page /75 Motor switching page /75 Control mode switching page /75 -wire control page /76 3-wire control page /76 Forced local mode page /76 Freewheel stop page /76 Fast stop page /76 DC injection stop page /76 Brake control page /77 Management of limit switch page /77 Monitoring page /77 Fault management page /78 Fault reset page /78 General reset (resets all faults) page /78 Controlled stop on loss of line supply page /78 Stop mode in the event of a fault page /78 Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection page /79 Automatic restart page /79 Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage page /79 Fault relay, unlocking page /79 Operating time reset to zero page /79 Motor thermal protection page /8 Drive thermal protection page /8 R, R relay configuration page /8 AOC/AOV analog outputs page /8 Saving and retrieving the configuration page /8 Function compatibility table page /8 Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /66

152 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Drive factory setting The drive is supplied ready for use in most applications, with the following functions and settings: b Nominal motor frequency: 5 Hz b Motor voltage: 3 V (ATV 3HpppM and M3X), 4 V (ATV 3HpppN4) or 6 V (ATV 3HpppS6X) b Linear ramp times: 3 seconds b Low speed (LSP): Hz, high speed (HSP): 5 Hz b Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp b Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel b Motor thermal current = nominal drive current b Standstill injection braking current =.7 x nominal drive current, for.5 seconds b Constant torque operation, with sensorless flux vector control b Logic inputs: v directions of operation (LI, LI), -wire control v 4 preset speeds (LI3, LI4): LSP (low speed), Hz, 5 Hz, Hz b Analog inputs: v AI speed reference ( + V) v AI(±V)summingofAI v AI3 (4- ma) not configured b Relay R: fault relay b Relay R: not assigned b Analog output AOC: - ma, image of the motor frequency b Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of excessive braking b Switching frequency 4 khz, random frequency Functions of the display and keys Information is displayed in the form of codes or values in four "7-segment" displays Buttons for scrolling through the menus or modifying values 3 ENT : Validation button for entering a menu or confirming the new value selected 4 ESC : Button for exiting the menus (no confirmation) 5 diagnosticledsforthecanopenbus b For ATV 3HppppMA, ATV 3HpppM3XA and ATV 3HpppN4A drives only: 6 Speed reference potentiometer 7 RUN : Local control of motor operation 8 STOP/RESET: Controls motor stopping locally and resets any faults Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /67

153 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset Remote display terminal b Remote display terminal option The remote display terminal can be mounted on the door of a wall-fixing or floorstanding enclosure. It comprises an LCD display with programming and control keys and a switch for locking access to the menus. Drive control keys: v FWD/RV : reversal of the direction of rotation v RUN : motor run command v STOP/RESET : motor stop command or fault reset The speed reference is given by the remote display terminal. Only the freewheel, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the drive/operator terminal link is broken, the drive locks in fault mode. Its subsequent action depends on the control and reference channel programming. Note: protection via customer confidential code has priority over the switch. b Menu access levels Thereare3accesslevels: v Level : access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with the Altivar 8. v Level : access to advanced application functions. v Level 3: access to advanced application functions and management of mixed control modes. b Menu access code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. When access is locked using a code, only the adjustment and monitoring parameters can be accessed. b Operating speed range Used to determine the frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by the machine under actual operating conditions for all applications with or without overspeed. f(hz) HSP LSP V xma 4mA Reference V yma ma LSP: low speed, from to HSP, factory setting HSP: high speed, from LSP to f max., factory setting 5 Hz x: configurable between and ma, factory setting 4 ma y: configurable between 4 and ma, factory setting ma b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics. f(hz) f(hz) 5 5 t t t t Ramp adjustment with PowerSuite for PC Linear acceleration ramp Linear deceleration ramp t: acceleration time t: deceleration time t and t can be set independently between. and s, factory setting: 3 s Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /68

154 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference, following a linear ratio or a preset ratio. v For applications such as material handling, packaging, transportation of people: the use of S ramps takes up mechanical play and eliminates jolts, and limits nonfollowing of speed during rapid transient operation of high inertia machines. v For pumping applications (installation with centrifugal pump and non-return valve): valve closing can be controlled more accurately if U ramps are used. v Selecting linear, S, U or customized profiles will affect both the acceleration and deceleration ramps. S ramps U ramps Customized ramps f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP t t t t t t t t t t t t t t ta ta ta3 ta4 ACC or AC dec or de HSP: high speed t:ramptimeset t =.6 x t The curve coefficient is fixed. HSP: high speed t: ramp time set t =.5 x t The curve coefficient is fixed. HSP: high speed ta: can be set between and % (of ACC or AC) ta: can be set between and (% - ta) (of ACC or AC) ta3: can be set between and % (of dec or de) ta4: can be set between and (% - ta3) (of dec or de) ACC: acceleration ramp time AC: acceleration ramp time dec: deceleration ramp time de: deceleration ramp time b Ramp switching Used to switch acceleration or deceleration ramp times, which can be adjusted separately. Ramp switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a frequency threshold v a combination of logic input and frequency threshold Function suitable for: v material handling with smooth starting and approach v machines with fast steady state speed correction f(hz) HSP AC de Forward or Reverse ACC dec t t LI4 t Acceleration (ACC) and deceleration (dec): - adjustment. to s - factory setting 3 s Acceleration (AC) and deceleration (de): - adjustment. to s - factory setting 5 s HSP: high speed Example of switching using logic input LI4 Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /69

155 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Adjustment of the voltage/frequency ratio with PowerSuite for PC b Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Used to automatically adapt the deceleration ramp if the initial setting is too low when theloadinertiaistakenintoaccount.thisfunctionavoidsthedrivelockinginthe eventofanexcessive braking fault. Function suitable for all applications not requiring precise stopping and not using braking resistors. Automatic adaptation must be cancelled if the machine has position control with stopping on a ramp and a braking resistor installed. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. b Voltage/frequency ratio v Motor and power supply characteristics Used to determine the limit values for the voltage/frequency ratio according to the line supply, the motor and the application. The following values should be set for variable or constant torque applications with or without overspeed: - the base frequency corresponding to the supply, - the nominal motor frequency (in Hz) given on the motor rating plate, - the nominal motor voltage (in V) given on the motor rating plate, - the maximum output frequency of the drive (in Hz). v Type of voltage/frequency ratio Used to adapt the voltage/frequency ratio to the application in order to optimize performance for the following applications: - constant torque applications (machines with average loads operating at low speed) with motors connected in parallel or special motors (e.g.: resistive cage motor): ratio L, - variable torque applications (pumps, fans): ratio P, - machines with heavy loads operating at low speed, machines with fast cycles, with (sensorless) flux vector control: ratio n, - energy saving, for machines with slow speed and torque variations: ratio nld. Voltage is automatically reduced to a minimum according to the necessary torque. U(V) Un L n P Un: Nominal motor voltage frn: Nominal motor frequency frn f(hz) b Auto-tuning Auto-tuning may be performed: v voluntarily by the operator using dialogue tools via local control mode or the serial link v each time the drive is switched on v on each run command v by enabling a logic input Auto-tuning is used to optimize application performance. b Switching frequency, noise reduction The switching frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. The switching frequency is modulated randomly in order to avoid resonance. This functioncanbedisabledifitcausesinstability. High frequency switching of the intermediate DC voltage can be used to supply the motor with a current wave that has a lower harmonic distortion. The switching frequency can be adjusted during operation to reduce the noise generated by the motor. Value:to6kHz,withafactorysettingof4kHz. For all applications which require low motor noise. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /7

156 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b Skip frequencies Used to suppress one or two critical speeds which may be the cause of mechanical resonance. It is possible to prohibit the prolonged operation of the motor on or frequency bands (with a bandwidth of ± Hz), which can be set within the operating range. Function suitable for lightweight machines, bulk product conveyors with unbalanced motor, fans and centrifugal pumps. f(hz) Hz Adjustment of the skip frequency with PowerSuite for Pocket PC Reference Motor speed change depending on the skip frequency reference b Speed reference The speed reference can have different sources depending on the drive configuration: v references provided by 3 analog inputs v the potentiometer reference (for ATV 3pppA drives only) v the +/- speed function via logic input, using the keypad or remote terminal keys v the remote display terminal reference v speed references provided by the communication bus or networks These different sources are managed by programming the reference functions and channels. b Analog inputs There are 3 analog inputs: v voltage inputs: - - V (AI) - ± V (AI) v current input: - X-Y ma (AI3) where X is configurable between and ma, and Y is configurable between 4 and ma b Preset speeds Used to switch preset speed references., 4, 8 or 6 preset speeds can be selected. Enabled by means of,, 3 or 4 logic inputs. The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of. Hz from Hz to 5 Hz. Function suitable for material handling and machines with several operating speeds. LSP f (Hz) 5 The speed obtained with inputs LI3 and LI4 at state is LSP or the speed reference, depending on the level of analog inputs AI, AI and AI3. Factory settings: Adjustment of preset speeds with PowerSuite for PC Forward or Reverse LI LI3 t t t st speed: LSP (low speed or speed reference) nd speed: Hz 3 rd speed: 5 Hz 4 th speed: Hz (high speed) LI4 t Example of operation with 4 preset speeds and logic inputs Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /7

157 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b +/- speed Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of or logic inputs, with or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function). This function is suitable for centralised control of a machine with several sections operating in one direction or for control by a pendant control station of a handling crane with two operating directions. Two types of operation are available: v Use of single action buttons: two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s). The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed, the input assigned to the "- speed" command decreases the speed. Adjustment of the "+/- speed" function with PowerSuite for PC HSP f(hz) Forward or Reverse LSP t t + speed - speed t t Example of "+/- speed" with logic inputs, single action buttons and reference saving v Use of double action buttons (only one logic input assigned to + speed is necessary): Logic inputs: Forward Reverse a b c d a and b: st press c and d: nd press + speed Forward button Reverse button Released (- speed) st press (speed maintained) nd press (+ speed) a a and b c c and d f(hz) HSP LSP LSP HSP t Forward operation nd press st press b a a b a a a a a t Reverse operation nd press st press c d c t LSP: low speed, HSP: high speed Example with double action buttons and logic input Note: this type of +/- speed control is incompatible with 3-wire control b Save reference This function is associated with +/- speed control. Enables the reading and saving of the last speed reference prior to the loss of the run signal or mains supply. The saved reference is applied at the next run signal. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /7

158 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Forward or Reverse f(hz) tm t t b Step by step (JOG) Used for pulse operation with minimum ramp times (. s), limited speed reference and minimum time between pulses. Enabled by a logic input and pulses given by the operating direction command. This function is suitable for machines with product insertion in manual mode (example: gradual movement of the mechanism during maintenance operations). JOG Speed reference: canbeadjustedfromtohz factory setting Hz Example of jog operation t tm: fixed time of.5 s, minimum time between pulses b Control and reference channels There are several control and reference channels which can be independent. Commands (forward, reverse, etc.) and speed references can be sent using the following methods: v terminals (logic and analog inputs) v keypad for ATV 3pppA only (RUN/STOP and potentiometer) v ATV 3 keypad v via the serial link - remote display terminal, - Modbus control word, - CANopen control word. The control and speed reference channels can be separate. Example: speed reference issued by CANopen and commands issued by the remote display terminal. Note: the STOP keys on the keypad and the remote display terminal may retain priority. The summing inputs and PI regulator functions only apply to one reference channel. f(hz) AI AI b Reference switching Switching between speed references can be enabled via: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word Reference is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at, reference is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at. The reference can be switched with the motor running. Forward or Reverse t t LIx COM AI + AI AI3 LIx Example of reference switching t + 4 V Connection diagram for reference switching ± V X-Y (X is adjustable from to ma and Y is adjustable from 4 to ma) b Summing inputs Used to add up or 3 speed references from different sources. The references to be added together are selected from all the possible types of speed reference. Example: Reference sent by AI Reference sent by AI Reference 3 sent by AIP Drive speed reference: reference + reference + reference 3. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /73

159 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 Ramp PI Feedback FBS + Manual reference Auto/man Multiplier Auto Man PIC X RPG RIG X PI inversion PI regulator Ramp if PSP = HSP Ramp ACC DEC ACC: Acceleration DEC: Deceleration FBS: PI feedback multiplication coefficient HSP: High speed PIC: Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator LSP: Low speed RIG: PI regulator integral gain RPG: PI regulator proportional gain PI regulator LSP Reference b PI regulator Used for simple control of a flow rate or a pressure with a sensor which supplies a feedback signal adapted to the drive. This function is suitable for pumping and ventilation applications. v PI reference: - internal regulator reference, adjustable from to, - regulation reference selected from all the possible types of regulation reference, - preset PI references. v or 4 preset PI references, adjustable from to, require the use of or logic inputs respectively. v Manual reference - speed reference selected from all the possible types of speed reference. v PI feedback: - analog input AI, AI or AI3. v Auto/Man: - logic input LI for switching operation to speed reference (Man) or PI regulation (Auto). During operation in automatic mode, it is possible to adapt the process feedback, to correct inverse PI, to adjust the proportional and integral gain and to apply a ramp (time = ACC - DEC) for establishing the PI action on starting and stopping. The motor speed is limited to between LSP and HSP. Note: the PI function is incompatible with the preset speeds and step by step (JOG) functions. The PI reference can also be transmitted on line via the Modbus RS 485 serial link or via the CANopen bus. b Spooling (function only available with ATV 3ppppT drives) Function for winding reels of thread (in textile applications) Spooling drive Winding drive Reel of thread Gearbox Main shaft Motor Thread Gearbox Thread guide Motor Cam The cam speed of rotation must follow a precise profile to ensure steady winding. RUN command t LI or bit Wiring check trc Motor speed Base reference + trh Base reference + trh - qsh Base reference Base reference - trl + qsl Base reference - trl Ramp ACC Ramp. s Ramp dec Ramp. s Start of function End of function When the function is configured, the ramp type is forced to linear ramp. qsl qsh trl trh t t Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /74

160 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar b Current limit switching A nd current limit can be configured between.5 and.5 times the nominal drive current. Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor. Switching between current limits can be enabled via: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word Configuration of current switching with PowerSuite for PC b Limiting low speed operating time The motor is stopped automatically after an operating period at low speed (LSP) with zero reference and run command present. This time can be set between. and seconds ( corresponds to an unlimited time). Factory setting: s. The motor restarts automatically on the ramp when the reference reappears or if the run command is broken and then re-established. This function is suitable for automatic stopping/starting on pressure-regulated pumps. b Motor switching Allows two motors with different powers to be supplied successively by the same drive. Switching must take place with the drive stopped and locked, using an appropriate sequence at the drive output. The function can be used to adapt the motor parameters. The following parameters are switched automatically: v nominal motor voltage v nominal motor frequency v nominal motor current v nominal motor speed v motor cosine Phi v selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor v IR compensation, motor v motor frequency loop gain v motor stability v motor slip compensation Motor thermal protection is disabled by this function. Motor switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word With hoisting applications, this function enables a single drive to be used for vertical and horizontal movements. b Control mode switching Control channel switching provides a choice of operating modes. Switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /75

161 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 b -wire control Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact. Enabled by means of or logic inputs (one or two directions). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. 3 operating modes are possible: v detection of the state of the logic inputs v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority over reverse. Altivar 3 control terminals 4 V LI LIx LI: Forward LIx: Reverse f(hz) Wiring diagram for -wire control Stop t t b 3-wire control Used to control the operating direction and stopping by means of pulsed contacts. Enabled by means of or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. Forward t Altivar 3 control terminals 4 V LI LI LIx LI: Stop LI: Forward LIx: Reverse Reverse Example of operation with 3-wire control t Wiring diagram for 3-wire control b Forced local mode Forced local mode imposes control via the terminals or operator terminal and prohibits all other control modes. The following references and commands are available for forced local mode: v references AI, or AI, or AI3 and control via logic inputs v reference and control via RUN/STOP keys and potentiometer (ATV 3pppAdrives only) v reference and control via the remote display terminal The changeover to forced local mode is enabled by a logic input b Freewheel stop Stops the motor by resistive torque only if the motor power supply is cut. A freewheel stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop command as a freewheel stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input. b Fast stop Used to achieve a braked stop with an acceptable deceleration ramp time (divided by to ) for the drive/motor unit to avoid locking on an excessive braking fault. Used for conveyors with emergency stop electrical braking. A fast stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop as a fast stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input. Configuration of stop types with PowerSuite for Pocket PC b DC injection stop Used to brake (at low speed) high inertia fans, or to maintain torque on stopping in the case of fans located in an airflow. A DC injection stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop as a DC injection stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input The DC value and the standstill braking time are adjustable. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /76

162 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Speed reference Brake release current Relay or logic output Motor current T Speed reference Brake engage frequency LI forward or reverse State of brake Accessible settings: t: Brake release time delay t: Brake engage time delay Brake control t Engaged Released Engaged Monitoring the different parameters with PowerSuite for PC Monitoring the different parameters with the oscilloscope function in PowerSuite for PC t t t t t t b Brake control Used to manage control of an electromagnetic brake in synchronization with the starting and stopping of the motor to avoid jolts and load veering. The brake control sequence is managed by the drive. Values that can be adjusted for releasing the brake: current threshold and time delay. Values that can be adjusted for engaging the brake: frequency threshold and time delay. Enabled: by relay logic output R or logic output AOC assigned to brake control. Function suitable for material handling applications with movements equipped with electromagnetic brakes (hoisting) and machines requiring a parking brake (unbalanced machines). v Principle: - Vertical lifting movement: Maintain motor torque in an upward direction when the brake is being released and engaged, in order to hold the load, and start smoothly as soon as the brake is released. - Horizontal lifting movement: Synchronizes brake release with the build-up torque on starting and brake engage at zero speed on stopping, in order to prevent jerking. Recommended settings for brake control for a vertical lifting application (for a horizontal lifting application set the current threshold to zero): - Brake release current: Adjust the brake release current to the nominal current indicated on the motor. If, during testing, the torque is insufficient, increase the brake release current (the maximum value is imposed by the drive). - Acceleration time: For lifting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than.5 seconds. Ensure that the drive does not change to current limiting. The same recommendation applies for deceleration. Note: For a lifting movement, a braking resistor should be used. Ensure that the settings and configurations selected cannot cause a drop or a loss of control of the lifted load. - Brake release time delay t: Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release. - Brake engage frequency: Settotwicethenominalslipthenadjustaccordingtotheresult. - Brake engage time delay t: Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage. b Management of limit switch Used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (with or operating directions). Each limit (forward, reverse) is associated with a logic input. The type of stop that occurs on detection of a limit can be configured as normal, freewheel or fast. Following a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only. b Monitoring The following data can be displayed: v frequency reference v internal PI reference v frequency reference (absolute value) v output frequency applied to the motor (value signed in two s complement) v output value in customer units v current in the motor v motor power: % = nominal power v line voltage v motor thermal state: %: nominal thermal state, 8%: motor overload threshold v drive thermal state: %: nominal thermal state, 8%: drive overload threshold v motor torque: % = nominal torque v last fault v operating time v auto-tuning status v configuration and state of logic inputs v configuration of analog inputs. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /77

163 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Fault management with PowerSuite for PC b Fault management There are different modes of operation on a resettable fault: v freewheel stop v the drive switches to the fallback speed v the drive maintains the speed at which it was operating when the fault occurred until the fault disappears v stop on ramp v fast stop The detected resettable faults are as follows: v drive overheating v motor overheating v CANopen bus fault v Modbus serial link failure v external faults v loss of 4- ma signal. b Fault reset Used to clear the last fault by means of a logic input. The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal power-up. Resets the following faults: overvoltage, overspeed, external fault, drive overheating, motor phase loss, DC bus overvoltage, loss of 4- ma reference, load veering, motor overload if the thermal state is less than %, serial link fault. "Line supply undervoltage" and "line supply phase loss" faults are reset automatically when the line supply is restored. Function suitable for applications where the drives are difficult to access, for example on moving parts in material handling systems. b General reset (resets all faults) This function can be used to inhibit all faults, including thermal protection (forced operation) and may cause irreparable damage to the drive. Function suitable for applications where a restart can be vital (conveyor in a furnace, smoke extraction station, machine with hardening products which need to be removed). The function is enabled by a logic input. Fault monitoring is active if the logic input is at state. All faults are reset on a change of state of the logic input. b Controlled stop on loss of line supply Used to control motor stopping on a loss of line supply. Function suitable for material handling, machines with high inertia, continuous product processing machines. Type of stop possible: v locking of the drive and freewheel stop v stop which uses the mechanical inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible v stop on ramp v fast stop (depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive). b Stop mode in the event of a fault Thetypeofstopthatoccursondetectionofafaultcanbeconfiguredasnormal, freewheel or fast for the following faults: v external fault (detection enabled by a logic input or a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word) v motor phase loss fault If a downstream contactor is being used between the drive and the motor, the motor phase loss fault should be inhibited. Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /78

164 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection ( catch on the fly ) Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events, provided the run command is still present: v loss of line supply or simple switch off v fault reset or automatic restart v freewheel stop On disappearance of the event, the effective speed of the motor is detected in order to restart on a ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. The speed detection time can be up to s depending on the initial deviation. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. This function is suitable for machines where the speed loss is negligible during the time over which the mains supply is lost (machines with high inertia), fans and pumps driven by residual flow, etc. b Automatic restart Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart. This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer wait periods of s, 5 s, s then minute for the rest. The whole restart procedure can last anywhere from 5 minutes to an unlimited time. If the drive has not restarted after the configured time, it will lock and the procedure is abandoned until it has been switched off and on again. The faults permitting this restart are: v line supply overvoltage v motor thermal overload v drive thermal overload v DC bus overvoltage v failure of a line supply phase v external fault v loss of 4- ma reference v CANopen bus fault v Modbus serial link fault v line supply voltage too low. For this fault, the function is always active, even if it is not configured. For these types of fault, the relay configured as a fault relay remains activated if the function is configured. The speed reference and the direction of operation must be maintained for this function. This function is suitable for machines or installations in continuous operation or without monitoring, and where a restart will not endanger equipment or personnel in any way. b Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage The line voltage monitoring threshold is lowered to 5% of the motor voltage. In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed b Fault relay, unlocking The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty. It contains a C/O common point contact. The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways: v by powering down until the ON LED extinguishes, then switching the power back on v by assigning a logic input to the reset faults function v by the automatic restart function, if it has been configured b Operating time reset to zero Thedriveoperatingtimecanberesettozero. Configuration of the fault relay with PowerSuite for Pocket PC Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /79

165 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 3 b Motor thermal protection Indirect motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its theoretical temperature rise. Thermal protection can be adjusted from. to.5 times the nominal drive current. This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled motors. ( h 45) t 35 5 Hz Trip time in seconds ( 6 mn),7,8,9,,,3,4,5,6 Motor current/ith Motor thermal protection curves b Drive thermal protection Thermal protection, by a PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module, ensures that the drive is protected in the event of poor ventilation or excessive ambient temperatures. Locks the drive in the event of a fault. t 5 3 Trip time in seconds 6 6,,,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 Motor current/drive In b R/R relay configuration The following states are signalled when the relay is powered on: v drive fault v drive running v frequency threshold reached v high speed reached v current threshold reached v frequency reference reached v motor thermal threshold reached v brake sequence (R only) Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages /58 to /6 /8

166 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Configuration of AOC/AOV outputs with PowerSuite for PC b AOC/AOV analog outputs The same data is available on analog outputs AOC and AOV. The following assignments are possible: v motor current v motor frequency v motor torque v power supplied by the drive v drive fault v frequency threshold reached v high speed reached v current threshold reached v frequency reference reached v motor thermal threshold reached v brake sequence. The adjustment of analog outputs AOC/AOV is used to modify the characteristics of the current analog output AOC or the voltage analog output AOV. AOC: can be set as - ma or 4- ma AOV: can be set at - V. b Saving and retrieving the configuration A configuration can be saved to the EEPROM. This function is used to store a configuration in addition to the current configuration. Retrieving this configuration clears the current configuration. Function compatibility table Functions Summing inputs +/- speed Summing inputs b Configurable I/O Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. Stop functions have priority over run commands. The selection of functions is limited: - by the number of drive I/O - by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another. +/- speed Management Preset of speeds limit switch A PI regulator Jog operation A Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop Management of limit switch Preset speeds PI regulator X A Jog operation Brake sequence X X DC injection stop Fast stop A A Freewheel stop X X Incompatible functions Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time) Compatible functions X The arrow indicates which function has priority Not applicable A Example: the "Freewheel stop" function has priority over the "Fast stop" function Presentation: pages /6 to /33 Characteristics: pages /34 to /37 References: pages /38 to /4 Dimensions: pages /5 to /57 Schemes: pages/58to/6 /8

167 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 ESC ENT FWO REV RUN stop reset /8

168 FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar Altivar 38 ENERGY Applications The Altivar 38 is a frequency inverter for three-phase asynchronous motors powered by a three-phase supply 38 V % to 46 V + % or 48 V + 5% in the power range.75kwto35kw. The Altivar 38 has been designed for state-of-the-art applications in heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) in industrial and commercial buildings: b ventilation b air conditioning b pumping The Altivar 38 can reduce operating costs in buildings by optimizing energy consumption whilst improving user comfort. Its numerous integrated options enable it to be adapted to and incorporated into electrical installations and sophisticated control systems. The need for electromagnetic compatibility was taken into account at the outset of designing the drive. Depending on the drive rating, filters and chokes are either built-in or available as optional accessories. Functions The Altivar 38 ( ) is supplied ready for use in pumping and ventilation applications. It comprises a terminal ( ) which can be used to modify programming, adjustment, control or monitoring functions in order to adapt and customize the application to meet individual customer requirements. b Specific functions for pumping/ventilation: v Energy saving v Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection (catch on the fly) v Adaptation of current limiting according to speed v Faster/slower, preset speeds v Integrated PI control, with preset PI references v Electricity and service hours meter v Motor noise reduction b Protection functions: v Motor and fan thermal protection via PTC thermal probe v Protection against overloads and overcurrents in continuous operation v Machine mechanical protection via jump frequency function v Protection via multiple fault management and configurable alarms b Easy to integrate into control systems: v 4 logic inputs, relay outputs, analogue inputs and analogue output v Plug in I/O connectors v Display of electrical variables and operating indicators v An RS 485 multidrop serial link with Modbus protocol as standard in the drive. This serial link can be used to connect PLCs ( 6 ), a PC, communication gateways or one of the available programming tools. Options b PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions: 3 solutions are available, with plain text display in 5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian) and configuration memory: v Pocket PC for PowerSuite ( 3 ) v PowerSuite software workshop for PC ( 4 ) v Magelis display unit ( 5 ). b Customizing the application: v I/O extension cards ( 8 ) v Application cards ( 8 ): pump switching, multi-motor function, multiple parameter settings and cycles v Communication cards for bus or network ( 8 ): METASYS N, Ethernet, Fipio, Uni-Telway/Modbus, Modbus Plus, AS-Interface, Profibus DP, INTERBUS, CANopen, DeviceNet v Communication module for LonWorks bus ( 7 ). Standard versions The Altivar 38 is available in two versions for integration into machines. b Drive with heatsink b Altivar 38 ENERGY ready-assembled drive with a power rating between 3 and 75 kw. TheIP55enclosureisequippedwithadrivewithacoolingsystemandaVarioswitch disconnector. A slot is provided for an additional contactor. The drives are supplied withabuilt-inlinechoke. This enclosure can be installed next to the motor. Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 References: pages /88 to /89 Dimensions: pages /96 to /99 Schemes: pages / to /3 /83

169 Characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 3 Environment characteristics Conforming to standards Altivar 38 drives have been developed to conform to the strictest national and international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN, NFC, VDE), in particular: p Low voltage EN 578 p EMC immunity: - IEC -4-/EN 6-4- level 3 - IEC -4-3/EN level 3 - IEC -4-4/EN level 4 - IEC -4-5/EN level 3 - IEC 8-3/EN 68-3, environments and p EMC, radiated and conducted emissions: - IEC 8-3/EN 68-3, environments: (industrial supply) and (public supply), restricted distribution - EN 55 class A (drives with built-in radio interference filters) - EN 55 class B, with additional filters e marking The drives have been designed to meet the requirements of the European low voltage (73/3/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives. Altivar 38 drives are therefore permitted to carry the e European Union mark. Product certifications DNV (up to 75 kw), UL and CSA Degree of protection Conforming to EN 578 ATV 38HU8N4 to HD3N4 and IP and IP 4 on upper part ATV 38HD5N4p to HD79N4p drives ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X drives IP on lower part (), IP on other sides Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC ATV 38HU8N4 to HD3N4 and ATV 38HD5N4p to HD79N4p drives ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X drives.5 mm peak from to 3 Hz gnfrom3tohz.6gnfromto55hz gnfrom55to5hz Shock resistance Conforming to IEC All ratings 5 gn for ms Maximum ambient pollution Conforming to UL 58C ATV 38HD5N4 to HD79N4 and HD5N4X to HD79N4X drives Conforming to IEC 664- and EN 578 ATV 38HU8N4 to HD3N4 and ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X drives Maximum relative humidity Conforming to IEC % without condensation or dripping water Ambient air temperature around the device Level 3 Level Storage All ratings C Operation ATV 38HU8N4 to HU9N4 drives C without derating Up to + 6 with current derating of. % per C above 5 C ATV 38HDN4 to HD3N4 and ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X drives ATV 38HD5N4 to HD79N4 and HD5N4X to HD79N4X drives C without derating Up to + 5 with current derating of. % per C above 4 C C without derating Up to + 6 with ventilation kit, current derating of. % per C above 4 C Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Operating position Vertical Drive characteristics Output frequency range Hz...5 Configurable switching Without derating, in continuous ATV 38HU8N4 to HD46N4 khz frequency operation and HD5N4X to HD46N4X drives ATV 38D54N4 to HD79N4 khz.5-- and HD54N4X to HC33N4X drives Without derating with ATV 38HU8N4 to HD3N4 drives khz 8--6 intermittent operating cycle or ATV 38HD5N4 to HD46N4 and khz 8- with derating by one power HD5N4X to HD46N4X drives rating in continuous operation ATV 38HD54N4 to HD79N4 and khz 4-8 HD54N4X to HD79N4X drives ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X drives khz 4 Speed range... Transient overtorque % of the nominal motor torque (typical value at ± %) for 6 s Braking torque 3 % of the nominal motor torque without braking resistor (typical value) for low power ratings Principle of motor control Pulse width modulation (PWM) () A protection device to prevent direct contact by personnel must be added. Presentation: pages /8 and /83 References: page /88 Dimensions: pages /96 to /99 Schemes: pages / to /3 /84

170 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Electrical characteristics Power supply a.c. voltage V ATV 38ppppN4 and ppppn4x drives: 38 - % to 46 + % or %, three-phase Frequency Hz 5±5%or6±5% Output voltage Maximum voltage equal to line supply voltage Electrical isolation Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, power supplies) Available internal supplies Protected against short-circuits and overloads: - x + V (, + %) supply for the reference potentiometer ( kω), maximum current ma - x + 4 V supply (min. V, max. 3 V) for control inputs, maximum current ma Analogue inputs AI analogue voltage input AI: - V, impedance 3 kω analogue current input AI: - ma, impedance Ω (reassignable to X-Y ma by programming X and Y with a precision of. ma) Frequency resolution at analogue reference:. Hz for Hz ( bits), precision ± %, linearity ±.5 % of the maximum output frequency Sampling time: 4 ms max. Other analogue inputs: see option cards Analogue output AO Assignable analogue output - ma, max. load impedance 5 Ω (reassignable to X-Y ma by programming X and Y from to with a precision of. ma) Resolution.4 ma (9 bits), linearity ±. ma, precision ±. ma Max. sampling time ms Other analogue inputs: see option cards Logic inputs LI 4 assignable logic inputs, impedance 3.5 kω, compatible with PLC level, standard IEC 65A-68. Maximum length of shielded cable: m + 4 V power supply (min. V, max. 3 V). State if < 5 V, state if V Sampling time: ms max. Other logic inputs: see option cards Logic outputs relay logic outputs R (fault relay) and R (assignable) C/O contact protected against overvoltages (relay R) N/O contact protected against overvoltages (relay R) Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 4 V Maximum switching capacity: - on resistive load (cos ϕ =):5Afora 5 V or c 3 V - on inductive load (cos ϕ =.4 and L/R = 7 ms):.5 A for a 5 V or c 3 V. Other outputs: see option cards Maximum connection capacity of I/O.5 mm (AWG 4) Communication RS 485 multidrop serial link with Modbus protocol integrated into the drive Transmission speed: 96 or 9 bps, no parity Use: - connecting a terminal (option) or - connecting a microprocessor card or - connecting a PC or a pocket PC (options) or - connecting one or more PLCs Acceleration and deceleration ramps Braking to a standstill Main protection and safety features of the drive Ramp profiles can be selected: linear, S or U. Possibility of ramp ranges which can be switched via frequency threshold or logic input. Can be adjusted separately between.5 and s (precision. s) Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp times if the braking capacity is exceeded (configurable option) By d.c. injection: - by a signal on an assignable logic input - automatically on stopping as soon as the frequency drops below. Hz, for a time which can be set between and 3 s or alternately set - continuous Short-circuit protection: - between output phases - between output phases and earth - on internal supply outputs Thermal protection against excessive overheating and overcurrents Mains undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits Loss of supply phase safety circuit (prevents single phase operation of 3-phase drives) Motor protection Thermal protection integrated into the drive via continuous calculation of I t taking the speed into account: - the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is powered down. - the function can be modified via the terminal or by using the PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions, depending on the type of motor (force-cooled or self-cooled). Protection against motor phase breaks Protection via PTC probes with option card Insulation resistance to earth MΩ > 5 (electrical isolation) at c 5 V Dielectric strength V c 83 earth/power a control/power Presentation: pages /8 and /83 References: page /88 Dimensions: pages /96 to /99 Schemes: pages / to /3 /85

171 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for both force-cooled and self-cooled motors. The only difference is in the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed. T/Tn,55,5,,,95 3,75,5 4, N (Hz) Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque 3 Transient overtorque 4 Torque in overspeed at constant power Caution: check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the manufacturer. Motor thermal protection The Altivar 38 drive features motor thermal protection designed specifically for selfcooled or forced-cooled variable speed motors. This motor thermal protection is designed for a maximum ambient temperature of 4 C around the motor. If the temperature around the motor exceeds 4 C, thermal protection should be provided directly by thermistor probes integrated into the motor using one of the available option cards. Presentation: pages /8 and /83 References: page /88 Dimensions: pages /96 to /99 Schemes: pages / to /3 /86

172 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Special uses Switching the motor at the drive output Thedrivecanbeswitchedwhenlockedorunlocked.Ifthedriveisswitchedon-thefly (drive locked), the motor is controlled and accelerates until it reaches the reference speed smoothly following the acceleration ramp. The "flying restart" must be configured for this type of use and the "loss of motor phase" protection function must be disabled. Example: breaking of downstream contactor Typical applications: breaking safety circuit at drive outputs, "bypass" function, switching of motors connected in parallel N t t KM t Altivar 38 M KM t t: deceleration without ramp t: acceleration with ramp Operation with intermittent cycle and high switching frequency If the operating conditions are intermittent and the maximum cumulative running time is 36 s per 6 s cycle (load factor 6 %), it is possible to operate at a high switching frequency without derating the power. Switching frequencies (in khz): b 8--6 for ATV 38HU8N4 to HD3N4 drives. b 8- for ATV 38HD5N4p to HD46N4p drives. b 4 for ATV 38HD54N4p to HC33N4X drives. Connecting motors in parallel Altivar 38 l4 Calculating the drive rating: In drive > In + In =...Inx l l lx In In Inx M M Mx The nominal current of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the motors to be controlled. In this case, provide external thermal protection for each motor using thermal probes or relays. If the number of motors connected in parallel is u 3, it is advisable to install an output filter between the drive and the motors or to reduce the switching frequency. If several motors are used in parallel, there are possible scenarios: - the motors have equal power ratings, in which case the torque characteristics will remain optimised after the drive has been configured, - the motors have different power ratings, in which case the drive configuration will be incompatible for the motors with the lowest power ratings and the overtorque at low speed will be considerably reduced. Ensure that the cables are the correct length. As the leakage currents are proportional to the total length of the cable between the drive and the motors, ensure L y mbyl=l+l+lx+l4. For longer lengths, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Presentation: pages /8 and /83 References: page /88 Dimensions: pages /96 to /99 Schemes: pages / to /3 /87

173 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Variable torque applications ( % Tn) 3 ATV 38HU8N4 ATV 38HD8N4 3-phase supply voltage: V 5/6 Hz Motor Power () Line supply () Line current at 4 V Altivar 38 Nominal drive current Max. transient current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load (4) Reference With integral EMC filters No EMC filters Weight kw A A A W kg ATV 38HU8N ATV 38HU9N ATV 38HU4N ATV 38HU54N ATV 38HU7N ATV 38HU9N ATV 38HDN ATV 38HD6N ATV 38HD3N4 5. 8, ATV 38HD5N4 34. ATV 38HD5N4X ATV 38HD8N4 34. ATV 38HD8N4X ATV 38HD33N4 34. ATV 38HD33N4X ATV 38HD46N4 34. ATV 38HD46N4X ATV 38HD54N4 57. ATV 38HD54N4X ATV 38HD64N4 57. ATV 38HD64N4X ATV 38HD79N4 57. ATV 38HD79N4X (5) ATV 38HCN4X (5) 3 75 ATV 38HC3N4X (5) ATV 38HC5N4X (5) ATV 38HC9N4X (5) ATV 38HC3N4X (5) ATV 38HC5N4X (5) ATV 38HC8N4X (5) ATV 38HC3N4X (5) ATV 38HC33N4X 68. () Value indicated on the motor rating plate. These power levels are for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive ( or 4 khz depending on the rating) in continuous operation without derating. For switching frequencies above this level, the drive must be in intermittent operation or it must be set one rating lower (see special uses on the previous pages). () The prospective short-circuit current at 4 V is 5 ka for ATV 38HU8N4 to HU9N4 drive ratings and ka for ATV 38HD5N4p to HC33N4X drive ratings. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive in continuous operation ( or 4 Hz, depending on the rating). (5) Line chokes must be used if the prospective short-circuit line current is greater than ka. The current values given include the addition of a line choke. ATV 38HC9N4X Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 and /85 Dimensions: pages /96 to /99 Schemes: pages / to /3 /88

174 Presentation, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: dialogue Operator terminal The removable operator terminal fits into a designated slot on the front panel of the drive. The operator terminal is supplied with the drive or can be ordered separately. The operator terminal can be used: - in 5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian), - to control, adjust and configure the drive, - for visible remote signalling, - to save and download configurations (4 files can be saved). Its maximum operating temperature is 6 C. Display (backlit) FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset Flashing: indicates the selected direction of rotation Steady: indicates the direction of motor rotation LOC Indicates control via the display module PROG Appears in setup and programming mode Flashing: indicates that a value has been modified but not saved 4 digits visible at 5 m: displays numeric values and codes One line of 6 characters: displays messages in plain text The keys are used: To adjust and configure the drive To control the drive Description The removable operator terminal can be used remotely, mounted on an enclosure door, using this kit. Description Reference Weight kg Kit comprising: VW3 A cable fitted with connectors, length 3 m - seals and screws for IP 65 mounting on an enclosure door - installation guide See pages 3/ and 3/3. This kit can be used to connect the drive to PLCs, operator terminals, etc., via the RS 485 multidrop serial link. The kit is connected instead of the operator terminal (the two cannot be used simultaneously). Description Reference Weight kg Connection kit for RS 485 comprising: VW3 A x 3 m cable with male 9-way SUB-D connector and male 5-way SUB-D connector - installation guide See pages /4 and /4. See pages /4 and /43. Reference (if ordered separately) Weight kg Operator terminal VW3 A58. Kit for remote operator terminal PowerSuite software workshop Connection kit for RS 485 I/O extension cards Communication options Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 and /85 Dimensions: pages /99 /89

175 Presentation, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: accessories VW3 A5883 Control card fan kit The fan kit enables the drive to operate at an ambient temperature of 6 C, for example if it is mounted in an IP 54 enclosure. The circulation of air around the electronic cards prevents the formation of hot spots. This kit is mounted on the upper part of the drive. It is powered by the drive. The kit consists of: b a fan subassembly, b mounting accessories. For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 38HU8N4, HU9N4, HU4N4 VW3 A ATV 38HU54N4, HU7N4, HU9N4 VW3 A ATV 38HDN4, HD6N4, HD3N4 VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4, HD8N4, HD33N4, HD46N4 ATV 38HD5N4X, HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X ATV 38HD54N4, HD64N4, HD79N4 ATV 38HD54N4X, HD64N4X, HD79N4X VW3 A5885. VW3 A5886. NEMA type kit (IP protection for mounting outside a wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure) The kit permits the connection of cables conforming to the NEMA type standard. The kit will provide IP protection if the drive is mounted directly on a wall and not inside a wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure. This kit is mounted on the lower part of the drive. The kit consists of: b a cover made up of two metal parts, b mounting accessories. For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 38HU8N4, HU9N4, HU4N4 VW3 A ATV 38HU54N4, HU7N4, HU9N4 VW3 A ATV 38HDN4, HD6N4 VW3 A ATV 38HD3N4 VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4, HD8N4, HD33N4, HD46N4 VW3 A ATV 38HD54N4, HD64N4, HD79N4 VW3 A Dimensions: page /96 /9

176 Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: line chokes Presentation VW3 A665p Line chokes can be used to provide improved protection against overvoltages on the line supply and to reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive. The recommended chokes are used to limit the line current. The use of line chokes is recommended in particular under the following circumstances: b Line supply with significant interference from other equipment (interference, overvoltages) b Line supply with voltage imbalance between phases >.8% of the nominal voltage b Line with very low impedance (in the vicinity of power transformers times more powerful than the drive rating) b Large number of frequency converters on the same line in order to reduce the line current b Use of cos ϕ correction capacitors or a power factor correction unit. ATV 38HD5N4 (8.5 kw) to HD79N4 (75 kw) and ATV 38HD5N4X (8.5 kw) to HD79N4X (75 kw) drives have a built-in line choke which limits the line current to the value of the nominal current of the motor. VW3 A685p Characteristics Chokes VW3 A665 to VW3 A6653 VW3 A6654 VW3 A685p Conforming to standards EN 578 (VDE 6 level high energy overvoltages on the line supply) IEC 676 (with HD 398) Voltage drop Between 3 and 5 % of the supply voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. Degree of protection Choke IP IP IP Terminals IP IP References Drive Choke Prospective line Isc Line current without choke at 4 V Line current with choke Value of the choke Nominal current Loss Reference Weight ka A A mh A W kg 3-phase supply voltage: 38 V - %...46 V + % ATV 38HU8N VW3 A665.5 ATV 38HU9N VW3 A665.5 ATV 38HU4N VW3 A ATV 38HU54N VW3 A ATV 38HU7N VW3 A ATV 38HU9N VW3 A ATV 38HDN VW3 A ATV 38HD6N VW3 A ATV 38HD3N VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4p () ATV 38HD8N4p () ATV 38HD33N4p () ATV 38HD46N4p () ATV 38HD54N4p () ATV 38HD64N4p () ATV 38HD79N4p () ATV 38HCN4X 56 (). 6 VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X 9 () VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X 9 (). 35 VW3 A ATV 38HC9N4X 79 () VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X 347 () VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X, 384 () VW3 A ATV 38HC8N4X ATV 38HC3N4X, 433 () VW3 A ATV 38HC33N4X () The line choke is integrated into these drives. () The addition of a line choke is recommended in particular for these drive ratings. The current values given include the addition of a line choke. Dimensions: page /97 /9

177 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: radio interference input filters 3 Presentation VW3 A6843 VW3 A68465 Function b Note about built-in filters: ATV 38HU8N4 to HD79N4 drives have a built-in radio interference filter to meet EMC "product" standards for speed drives IEC 8-3 and EN Compliance with these standards is sufficient to meet the requirements of the European EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) directive. b Additional input filters: The additional radio interference input filters enable the drives to meet more stringent requirements. These filters are designed to reduce emissions conducted on the line supply below the limits of standards EN 55 class A or EN 55 class B. They can be added to the following drives: v ATV 38HU8N4 to ATV 38 D3N4 which already have a built-in filter, if the motor cableismorethan5mlong, v ATV 38HD5N4p to ATV 38 D79N4p (), available with or without built-in filters, if themotorcableismorethan5mlong, v ATV 38HCN4X to ATV 38HC33N4X without built-in filters. Additional input filters should be installed on the line supply, upstream of the drive, if the surrounding environment is subject to electromagnetic interference and radioelectric frequencies above 5 khz. VW3 A584 to VW3 A5848 filters can be installed on ATV 38Hpppp drives. They act as supports for the drives and are fixed to them via tapped holes. VW3 A684 to VW3 A6843 and VW3 A6845, A68435 and A68465 filters should be installed next to the drives. The motor cables should be shielded and not exceed the maximum length given in the reference table. For the filter to operate efficiently, the installation conditions must be carefully respected. Use according to the type of mains supply The built-in filters are compatible with IT connection (impeding or isolated neutral) up to 46 V. They help to attenuate interference even in conditions not defined by the EMC standard. These additional input filters may only be used on TN (connected to neutral) and TT (neutral to earth) type supplies. They are not permitted on IT (impedance or isolated neutral) supplies. () If EMC conformance is not required, replace p with an X in the drive reference. Characteristics Filters VW3 A584p VW3 A684pp Conforming to standards EN 33 Degree of protection IP and IP 4 on upper part IP Maximum relative humidity 93 % without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC Maximum operating temperature Operation C , up to + 55 with current derating of % per C above 45 C Storage C Maximum operating altitude Without derating m (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Dimensions: page /98 Schemes: page / /9

178 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: radio interference input filters References For drives Filters Maximum length of motor cable () EN 55 class A EN 55 class B Nominal filter current Reference m m A kg 3-phase supply voltage: 38 V - %...46 V + % 5-6Hz ATV 38HU8N4, HU9N4, HU4N4 5 5 VW3 A ATV 38HU54N4, HU7N4, HU9N4 5 5 VW3 A ATV 38HDN4, HD6N VW3 A5844. ATV 38HD3N VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4 5 VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4X 5 5 VW3 A ATV 38HD8N4 5 VW3 A ATV 38HD8N4X 5 5 VW3 A ATV 38HD33N4, HD46N4 8 VW3 A ATV 38HD33N4X, HD46N4X 5 8 VW3 A ATV 38HD54N4, HD64N4, HD79N4, 6 VW3 A5848. ATV 38HD54N4X, HD64N4X, HD79N4X 5 6 VW3 A5848. For drives Filters Maximum length of motor cable () With motor choke Without motor choke Weight Nominal Loss Reference Weight filter current m m A W kg Supply voltage: 4 V (± 5 %) ATV 38HCN4X 4 7 VW3 A684 () 5. ATV 38HC3N4X and HC5N4X VW3 A684 () 5.5 ATV 38HC9N4X VW3 A684 () 5.5 ATV 38HC3N4X, HC5N4X, HC8N4X, HC3N4X and VW3 A6843 () 6. HC33N4X Supply voltage: 44 V...46 V (± 5 %) ATV 38HCN4X VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X, HC5N4X and HC9N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X, HC5N4X, HC8N4X, HC3N4X and HC33N4X VW3 A () The length of the shielded cables connecting the motor to the drive is limited. If motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account. The limits are given as examples only as they vary depending on the interference capacity of the motors and the cables used. ATV 38HU8N4 to ATV 38HD79N4p drives: cable length limits given for a switching frequency between.5 and khz. ATV 38HCN4X to ATV 38HC33N4X drives: cable length limits given for a modulation frequency of.5 khz. They should be multiplied by.6 for a frequency of 5 khz and by.3 for khz. If the motor cable is longer, the addition of a motor choke enables the length to be multiplied by.5, and the use of a single cable with a larger cross-section instead of several cables in parallel enables it to be multiplied by.5 or if it is not shielded. In this case the radiated emissions are not limited. () Filters VW3 A684 to 43 have parts: the line choke should be mounted between them. Dimensions: page /98 Schemes: page / /93

179 Presentation, principle, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: output filters and motor chokes Presentation Principle LR filter cell This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3resistors. Byinsertinganoutputfilterbetweenthedriveandthemotor,itispossibleto: dv b Limit dt to 5 V/µs at4v. b Limit overvoltages to on the motor terminals to V at 4 V. b Filter interference caused by opening a contactor placed between the filter and the motor. b Reduce the motor earth leakage current. The offer comprises three types of filters and motor chokes. LC filter cell This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3 capacitors. Altivar 38 LR filter U V W M 3 Altivar 38 LC filter U V W 3 C C C Choke + capacitor combination This combination comprises 3 capacitors installed in a deltaconnectioninajunctionboxtobeconnectedtoa VW3 A665p 3-phase line choke. Motor choke Overvoltages on the motor terminals can be limited by inserting an output choke between the drive and the motor. This is recommended for motor cable lengths over: - 5 m (shielded cables) or m (unshielded cables) for ATV 38HU8N4 to ATV 38HD79N4p drives, - 5 m (shielded cables) or 8 m (unshielded cables) for ATV 38HCN4X to ATV 38HC33N4X drives. Motor chokes U Motor chokes Altivar 38 V W Altivar 38 M 3 C C C Capacitors Characteristics () LR filter cells () LC filter cells Chokes + capacitors combinations VW3 A664p VW3 A665p + VW3 A664 Motor chokes VW3 A665p Drive switching frequency khz or4 or4 4 max. Length of motor cable Shielded cables m y 8 y y 5 y 4 y y (3) Unshielded cables m y 8 y 4 y y y (3) Degree of protection IP IP IP IP IP IP IP VW3 A6855p () Filter performance is ensured if the cable lengths between the motor and the drive given in the above table are not exceeded. If motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account. If a cable longer than that recommended is used, the filters may overheat. () For frequencies greater than 4 khz or cable lengths longer than m, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) See page /95. Dimensions: pages /97 and /98 Schemes: page / /94

180 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Options: output filters and motor chokes VW3 A68553 LR filter cells For drives Nominal current Loss Reference Weight A W kg ATV 38HU8N4 to HU7N4 5 VW3 A ATV 38HU9N4 6 8 VW3 A ATV 38HDN4 to HD3N4 33 VW3 A LC filter cells For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 38HD5N4 to HD33N4, VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4X to HD33N4X ATV 38HD46N4 to HD64N4 ATV 38HD46N4X to HD64N4X VW3 A Chokes () + capacitors combination For drives Description Reference Weight kg ATV 38HD5N4 to HD46N4 ATV 38HD5N4X to HD46N4X ATV 38HD54N4 to HD79N4 ATV 38HD54N4X to HD79N4X Motor chokes Motor chokes VW3 A Capacitors () VW3 A664.5 Motor chokes VW3 A Capacitors () VW3 A664.5 For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 38HD3N4 to HD46N4 VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4X to HD46N4X ATV 38HD54N4 to HD79N4 ATV 38HD54N4X to HD79N4X VW3 A For drives Maximum length of motor cable (3) Unshielded Shielded Nominal current Max. loss Reference Weight m m A W kg Power supply voltage 4 V ± 5 % ATV 38HCN4X VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC9N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC8N4X ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC33N4X Power supply voltage 44 V - % 46 V + % ATV 38HCN4X VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC9N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC8N4X ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A ATV 38HC33N4X () It is not recommended to connect option VW3 A664 to drive terminals without chokes as this could cause a drive fault to be displayed. () Connected to terminals S, S, S3 of the selected choke using wires with a cross-section of.5 mm. (3) For longer cables, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Choke performance is ensured if the cable lengths above are not exceeded. If motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account. If a cable longer than that recommended is used, the motor chokes may overheat. Dimensions: pages /97 and /98 Schemes: page / /95

181 Dimensions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 ATV 38HU8N4 to ATV 38HD3N4 ATV 38HD5N4p to ATV 38HD79N4p c b = H = = G = a c b = H = = G = a 3 ATV 38H a b c G H Ø ATV 38H a b c G H Ø U8N4, U9N4, D5N4p, D8N4p, D33N4p, U4N4 D46N4p U54N4, U7N4, U9N D54N4p, D64N4p, D79N4p DN4, D6N D3N Maximum connection capacity: all terminals ATV 38H Maximum connection capacity: all terminals ATV 38H U8N4 to U9N4: 6 mm (AWG 8) D5N4p, D8N4p: 6mm (AWG 4) DN4 to D3N4: mm (AWG 6) D33N4p, D46N4p: 35mm (AWG ) D54N4p to D79N4p: 7mm (AWG /) ATV 38HCN4X to ATV 38HC33N4X c b = H = = G = a ATV 38H a b c G H Ø CN4X C3N4X, C5N4X, C9N4X C3N4X, C5N4X, C8N4X, C3N4X, C33N4X Maximum connection capacity ATV 38H Earth connection Power terminal CN4X to C5N4X 6 mm mm C9N4X mm 5 mm C3N4X to C5N4X mm mm C8N4X to C33N4X 5 mm 5 x mm EMC mounting plate (supplied with drive) Control card fan kit NEMAtypekit () () () () b b () (3) () Mounting on ATV 38H b Ø (3) VW3 b VW3 b U8N4 to U9N M4 A588 5 A DN4 to D3N4 6 M4 A A D5N4p to D46N4p 8 M5 A A D54N4p to D79N4p M5 A A () Drive () Mounting plate (3) Tapped holes for fixing the EMC clamps Presentation: pages /8 and /83 /96 Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 A A () VW3 A588 to VW3 A5886 () Drive References: pages /88 and /89 Schemes: pages / to /3 A () VW3 A5885 to VW3 A58857 () Drive

182 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 3-phase chokes (line and motor) VW3 A665 to VW3 A phase line chokes VW3 A685 to VW3 A6857 () b H c c G G a G c b G H b c a VW3 a b c c G G H Ø VW3 a b b c c G G H Ø Ø Ø Line chokes A x 9 A A x A A x A A x A Motor chokes A A x A A A () min. 5 mm Radio interference suppression filters (EMC) VW3 A584 to VW3 A5848 c VW3 A684 ( elements) ,5 H b 9 5x5 G a () L L L L L L3 6 6 VW3 a b c G H Ø A A A A A A A () Cable Presentation: pages /9 and /9 References: pages /9 and /93 Schemes: page / /97

183 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Radio interference suppression filters (EMC) (continued) VW3 A684, A6843 ( elements) VW3 A6845 a 34 a 89 4,5 L L L3 9 L L 9 95 L L L3 L3 8 8 () M 3 VW3 a a Ø () A bar 3 x 5 A bar 4 x 5 VW3 A68435 and A L M Output filters VW3 A5845 to A58453 L L L b H 35 c 4 VW3 c L VW3 a b c G H Ø A A A A A Additional motor chokes VW3 A c VW3 A6855 G a 3 6 9x3 4 9x > Additional motor chokes VW3 A Mounting the remote operator terminal VW3 A583 55, , > Presentation: pages /9 and /94 /98 References: pages /93 and /95 Schemes: page /

184 Mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Mounting recommendations Depending on the conditions in which the drive is to be used, its installation will require certain precautions and the use of appropriate accessories. Install the unit vertically, at ± o. Do not place it close to heating elements. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. Drive Mounting recommendations d h h d e ATV 38HU8N4 to ATV 38HU9N4 ATV 38HDN4 to ATV 38HD3N4 ATV 38HD5N4p to ATV 38HD79N4p ATV 38HCN4X to ATV 38HC33N4X e u mm, h u 5 mm - +4 C d u 5 mm, no special precautions d = mm, remove the drive's protective blanking cover (the degree of protection will then be IP ) C d u 5 mm, remove the drive's protective blanking cover (the degree of protection will then be IP ) C d u 5 mm, add the VW3 A588p control card fan kit. Derate the current by. % per C above 5 C. e u mm, h u 5 mm - +4 C d u 5 mm, no special precautions d = mm, remove the drive's protective blanking cover (the degree of protection will then be IP ) C d u 5 mm, remove the drive's protective blanking cover (the degree of protection will then be IP ). Derate the current by. % per C above 4 C. d = mm, add the VW3 A588p control card fan kit. Derate the current by. % per C above 4 C. e u 5 mm, h u mm, d u 5 mm C, no special precautions C, add the VW3 A588ppp control card fan kit. Derate the current by. % per C above 4 C. e u 5 mm, h u mm, d u 5 mm C, no special precautions C, derate the current by. % per C over 4 C. Mounting in a metal wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure with degree of protection IP 3 or IP 54 b Observe the mounting recommendations above. b To ensure proper air circulation in the drive: fit ventilation grilles, ensure that the ventilation is adequate - if not, install forced ventilation with a filter. b UsespecialfilterswithIP54protection. Fan flow rate depending on the drive rating ATV 38 drive Flow rate m 3 /hour ATV 38HU8N4 not cooled ATV 38HU9N4, HU4N4, U54N4 36 ATV 38HU7N4, HU9N4, HDN4, HD6N4, HD3N4 7 ATV 38HD5N4p, HD8N4p, HD33N4p, HD46N4p 9 ATV 38HD54N4p, HD64N4p, HD79N4p 49 ATV 38HCN4X 6 ATV 38HC3N4X, HC5N4X, HC9N4X 9 ATV 38HC3N4X, HC5N4X, HC8N4X, HC3N4X, HC33N4X 9 Metal wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure with IP 54 degree of protection The drive must be mounted in a dust and damp proof casing in certain environmental conditions: dust, corrosive gases, high humidity with risk of condensation and dripping water, splashing liquid, etc. To avoid hot spots in the drive, add a fan to circulate the air inside the enclosure, reference VW3 A588p (see page /9). This enables the drivetobeusedinanenclosurewherethemaximuminternaltemperaturecanreach6 o C. Calculating the size of the wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure Maximum thermal resistance Rth ( C/W) θ θe Rth = P θ = maximum temperature inside the enclosure in C, θe = maximum external temperature in C P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W Power dissipated by drive: see page /88. Add the power dissipated by the other equipment components. Effective exchange surface area of enclosure S (m ) (sides + top + front panel if wall-mounted) K S = K is the thermal resistance per m Rth of casing For ACM type metal enclosures: K =. with internal fan, K =.5 without fan. Caution: do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity. Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 References: pages /88 and /89 Schemes: pages / to /3 /99

185 Schemes, combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Scheme without line contactor, recommended for machines which are not dangerous ATV 38Hpppp 3-phase power supply Scheme with line contactor, recommended for dangerous machines which are switched off and on infrequently 3-phase power supply Q Q Q T Q3 S S KM A A Q A KM RA RC 3 4 () KM 4 6 () 3 A L U V W AO COM AI + L AI L3 RA () (3) (4) RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 RA RC A L L L3 RA () (3) (4) RC RB LI X - Y ma Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) U LI V LI3 W U V LI4 W + 4 RA RC (5) U V W AO COM AI + AI (5) X - Y ma Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) M 3 M 3 () Line choke recommended. () Fault relay contacts for remote signalling of drive status. (3) Internal + 4 V. If an external + 4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the + 4 terminal on the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. (4) Relay R can be reassigned. (5) X and Y can be configured between and ma independently for AI and AO. Nota : All terminals are located at the bottom of the drive. Fit interference suppressors to all specific circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Compatible components Code Description A Drive Q GV-L or Compact NS circuit-breaker (see pages /4 and /5) KM LC-Dpp contactor with interference suppressor (see pages /4 and /5) S, S XB-B or XA-B pushbuttons T Q Q3 VA transformer V secondary GV-L circuit-breaker rated at twice the nominal primary current of T GB-CB5 Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 References: pages /88 and /89 Dimensions: pages /6 to /9 /

186 Schemes, combinations (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Scheme with downstream contactor, recommended for dangerous machines which are switched off and on frequently ATV 38HU8N4 to ATV 38HD3N4 3-phase power supply ATV 38HD5N4p to ATV 38HC33N4X 3-phase power supply Q Q Q T (4) A Q3 RA RC KM A A Q () () A L L L3 RA RC () RB LI LI LI3 (3) (4) LI4 + 4 RA RC A L L L3 RA () (3) U V W AO RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 COM AI + AI U V W AO COM AI + AI KM (5) X - Y ma A Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) KM (5) X - Y ma Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) U V W KM A U V W M 3 3 M () Line choke recommended. () Fault relay contacts for remote signalling of drive status. (3) Internal + 4 V. If an external + 4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the + 4 terminal on the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. (4) Use the "downstream contactor control" function with relay R (or with the logic output LO of one of the "I/O extension" cards, when connecting). (5) X and Y can be configured between and ma independently for AI and AO. Nota : All terminals are located at the bottom of the drive. Fit interference suppressors to all specific circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Compatible components Code Description A Drive Q GV-L or Compact NS circuit-breaker (see pages /4 and /5) KM LC-Dpp contactor with interference suppressor (see pages /4 and /5) T Q Q3 VA transformer V secondary GV-L circuit-breaker rated at twice the nominal primary current of T GB-CB5 Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 References: pages /88 and /89 Dimensions: pages /6 to /9 /

187 Schemes (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 External 4 V supply for the logic inputs and/or the logic output -wire control 3-wire control ATV 38 COM LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 LO + LO ATV 38 LI LI + 4 ATV 38 LI LI LI3 + 4 V V supply + KA Forward Reverse Stop Forward Reverse Motor protection via PTC probes, with optional analogue input extension card Additional radio interference suppression input filters VW3 A584p 3-phase power supply 3 Option card + L L L3 AI3A L AI3B COM L L 3 L L L3 3 x 5 Ω probes connected Output filters VW3 A5845p VW3 A664p VW3 A665p + VW3 A664 LR cell LC cell Motor chokes + capacitors G L L U V W U L3 3 U/T V/T 3 4 W/T3 E S V W E U S E3 V S3 W VW3-A665i U V M 3 W U V M 3 W 3 VW3 A664 U V W M 3 Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 References: pages /88 and /89 Dimensions: pages /6 to /9 /

188 Principle, mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Electromagnetic compatibility Principle b Grounds between drive, motor and cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality. b Use shielded cables with shielding connected to earth over 36 at both ends for the motor cable and the control-command cables. Conduit or metal ducting can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. b Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (mains supply) and the motor cable. Mounting: installation diagram for ATV 38HU8N4 to HD79N4p drives Steelplatesuppliedwiththedrive,tobefittedonit(machineground) Altivar 38 3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable 4 Non-shielded wires for the output of the safety relay contacts 5 Fix and earth the shielding of cables 6 and 7 as close as possible to the drive: - strip the shielding -usethecorrectsizeclampsonthestrippedpartoftheshieldingtofixtometal sheet. The shielding must be clamped tightly enough on the metal sheet to ensure good contact - types of clamp: stainless steel 6 Shielded cable () for connecting the motor 7 Shielded cable () for connecting the control/command system. For applications requiring several conductors, use small cross-sections (.5 mm ) () The shielding of cables 6 and 7 must be connected to earth at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. Nota : Although there is an HF equipotential earth connection between the drive, the motor and the cable shielding, it is still necessary to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each of the devices. If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted beneath the drive and connected directly to the mains supply via an unshielded cable. The connection 3 is then made via the filter cable. Wiring recommendations for ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X drives Line chokes must be used if the prospective short-circuit line current is greater than ka. These chokes provide improved protection against overvoltages on the mains supply and reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive. The chokes are used to limit the line current. Power wiring The power wiring should consist of cables with 4 conductors or individual cables maintained as close as possible to the PE cable. Take care to route the motor cables well away from the power supply cables. The power supply cables are not shielded. If a radio interference filter is used, the grounds for the filter and the drive should be at the same potential with low-impedance links at high frequency (fixed to unpainted steel plate with anti-corrosion treatment/machine ground wiring). The filter should be fitted as close as possible to the drive. If the environment is sensitive to radiated radio interference, the motor cables should be shielded. On the drive side, fix and connect the shielding to the machine ground with rustproof clamps. The main function of the motor cable shielding is to limit their radio frequency radiation. Therefore, use 4-pole cables for the motor, connecting each end of the shielding in accordance with established practice for High Frequency wiring. The type of protective material (copper or steel) is less important than the quality of the connection at both ends. An alternative is to use a metal cable duct with good conductivity and no break in continuity. Nota : when using a cable with a protective sleeve (NYCY type) which fulfils the dual function of PE + screen, it must be connected correctly to both the drive and the motor (its radiation efficiency is reduced). Control wiring Shielding clamp Cable grip. Check that the cable follows the path indicated by the clips. Presentation: pages /8 and /83 Characteristics: pages /84 to /87 References: pages /88 and /89 Dimensions: pages /6 to /9 /3

189 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Motor starters 3 NS8HMA + LC D + ATV 38 Applications Circuit-breaker/contactor/drive combinations can be used to ensure continuous service of the installation with optimum safety. The selected circuit-breaker/contactor combination can reduce maintenance costs in the event of a short-circuit by minimising the time required to make the necessary repairs and the cost of replacement equipment. The combinations suggested correspond to type coordination. Type coordination: a short-circuit will not damage the device or affect its settings. The motor starter should be able to operate once the electrical fault has been removed. The electrical isolation provided by the circuit-breaker will not be affected by the short-circuit. Welding of the contactor contacts is permissible if they can be separated easily. The downstream contactor is not affected by type coordination. The drive controls the motor, provides protection against short-circuits between the drive and the motor and protects the motor cable against overloads. The overload protection is provided by the drive's motor thermal protection. If this protection is removed, external thermal protection should be provided. Before restarting the installation, the cause of the trip must be removed. 3-phase supply voltage: 38 to 45 V (for.75 to 35 kw motors) Motor circuit-breaker: NSppppMA product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand Composition of contactors: LC D9 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact LC Fpp: 3 poles Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw () A (3) (3) (5).75 GV L8 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU8N4.5 GV L 6.3 LC D8pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU9N4. GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU4N4 3 GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU54N4 4 GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU7N4 5.5 GV L 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU9N4 7.5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HDN4 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5BL (4) ATV 38HD6N4 5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5BL (4) ATV 38HD3N4 8.5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5pp ATV 38HD5N4p NS8pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D3pp ATV 38HD8N4p 3 NS8pMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D4pp ATV 38HD33N4p 37 NS8pMA8 8 LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 38HD46N4p 45 NSpMA LC D8pp LC D8pp ATV 38HD54N4p 55 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 38HD64N4p 75 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D5pp ATV 38HD79N4p 9 NS5pMA LC F85pp LC D5pp ATV 38HCN4X NS5pMA LC F5pp LC D5pp ATV 38HC3N4X 3 NS5pMA LC F65pp LC D5pp ATV 38HC5N4X 6 NS4pMA 3 LC F33pp LC F5pp ATV 38HC9N4X NS63pMA 3 LC F4pp LC F65pp ATV 38HC3N4X NS63pMA 5 LC F4pp LC F33pp ATV 38HC5N4X 5 NS63pMA 5 LC F5pp LC F4pp ATV 38HC8N4X 8 NS63pMA 5 LC F63pp LC F4pp ATV 38HC3N4X 35 NS63pMA 5 LC F63pp LC F5pp ATV 38HC33N4X () Standard power ratings for 4-pole motors 5/6 Hz 4 V. () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity, in the table below. Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC /45 V Icu (ka) GV L 5 NS8pMA 7 38/45 V N H L NSpMA NS6pMA, NS5pMA NS4pMA, NS63pMA 7 3 (3) Replace pp with the control circuit voltage reference indicated in the table on the opposite page. (4) LC DppBL contactors have 4 V d.c. low consumption coils ( ma). Up to 5 kw, they are powered by the internal drive power supply. For power ratings above this level, use an external supply and complete the contactor coil voltage according to footnote (3). (5) For drives without integrated EMC filter, replace the p with an X. Note: the maximum line current is determined with a maximum upstream short-circuit power rating of 5 ka at between.75 and 5.5 kw ( ka between 7.5 and 35 kw). /4

190 Combinations for customer assembly (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Motor starters NS8HMA + LC D + ATV 38 3-phase supply voltage: 44 to 46 V (for.75 to 35 kw motors) Motor circuit-breaker: NSppppMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand Composition of contactors: LC D9 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact LC Fpp: 3poles Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw () A (3) (3) 5).75 GV L8 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU8N4.5 GV L 6.3 LC D5pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU9N4. GV L 6.3 LC D5pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU4N4 3 GV L4 LC D5pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU54N4 4 GV L4 LC D5pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU7N4 5.5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HU9N4 7.5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D9BL (4) ATV 38HDN4 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5BL (4) ATV 38HD6N4 5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5BL (4) ATV 38HD3N4 8.5 NSpMA5 5 LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 38HD5N4p NSpMA5 5 LC D8pp LC D3pp ATV 38HD8N4p 3 NSpMA5 5 LC D8pp LC D4pp ATV 38HD33N4p 37 NSpMA8 LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 38HD46N4p 45 NSpMA LC D8pp LC D8pp ATV 38HD54N4p 55 NSpMA LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 38HD64N4p 75 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D5pp ATV 38HD79N4p 9 NS6pMA 5 LC D5pp LC D5pp ATV 38HCN4X NS5pMA LC F85pp LC D5pp ATV 38HC3N4X 3 NS5pMA LC F65pp LC F5pp ATV 38HC5N4X 6 NS4pMA 3 LC F65pp LC F5pp ATV 38HC9N4X NS4pMA 3 LC F33pp LC F65pp ATV 38HC3N4X NS4pMA 3 LC F4pp LC F33pp ATV 38HC5N4X 5 NS63pMA 5 LC F4pp LC F4pp ATV 38HC8N4X 8 NS63pMA 5 LC F5pp LC F4pp ATV 38HC3N4X 35 NS63pMA 5 LC F5pp LC F5pp ATV 38HC33N4X () Standard power ratings for 4-pole motors 5/6 Hz 4 V. () Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity, in the table below. Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC6947-4/46 V Icu (ka) GV L8, L > GV L4, L6, L NS8pMA 65 44/46 V N H L NSpMA NS6pMA, NS5pMA NS4pMA, NS63pMA 65 3 (3) Replace pp with the control circuit voltage reference indicated in the table below. a.c. control circuit Volts a /6 Hz B7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 V7 (4) LC DppBL contactors have 4 V d.c. low consumption coils ( ma). Up to 5 kw, they are powered by the internal drive power supply. For power ratings above this level, use an external supply and complete the contactor coil voltage according to footnote (3). (5) For drives without integrated EMC filter, replace the p with an X. Note: the maximum line current is determined with a maximum upstream short-circuit power rating of 5.5 ka at between.75 and 5.5 kw ( ka between 7.5 and 35 kw). /5

191 Functions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 3 Summary of functions Operating speed range page /7 Acceleration and deceleration ramp times page /7 Acceleration and deceleration ramp profiles page /7 Alternate ramp switching page /8 Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp page /8 Reverse operation page /8 Disabling reverse page /8 Jog operation page /8 -wire control page /9 3-wire control page /9 +/- speed page /9 Save reference page /9 Motor switching page / Downstream contactor control page / Preset speeds page / Adjusting analog input AI page / Summing inputs page / Reference switching page / PI regulator page / Speed feedback with tachogenerator page / Incremental speed feedback page / Incremental speed reference page / Controlled stop page / Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection page /3 Automatic restart page /3 Maintaining the speed following loss of the 4- ma reference page /3 Operating speed limit at low speed page /3 Fault reset page /3 General reset (inhibits all faults) page /3 Forced local mode page /3 External fault page /3 Fault relay, unlocking page /4 Motor thermal protection page /4 PTC probe protection page /4 Drive thermal protection page /4 Switching frequency, noise reduction page /4 Energy saving page /5 Adaptation of the current limit page /5 Auto-tuning page /5 Skip frequencies page /5 Reassignable logic outputs page /5 Analog outputs AO and AO page /5 Adjusting analog outputs AO and AO page /5 Configurable I/O page /6 Drive factory setting To facilitate installation of the drive, the functions, parameters and I/O have been assigned to meet the requirements of pumping and ventilation applications. Drive I/O: - logic input LI: forward, - logic input LI: reverse, - logic input LI3: fault reset, - logic input LI4: not assigned, - analog input AI: speed reference, - analog input AI: summing speed reference, - relay R: drive fault, - relay R: drive running, - analog output AO: motor frequency. Extension card I/O: - logic input LI5: ramp switching, - logic input LI6: not assigned, - analog input AI3 or encoder inputs: summing speed reference, - logic output LO: high speed reached, - analog output AO: motor current. /6

192 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b Operating speed range Used to determine frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by the machine under actual operating conditions. Three operating modes are possible: v Normal mode v Pedestal mode v Deadband mode f(hz) f(hz) f(hz) HSP HSP HSP LSP V xma 4mA V yma ma Reference LSP V xma 4mA V yma ma Reference LSP Reference V xma 4mA V yma ma LSP: low speed, from to HSP, factory setting HSP: high speed, from LSP to f max., factory setting 5/6 Hz x: configurable between and ma, factory setting 4 ma y: configurable between and ma, factory setting ma b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics. f(hz) f(hz) 5/6 5/6 t t t t Adjustment for t and t between.5 and s, factory setting 3 s. Linear acceleration ramp Linear deceleration ramp b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profiles Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference, following a linear ratio or a preset ratio which enables the ramp to be given an S or a U profile. For a pumping application (installation with centrifugal pump and non-return valve): the closing of the valve can be controlled more accurately if U-shape ramps are used. Selecting "linear", "S", or "U" profiles will affect both the deceleration and acceleration ramps. v S-shape ramps v U-shape ramps f(hz) HSP HSP f(hz) f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP t t t t t t t t t t t t HSP: high speed The curve coefficient is fixed, with t =.6 x t. wheret=setramptime HSP: high speed The curve coefficient is fixed, with t =.5 x t. where t = set ramp time /7

193 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 HSP f(hz) Acc Dec b Alternate ramp switching Used to switch acceleration or deceleration ramp times, which can be adjusted separately. The function is enabled by reassigning logic input or by defining frequency threshold. It is suitable for machines with fast continuous speed correction and high speed lathes with acceleration and deceleration limiting above certain speeds. Forward or reverse Acc Dec t t b Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Used to automatically adapt the deceleration ramp if the initial setting is too low when the load inertia is taken into account. This function avoids the drive locking in the event of an excessive braking fault. LI4 Acceleration (Acc ) and deceleration (Dec ): - adjustment.5 to s - factory setting 3 s t b Reverse operation Used to reverse the direction of operation by means of a logic input. LI is assigned to this function in the factory setting. This function can be suppressed in non-reversing motor applications by reassigning input LI to a different function. 3 Acceleration (Acc ) and deceleration (Dec ): - adjustment.5 to s, - factory setting 5 s. HSP: high speed Acceleration and deceleration Example of switching using logic input LI4 b Disabling reverse direction Used to: v inhibit operation in the opposite direction to that controlled by the logic inputs, even if this reversal is required by a summing or feedback control function, v inhibit reverse operation if it is requested using the REV key on the terminal. To be used if the direction of operation should not be reversed (example: fan). Forward or stop f(hz) tm t t b Jog operation Used for pulse operation at minimum ramp times (. s), limited speed reference and minimum time between pulses. Enabled by means of an adjustable logic input LI, assigned to this function, and pulses given by the operating direction command. This function is suitable for machines with product insertion in manual mode (example: gradual movement of the mechanism during maintenance operations). JOG t Speed reference: - adjustment to Hz - factory setting Hz Minimum time tm between pulses: - adjustment to s - factory setting.5 s Jog function /8

194 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b -wire control Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact. Enabled by means of or logic inputs (one or two directions). This function is suitable for all one or two direction applications. 3 operating modes are possible: v detection of the state of the logic inputs, v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs, v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority over reverse. Altivar 38 control terminals 4 V LI LIx LI: forward LIx: reverse Wiring diagram for -wire control f(hz) b 3-wire control Used to control the operating and stopping direction by means of pulsed contacts. Enabled by means of or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. Stop t Altivar 38 control terminals 4 V LI LI LIx LI: stop LI: forward LIx: reverse t Forward Reverse 3-wire control t t Wiring diagram for 3-wire control b +/- speed Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of or logic commands, with or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function). The maximum speed is given by the reference applied to the analog inputs. For example, connect AI to the + V. Enabled by assigning or logic inputs. This function is suitable for centralised control of a machine with several sections operating in one direction or for controlling pendant control station, using a handling crane in two operating directions. v With saving of the last reference and logic inputs v Without saving of the last reference and a single logic input ("+ speed") f(hz) f(hz) t LSP t Forward or reverse t Forward t + speed t Reverse + speed t - speed t + speed t LSP: low speed Example of "+/- speed" with logic inputs Example with double action buttons Forward Reverse + speed a b A B a and b: st press A and B: nd press Note: this type of "+/- speed" control is incompatible with 3-wire control. b Save reference This function is associated with "+/- speed" control. Select yes or no. Enables the new speed reference to be applied if the run command or line supply is lost. The save is applied the next time a run command is received. /9

195 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b Motor switching Allows two motors with different powers to be supplied successively by the same drive. Switching must take place with the drive stopped and locked, using an appropriate sequence at the drive output. The function can be used to adapt the motor parameters. The following parameters are switched automatically: v nominal motor current, v injection current. Motor thermal protection is disabled by this function. Enabled by assigning logic input LI to this function. The associated parameter is the coefficient which provides the ratio between the power of the smallest motor and the power of the drive:. to. b Downstream contactor control Allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor. The request to close the contactor is made when a run command appears. The request to open the contactor is made when there is neither a run command nor a current present in the motor (freewheel stop, drive locked or braking terminated). Enabled by means of logic output LO or relay R. v This function avoids the need for frequency switching on the power circuit upstream of the drive (otherwise premature aging of the filtering capacitors will occur) and requires a specific connection diagram (see page /). v This function must be used for cycles < 6 s with motor isolation on stopping. 3 b Preset speeds Used to switch preset speed references., 4, or 8 preset speeds can be selected. Enabled by means of, or 3 logic inputs. The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of. Hz to Hz up to the maximum speed. f(hz) LSP Forward or LI reverse LI3 t t t The speed obtained with inputs LI3 and LI4 at state is LSP or the speed reference, depending on the level of analog inputs AI and AI. Presets: st speed: LSP (low speed or reference) nd speed: 5 Hz 3 rd speed: Hz 4 th speed: HSP (high speed) LI4 Example of operation with 4 preset speeds t b Adjusting analog input AI It is possible to modify the characteristics of analog current input AI. Factory setting: 4- ma. Other values: - ma, -4 ma or X-Y ma by programming X and Y with a precision of. ma. /

196 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b Summing inputs Analog input AI (and/or analog input AI3 with extension card) can be assigned as a summing input with AI. The sum is limited to the value corresponding to the high speed (HSP). This function is suitable for machines on which the speed is controlled by a process controller signal on input AI. f(hz) AI AI Forward or reverse t t b Reference switching Allows analog references to be switched by means of a logic command. This function avoids having to switch low level signals and makes the reference inputs AI and AI independent. Enabled by means of reassignable logic input LI. This function is suitable for all machines with automatic/manual operation. Automatic control via a sensor on input AI, enabled by setting the logic input to. Manual control by means of potentiometer on input AI (local control). LIx COM AI + AI LIx Example of reference switching t + 4 V - ma 4- ma -4 ma Adaptation to sensor Connection diagram for reference switching b PI regulator Used for simple control of a flow rate or a pressure with a sensor which supplies a feedback signal adapted to the drive. This function is suitable for pumping and ventilation applications. PI Reference PI Feedback PSP Low-pass filter FBS + Multiplier PI PI Inversion Regulator PIC X± RPG RIG Ramp if PSP > Ramp if PSP = X AC DE Run command ACC DEC Auto Man Reference Manual reference Auto/man ACC DEC Ramp ACC: acceleration AC: acceleration DEC: deceleration DE: deceleration FBS: PI feedback multiplication coefficient PIC: reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator PSP: filter time constant setting on the PI feedback RIG: PI regulator integral gain RPG: PI regulator proportional gain Preset PI references: or 4 preset references require the use of or logic inputs respectively. preset references 4 preset references Assign: LIx to Pr Assign: LIx to Pr, LIy to Pr4 LIx Reference LIy LIx Reference Analog reference Analog reference Process max PI (adjustable) (= V) PI3 (adjustable) Process max (= V) /

197 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 AI3B R AI3A B Option card R b Speed feedback with tachogenerator Used for precise speed control, irrespective of the state of the motor load. Assigned to logic input AI3, with extension card/analog input The maximum tachogenerator voltage must be between 5 and 9 V. If necessary, use an external divider bridge to adapt this value (). The value can be set precisely in the "Adjust" menu. Consistency between the motor frequency and the speed feedback is monitored in the drive fault management system. This function is suitable for all applications requiring exact speed irrespective of the load. Connection diagram for speed feedback via tachogenerator () Example: motor 5 rpm at 5 Hz, tachogenerator.6 V/rpm, max. speed set to 75 Hz (speed 5 rpm), maximum voltage.6 x 5 = 35 V, recommended tachogenerator current ma, therefore R + R = 35/ = 3.5 kω, average voltage on the input = 7 V, therefore R = 7/ =.7 kω or 68 Ω, nearest standard value. R = R, or kω, nearest standard value, exact voltage on AI3 = 35 x R/(R + R) = 35 x.68/.68 = 7.4 V. Use appropriate power resistors (min. W). The speed feedback should be scaled exactly by programming (when the device is set up). 3 v Useinoperatingdirection Option card b Incremental speed feedback Used for precise speed control, irrespective of the state of the motor load. Assigned to logic inputs A, A-, B, B- on the extension card/encoder inputs. NPN type open collector output, nominal voltage 4 V c Max. read frequency 33 khz at max. speed HSP v Use in or operating directions Option card A A B B COM + 4 A A B B COM + NPN detector A A B B Incremental encoder V External 4 V power supply Connection diagram with inductive sensor or simple control photoelectric sensor (not very precise at low speeds) Connection diagram with incremental encoder for precise control at low speeds Consistency between the motor frequency and the speed feedback is monitored in the drive fault management system. This function is suitable for applications requiring precise speed control irrespective of the load and a high level of immunity to interference. b Incremental speed reference Enabled by assigning the logic inputs on the above extension card/encoder inputs to the "summing inputs" function. Synchronization of the speed of a number of drives. Nominal voltage 4 V c Max. reading frequency 33 khz at max. speed HSP f(hz) b Controlled stop Used to define stop modes in addition to the standard drive stops. These stop requests always have priority. Fast stop d.c. injection stop 3 Normal stop on deceleration ramp 4 Freewheel stop Example of controlled stops 3 4 t Three stop modes are available for selection: v freewheel stop: the drive is locked and the motor stops in accordance with the inertia and the resistive torque, v fast stop: the motor brakes to a stop with the deceleration ramp time divided by a coefficient which can be set between and, v d.c. injection braking: adjustment of the time ( to 3 s, factory setting.5 s) and current ( % to % of the nominal drive current in high torque applications, factory setting 7 %). Continuous braking is possible but is limited automatically to another adjustable value ( % to % of the nominal motor current, factory setting 5 %) after 3 s. Enable modes: v by means of reassignable logic input LI: active at for freewheel stop and fast stop, active at for injection stop, v automatically when stopping (frequency less than. Hz) for injection braking, as this function can be combined with the others. In this case, only the current after 3 s of injection can be adjusted. /

198 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection ("catch on the fly") Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events: v loss of line supply or power off, v fault reset or automatic restart, v freewheel stop or injection stop with logic input, v uncontrolled loss of power downstream of the drive. On restarting, the effective speed of the motor is detected in order to restart on the ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. The speed detection time can be up to s depending on the initial deviation. Factory setting: active. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. This function is suitable for machines for which the loss of motor speed is negligible during the supply loss time (machines with high inertia), fans and pumps driven by a residual flux, etc. b Automatic restart Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart. This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts at 3 s intervals. If a restart has not been possible after 6 attempts, the procedure is abandoned and it remains locked until it has been switched off and on again. Factory setting: inactive. The faults permitting this restart are: v supply overvoltage, v motor thermal overload, v drive thermal overload, v loss of 4- ma reference, v d.c. bus overvoltage, v external fault, v motor phase loss, v serial link fault, v mains voltage too low. For this fault, the function is always active, even if it is not configured. For this type of fault, the drive fault relay remains activated if the function is configured. The speed reference and the direction of operation must be maintained for this function. This function is suitable for machines or installations in continuous operation or without monitoring, and where a restart will not endanger equipment or personnel in any way. b Maintaining the speed following loss of the 4- ma reference Enables the motor speed to be maintained following loss of the 4- ma reference. This function is suitable for applications which must not be interrupted. b Limiting low speed operating time (LSP) The motor is stopped automatically after an operating period at low speed (LSP) with zero reference and run command present. This time can be set between. and s or no limit. Factory setting 5 s. The motor restarts automatically on the ramp when the reference reappears or if the run command is broken and then re-established. This function is suitable for automatic stopping/starting on pressure-regulated pumps. b Fault reset Enables faults to be reset by means of a logic input LI which can be reassigned to this function. The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal power-up. Fault reset: overvoltage, overspeed, external fault, drive overheating, loss of motor phase, d.c. bus overvoltage, loss of 4- ma reference, load veering, motor overload if the thermal state is less than %, serial link fault. "Mains undervoltage" and "mains phase loss" faults are reset automatically when the mains supply is restored. This function is suitable for applications with drives which are difficult to access. b General reset (inhibits all faults) This function can be used to inhibit all faults, including thermal protection (forced operation) except short-circuit faults, to ensure operation unless irreparable damage has been caused in extreme operating conditions. This function is suitable for applications where a restart could be vital (tunnel smoke extraction system). b Forced local mode Forced local mode switches the drive from serial link control to terminal control. A logic input LI can be reassigned to this function. b External fault When the input assigned to this function changes to, the motor stops in accordance with the parameter configuration and the drive locks in an "EPF external fault" fault. /3

199 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b Fault relay, unlocking The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty. It has one C/O contact at the common point. The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways: v by switching the drive off until the power on LED goes out and then switching it on again, v by assigning a logic input to the fault reset function, v using the automatic restart function (if it has been configured). 6 hr t Hz Hz b Motor thermal protection Indirect motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its theoretical temperature rise. The drive is locked by default if this temperature rise exceeds 8 % of the nominal temperature rise. min 4min min min Cold state v This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled or force-cooled motors: the microprocessor calculates the theoretical temperature rise of the motor based on various elements: - the operating frequency, - the current taken by the motor, - the operating time, - the maximum ambient temperature around the motor (4 C). Adjustment:.5 to.36 times the nominal current of the drive in high torque applications, factory setting.9 times the nominal current indicated on the motor rating plate. 3 Hot state s I/In,7,8,9,,,3,4,5 Thermal protection characteristics (warm and cold) v Special applications Adaptation of thermal protection in the fault configuration menu: - applications with force-cooled motor: in this case, the tripping curves are those shown opposite for the nominal frequency 5/6 Hz, - suppression of thermal protection in harsh environments: temperature greater than 4 C around the motor, which may cause the cooling fins to become clogged (provide direct thermal protection via thermistor probes integrated into the motor), - motor thermal protection using PTC probes: see "thermal protection with PTC probes" function with option card, - if several motors are connected in parallel on the same drive, fit each motor starter with a thermal relay to reduce the risk of the load being distributed unevenly. Note: when the drive is switched off, calculation It is saved and the amount by which it has decreased is calculated. b PTC probe protection Used for motor thermal protection (if the motor is fitted with PTC probes). Assigned to logic input AI3, with extension card/analog input. Maximum resistance of probe circuit at C: 75 Ω (3 x 5 Ω probes connected in series). Probe break and short-circuit faults are monitored. This function is suitable for use in all applications. b Thermal protection of drive Enables the drive to be protected directly via a thermistor fitted on the heatsink, ensuring that components are protected in the event of poor ventilation or excessive ambient temperatures. Locks the drive in the event of a fault. b Switching frequency, noise reduction High frequency switching of the intermediate d.c. voltage can be used to supply the motor with a current wave with low harmonic distortion. The switching frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. In addition, the switching frequency is random in order to avoid resonance. This function can be disabled if it causes instability. This function is suitable for all applications which require low motor noise. v Without derating, for continuous or intermittent operation (frequencies of.5 and khz should be used for long cable lengths). Drive Configurable switching frequency - khz ATV 38HU8N4 to HD46N4 ATV 38HD5N4X to HD46N4X ATV 38HU54N4 to HC33N4 ATV 38HD54N4X to HC33N4X v Without derating, with intermittent operating cycle or with derating by one power rating in continuous operation (). Drives ATV 38HU8N4 to HD3N ATV 38HU5N4 to HD46N4 8- ATV 38HU5N4X to HD46N4X ATV 38HU54N4 to HD79N4 4-8 ATV 38HU54N4X to HD79N4X ATV 38HCN4X to HC33N4X 4 Configurable switching frequency - khz () In intermittent operation, the frequency automatically decreases in the case of overheating. /4

200 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 b Energy saving Enables the power consumption to be adapted according to the load, improving efficiency. % CLI 5 % CLI Ilimit Cold air Hot air CLI: internal current limit HSP: high speed b Adaptation of the current limit The current limit can be adapted automatically according to the speed in order to avoid a motor overload fault. This function is suitable for ventilation applications in which the load curve changes according to the air density. b Auto-tuning Auto-tuning is only possible by means of user intervention using the dialogue tools and an assignable logic input. It is used to optimize performance. This function is suitable for use in all applications.,5 Adaptation of the current limit f/fn HSP b Skip frequencies Skip frequencies can be used to suppress up to three critical speeds which may be the cause of mechanical resonance. Prolonged operation of the motor can be prohibited on one to three adjustable frequency bands (with a band width of 5 Hz ), which can be set within the operating range. This function is suitable for use in fans and centrifugal pumps. b Reassignable logic outputs Relay R (or LO solid state output with I/O extension card): f(hz) Motor speed change depending on the reference with a skip frequency 5 Hz Reference v remote signalling of the following information as required: - drive operating (running or braking), - frequency threshold reached (greater than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - nd frequency threshold reached, - frequency reference reached (motor frequency equal to the reference), - current threshold reached (greater than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - motor thermal threshold reached (greater than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - drive thermal threshold reached (greater than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - high speed reached, - loss of 4- ma reference. v remote downstream contactor control. b Analog outputs AO (or AO with I/O extension card) Analog outputs AO and AO (x-y ma) can be assigned to the following parameters: - motor current (y ma = twice the nominal current of the drive), - motor frequency (y ma = maximum frequency), - ramp output (y ma = maximum frequency), - signed ramp (x ma = maximum reversing frequency, y ma = maximum forward frequency), - PI reference (x ma = minimum reference, y ma = maximum reference), - PI feedback (x ma = minimum feedback, y ma = maximum feedback), - PI error (x ma = maximum error <, y ma = minimum error > ), - PI integral (y ma = integral saturated), - motor power (x ma = % of the nominal motor power, y ma = % of the nominal motor power), - motor thermal state calculated: (x ma = %, y ma = %), - drive thermal state: (x ma = %, y ma = %). Note: x and y can be set between and ma b Adjusting the analog outputs AO (or AO with I/O extension card) The characteristics of analog current outputs AO and AO can be modified. Factory setting: - ma Other values: 4- ma, -4 ma or x-y ma by programming x and y with a definition of. ma. This function is suitable for use in applications with a signal other than - ma. /5

201 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Compatibility table for configurable I/O functions b Configurable I/O Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. v stop functions have priority over run commands, v speed references via logic command have priority over analog references. Functions d.c. injection braking Summing inputs The selection of functions is limited: - by the number of drive I/O which can be reassigned: if necessary, add an I/O extension card, - by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another. PI regulator +/- speed Reference switching Freewheel stop d.c. injection braking A A Fast stop Jog operation Preset speeds Speed regulation with tachogenerator or encoder Summing inputs PI regulator 3 +/- speed A Reference switching Freewheel stop X X Fast stop A Jog operation X X Preset speeds A Speed regulation with tachogenerator or encoder Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time) X A The arrow indicates which function has priority. Example: the "fast stop" function has priority over the "d.c. injection braking" function /6

202 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 Summary table of the configurable I/O assignments Drive I/O Without option card With I/O extension cards Functions Auto-tuning Reverse operation Alternate ramp switching Jog operation +/- speed Preset speeds Reference switching External fault Freewheel stop Injection stop Fast stop Motor switching Forced local mode PI auto/man Fault reset General reset (inhibits all faults) Summing reference PI regulator nd speed reference Speed feedback PTC probes Downstream contactor control Frequency threshold reached High speed reached Frequency reference reached Current threshold reached Motor thermal threshold reached Drive thermal threshold reached Drive running Loss of 4- ma reference Motor current Motor frequency Ramp output (signed) PI function outputs Motor power Motor thermal state Drive thermal state Relay R Analog input AI Analog output AO 3 logic inputs LI- LI3-LI4 logic inputs LI5- LI6 Analog input AI3 Logic output LO Analog output AO Encoder inputs A-, A+, B-, B+ Possible assignments /7

203 ESC FWO RUN REV ENT stop reset Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 38 3 Presentation Characteristics Degree of protection IP 55 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage C Operation C Shock resistance Conforming to IEC gn for ms Altivar 38 ENERGY ready-assembled drives are motor starters specifically designed for pump and fan applications powered by a three-phase supply 38 to 46 V in the powerrange3to75kwor5tohp. They are housed inside a dust and damp proof enclosure which contains: -AnATV38drive - A line choke - A Vario switch disconnector with padlockable front external control 3 - A frequency reference potentiometer - A 3-position switch for selecting the direction of operation - An operator terminal 4 A slot is provided for installing an additional contactor. The front panel has a hinged cover. For safety reasons, it can only be opened when the switch disconnector is in the OFF position. The underside of the enclosure should be fitted with cable glands 5 via which the cables can be routed. Options b Common functions of the Altivar 38 and the Altivar 38 ENERGY: v Extension cards (see pages /4 and /4) v Communication cards (see pages /4 and /43) v Powersuite software workshop (see pages 3/ and 3/3) v Braking module and resistors to be mounted externally (see pages /44 to /47) b Specific options for Altivar 38 ENERGY: v An IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal v A line or downstream contactor v A SUB-D cable gland. The ready-assembled Altivar 38 has the same environmental, drive and electrical characteristics as the Altivar 38 with heatsink, with the exception of those detailed in the table below References ATV 38EDN4 Altivar 38 ENERGY, standard torque applications (% Tn) Motor Line supply Ready-assembled Altivar 38 Power indicated on rating plate () Line current () Prospective line Isc at U min. at U max. at U min. at U max. Continuous output current Max. transient current (3) References Weight a b a b kw HP A A ka ka A A A A kg 3-phase supply voltage: V (4) , ATV 38ED5N , ATV 38ED7N ,, ATV 38ED9N , ATV 38EDN ATV 38ED6N , ATV 38ED3N ATV 38ED5N ATV 38ED8N ATV 38ED33N ATV 38ED46N ATV 38ED54N ATV 38ED64N ATV 38ED79N4. a : values obtained for jumper positioned on 5 Hz at U = 4 V b : values obtained for jumper positioned on 6 Hz at U = 46 V () These power ratings are given for a maximum permissible switching frequency of 4 khz in continuous operation without derating. For higher switching frequencies, the drive must be in intermittent operation or it must be set one rating lower (see special uses on page /3). () Typical value without additional choke. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) Nominal supply voltages, U min U max. Please refer to the table summarising the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on pages / and / /8

204 References (continued), dimensions, mounting, schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 38 References (continued) IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal The plug-in operator terminal can be used remotely, hand-held or fixed to the machine, using this IP 65 dust and damp proof kit. Description For drives Reference Weight kg Kit comprising: - cable fitted with connectors, length 3 m - IP 65 enclosure with flexible, transparent membrane - instructions ATV 38ED all ratings VW3 A Line or downstream contactor A slot is provided for mounting a contactor on ATV 38ED drives. The contactor is wired as a line or downstream contactor by the user, depending on requirements. To select a contactor, see pages /7 to /75. Accessories Description For drives Reference Weight kg IP65 potentiometer. kω SUB-D cable gland, plug-in, -terminals ATV 38ED all ratings ATV 38ED all ratings VW3 A VW3 A Dimensions G H b H ATV 38ED a b c d G G H H 5N4, 7N4, 9N4, N4, N4, 3N4 5N4, 8N4, 33N4, 46N N4, 64N4, 79N c d G a 8xØ9 Mounting ATV 38ED 5N4, 7N4, 9N4, N4, 6N4, 3N4, 5N4, 8N4, 33N4, 46N4, 54N4, 64N4, 79N4 3 U L V L W L3 L L L3 FW U V W 4 4 PA PB RC RA AO +4 AI LI LI COM LI3 AI LI4 + RA 3 3 PA RB PB RC Do not place equipment close to heating elements. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. U V M 3 W Braking resistor /9

205 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38 with heatsink, ready-assembled Altivar 38 3 Possible combinations for drives with or without integrated EMC filters (see page /88) Altivar 38 with heatsink Line supply Motor ATV 38 drive Options Supply voltage 5/6 Hz V 3-phase Power indicated on rating plate kw With integrated EMC filters No EMC filters Line choke extension or communication card IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions Software workshop Magelis XBT display unit RS 485 interconnection.75 ATV 38HU8N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HU9N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836. ATV 38HU4N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HU54N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HU7N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HU9N4 VW3 A6653 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HDN4 VW3 A6653 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD6N4 VW3 A6654 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD3N4 VW3 A6654 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD5N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD5N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD8N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD8N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD33N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD33N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD46N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD46N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD54N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD54N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD64N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD64N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HD79N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HD79N4X Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HCN4X VW3 A685 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A685 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HC5N4X VW3 A6853 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HC9N4X VW3 A6854 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A6855 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 ATV 38HC5N4X VW3 A6856 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HC8N4X VW3 A6856 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HC3N4X VW3 A6857 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38HC33N4X VW3 A6857 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A583 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 Possible combinations for ready-assembled drives (see pages /8 and /9) Altivar 38 ENERGY Line supply Motor ATV 38 drive Options Supply voltage 5/6 Hz V 3-phase Power indicated on rating plate kw HP Line choke extension or communication card IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions Software workshop Magelis XBT display unit RS 485 interconnection 3 ATV 38ED5N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED7N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED9N4 VW3 A6653 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38EDN4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED6N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED3N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED5N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED8N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED33N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED46N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED54N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED64N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A ATV 38ED79N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp HM7A8 VW3 A5836 () In most cases this filter is unnecessary as the ready-assembled drive can be located very close to the motor. /

206 Options (continued) Additional input filter () 4 V V Output filter () Braking module IP braking resistor IP 3 braking resistor Kit for mounting IP 3 air exchanger Control card fan kit Separate control circuitsupply kit Removable power terminals VW3 A584 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A588 VW3 A586 VW3 A588 VW3 A584 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A588 VW3 A586 VW3 A588 VW3 A584 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A588 VW3 A586 VW3 A588 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5883 VW3 A5863 VW3 A5883 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5883 VW3 A5863 VW3 A5883 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5883 VW3 A5863 VW3 A5883 VW3 A5844 VW3 A5844 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5884 VW3 A5864 VW3 A5844 VW3 A5844 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58736 VW3 A5884 VW3 A5864 VW3 A5845 VW3 A5845 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58736 VW3 A5884 VW3 A5864 VW3 A5846 VW3 A5846 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5885 VW3 A5846 VW3 A5846 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5885 VW3 A5846 VW3 A5846 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5885 VW3 A5846 VW3 A5846 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5885 VW3 A5847 VW3 A5847 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5885 VW3 A5847 VW3 A5847 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5887 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5847 VW3 A5847 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5885 VW3 A5847 VW3 A5847 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5887 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5848 VW3 A5848 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5887 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5848 VW3 A5848 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5887 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5848 VW3 A5848 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5887 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5848 VW3 A5848 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5887 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5848 VW3 A5848 VW3 A6657 VW3 A5848 VW3 A5848 VW3 A664 VW3 A684 VW3 A6845 VW3 A6855 VW3 A684 VW3 A68435 VW3 A6855 VW3 A684 VW3 A68435 VW3 A6855 VW3 A684 VW3 A68435 VW3 A6855 VW3 A6843 VW3 A68465 VW3 A68553 VW3 A6843 VW3 A68465 VW3 A68553 VW3 A6843 VW3 A68465 VW3 A68553 VW3 A6843 VW3 A68465 VW3 A68553 VW3 A6843 VW3 A68465 VW3 A68553 Options (continued) Additional input filter () Output filter () Braking module IP braking resistor IP 3 braking resistor 4 V V VW3 A5843 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5844 VW3 A5844 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5844 VW3 A5844 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58736 VW3 A5845 VW3 A5845 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58736 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 Integrated VW3 A6674 /

207 FWO REV stop reset FWO REV stop reset FWO REV stop reset FWO REV stop reset FWO REV stop reset Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 RUN ESC ENT ESC ENT RUN 3 4 ESC ENT RUN 5 4 ESC ENT RUN ESC ENT RUN /

208 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Applications The Altivar 58 is a frequency inverter for three-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors which incorporates the latest technological developments and functions suitable for the most common applications, including: b horizontal and vertical materials handling, b packing/packaging, b special machines, b ventilation/air conditioning, b pumps and compressors. Its numerous integrated options enable it to be adapted to sophisticated and advanced control systems. For applications in which only a small amount of overtorque is required, drives with power ratings of kw at 8 4 V and 8.5 kw at 38 5 V can be oversized. Functions The main functions are: b starting, dynamic braking and braking to a standstill, and speed control, b energy saving, PI regulator (flow rate, pressure, etc.), b brake sequence, b speed loop with tachogenerator or pulse generator, b +/- speed, S ramps, U ramps, preset speeds, JOG operation, b automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection (catch on the fly), b adaptation of current limiting according to speed for ventilation applications, b automatic limitation of low speed operating time, motor and drive protection, etc. Standard versions The Altivar 58 is available in three versions for integration into machines. Standard drive with heatsink () For normal environments and ventilated enclosures Driveonbaseplate( and 3) This version is designed for applications in which the degree of protection required for the prevailing environmental conditions prevents ventilation. Thedrivecanbemountedinthefollowingways: b in a dust and damp proof enclosure sold separately in order to dissipate heat externally (), b on the machine chassis if the chassis frame can absorb the heat (3) In both cases, no special cut-outs other than the fixing holes for the drive are needed. Ready-assembled drive (4 and 5) b Altivar 58 COMPACT, power rating between.37 and 5.5 kw (4) This ready-to-use IP 55 enclosure is equipped with a drive on a base plate with an external heatsink, a circuit-breaker to provide type coordination and protection, and a downstream contactor. This enclosure can be installed next to the motor. b Altivar 58 ENERGY, power rating between 3 and 75 kw (5) TheIP55enclosureisequippedwithadrivewithacoolingsystemandaVarioswitch disconnector. A slot is provided for an additional contactor. The drives are supplied with an integrated line choke. This enclosure can be installed next to the motor. Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 and /3 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /3

209 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 ESC ENT FWO REV RUN stop reset /4

210 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Quick programming using macro-configurations The Altivar 58 can be programmed quickly and easily using macro-configurations which correspond to the various functions and applications: materials handling, general use, variable torque. Each of these configurations can of course be modified as required. Dialogue functions The Altivar 58 () has an RS 485 multidrop serial link with a simplified Modbus protocol integrated into the base product. This serial link can be used to connect PLCs (6), a PC, a communication gateway or one of the available programming tools. 4 advanced dialogue solutions, with plain text display in 5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian) and configuration memory: b operator terminal, on drive or enclosure door (), b PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions: v Pocket PC for PowerSuite (3), v PowerSuite software workshop for PC (4), v Magelis display unit with matrix screen (5). Customizing the application Functions can be extended by adding an extension card or a communication bus. b I/O extension cards (8): v I/O and speed loop with analogue input or encoder input. b Communication bus (7 and 8): v Fipio, Uni-Telway/Modbus, INTERBUS-S, Modbus Plus, AS-Interface, Profibus DP, Ethernet, CANopen, DeviceNet, METASYS N communication bus, v Lonworks communication gateway. b Customer-specific card (8) on request: v software functions, for example special cycles and servo control, v hardware functions, for example specific inputs or outputs. Cards are already available for: b pump switching, b multi-motor function, b multi-parameter settings, b simple position control. Electromagnetic compatibility EMC b Integrated EMC filters: ATV 58 drives can be supplied with integrated EMC filters. Incorporation of the filters in the drives facilitates machine installation and conformity for e marking purpose at low cost. They have been sized to conform to IEC/EN 68-3 standards (residential and industrial environments). ATV58driveswithpowerratingsu 8.5 kw at 38 5 V are also available without EMC filters for applications which do not require EMC conformance. Drives with power ratings y kw at 8 4 V are available with integrated EMC filters. For ratings u kw, EMC filters are available as an option. b Line chokes: ATV58driveswithpowerratingsu kw at 8 4 V and u 8.5 kw at 38 5 V are available with integrated line chokes which limit the line current to the value of the nominal current of the motor. Separate line chokes are available as an option for other ratings. Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /5

211 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Operator terminal The Altivar 58 has a slot on the front panel for a removable operator terminal which can be supplied with the drive or ordered separately. It can be used: b in 5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian), b to control, adjust and configure the drive, b for visible remote signalling, b to save and download configurations (4 storage files). A"remoteterminal"optionenablestheterminaltobeusedremotely(usinga3m cable) and to be mounted on the door of an enclosure with IP 65 protection on the front panel. Backlit display () Flashing: indicates the selected direction of rotation. Steady: indicates the direction of motor rotation. FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset LOC Indicates control via the terminal. PROG Appears in setup and programming mode. Flashing: indicates that a value has been modified but not saved. 4 digits visible at 5 m: displays numeric values and codes. One line of 6 characters: displays messages in plain text. 4 Thekeysareused(): To adjust and configure the drive. To control the drive. PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions See pages 3/ and 3/3. Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /6

212 Characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Environment characteristics Conforming to standards Altivar 58 drives have been developed to conform to the strictest national and international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN, NFC, VDE), in particular: b Low voltage EN 578 b EMC immunity: v IEC/EN 6-4- level 3 v IEC/EN level 3 v IEC/EN level 4 v IEC/EN level 3 v IEC/EN 68-3, environments and b EMC, radiated and conducted emissions: v IEC/EN 68-3, environments: (industrial supply) and (public supply) restricted distribution v EN 55 class A (drives with built-in radio interference filters) v EN 55 class B, with additional filters e marking The drives have been designed to meet the requirements of the European low voltage (73/3/ EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives. Altivar 58 drives are therefore permitted to carry the e European Union mark. Product certifications UL, CSA, DNV Degree of protection Unprotected drives: IP and IP 4 on upper part (conforming to EN 578) Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC : b.5 mm peak from to 3 Hz b gnfrom3tohz Shock resistance Conforming to IEC : 5 gn for ms Maximum ambient pollution Drives ATV 58HD6MX to HD46MX, pd8n4 to pd79n4 and HD8N4X to HD79N4X: Degree 3 conforming to UL 58C Other drives: degree conforming to IEC 664- and EN 578 Maximum relative humidity 93 % without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC Ambient temperature around the unit Storage C Operation C ATV 58Ppppp drives, all ratings: Drives ATV 58HU9M to HU7M and HU8N4 to HU9N4: b without ventilation kit, without derating b Up to + 6 with ventilation kit, with current derating of. % per C above 5 C Drives ATV 58HU9M to HDM and HDN4 to HD3N4: b without ventilation kit, without derating b Up to + 5 with ventilation kit, with current derating of. % per C above 4 C Drives ATV 58HD6MX to HD46MX, HD8N4 to HD79N4 and HD8N4X to HD79N4X: b without ventilation kit, without derating b Up to + 6 with ventilation kit, current derating of. % per C above 4 C Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Operating position Drive characteristics Vertical Output frequency range Hz. 5 Configurable switching frequency khz b Without derating, in continuous operation: v for drives ATV 58pU9M to pdm, HD6MX and HD3MX, pu8n4 to pd46n4 and HD8N4X to HD46N4X v.5-- for drives ATV 58HD8MX to HD46MX, pd54n4 to pd79n4 andhd54n4x to HD79N4X b Without derating with intermittent operating cycle or with derating by one power rating in continuous operation: v 8--6 for drives ATV 58pU9M to pdm and pu8n4 to pd3n4 v 8- for drives ATV 58HD6MX, HD3MX, pd8n4 to pd46n4 and HD8N4X to HD46N4X v 4-8 for drives ATV 58HD8MX to HD46MX, pd54n4 to pd79n4 and HD54N4X to HD79N4X Speed range Speed precision For a torque variation of. Tn to Tn Transient overtorque Braking torque Voltage/frequency ratios b ± % of nominal speed, without speed feedback b ±. % of nominal speed, with tachogenerator feedback (option card) b ±. % of nominal speed, with encoder feedback (option card) % (4 % in standard torque) of the nominal motor torque (typical value at ± %) for s 7 % ( % in standard torque) of the nominal motor torque (typical value at ± %) for 6 s 3 % of the nominal motor torque without braking resistor (typical value). Up to 5 % with braking resistor fitted as option Sensorless flux vector control: at constant torque, variable torque or in energy saving mode, configurable Presentation: pages / to /6 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /7

213 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Electrical characteristics Power supply a.c. voltage V Drives ATV 58ppppM: - % to 4 + % single-phase and 3-phase Drives ATV 58HDppMX: 8 - % to 4 + % 3-phase Drives ATV 58ppppN4 and ppppn4x: 38 - % to 5 + % 3-phase Frequency Hz 5±5%or6±5% d.c. voltage V Drives ATV 58HpppppZ9: 54 - % to 7 + % Output voltage Electrical isolation Maximum voltage equal to line supply voltage Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, power supplies) 4 Available internal supplies Short-circuit and overload protection x + V (-, + %) supply for the reference potentiometer ( to kω), maximum current ma x + 4 V supply (min. V, max. 3 V) for control inputs, maximum current ma Analogue inputs A analogue voltage input AI: - V, impedance 3 kω analogue current input AI: - ma, impedance kω (reassignable to X-Y ma by programming X and Y with a definition of. ma) Frequency resolution in analogue reference:. Hz for Hz ( bits) Precision accuracy ± %, linearity ±.5 % of the maximum output frequency Sampling time: 4 ms max. Other inputs: see option cards Analogue output AO Assignable analogue output - ma, max. load impedance 5 Ω (reassignable to X-Y ma by programming X and Y from to with a definition of. ma) Resolution.4 ma (9 bits), linearity ±. ma, precision ±. ma Max.samplingtimems Other analogue outputs: see option cards Logic inputs LI 4 assignable logic inputs, impedance 3.5 kω, compatible with level PLC, IEC 65A-68 standard Maximum length of shielded cable: m Power supply + 4 V (min. V, max. 3 V) State if < 5 V, state if u V Sampling time: ms max. Other inputs: see option cards Logic outputs relay logic outputs R (fault relay) and R (assignable) C/O contact protected against overvoltages (relay R) N/O contact protected against overvoltages (relay R) Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 4 V Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos ϕ =):5Afora5 V or c 3 V b on inductive load (cos ϕ =.4 and L/R = 7 ms):.5 A for a 5 V or c 3 V Other outputs: see option cards Communication RS 485 multidrop serial link with simplified Modbus protocol as part of the standard product Transmission speed: 9 bps, no parity Use: b connecting a terminal (option) or b connecting a microprocessor card or b connecting a PC (option) or b connecting one or more PLCs Acceleration and deceleration ramps Ramp profiles can be selected: linear, S or U Factory-set to 3 s Possibility of ramp ranges which can be switched via frequency threshold or logic input Can be adjusted separately from.5-. to s (definition. s) Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp times if the braking capacity is exceeded (configurable option) Braking to a standstill By d.c. injection: b by a signal on an assignable logic input b automatically on stopping as soon as the frequency drops below. Hz, for a time which can be set between and 3 s or continuous Main protection and safety features of the drive Short-circuit protection: b between output phases b between output phases and earth b on internal supply outputs Thermal protection against overheating and overcurrents Line supply undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits Loss of supply phase safety circuit (prevents single-phase operation of 3-phase drives) Motor protection Thermal protection integrated in drive via continuous calculation of I t taking speed into account: b the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is powered down b the function can be modified via the terminal, depending on the type of motor (force-cooled or self-cooled). Protection against motor loss of phase Protection via PTC probes with option card Insulation resistance to earth MΩ > 5 (electrical isolation) at c 5 V Dielectric strength V c 83 earth/power V a control/power Presentation: pages / to /6 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /8

214 Characteristics (continued), operation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for both force-cooled and self-cooled motors. The only difference is in the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed. High torque applications C/Cn,75,7,5,5,95,75,5 3 4 Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque () Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque 3 Transient overtorque 4 Torque in overspeed at constant power (), N (Hz) C/Cn,75 Standard torque applications Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque (),55,5,,,95,75,5 3 4 Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque 3 Transient overtorque 4 Torque in overspeed at constant power (), N (Hz) Motor thermal protection The Altivar 58 drive features motor thermal protection designed specifically for selfcooled or forced-cooled variable speed motors. This motor thermal protection is designed for a maximum ambient temperature of 4 C around the motor. If the temperature around the motor exceeds 4 C, external thermal protection should be provided directly by thermistor probes integrated into the motor using one of the available option cards. () For power ratings 5 W, derate the motor by % instead of 5 % at very low frequencies. () The nominal frequency of the motor and the maximum output frequency can be adjusted between 4 and 5 Hz. Caution: check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the manufacturer. Presentation: pages / to /6 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /9

215 Operation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Special uses Motor power lower than drive power The Altivar 58 drive can supply any motor which has a power rating lower than that for which it is designed. Using the drive in this way provides a possible solution for applications requiring high intermittent overtorques. Examples: machine with very high starting torque, grinder, kneader, etc. Nota : in this case, it is advisable to increase the rating of the drive to the standardised power rating immediately above that of the motor. Example: an kw motor connected to a 5 kw drive. C/Cn,5 3,95 Motor power greater than drive power A motor with a power rating greater than that of the drive may be used as long as the current taken by the motor is less than or equal to the nominal current of the drive. This gives a self-cooled motor a greater speed range in continuous operation. Nota : the motor power should be limited to the standardised power rating immediately above that of the drive. 4,75,5, N (Hz) Example: a. kw drive connected to a 3 kw motor (the 3 kw motor will be used as a.kwmotorwithaspeedrangebetweenand5hz). Continuous motor torque Example:. kw Motor power = drive power Continuous motor torque Example: 3 kw Motor power > drive power 3. kw drive: nominal current Connecting motors in parallel Altivar 58 Output filter In In Inx M M Mx The nominal current of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the motors to be controlled. In this case, provide external thermal protection for each motor using probes or thermal overload relays. If the number of motors connected in parallel is 3, it is advisable to install an output filter between the drive and the motors or to reduce the switching frequency. Calculating the drive rating: Indrive>In+In+ Inx If several motors are used in parallel, there are possible scenarios: b the motors have equal power ratings, in which case the torque characteristics will remain optimised after the drive has been configured, b the motors have different power ratings, in which case the drive configuration will be incompatible for the motors with the lowest power ratings and the overtorque at low speed will be considerably reduced. Using a motor at overspeed,95 C/Cn,75,5, N (Hz) The maximum output frequency of the drive can be adjusted between 4 and 5 Hz. Before using a standard asynchronous motor at overspeed, check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the manufacturer. Above its nominal speed (corresponding to a frequency of 5/6 Hz), the motor operates with decreasing flux and its torque drops significantly (see the graph opposite). The application must support this mode of operation at reduced torque and very high speed. Machine torque (decreasing torque) Machine torque (low motor torque) 3 Continuous motor torque Typical applications: wood-working machine and increase of the operating speed range on motors with low loads. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /3

216 Operation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 4 U (V) 3 Special uses (continued) Using a motor at constant torque up to 87/4 Hz One4V,5Hzmotorwitha connectioncanbeusedatconstanttorqueupto 87 Hz if it has a connection. In this special case, the initial power of the motor and the power of the first drive connected are multiplied by 3 (you must select a drive with a suitable power rating). Example: a. kw, 5 Hz motor with a connection supplies 3.8 kw at 87 Hz with a connection. (Check that it can operate at overspeed). 5 (6) 87 (4) f (Hz) Using special motors Altivar 58, kw Altivar 58 4 kw Identical motor 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 Hz 87Hz b Special brake motors: tapered rotor or flux bypass This is the magnetic field of the motor which releases the brake. In order to operate the Altivar 58 in this way, the voltage must be set at low frequency. Nota : the no-load current can be high but operation at low speed may only be intermittent. b Synchronised synchronous or asynchronous motors These motors have a low level of self-inductance and require the use of chokes connected in series. The low speed torque remains limited. Special settings are required (suppression of slip compensation, adjustment of the motor power supply ratio). b Asynchronous motors with resistive rotor The excessive slip on these motors limits the low speed torque. Special settings are required (adjustment of slip compensation and motor power supply ratio). b Special high-speed motors These motors are designed for constant torque applications with high frequency ranges: to /5 Hz. In some cases, it is advisable to install an output filter between the drive and the motor. KM N Example: breaking of downstream contactor t: deceleration without ramp (freewheel) t: acceleration with ramp t t t t Switching the motor at the drive output Switchingispossiblewiththedrivelockedorunlocked.Withswitchingon-the-fly (drive unlocked), the motor is controlled and accelerates smoothly until it reaches the reference speed following the acceleration ramp. The "flying restart" must be configured for this type of use and the "output phase loss" protection function must be disabled. Typical applications: safety breaking at the drive output, bypass function, switching of motors connected in parallel. Altivar 58 KM M Operation with intermittent cycle and high switching frequency It is possible to operate at a high switching frequency () without derating the power if the operating conditions are intermittent within the following limits: cumulative running time 36 s maximum per 6 s cycle (load factor 6 %). () Possible frequencies (in khz): 8--6 for drives ATV 58pU9M to pdm and pu8n4 to pd3n4 8- for drives ATV 58HD6MX, HD3MX and HD8N4 to HD46N4 4-8 for drives ATV 58HD8MX to HD46MX and HD54N4 to HD79N4 Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /3

217 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 with heatsink and integrated EMC filters for asynchronous motors from.37 to 75 kw or.5 to HP 4 ATV 58HU8M ATV 58HD8N4 High torque applications (7 % Tn) Motor Line supply Altivar 58 Power indicated Line current () on rating plate () at Umin. at U max. Max. prospective line Isc at Umin. at Umax. Nominal drive current Max. transient current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load (4) Reference to be completed (5) Weight kw HP A A ka ka A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HU9M ATV 58HU8M ATV 58HU9M ATV 58HU4M ATV 58HU7M (7) ATV 58HU9M (7) ATV 58HDM (7) 3. 3-phase supply voltage: 4 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HU9M (8) ATV 58HU4M (8) ATV 58HU54M (8) ATV 58HU7M (8) ATV 58HU9M (8) ATV 58HDM (8) 3. 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HU8N4 (8) ATV 58HU9N4 (8) ATV 58HU4N4 (8) ATV 58HU54N4 (8) ATV 58HU7N4 (8) ATV 58HU9N4 (8) ATV 58HDN4 (8) ATV 58HD6N4 (8) ATV 58HD3N4 (8) ATV 58HD8N ATV 58HD33N ATV 58HD46N ATV 58HD54N ATV 58HD64N ATV 58HD79N4 57. Standard torque applications ( % Tn) 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HD8N ATV 58HD33N ATV 58HD46N ATV 58HD54N ATV 58HD64N ATV 58HD79N4 57. ATV 58HD54N4 () These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive ( or 4 khz depending on the rating) in continuous operation without derating. For higher switching frequencies, the drive must be in intermittent operation or it must be set one rating lower (see special uses on the previous pages). () Typical value without additional choke for a 4-pole motor. Exceptions: ATV 58HU7M, HU9M and HDM (single phase) (7). (3) For 6 seconds. (4) These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive in continuous operation ( or 4 khz depending on the rating). (5) Drive supplied with an operator terminal mounted on it. To obtain a drive without an operator terminal, add the letter Z at the end of the reference. Example: for ATV 58HU9M without operator terminal, the reference is ATV 58HU9MZ. (6) Nominal supply voltages, U min U max. (7) A line choke must be used if these drives are connected to a single phase supply. (8) These drives are available with power supplied via the d.c. bus, without an operator terminal. To order these drives, add Z9 at the end of the reference. Example: ATV58HU8N4becomes ATV 58HU8N4Z9 with power supply via the d.c. bus. Note: please refer to the table summarising the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on pages /54 and /55. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /3

218 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 with heatsink and no EMC filters for asynchronous motors from.37 to 75 kw or.5 to HP ATV 58HD8N4X High torque applications (7 % Tn) Motor Line supply Altivar 58 Power indicated Line current () on rating plate () at Umin. at U max. Max. prospective line Isc at Umin. at U max. Nominal drive current Max. transient current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load (4) Reference to be completed (5) Weight kw HP A A ka ka A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 8 4 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HD6MX ATV 58HD3MX ATV 58HD8MX ATV 58HD33MX ATV 58HD46MX phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HD8N4X ATV 58HD33N4X ATV 58HD46N4X ATV 58HD54N4X ATV 58HD64N4X ATV 58HD79N4X 57. Standard torque applications ( % Tn) 3-phase supply voltage: 8 4 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HD6MX ATV 58HD3MX ATV 58HD8MX ATV 58HD33MX ATV 58HD46MX phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58HD8N4X ATV 58HD33N4X ATV 58HD46N4X ATV 58HD54N4X ATV 58HD64N4X ATV 58HD79N4X 57. ATV 58HD54N4X () These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive ( or 4 khz depending on the rating) in continuous operation without derating. For higher switching frequencies, the drive must be in intermittent operation or it must be set one rating lower (see special uses on the previous pages). () Typical value for a 4-pole motor. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive in continuous operation ( or 4 khz depending on the rating). (5) Drive supplied with an operator terminal mounted on it. To obtain a drive without an operator terminal, add the letter Z at the end of the reference. Example: for ATV 58HD6MX without operator terminal, the reference is ATV 58HD6MXZ. (6) Nominal supply voltages, U min U max. Note: please refer to the table summarising the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on pages /54 and /55. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /33

219 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar58onbaseplate,withintegratedEMCfilters for asynchronous motors from.37 to 5 kw or.5 to HP 4 ATV 58PU8M High torque applications (7 % Tn) Motor Line supply Altivar 58 Power indicated Line current () on rating plate () at Umin. at U max. Max. prospective line Isc at Umin. at Umax. Nominal drive current Max. transient current (3) Power dissipated at nominal load (4) Reference to be completed (5) Weight kw HP A A ka ka A A W kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58PU9M ATV 58PU8M ATV 58PU9M ATV 58PU4M ATV 58PU7M (7) ATV 58PU9M (7) ATV 58PDM (7).5 3-phase supply voltage: 4 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58PU9M ATV 58PU4M ATV 58PU54M ATV 58PU7M ATV 58PU9M ATV 58PDM.5 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (6) 5/6 Hz ATV 58PU8N ATV 58PU9N ATV 58PU4N ATV 58PU54N ATV 58PU7N ATV 58PU9N ATV 58PDN ATV 58PD6N ATV 58PD3N4 3.5 () These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive ( or 4 khz depending on the rating) in continuous operation without derating. For higher switching frequencies, the drive must be in intermittent operation or it must be set one rating lower (see special uses on the previous pages). () Typical value without additional choke for a 4-pole motor. Exceptions: ATV 58PU7M, 58PU9M et 58PDM (single phase) (7). (3) For 6 seconds. (4) These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive in continuous operation ( or 4 khz depending on the rating). (5) Drive supplied with an operator terminal mounted on it. To obtain a drive without an operator terminal, add the letter Z at the end of the reference. Example: for ATV 58PU9M without operator terminal, the reference is ATV 58PU9MZ. (6) Nominal supply voltages, U min U max. (7) A line choke must be used if these drives are connected to a single phase supply. Note: please refer to the table summarising the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on pages /54 and /55. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /34

220 FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: accessories Kit for mounting in dust and damp proof enclosure (IP54degreeofprotection) This kit is used to mount the drive on a base plate inside a dust and damp proof enclosure, evacuating heat via an externally mounted heatsink. The only work to be done on the enclosure involves drilling the fixing holes. The kit consists of: b sealing joints, b aheatsink, b a set of instructions. VW3 A588p This does not apply to the ATV 58PU9M and 58PU8M, as the power dissipated by models on a heatsink is low enough for these products to be mounted in an enclosure (the ATV 58PU9M and 58PU8M are only designed for direct mounting on machine frames). Characteristics of the enclosure The surface of the cabinet or enclosure used for mounting the drive must have the following characteristics: b thickness.5 to 3 mm, b metal sheet: stainless or painted steel, adequately smooth, b heat-treated epoxy paintwork (do not use lacquer), max. thickness 7µm, fine or medium texture. For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 58PU9M, PU4M, PU8N4, PU9N4, PU4N4 VW3 A ATV 58PU54M, PU7M, PU54N4, PU7N4, PU9N4 VW3 A ATV 58PU9M, PDM, PDN4, PD6N4 VW3 A ATV 58PD3N4 VW3 A Kit for mounting air exchanger (IP3degreeofprotection) This kit is used for mounting certain drives with heatsinks (ATV 58HDppMX, HD8N4 to HD79N4 and HD8N4X to HD79N4X) inside a dust and damp proof enclosure. It evacuates heat using fittings which allow the fan to draw in cold air at the bottom, and to evacuate hot air to the outside at the top. This requires two cut-outs in the enclosure. The mounting kit consists of: b set of bellows (max. length = m), b grilles, b set of instructions. For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 58HD6MX, HD3MX ATV 58HD8N4, HD33N4, HD46N4 ATV 58HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X VW3 A VW3 A588p ATV 58HD8MX, HD33MX, HD46MX ATV 58HD54N4, HD64N4, HD79N4 ATV 58HD54N4X, HD64N4, HD79N4X VW3 A Presentation: pages / to /6 Dimensions: page /6 /35

221 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: accessories Control card fan kit The fan kit enables the drive to operate at an ambient temperature of 6 C, for example if it is mounted in an IP 54 enclosure. The circulation of air around the electronic cards prevents the formation of hot spots but not the derating: see page /7. This kit is mounted on the upper part of the drive. It is powered by the drive. The kit consists of: b a fan subassembly, b mounting accessories. VW3 A5883 For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 58pU9M, pu8m VW3 A ATV 58pU9M, pu4m, pu8n4, pu9n4, pu4n4 VW3 A ATV 58pU54M, pu7m, pu54n4, pu7n4, pu9n4 VW3 A ATV 58pU9M, pdm, pdn4, pd6n4, pd3n4 VW3 A ATV 58HD6MX, HD3MX ATV 58HD8N4, HD33N4, HD46N4 ATV 58HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X ATV 58HD8MX, HD33MX, HD46MX ATV 58HD54N4, HD64N4, HD79N4 ATV 58HD54N4X, HD64N4X, HD79N4X VW3 A5885. VW3 A5886. Separate control circuit supply kit The separate control circuit supply kit enables the drive control circuit to be supplied when the power is off. For drives connected on a communication bus, this option enables the dialogue and hence the diagnostics to be maintained if the power is interrupted. This kit is designed for drives with a rating of < 5 kw. It is mounted on the upper part of the drive. The power supplies must be separated by an isolation transformer. The kit must be supplied at 3 V (see isolation transformer characteristics below). The kit consists of: b a power supply subassembly, b removable screw terminals for 3 V power supply, b mounting and wiring accessories. Characteristics of the isolation transformer, to be ordered separately: b power part 3 VA, b secondary V - %...4 V + %, 5/6 Hz. For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 58pU8N4, pu9n4, pu4n4 VW3 A ATV 58pU54N4, pu7n4, pu9n4 VW3 A ATV 58pDN4, pd6n4, pd3n4 VW3 A Presentation: pages / to /6 Dimensions: page /6 /36

222 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: accessories Kit for removable power terminals The Altivar 58 "control" terminals are removable. This kit enables the drive's power terminals to be removed for applications which require speedy repairs. It is only designed for low-power drives (see below). The kit consists of: b removable prewired terminals, b mounting accessories, b a set of instructions. VW3 A588 For drives Reference Weight kg ATV 58pU9M, pu8m VW3 A588.3 ATV 58pU9M, pu4m, pu8n4, pu9n4, pu4n4 VW3 A588.3 ATV 58pU54M, pu7m, pu54n4, pu7n4, pu9n4 VW3 A Presentation: pages / to /6 Dimensions: page /6 /37

223 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: dialogue Operator terminal (this terminal can be supplied with the drive or ordered separately) This plug-in terminal is inserted into a slot provided for this purpose on the front panel of the drive. Its maximum operating temperature is 6 C. FWO REV RUN ESC ENT stop reset Description For drives Reference Weight (if ordered separately) kg Operator terminal ATV-58 all ratings VW3-A58. VW3-A58 4 Kit for remote location of operator terminal The plug-in terminal can be used remotely, fixed to the door of the enclosure, using this kit. Description For drives Reference Weight kg Kit comprising: ATV-58 all ratings VW3-A cable with connectors, length 3 m, - seals and screws for IP 65 mounting on enclosure door, - manual. Presentation: pages / to /6 /38

224 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: dialogue PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions See pages 3/ and 3/3. RS 485 connection kit This kit is used for RS 485 multidrop serial link connection to PLCs, Human/machine interface terminals, etc. It is connected in place of the operator terminal and cannot therefore be used at the same time. Description For drives Reference Weight kg RS 485 connection kit comprising: Altivar 58 VW3-A cable, length 3 m with male all ratings 9-way SUB-D connector and male 5-way SUB-D connector, - manual. Presentation: pages / to /6 /39

225 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: I/O extension cards, customer-specific cards Presentation I/O extension cards The Altivar 58 drive can be specially adapted to suit certain types of application by installing an I/O extension card in the drive. Two models are available: p Card with analogue input Includes two c 4 V logic inputs, one c 4 V open collector logic output, one / ma analogue output and one bipolar ± V analogue input. The analogue input can be used for speed correction with a tachogenerator, for feedback of the PI function, for processing of PTC motor protection probes or for summing the frequency reference. p Card with encoder inputs Includes two c 4 V logic inputs, one c 4 V open collector logic output, one / ma analogue output and A+, A-, B+, B- inputs which can be used for speed correction with an incremental encoder (Telemecanique XCC-H for example) or with an inductive or photoelectric sensor. Customer specific cards 4 To meet the requirements of special applications for which neither the standard product nor I/O extension cards are suitable, we can design and supply cards on request which incorporate: - hardware functions (I/O), - software functions, (special cycles and servo controls, etc). Cards are already available for: pump switching, multimotor operation, multiparameter entry and positioning. p Pump switching card This is used for controlling a complete pumping or compression installation using a single Altivar 58, and provides: - constant pressure in the supply, regardless of flow rate, - ease of setup and diagnosis of the installation, using the Altivar 58, - control of a variable speed pump and up to 4 fixed speed pumps, avoiding systematic wear of the same pumps. For more information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. p Multimotor card Has c 4 V reassignable logic inputs, c 4 V open collector logic output, one / ma analogue output, and one bipolar ± V analogue input.the analogue input can be used for speed correction with a tachogenerator, for feedback of the PI function, for processing of PTC motor protection probes, or for summing the frequency reference. Two drive configurations can be switched when the motor is stopped. Functions: loading two configurations with an Altivar 58 operator dialogue terminal, switching configurations via logic input or with an operator dialogue terminal, automatic auto-tuning possible after switching. p Multiparameter card This is used to switch (automatically or via logic input) up to 6 sets of 3 parameters, 6 of which are pre-defined and 7 are user-definable. Only the adjustment functions are taken into account when the motor is running. p Simple position indexer card This is used to define a cycle which manages the motion of a moving part along an axis with a limit switch as the end stop preceded by another end stop imposing the change to low speed. Positioning can be performed in both directions: -forward, -reverse. The card is equipped with: - 6 logic inputs c 4 V, - logic output c 4 V with open collector, - bipolar analogue input ± V, - analogue output - ma. TheAltivar58isdesignedtotakeacardmountedintheI/Oextensioncardslot. These special cards are for use with standard machines. Please consult your Regional Sales Office for a quotation. Schemes: pages /68 and /69 /4

226 Characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: I/O extension cards, customer-specific cards Characteristics of I/O extension cards Internal sources available Protected against short circuits and overloads - output + V ± %, maximum flow rate ma - output - V ± %, maximum flow rate ma - output + 4 V (min. V, max. 3 V), maximum flow rate ma for all 4 V drive outputs LI logic inputs Assignable logic inputs, impedance 3.5 kω, compatible with level PLC, IEC standard 65A-68 Maximum length of shielded cable: m Power supply + 4 V (min. V, max. 3 V). Status if < 5 V, status if > V Sampling time ms max. LO logic output Assignable open collector logic output, compatible with level PLC, IEC standard 65A-68 Power supply + 4 V (min. V, max. 3 V), max. current ma with internal source and ma with external source Sampling time ms max. AO analogue output AI analogue input or Assignable logic output / ma, max. load impedance 5 Ω (reassignable to X-YmA, by programming X and Y fromtowithadefinitionof.ma) Resolution.4 ma (9 bits), linearity ±. ma, precision ±, ma Sampling time ms max. assignable differential bipolar input ± V, impedance 3 kω. Adjustable gain Frequency reference resolution:. Hz for Hz ( bits plus sign) Precision ±.5 %, linearity ±. %, of max. output frequency Sampling time ms max. Max. length of shielded cable: m If configured for PTC probe processing, use at 75 Ω max. at C (3 x 5 Ω probes in series) Logic inputs A+, A-, B+, B- For encoders or detectors with NPN-type open collector outputs, nominal voltage 4 V c (9. at 3 V) Input impedance 785 Ω ±% Max. signal frequency 33 khz at max. speed HSP We recommend the use of an external 4 V source when using the drive with incremental coders I/O extension cards 8344 Description For drives Reference Weight kg Card with analogue input ATV-58 VW3-A58. all ratings Card with encoder inputs ATV-58 VW3-A58. all ratings Customer specific cards Description For drives Reference Weight kg Pump switching card ATV-58 VW3-A58. all ratings VW3-A58p Multimotor card ATV-58 VW3-A58. all ratings Multiparameter card ATV-58 VW3-A58. all ratings Simple position indexer card ATV-58 VW3-A583. all ratings Schemes: pages /68 and /69 /4

227 Presentation, functions, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Communication options 4 Presentation Functions The Altivar 38 or Altivar 58 can be connected to the communication networks or buses via communication cards or gateways. Communication cards are available for the following buses or networks: b Fipio. b Modbus Plus. b Uni-Telway, Modbus ASCII, Modbus RTU/Jbus. b INTERBUS-S. b AS-Interface. b Profibus DP. b Ethernet. b CANopen. b DeviceNet. b METASYS N. Communication gateways are available for the Profibus DP bus and the LonWorks network. (see pages 4/ to 4/5) Cards for Fipio, Modbus Plus, Uni-Telway/Modbus, INTERBUS-S, Profibus DP, Ethernet, CANopen, DeviceNet, METASYS N bus or networks Using these communication cards will enable you to benefit from the entire range of functions offered by the Altivar 38 or Altivar 58: b Configuration (accessible in read and write modes): line supply frequency, motor voltage, ramp profile, I/O assignment, etc. b Adjustment (accessible in read and write modes): d.c. injection time and amplitude, thermal protection, speed range, ramp time, current limitation, etc. b Control (accessible in read and write modes): run/stop, braking, frequency reference, fault reset, etc. b Signalling (accessible in read only mode): drive status register, motor speed, motor current, logic I/O status register, fault register, etc. b Authorisation of local control (via the terminals) Card for the AS-Interface bus Using this communication card will enable you to benefit from the entire range of functions offered by the Altivar 38 or Altivar 58: b Control: run/stop, braking, frequency reference (preset values), fault reset, +/- speed b Signalling: drive status (ready, running, faulty, frequency reference reached, thermal threshold reached, local forcing) b Authorisation of control via the terminals (local forcing) Characteristics Bus or network Maximum number of drives Transmission speed controlled on the bus Fipio 6 Mbps Modbus Plus 64 Mbps Uni-Telway, Modbus ASCII, Modbus RTU/Jbus , bps INTERBUS-S 64 Mbps AS-Interface 3 66 Kbps Profibus DP With card 6 96 bps Mbps With gateway 5 Modbus + 6 Profibus DP 96 bps Mbps Ethernet / Mbps CANopen 63 5/5/5/ Kbps DeviceNet 63 5/5/5 Kbps METASYS N 55 LonWorks 78 Kbps /4

228 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Communication options Communication card For bus or network Reference Weight kg Fipio: the card is equipped with a male 9-way SUB-D connector, which will take a TSX FP ACC removable connector with TSX FP CCpp connecting cable or TSX FP CApp tap cable. Configuration and adjustment access to predefined functions in the PL7 software screens. VW3 A583.3 Card incompatible with the ATV 38 drive. Fipio: hardware description identical to reference VW3 A583. The card is used for read/write access to all functions via the application program of the PLC. VW3 A583.3 VW3 A583 Modbus Plus: the card is equipped with a female 9-way SUB-D connector, which can take a Modbus Plus drop cable with connectors, reference 99NAD or 99NAD3. This cable should be connected to a Modbus Plus tap, reference 99NAD3, for connection to the Modbus Plus trunk cable, reference 49NAA7pp. VW3 A583.3 Uni-Telway/Modbus: the card is equipped with a female 9-way SUB-D connector and supplied with a 3 m cable fitted with a male 9-way SUB-D connector and a male 5-way SUB-D connector for connection on TSX SCA 6 subscriber sockets. VW3 A INTERBUS-S: the card is equipped with one male and one female 9-way SUB-D connector for connection with cables with connectors and screw terminals for separate c 4 V supplies. Power supply: c 4 V, ma min., to be ordered separately. VW3 A5834E.3 AS-Interface: the card is equipped with removable terminals. Example of connection accessory: use a tap-off for the AS- Interface cable, reference XZ-CG. VW3 A Profibus DP: the card is equipped with a female 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to cables with connectors. VW3 A Ethernet: the card is equipped with an RJ 45 connector for connection to cables with connectors, reference 49NTWpp. VW3 A583.3 CANopen: the card is equipped with removable screw terminals. VW3 A VW3 A583 DeviceNet: the card is equipped with removable screw terminals. The card supports: b The ODVA (Open Device Vendor Association) profile. b The drive profile defined previously. VW3 A METASYS N: the card is equipped with a female 9-way SUB-D connector. VW3 A58354U.3 Card incompatible with the ATV 58F drive Communication module and gateway For bus or network Reference Weight kg LonWorks: the module is equipped with a removable 5-way screw connector for the network (). The LonWorks module is connected either on the Modbus VW3 A5833 card via a cable supplied with the module, or on the drive terminal port. If the LonWorks module is connected on the drive terminal port, it will not be possible to use the operator terminal. VW3 A583PU.3 Module incompatible with the ATV 58F drive. Profibus DP: the gateway is equipped with an RJ 45 connector for connection to a cable fitted with connectors, reference VW3 P736R, and a 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to a stripped cable, reference VW3 A836D3 () (see pages 4/4 and 4/5). LA9 P37 () The module or gateway must be powered with a c 4 V supply. Power supply c 4 V, 4 ma min., to be ordered separately. Nota : to order connection cables and accessories, please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" and "Modicon TSX Micro and PL7 software" specialist catalogues or the manufacturers' catalogues. /43

229 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: braking module and resistors Presentation The resistor enables the Altivar 58 speed drive to operate when braking to a standstill or during slowdown braking, by dissipating the braking energy. Presentation There are two types available: - a model in an IP 3 or IP 3 unit designed for EMC, protected by a temperature controlled switch or thermal relay, - an model without protection, for low power ratings only. Applications Machines with high inertia, driving loads, machine with fast cycles. Braking is integrated in the Altivar 58 with the exception of the ATV-58pU9M and ATV-58pU8M drives, which require an additional braking module. Characteristics 4 References VW3-A5873 VW3-A58736 VW3-A587 VW3-A6674 to VW3-A58735 and VW3-A58737 to VW3-A5874 Ambient air temperature C Degree of protection of the unit IP 3 IP 3 IP IP 3 Protection of the resistor By temperature By temperature None By thermal relay () () controlled switch () controlled switch () Temperature controlled switch Tripping temperature C 3 ± 5% 6 ± 4 % Max voltage - max current a V -.3 A a V - 6 A Min voltage - min current c 4 V -. A c 4 V -. A Maximum contact resistance mω 5 5 Load factor of resistors The average value of the power which can be dissipated at 4 C by the resistor in the unit is determined for a load factor during braking which corresponds to most common applications: - seconds braking with a torque of.6 Tn every 4 seconds, -.8 seconds braking with a torque of.5 Tn every 4 seconds. Braking torque with resistor (speed drive limits) High torque applications 5/3 5/6 75/9 / N (Hz) Standard torque applications 5/3 5/6 75/9 / N (Hz),5,5,5,5,75,5,5 T/Tn,75,,5,5 T/Tn Continuous braking torque (driving load) Continuous braking torque (driving load) Load factor %. Load factor %. Maximum transient braking torque (for 6 s). Maximum transient braking torque (for 6 s). Minimum ohmic value of resistors which can be used with ATV-58 speed drive ATV-58p speed drive U9M U9M U54M U7M U9M D6MX D3MX D8MX D33MX D46MX U8M U4M DM Min resistance value in ohms ATV-58p speed drive U8N4 U7N4 U9N4 DN4 D6N4 D8N4, D8N4X D54N4 D64N4 U9N4 D3N4 D33N4, D33N4X D54N4X D64N4X U4N4 D46N4, D46N4X D79N4 U54N4 D79N4X Min resistance value in ohms () The switch must be connected in sequence (use for signalling or to control the line contactor). () Please order separately, rating 8 A. References: pages /46 and /47 /44 Dimensions: page /6

230 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: braking module and resistors Load factor The average value of power which can be dissipated at 4 C by the resistor in the unit is determined for a load factor when braking, which corresponds to most common applications. This load factor is given in the table on the previous page. Speed t TTime t Load factor: T t:brakingtimeins T: cycle time in s T For a specific application (hoisting, materials handling), it is necessary to redefine the nominal power of the resistor, taking into account the new load factor. Determining the nominal power Graph no. Average power depending on the braking torque for a load factor K,,6 6% 4% % % 5% Example: Motor power Pm = 4 kw Motor efficiency η =.85 Braking torque Tf =.6 Tn Brakingtimet=s CycletimeT=5s t Load factor fm = = % T %,,, Graph no.,5,6,5 Cf/Cn From graph no. calculate the coefficient K corresponding to a braking torque of.6 Tn and a load factor of %. K =.6 Permissible resistor overload depending on time (typical curve) K t (s) From graph no. calculate the coefficient K corresponding to a braking time of seconds. K = 7 Nominal power of the resistor (Pn) must be greater than: Pn = Pm x K x η ( + ) = 4. 3 x.6 x.85 ( + ) = 35 W Kxfm 7x. References: pages /46 and /47 Dimensions: page /6 /45

231 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: braking module and resistors Braking module For speed drives Reference Weight kg ATV-58pU9M, pu8m VW3-A587.5 Unprotected braking resistors For speed drives Ohmic Average Reference Weight value power available at 4 C () Ω W kg ATV-58pU9M, pu8m, pu9m, 3 VW3-A587.6 ATV-58pU8N4, pu9n4, pu4n4 4 ATV-58pU4M, pu54m 68 3 VW3-A VW3-A587 ATV-58pU54N4, pu7n4 4 VW3-A () Power which can be dissipated by the resistor at a maximum temperature of 5 C, corresponding to a maximum temperature limit of 75 C in an ambient temperature of 4 C. Characteristics: pages /44 and /45 Dimensions: page /6 /46

232 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: braking module and resistors Protected braking resistors For speed drives Ohmic Average Reference Weight value available power at 4 C () Ω W kg ATV-58pU9M, pu8m, pu9m, 3 VW3-A5873. ATV-58pU8N4, pu9n4, pu4n4 VW3-A5873p ATV-58pU4M, pu54m 68 3 VW3-A ATV-58pU54N4, pu7n4 4 VW3-A58734 ATV-58pU9N4, pdn4 6 8 VW3-A ATV-58pU7M, pd6n4, pd3n4 8 VW3-A ATV-58pU9M, pdm, 4 4 VW3-A ATV-58pD8N4, pd33n4, pd46n4, ATV-58HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X ATV-58HD6MX, pd54n4, HD54N4X VW3-A6674 () 7. ATV-58HD3MX 7.5 ATV-58HD8MX, HD33MX 5 ATV-58pD64N4, pd79n4 5 ATV-58HD64N4X, HD79N4X 5 ATV-58HD46MX 4.6 Characteristics: pages /44 and /45 () Power which can be dissipated by the resistor at a maximum temperature of 5 C, corresponding to a maximum temperature limit of 75 C in an ambient temperature of 4 C. () The different ohmic values are obtained depending on the connection and are detailed in the resistor manual. Dimensions: page /6 /47

233 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: line chokes Presentation The line chokes provide improved protection against mains overvoltages and reduce the current harmonic distortion produced by the speed drive. The chokes recommended are used to limit the line current. The use of line chokes is especially recommended in the following cases: p severe disturbance of mains supply by other receivers (interference, overvoltages), p mains supply with voltage imbalance between phases >.8 % of the nominal voltage, p speed drive supplied by a line with very low impedance (close to power transformers times more powerful than the speed drive rating), p installation of a large number of frequency inverters on the same line (reduction of line current), p reduction of overload of the cos ϕ power factor correction capacitors, if the installation has a bank of power factor correction capacitors. Line chokes must be used for supplying ATV-58pU7M, pu9m and pdm 3-phase speed drives via a singlephase V supply. Certain ATV-58 speed drives are available with an integrated line choke which limits the line current to the nominal motor current value: 4 p ATV-58HD6MX to HD46MX, HD8N4 to HD79N4 and HD8N4X to HD79N4X speed drives, p ready-assembled ATV-58EDN4 to ED79N4 speed drives. Characteristics Conforming to standards EN 578 (VDE 6 level high-energy overvoltages on the mains supply) Voltage drop Between 3 and 5 % inclusive of the supply nominal voltage. Higher values may cause a loss of torque. Type of choke VZ-L VZ-L VZ-L VW3- VW3- VW3- VW3- VW3- VW3-4M 7UM5 8UM A585 A585 A665 A665 A6653 A6654 Degree of protection Choke IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP Terminals IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP Value of inductance (mh) 5 4 Nominal current (A) Losses (W) Dimensions: page /63 /48

234 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: line chokes Altivar 58 Choke Prospective Single phase Line current Line current Reference Weight line or without with Isc 3-phase choke at choke at Umin Umax Umin Umax ka A A A A kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V () 5/6 Hz ATV-58pU9M VZ-L4M.63 ATV-58pU8M VZ-L7UM ATV-58pU9M VZ-L8UM.99 5 ATV-58pU4M VZ-L8UM.99 VW3-A665p 5 ATV-58pU7M () () VW3-A ATV-58pU9M () () 35 3 VW3-A ATV-58pDM () () VW3-A phase supply voltage: 4 V () 5/6 Hz 5 ATV-58pU9M VW3-A ATV-58pU4M VW3-A ATV-58pU54M 7. 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU7M VW3-A ATV-58pU9M VW3-A ATV-58pDM VW3-A phase supply voltage: 38 5 V () 5/6 Hz 5 ATV-58pU8N VW3-A ATV-58pU9N VW3-A ATV-58pU4N VW3-A ATV-58pU54N VW3-A ATV-58pU7N VW3-A ATV-58pU9N VW3-A ATV-58pDN VW3-A ATV-58pD6N VW3-A ATV-58pD3N VW3-A () Nominal supply voltage: U min U max. () Compulsory line choke. Dimensions: page /63 /49

235 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: additional radio interference suppression input filters Presentation Function The Altivar 58 incorporates radio interference suppression input filters to comply with the EMC products standards IEC 8-3 and EN 68-3 concerning variable speed drives. Compliance with these standards meets the requirements of the European directive on EMC. Certain ATV-58 speed drives are available without input filters, in situations where EMC conformity is not necessary: p ATV-58HD8N4 to HD79N4 speed drives are available with or without integrated input filters (in this case, the speed drive reference ends with X), p ATV-58HD6MX to HD46MX speed drives are not available with integrated input filters. Certain ATV-58 speed drives cannot be ordered without integrated input filters: p ATV-58pU9M to pdm speed drives, p ATV-58pU8N4 to pd3n4 speed drives. The additional filters meet the strictest requirements: these filters are designed to reduce conducted emissions on the mains supply to below the limits of standards EN 55 class A () or EN 55 class B. The filters are mounted under the ATV-58H speed drives (with heatsinks). They have tapped holes for fixing to the speed drives which they support. In the case of ATV-58P speed drives (on baseplate), and of ATV-58E (readyassembled) the filters are fixed to the side of the speed drive. () If the cable is longer than 5 m for ATV-58pU9M to pdm and pu8n4 to pd3n4 speed drives. If the cable is longer than 5 m for ATV-58HD8N4 to HD79N4 speed drives. 4 Use according to the type of mains supply These filters can only be used on TN type (connected to neutral) and TT type (neutral to earth) mains supplies. These filters must not be used with IT (impeding or isolated neutral) mains supplies. Standard IEC 8-3, appendix D., states that, for this type of supply, filters must not be used as they prevent the earth leakage detectors from working reliably. In addition, the effectiveness of the filters on this type of supply depends on the type of impedance between neutral and earth and is therefore not recommended. In the case of a machine which must be installed on an IT supply, the solution is to insert an isolation transformer and operate the machine locally using a TN or TT supply. Characteristics Conforming to standards EN 33 Degree of protection IP and IP 4 on upper part Maximum relative humidity 93 % with no condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC Ambient air temperature Operation C around the device Storage C Maximum operating altitude Without derating m (above this derate the current by % for each additional m) Maximum nominal voltage 5/6 Hz single phase V 4 + % 5/6 Hz 3-phase V 5 + % Dimensions: page /63 Schemes: page /7 /5

236 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: additional radio interference suppression input filters For speed drives Filter Reference Maximum length In Reference Weight of shielded cable EN 55 EN 55 () classa classb () () m m A kg Single phase supply voltage:...4 V (3) - 5/6 Hz ATV-58pU9M, pu8m 5 VW3-A584.7 ATV-58pU9M, pu4m 5 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU7M 5 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU9M, pdm 5 45 VW3-A phase supply voltage:...4 V (3) - 5/6 Hz ATV-58pU9M, pu4m 5 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU54M, pu7m 5 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU9M, pdm 5 45 VW3-A phase supply voltage: V (3) - 5/6 Hz ATV-58HD6MX, HD3MX 5 8 VW3-A ATV-58HD8MX, HD33MX 5 6 VW3-A5848. ATV-58HD46MX 3-phase supply voltage: V (3) - 5/6 Hz ATV-58pU8N4, pu9n4, 5 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU4N4 ATV-58pU54N4, pu7n4, 5 5 VW3-A ATV-58pU9N4 ATV-58pDN4, pd6n VW3-A5844. ATV-58pD3N VW3-A ATV-58HD8N4 5 VW3-A ATV-58HD8N4X 5 5 ATV-58HD33N4, HD46N4 8 VW3-A ATV-58HD33N4X, HD46N4X 5 8 Dimensions: page /63 ATV-58HD54N4, HD64N4, 6 VW3-A5848. HD79N4, ATV-58HD54N4X, 5 6 HD64N4X, HD79N4X () The filter selection tables give the maximum length for the shielded cables which connect the motors to the speed drives, for a switching frequency of.5 to khz. These limits are given for information only as they depend on the interference capacity of the motors and the cables used. For motors connected in parallel, the total of the lengths must be taken into account. () In: nominal current of the filter. (3) Nominal supply voltage : U min...u max. Schemes: page /7 /5

237 Presentation, principle Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: output filters and motor line chokes Presentation An output filter inserted between the speed drive and the motor provides: p limitation of dv dt at motor terminals (5 to 5 V/µs), for cables over 5 m long, p filtering of interference caused by the opening of a contactor placed between the filter and the motor, p reduction of the motor earth leakage current. Our range offers three types of filter. Principle LR filter cell: this cell comprises 3 high frequency line chokes and 3 resistors. LR filter U 4 Altivar 58 V W M 3 LC filter cell: this cell comprises 3 high frequency line chokes and 3 capacitors. LC filter U Altivar 58 V W C C C Line choke + capacitor combination: this assembly comprises 3 capacitors in delta connection mounted in a box connected to a 3-phase line choke VW3-A665p. Motor line chokes U Altivar 58 V W C C C Capacitors Motor line chokes For standard motor cable lengths over m (5 m for shielded cables), a line choke limits overvoltages at the motor terminals. Altivar 58 M 3 Dimensions: page /63 /5

238 Characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Options: output filters and motor line chokes Characteristics () LR filter cells Speed drive switching frequency khz.5 4 max () Length I of motor cable m Shielded wires: 8 ; unshieldes wires: Degree of protection IP LC filter cells Types of LC filter Line chokes: VW3-A665p + LC filter cell: VW3-A664p capacitors VW3-A664 Speed drive switching frequency khz or4 or4 Length I of Shielded wires m 4 5 motor cable Unshielded wires m 8 4 References LR filter cells For speed drives Losses Nominal Reference Weight current kg ATV-58pU8M, pu9m, 5 W A VW3-A ATV-58pU8N4, pu9n4, pu4n4, pu54n4, ATV-58pU7N4 ATV-58pU4M, pu54m, 8 W 6 A VW3-A ATV-58pU9N4 ATV-58pDM, pu7m, pu9m, ATV-58pD3N4, pdn4, pd6n4 W 33 A VW3-A Line choke (3) + capacitor combinations For speed drives Description Reference Weight kg ATV-58HD6MX Motor line chokes VW3-A6655. Capacitors (4) VW3-A664.5 ATV-58HD3MX, HD8MX, HD33MX, Motor line chokes VW3-A ATV-58pD8N4, pd33n4, pd46n4, ATV-58HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X Capacitors (4) VW3-A664.5 ATV-58HD46MX, pd54n4, pd64n4, pd79n4, Motor line chokes VW3-A ATV-58HD54N4X, HD64N4X, HD79N4X Capacitors (4) VW3-A664.5 LC filter cell in high torque applications ATV-58pD8N4, pd33n4, pd46n4, LC filter cell VW3-A ATV-58HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X, ATV-58HD6MX, HD3MX ATV-58pD54N4, pd64n4, pd79n4, LC filter cell VW3-A ATV-58HD54N4X, HD64N4X, HD79N4X, ATV-58HD8MX, HD33MX LC filter cell in standard torque applications ATV-58pD8N4, pd33n4, HD8N4X, HD33N4X LC filter cell VW3-A ATV-58pD46N4, pd54n4, pd64n4, LC filter cell VW3-A ATV-58HD46N4X, HD54N4X, HD64N4X, ATV-58HD6MX, HD3MX Motor line chokes (5) ATV-58HD6MX Motor line choke VW3-A6655. ATV-58HD3MX, HD8MX, HD33MX, Motor line choke VW3-A ATV-58pD3N4, pd8n4, pd33n4, pd46n4 ATV-58HD8N4X, HD33N4X, HD46N4X ATV-58HD46MX, pd54n4, pd64n4, pd79n4 Motor line choke VW3-A ATV-58HD54N4X, HD64N4X, HD79N4X () To ensure the filters perform at optimum level, observe the cable length between the motor and the speed drive given in the table above. For an application using several motors connected in parallel, the cable length must be the total length including all tap-offs. There is a risk of the filters overheating if a cable longer than the recommended length is used. () For frequencies above 4 khz or cables longer than metres, consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) It is not advisable to connect option VW3-A664 to the speed drive terminals without line chokes, as this could cause the speed drive to fail. (4) Connection to the S, S, S3 terminals of the selected line choke using wires of.5 mm cross-section. (5) Degree of protection IP. Dimensions: page /63 /53

239 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 with heatsink Compatibility with integrated EMC filters (see page /3) Supply Motor ATV-58 drives for applications Options Supply voltage 5/6 Hz Power indicated on rating plate with standard torque ( % Tn) with high torque (7 % Tn) Line chokes extension or communication card Remote operator terminal PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions Software workshop Magelis See p. /4 and Pocket PC display kw HP See p. /49 See p. /43 See p. /38 See p. 3/ 4 V.37,5 ATV-58HU9M VZ-L4M VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 single-phase.75 ATV-58HU8M VZ-L7UM5 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8.5 ATV-58HU9M VZ-L8UM VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8. 3 ATV-58HU4M VZ-L8UM VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 ATV-58HU7M VW3-A585 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58HU9M VW3-A585 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ,5 ATV-58HDM VW3-A585 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 V.5 ATV-58HU9M VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3-phase. 3 ATV-58HU4M VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 3 ATV-58HU54M VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58HU7M VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58HU9M VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 7.5 ATV-58HDM VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A V.75 ATV-58HU8N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3-phase.5 ATV-58HU9N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8. 3 ATV-58HU4N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 ATV-58HU54N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58HU7N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58HU9N4 VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 7.5 ATV-58HDN4 VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5 ATV-58HD6N4 VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5 ATV-58HD3N4 VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58HD8N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 ATV-58HD33N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 ATV-58HD8N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 4 ATV-58HD46N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 ATV-58HD33N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58HD54N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 ATV-58HD46N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58HD64N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 ATV-58HD54N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58HD79N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 ATV-58HD64N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 75 ATV-58HD79N4 Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 /54

240 RS 485 interconnection Additional input filter Output filter Braking module IP braking resistor IP 3 braking resistor Kit for mounting IP 3 air exchanger Control card fan kit Separate control circuit supply kit Plug-in power terminal block See p. /39 See p. /5 See p. /53 See p. /46 See p. /46 See p. /47 See p. /35 See p. /36 See p. /36 See p. /37 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A587 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 VW3-A587 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5874 VW3-A58733 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5874 VW3-A58733 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5874 VW3-A58733 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5873 VW3-A58734 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5873 VW3-A58734 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A58735 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58735 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5845 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5846 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5846 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 /55

241 Combinations for customer assembly (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 with heatsink Compatibility without integrated EMC filters (see page /33) Supply Motor ATV-58 drives for applications Options Supply Power with standard with high Line extension or Remote PowerSuite advanced voltage indicated on torque torque choke communication operator dialogue solutions 5/6 Hz rating plate ( % Tn) (7 % Tn) card terminal Software workshop See p. /4 and Pocket PC kw HP See p. /49 See p. /43 See p. /38 See p. 3/ 8 4 V 5 ATV-58HD6MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 3-phase 5 ATV-58HD3MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD6MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD8MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD3MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 3 ATV-58HD33MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD8MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 3 4 ATV-58HD46MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD33MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD46MX Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 38 5 V ATV-58HD8N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 3-phase 3 ATV-58HD33N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD8N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 3 4 ATV-58HD46N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD33N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 37 5 ATV-58HD54N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD46N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 45 6 ATV-58HD64N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD54N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD79N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp ATV-58HD64N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp 75 ATV-58HD79N4X Integrated VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp /56

242 PowerSuite advanced RS 485 Additional Output Braking IP 3 Kit for Control dialogue solutions interconnection input filter module braking mounting card Magelis display filter resistor IP 3 air fan kit exchanger See p. 3/ See p. /39 See p. /5 See p. /53 See p. /46 See p. /47 See p. /35 See p. /36 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5846 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5846 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5847 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 XBT-HM7A8 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5848 Integrated VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 /57

243 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 on baseplate Compatibility with integrated EMC filters (see page /34) Supply Motor ATV-58 drive for applications Options Supply voltage Power indicated on with standard torque with high torque Line choke extension or communication Remote operator PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions 5/6 Hz rating plate ( % Tn) (7 % Tn) card terminal Software workshop Magelis display See p. /4 and Pocket PC kw HP See p. /49 See p. /43 See p. /38 See p. 3/ 4 V.37.5 ATV-58PU9M VZ-L4M VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 single-phase.75 ATV-58PU8M VZ-L7UM5 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8.5 ATV-58PU9M VZ-L8UM VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8. 3 ATV-58PU4M VZ-L8UM VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 ATV-58PU7M VW3-A585 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58PU9M VW3-A585 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58PDM VW3-A585 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 V.5 ATV-58PU9M VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3-phase. 3 ATV-58PU4M VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 3 ATV-58PU54M VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58PU7M VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58PU9M VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 7.5 ATV-58PDM VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A V.75 ATV-58PU8N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3-phase.5 ATV-58PU9N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8. 3 ATV-58PU4N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 ATV-58PU54N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58PU7N4 VW3-A665 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58PU9N4 VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 7.5 ATV-58PDN4 VW3-A6653 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5 ATV-58PD6N4 VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5 ATV-58PD3N4 VW3-A6654 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 /58

244 RS 485 Additional Output Braking IP IP 3 Kit for Control Separate Plug-in inter- input filter module braking braking mounting card control circuit power connection filter resistor resistor in IP 54 fan kit supply kit terminal block enclosure See p. /39 See p. /5 See p. /53 See p. /46 See p. /46 See p. /47 See p. /35 See p. /36 See p. /36 See p. /37 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A587 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 VW3-A587 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5874 VW3-A58733 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5874 VW3-A58733 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5874 VW3-A58733 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58737 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5873 VW3-A58734 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A5873 VW3-A58734 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 Integrated VW3-A58735 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58735 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A5845 VW3-A58453 Integrated VW3-A58736 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 /59

245 Dimensions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 ATV-58Hpppp (with heatsink) 4Ø c b = G = a = H = 4 ATV-58H a b c G H Ø U9M, U8M U9M, U4M, U8N4, U9N4, U4N U54M, U7M, U54N4, U7N4, U9N U9M, DM, DN4, D6N D3N D6MX, D3MX, D8N4, D33N4, D46N D8N4X, D33N4X, D46N4X D8MX, D33MX, D46MX, D54N4, D64N4, D79N D54N4X, D64N4X, D79N4X ATV-58Ppppp (on baseplate) 4Ø c b = G = = H = a ATV-58P a b c G H Ø U9M, U8M U9M, U4M, U8N4, U9N4, U4N U54M, U7M, U54N4, U7N4, U9N U9M, DM, DN4, D6N D3N Presentation: pages / to /6 /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34

246 = Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Protected braking resistors VW3-A5873 to A58734 VW3-A58735 to A58737 c a 7,5 = = 8, = 77,5 = 4xØ H b xø5 6 = = 85 = 3xØ5,5 VW3- a b c H A A58736, A VW3-A = = 6 3 = 4 = xØ3 Unprotected braking resistors VW3-A5873 -wire output, length.5 m VW3-A587 and A5874 -wire output, length.5 m 36 6 Braking module VW3-A587 (mounted on AM-ED mounting rail) Presentation: page /44 Characteristics: pages /44 and /45 References: pages /46 and /47 /6

247 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Kit for mounting in dust and damp proof enclosure VW3-A588 to A5885 () a (3) () b 4 () c VW3- a b c A A A A () Metal plate of enclosure () VW3-A588 to VW3-A5885 (3) Drive Kit for mounting air exchanger VW3-A5886 and A5887 Example of connecting upper bellows on a side panel b Control card fan kit VW3-A588 to A5886 () () () (3) VW3- b A588 6 A588 5 VW3- b A A A A A () VW3-A5886 and VW3-A5887 A () Drive () VW3-A588 to VW3-A5884 (3) 3 mm minimum () Drive Separate control circuit supply kit Kit for removable power terminals VW3-A586 to A5864 VW3-A588 to A5883 () () () () VW3- b VW3- b A586 5 A588 5 A A A A () VW3-A586 to A5864 () VW3-A588 to VW3-A5883 () Drive () Drive Presentation: pages / to /6 References: pages /35 to /37 /6

248 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 3-phase chokes VW3-A665 to A6657 Single phase chokes VZ-Lppppppp, VW3-A585 and VW3-A585 Ø b H c c 8xØ G G a c 4 Ø 4 Ø G a () b b H H b b H c G a VW3- a b c c G G H Ø A x 9 A x a b c G H Ø A x VZ-L4M x 9 A x VZ-L7UM x 9 A x VZ-L8UM x A x VW3-A x A VW3-A x Radio interference suppression filters (EMC) Output filters VW3-A584 to A5848 VW3-A5845 to A58453 () VW3- a b c G H Ø A A A A A VW3- a b c G H Ø A5846, A A5845, A A A () Cable Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) c G a () 5 Ø (3) Mounting on ATV-58p b Ø (3) U9M, U8M 63 M4 U9M, U4M, U8N4, U9N4, U4N M4 U54M, U7M, U54N4, U7N4, U9N M4 U9M, DM, DN4, D6N4 6 M4 D3N4 6 M4 D6MX, D3MX, D8N4, D33N4, D46N4 8 M5 D8MX, D33MX, D46MX, D54N4, D64N4, D79N4 M5 () Drive () Plate (3) Tapped holes for fixing EMC clamps Presentation: pages /48 to /53 Characteristics: pages /48 to /53 References: pages /49 to /53 /63

249 Schemes, compatibility Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Schemes without contactor, recommended for machines which are not dangerous 3-phase supply Single phase supply Q () () (3) (4) Q () () (3) (4) A U L V L W L3 RA A L L RA RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 RA RC U V M 3 W 4 A ATV- 58pU9M and 58pU8M A ATV-58 other ratings + PA PB U V W PA PB AO COM AI + AO COM AI + AI RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 AI RA RC U V M 3 W Optional braking resistor (5) X - Y ma Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) (5) X - Y ma Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) A + (6) PA PB Optional braking resistor () Optional line choke. () Fault relay contacts; for remote signalling of drive status. (3) Internal + 4 V. If an external + 4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the + 4 of the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. (4) R relay can be reassigned. (5) X and Y can be configured between and ma independently for AI and AO. (6) VW3-A587 braking module, if a braking resistor is used, for ratings ATV-58pU9M and pu8m only. Note: - all the terminals are located at the bottom of the drive, - fit suppressors to all the specific circuits close to the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Compatible components (for complete references, consult our catalogue "Motor starter solutions") Code Q Description GV-L or Compact NS (see following pages) Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /64

250 Schemes, compatibility (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Schemes with line contactor, recommended for dangerous machines which are switched on or off infrequently 3-phase supply Single phase supply Q Q Q T Q3 S S Q 6 KM A A 6 Q T Q3 S S Q 6 KM A A 3 5 A KM RA RC A KM RA RC 3 4 KM KM 4 () () () (3) (4) () (3) (4) A L L RA RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 RA RC U U V V M 3 W W (5) X - Y ma A A + PA PB 4 6 A L L L3 RA RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 RA RC U U V V M 3 W W Optional braking resistor PA PB (5) X - Y ma AO COM AI + AI Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) AO COM AI + AI Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (5) ATV- 58pU9M and 58pU8M ATV-58 other ratings () Optional line choke. A (6) () Fault relay contacts; for remote signalling of drive status. (3) Internal + 4 V. If an external + 4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the + 4 of the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. Optional braking (4) R relay can be reassigned. resistor (5) X and Y can be configured between and ma independently for AI and AO. (6) VW3-A587 braking module, if a braking resistor is used, for ratings ATV-58pU9M and pu8m only. Note: - all the terminals are located at the bottom of the drive, - fit suppressors to all the specific circuits close to the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. + PA PB Compatible components (for complete references, consult our catalogue "Motor starter solutions") Code Q KM Description GV-L or Compact NS (see following pages) LC-Dpp + LA4-DAU (see following pages) S, S XB-B or XA-B pushbuttons T Q Q3 VA transformer V secondary GV-L rated at twice the nominal primary current of T GB-CB5 Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /65

251 Schemes, compatibility (continued) Drives ATV-58pU9M to pdm and pu8n4 to pd3n4 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Schemes with downstream contactor, recommended for dangerous machines which are switched on and off frequently 3-phase supply Single phase supply Q Q () () () (3) (4) () (3) (4) A L L L3 RA RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 RA RC A U V W PA PB AO COM AI + AI U V L L RA RC RB LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 RA RC W AO COM AI + AI (5) X - Y ma (5) X - Y ma 4 KM U 3 4 V 6 5 W Optional braking resistor Reference potentiometer KM A A X - Y ma (5) KM U 3 4 V 5 6 W Reference potentiometer KM A A X - Y ma (5) M 3 M 3 A A ATV- 58pU9M and 58pU8M + ATV-58 other ratings PA PB + A (6) PA PB () Optional line choke. () Fault relay contacts; for remote signalling of drive status. (3) Internal + 4 V. If an external + 4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the + 4 of the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. (4) Use the downstream contactor control function with relay R (or the logic output LO of one of the I/O extension cards by relaying). (5) X and Y can be configured between and ma independently for AI and AO. (6) VW3-A587 braking module, if a braking resistor is used, for ratings ATV-58pU9M and pu8m only. Note: - all the terminals are located at the bottom of the drive, - fit suppressors to all the specific circuits close to the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Optional braking resistor Compatible components (for complete references, consult our catalogue "Motor starter solutions") Code Q KM Description GV-L or Compact NS (see following pages) LP4-pppp (see following pages) Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /66

252 Schemes, compatibility (continued) Drives ATV-58HD6MX to HD46MX and HD8N4 to HD79N4 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Schemes with downstream contactor, recommended for dangerous machines which are switched on and off frequently 3-phase supply Q Q 3 4 Q 5 6 (3) A T Q3 RA RC KM A A A KM L U U L V 3 4 V L3 W 5 6 W RA RC Optional braking resistor () () PA RB PB LI (4) LI X - Y ma AO LI3 COM ( V) LI4 + 4 AI + AI Reference potentiometer X - Y ma (4) 3 M () Fault relay contacts; for remote signalling of drive status. () Internal + 4 V. If an external + 4 V supply is used, connect the V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the + 4 of the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the + 4 V of the external supply. (3) Use the "downstream contactor control" function with relay R (or the logic output LO of one of the "I/O extension" cards, by relaying). (4) X and Y can be configured between and ma independently for AI and AO. Note: - all the terminals are located at the bottom of the drive, - fit suppressors to all the specific circuits close to the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Compatible components (for complete references, consult our catalogue "Motor starter solutions") Code Q KM T Q Q3 Description GV-L or Compact NS (see following pages) LC-Dppp with interference suppressor (see following pages) VA transformer V secondary GV-L rated at twice the nominal primary current of T GB-CB5 Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /67

253 Schemes (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 4 V external supply for supplying logic inputs and/or the logic -wire control and step by step (JOG) operation output 4 COM LIi LIi LIi LIi + 4 LO + LO LI LI LI KA Forward Reverse JOG V V supply 3-wire control and step by step (JOG) operation Motor protection via PTC probes, with optional analogue input extension card LI LI LI3 LI4 + 4 Option card + AI3A AI3B COM R = kω ± 5 % Stop Forward Reverse Forward JOG 3 5 Ω probes in series Reverse JOG Motor Separate control circuit supply kit VW3-A586 A5864 ATV-58 C 3 V 3 V Note: the drive control is supplied in the following cases: - power on, - separate control circuit supply on, - power and separate control circuit supply on. Presentation: page /4 Characteristics: page /4 References: page /4 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /68

254 Schemes (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 I/O extension card with analogue input I/O extension card with inputs for encoder COM AI3A ± V AI3B + AO LI5 LI6 + 4 LO + LO + KA COM v A A A A Encoder 4 v + B B B B AO LI5 LI6 + 4 LO + LO + KA 4 V external supply Examples of use with I/O extension cards VW3-A58p Bipolar speed reference Bipolar speed reference on external ± V supply ± V COM AI3A AI3B + COM AI3A AI3B + COM AI3A AI3B + R Unipolar speed reference Speed regulation with tachometer feedback COM AI3A AI3B + R ±5to9V -R () -R () B () See page /44 the section on functions to determine the resistances. VW3-A58 I/O extension card with inputs for encoder used with 3-wire inductive or photoelectric proximity sensor Speed regulation with reduced precision at low speed and increased response time direction only COM A A NPN sensor + B B AO LI5 LI6 + 4 LO + LO + KA Presentation: page /4 Characteristics: page /4 References: page /4 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /69

255 Schemes (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Additional input filters, radio interference suppression filters VW3-A584p Single phase supply, single phase filter Single phase supply, 3-phase filters L L' L' L L' L L L3 L L L L L3 L' L'3 3-phase supply L' L' L'3 L L L3 4 L L L3 Output filters VW3-A5845p LR cell VW3-A665p + VW3-A664 Motor line chokes + capacitors G L L L3 3 E S E U V W U V S E3 S3 W VW3-A665i U V M 3 W 3 VW3-A664 VW3-A664p LC cell U V M 3 U V W U/T 3 V/T 4 W/T3 W U V W M 3 Presentation: pages /5 and /5 Characteristics: pages /5 and /53 References: pages /5 and /53 Dimensions: page /63 /7

256 Principle, installation diagram Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Electromagnetic compatibility Principle p The earths between the drive, motor and cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality. p Use shielded cables with shielding connected to earth at 36 at both ends of the motor cable, braking resistor (if fitted) and control-command cables. Tubes or metal ducting can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. p Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (mains supply) and the motor cable. Installation diagram Metal plate supplied with the drive, to be mounted as shown (machine earth). Altivar Non-shielded power supply wires or cable. 4 Non-shielded wires for fault relay contacts output. 5 Fix and earth the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive: - strip the shielding, - use the correct size clamps on the stripped part of the shielding to fix to metal plate ; the shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure good contact, - clamp types: stainless steel. 6 Shielded cable for motor connection with shielding connected to earth at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminal blocks must be in EMC shielded metal cases. 7 Shielded cable for connecting the control/command system. For applications requiring several conductors, use small cross-sections (.5 mm). The shielding must be connected to earth at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminal blocks must be in EMC shielded metal cases. 8 Shielded cable for connecting brake resistor (if fitted). The shielding must be connected to earth at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminal blocks must be in EMC shielded metal cases. Notes: The HF equipotential earth connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit. If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted under the drive (drive with heatsink) or to one side (drive on a baseplate), and connected directly to the mains supply via an unshielded cable. Link 3 is via the filter cable. Presentation: pages / to /6 /7

257 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Motor starters 4 GV L + LC D + ATV 58 Applications Circuit-breaker/contactor/drive combinations can be used to ensure continuous service of the installation with optimum safety. The type of coordination selected between the circuit-breaker and the contactor can reduce maintenance costs in the event of a short-circuit by minimising the time required to make necessary repairs and the cost of replacement equipment. The combinations suggested provide type coordination. Type coordination: a short-circuit will not damage the device or affect its settings. The motor starter should be able to operate once the electrical fault has been removed. The electrical isolation provided by the circuit-breaker will not be affected by the short-circuit. The risk of welding of the line contactor contacts is permissible if they can be separated easily. The downstream contactor is not affected by type coordination. The drive controls the motor, provides protection against short-circuits between the drive and the motor and protects the motor cable against overloads. The overload protection is provided by the drive's motor thermal protection. If this protection is removed, external thermal protection should be provided. Before restarting the installation, the cause of the trip must be removed. Single phase supply voltage: to 4 V (for motors.37 to 5.5 kw or.5to7.5hp) Motor circuit-breaker: NS8HMA product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. Composition of contactors: LC D9 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact. Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference (3) Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () A (4) (5) (6).37/.5 GV L 6.3 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9M.75/ GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU8M.5/ GV L 8 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9M./3 GV L 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU4M 3/ GV L 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU7M (7) 4/5 NS8HMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9M (7) 5.5/7.5 NS8HMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8BL ATV 58pDM (7) 3-phase supply voltage: to 3 V (for motors.5 to 7.5 kw or tohp) Motor circuit-breaker: NS8HMA product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. Composition of contactors: LC D9 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact. Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference (3) Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () A (4) (5) (6).5/ GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9M./3 GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU4M 3/ GV L 8 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU54M 4/5 GV L 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU7M 5.5/7.5 NS8HMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D8BL ATV 58pU9M 7.5/ NS8HMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D5BL ATV 58pDM () Standard power ratings for 4-pole motors 5/6 Hz 3 V. () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (3) Breaking capacity: /4 V Icu (ka) GV L 5 NS8HMA5 (4) Replace pp with the control circuit voltage reference indicated in the table below. a.c. control circuit Volts a /6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (5) LC DppBL contactors have 4 V d.c. low consumption coils ( ma). Up to 5 kw, they are powered by the internal drive power supply. For power ratings above this level, use an external supply and complete the contactor coil voltage according to footnote (4). (6) Replace the p in the reference according to the type of drive required (see pages /3 to /34). (7) A line choke must be added. /7

258 Combinations for customer assembly (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Motor starters 3-phase supply voltage: 8 to 4 V (for motors to 37 kw or 5 to 5 HP) Motor circuit-breaker: NSppppMA product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. Composition of contactors: LC D3 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact. High torque application Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () (3) A (4) (4) /5 NS8HMA5 8 LC D4pp LC D3pp ATV 58HD6MX 5/ NSHMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D4pp ATV 58HD3MX 8.5/5 NSNMA LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD8MX /3 NSNMA LC D8pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD33MX 3/4 NS6NMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD46MX Standard torque application Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () (3) A (4) (4) 5/ NS8HMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D4pp ATV 58HD6MX 8.5/5 NSNMA LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD3MX /3 NSNMA LC D8pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD8MX 3/4 NS6NMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD33MX 37/5 NS6NMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD46MX () Standard power ratings for 4-pole motors 5/6 Hz 3 V. () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (3) Breaking capacity of circuit-breaker according to standard IEC (4) Replace pp with the control circuit voltage reference indicated in the table below. a.c. control circuit Volts a /6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. NS8HMA + LC D + ATV 58 /73

259 Combinations for customer assembly (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Motor starters 4 NS8HMA + LC D + ATV 58 3-phase supply voltage: 38 to 45 V (for motors.75 to 75 kw or tohp) Motor circuit-breaker: NSppppMA product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. Composition of contactors: LC D9 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact. High torque application Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () (3) A (4) (4) (5) (6).75/ GV L8 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU8N4.5/ GV L 6.3 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4./3 GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU4N4 3/ GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU54N4 4/5 GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU7N4 5.5/7.5 GV L 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4 7.5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D9BL ATV 58pDN4 /5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D5BL ATV 58pD6N4 5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D5pp (7) LC D5BL ATV 58pD3N4 8.5/5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD8N4 /3 NS8pMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D3pp ATV 58HD33N4 3/4 NS8pMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD46N4 37/5 NSpMA LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD54N4 45/6 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD64N4 55/75 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD79N4 Standard torque application Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () (3) A (4) (4) (5) (6).75/ GV L8 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU8N4.5/ GV L 6.3 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4./3 GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU4N4 3/ GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU54N4 4/5 GV L6 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU7N4 5.5/7.5 GV L 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4 7.5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D9BL ATV 58pDN4 /5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D5BL ATV 58pD6N4 5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D5pp (7) LC D5BL ATV 58pD3N4 8.5/5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD8N4 /3 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D3pp ATV 58HD8N4 3/4 NS8pMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D4pp ATV 58HD33N4 37/5 NS8pMA8 8 LC D65pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD46N4 45/6 NSpMA LC D8pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD54N4 55/75 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD64N4 75/ NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD79N4 () Standard power ratings for 4-pole motors 5/6 Hz 4 V. () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (3) Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity, in the table below. Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC /45 V Icu (ka) GV L 5 38/45 V N H NS8pMA5 5 NS8pMA8 35 NSpMA 5 NS6pMA 35 (4) Replace pp with the control circuit voltage reference indicated in the table below. a.c. control circuit Volts a 4 48 /3 4 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (5) LC DppBL contactors have 4 V d.c. low consumption coils ( ma). Up to 5 kw, they are powered by the internal drive power supply. For power ratings above this level, use an external supply and complete the contactor coil voltage according to footnote (4). (6) Replace the p in the reference according to the type of drive required (see pages /3 to /34). (7) LC D5pp for ready-assembled ATV 58 drives with a built-in line choke. /74

260 Combinations for customer assembly (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Motor starters NS8HMA + LC D + ATV 58 3-phase supply voltage: 44 to 5 V (for motors.75 to 75 kw or tohp) Motor circuit-breaker: NSppppMA product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. Composition of contactors: LC D9 to LC D5: 3 poles + "N/O" auxiliary contact and "N/C" auxiliary contact. High torque application Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () (3) A (4) (4) (5) (6).75/ GV L8 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU8N4.5/ GV L 6.3 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4./3 GV L 6.3 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU4N4 3/ GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU54N4 4/5 GV L4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU7N4 5.5/7.5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4 7.5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (6) LC D9BL ATV 58pDN4 /5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (6) LC D5BL ATV 58pD6N4 5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D5pp (6) LC D5BL ATV 58pD3N4 8.5/5 NSpMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD8N4 /3 NSpMA5 5 LC D65pp LC D3pp ATV 58HD33N4 3/4 NSpMA LC D65pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD46N4 37/5 NSpMA LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD54N4 45/6 NS6pMA LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD64N4 55/75 NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD79N4 Standard torque application Motor () Circuit-breaker Line contactor Downstream contactor Variable speed drive Power Reference Rating Reference Reference Reference kw/hp () (3) A (4) (4) (5) (6).75/ GV L8 4 LC D8pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU8N4.5/ GV L 6.3 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4./3 GV L 6.3 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU4N4 3/ GV L4 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU54N4 4/5 GV L4 LC D5pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU7N4 5.5/7.5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp LC D9BL ATV 58pU9N4 7.5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D9BL ATV 58pDN4 /5 NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D5BL ATV 58pD6N4 5/ NS8pMA5 5 LC D4pp (7) LC D5BL ATV 58pD3N4 8.5/5 NSpMA5 5 LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD8N4 /3 NSpMA5 5 LC D8pp LC D3pp ATV 58HD8N4 3/4 NSpMA5 5 LC D8pp LC D4pp ATV 58HD33N4 37/5 NSpMA LC D8pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD46N4 45/6 NS6pMA LC D8pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD54N4 55/75 NS6pMA LC D5pp LC D8pp ATV 58HD64N4 75/ NS6pMA5 5 LC D5pp LC D5pp ATV 58HD79N4 () Standard power ratings for 4-pole motors 5/6 Hz 4 V. () The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (3) Replace p with N, H or L, according to the breaking capacity, in the table below. Breaking capacity of circuit-breakers according to standard IEC /5 V Icu (ka) GV L8, GV L 5 GV L4 44/5 V L NS8pMA 5 NSpMA, NS6pMA (4) Replace pp with the control circuit voltage reference indicated in the table below. a.c. control circuit Volts a 4 48 /3 4 5/6 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 U7 For other voltages between 4 and 66 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (5) LC DppBL contactors have 4 V d.c. low consumption coils ( ma). Up to 5 kw, they are powered by the internal drive power supply. For power ratings above this level, use an external supply and complete the contactor coil voltage according to footnote (4). (6) Replace the p in the reference according to the type of drive required (see pages /3 to /34). (7) LC D5pp for ready-assembled ATV 58 drives with a built-in line choke. /75

261 Selection Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Mounting options Depending on the conditions in which the speed drive is to be used, setup will require certain installation precautions as well as the appropriate accessories. Install the unit vertically at ±. - Do not place it close to heating elements. - Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. h d d h e Mounting recommendations 4 Speed drive with heatsink ATV-58 speed drives Temperature HU9M to HU7M and C C C HU8N4 to HU9N4 d 5 mm d 5 mm d 5 mm e=mm h=5mm No special precautions d=mm Remove the protective blanking cover from the top of the speed drive (degree of protection is then IP ) Remove the protective blanking cover from the top of the speed drive (degree of protection is then IP ) d=mm Add control card fan kit VW3-A588p (see previous pages) Add control card fan kit VW3-A588p (see previous pages) Derate the rated operating current by. % for each C over 5 C HU9M to HDM and C C HDN4 to HD3N4 d 5 mm d 5 mm e=mm h=5mm No special precautions Remove the protective blanking cover from the top of the speed drive (degree of protection is then IP ) Derate the rated operating current by. % for each C over 4 C d=mm Remove the protective blanking cover from the top of the speed drive (degree of protection is then IP ) d=mm Add control card fan kit VW3-A588p (see previous pages) Derate the rated operating current by. % for each C over 4 C HD6MX to HD46MX, HD8N4 to HD79N4 and HD8N4X to HD79N4X e=5mm h = mm C C d 5 mm No special precautions d 5 mm Add control fan card kit VW3-A588p (see previous pages) Derate the rated operating current by. % foreach Cover4 C Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /76

262 Selection (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Mounting options Mounting recommendations (continued) Speed drive on a baseplate (use the VW3-A588p kit, see the following pages) p Mounting in a wall-fixing or floor standing enclosure - External ambient temperature (heatsink side VW3-A588p): C. - Temperature inside the wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure: this has the same limits, mounting conditions and derating (if any) as for speed drives with heatsinks, see opposite. p Mounting on machine frame Ambient temperature: C. Recommendations for mounting in a wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure Risk of condensation If the device is left switched off for long periods, a heater must be used (. to.5 W per cm 3 of the enclosure) which switches on automatically as soon as the device stops. This keeps the interior of the enclosure at a temperature slightly above the external temperature, and avoids any risk of condensation or dripping water while the device is switched off. Alternative solution: keep the device powered up when it is stopped (the heat of the device itself when powered up is generally sufficient to cause this temperature difference). Dust and damp proof casing Calculating the size of the enclosure K Usable heat dissipation area of casing (if wall-mounted): S = Rth Where: S(m) = area of sides + area of top + area of front panel K: thermal resistance per m of casing For metal casing: K =. with internal fan, K =.5 without fan. Rth: maximum thermal resistance in C/W: θ θe Rth = where: θ = maximum temperature inside enclosure in C, P θe = maximum external temperature in C, P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W. The total power dissipated in the enclosure consists of: the power dissipated by the speed drive (see reference tables) plus the power dissipated by the other components of the unit. Attention: Do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity. Using the speed drive on a baseplate reduces the power dissipated in the enclosure, which makes the IP 54 degree of protection easier to achieve. To avoid hot spots, add the control card fan kit to circulate the air inside the speed drive. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /77

263 Selection (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Mounting options Recommendations for mounting in a wall-fixing or floor-standing enclosure (continued) Ventilated casing The apertures and/or optional fans must permit a flow rate at least equal to that provided by the speed drive fans. Fan flow rate according to speed drive rating Type of speed drive Fan flow rate With heatsink ATV-58HU9M, HU8M, Non-ventilated ATV-58HU8N4 ATV-58HU9M, HU54M, ATV-58HU9N4, HU4N4, HU54N4 36 m 3 /hr ATV-58HU4M 47 m3/hr 4 ATV-58HU7M, HU9M, HDM, ATV-58HU7N4, HU9N4, HDN4, HD6N4, HD3N4 7 m 3 /hr ATV-58HD6MX, HD3MX, ATV-58HD8N4 to HD46N4, ATV-58HD8N4X to HD46N4X () 9 m3/hr ATV-58HD8MX to HD46MX, ATV-58HD54N4 to HD79N4, ATV-58HD54N4X to HD79N4X () 49 m 3 /hr Control card fan kit 36 m 3 /hr On baseplate All ratings except ATV-58PU4M Non-ventilated ATV-58PU4M m3/hr Control card fan kit 36 m3/hr () For these speed drives use the air exchanger mounting kit: see page /35. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /78

264 Selection (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Mounting options Recommendations for mounting on machine frame (speed drives on baseplate) Speed drives on baseplates with the following ratings can be mounted on (or in) a cast iron or aluminium machine frame as long as the following conditions are observed: - maximum ambient temperature: 4 C, - mating surface (A) on frame machined to provide µm max smoothness and 3. µm max roughness, - the speed drive must be mounted in the centre of a support (frame) with minimum thickness (e) and minimum square area of cooling surface (s) exposed to the open air. This usage should be checked first by a test when the operating conditions are close to the maximum limits (power, cycle and temperature). G (s) (A) H b (e) a (s) Minimal surface of support (A) Minimum machined surface (e) Thickness of support Speed drives Minimum Minimum a b G H Ø surface (s) thickness (e) m mm Cast iron Aluminium ATV-58PU9M, PU8M M4 ATV-58PU9M, PU4M, M5 ATV-58PU8N4, PU9N4, PU4N4 Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /79

265 FWO stop reset ESC FWO RUN REV ENT stop reset Presentation, description Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar REV RUN ESC ENT Presentation There are two types of ready-assembled drive for the Altivar 58: b Altivar 58 COMPACT power rating between.37 and 5.5 kw: this ready-to-use IP 55 enclosure is equipped with a drive on a base plate with an external heatsink, a circuit-breaker to provide type coordination and protection, and a downstream contactor. This enclosure can be installed as close as possible to the drive. b Altivar 58 ENERGY power rating between 3 and 75 kw: theip55enclosureisequippedwithadrivewithacoolingsystemandavarioswitch disconnector. A slot is provided for an additional contactor. The drives are supplied withabuilt-inlinechoke. This enclosure can be installed next to the motor. Description Altivar 58 COMPACT (ready-assembled drives with power ratings from.37 to 5.5 kw) The ready-assembled drives are housed inside a dust and damp proof enclosure which contains: - an ATV 58 drive, - a protective circuit-breaker with padlockable front external control 3, - a "downstream" contactor, - a transparent cover which can be opened and sealed and through which the indicator lights can be seen and the operator terminal display viewed and accessed for the purposes of configuration. The cover can only be opened if the circuit-breaker has been tripped manually using 3. The metal gland plate 4 comprises: b On the front panel: v a 3-position switch for selecting the directon of operation (factory-set for one direction only), v a "frequency" reference potentiometer (which can be replaced with a blanking plug supplied with the drive if remote control is to be applied), v slots designed for diameter 6 control units. b On the bottom panel: v holes fitted with cable glands 5: - one EMC PG3 metal gland for the shielded motor cable, - one PG3 plastic gland for the unshielded power supply cable, v holes fitted with plastic blanking plugs, designed for PG cable glands 6, v 3 recesses for additional cables 8, v 3 open cut-outs 7 fitted with blanking plugs, through which cables fitted with connectors (PC link, remote terminal, communication buses) can be routed without having to be disconnected. As the connections between the gland plate and the devices inside the enclosure are removable, all active components in the assembly can be replaced quickly and easily. The assembly is supplied ready for use with the "Forward" command is prewired internally Altivar 58 ENERGY (ready-assembled drives with power ratings from 3 to 75 kw) The ready-assembled drives are housed inside a dust and damp proof enclosure which contains: - an ATV 58 drive, - a line choke, - a Vario switch disconnector with padlockable front external control 3, - a "frequency" reference potentiometer, - a 3-position switch for selecting the direction of operation, - an operator terminal 4. A slot is provided for installing an additional contactor. The front panel has a hinged cover. For safety reasons, it can only be opened when the switch disconnector is in the "OFF" position. The underside of the enclosure should be fitted with cable glands 5 via which the cables can be routed. When a ready-assembled drive with a power rating 7.5 kw is delivered, the additional contactor must be wired as a "line" or "downstream" contactor according to the specifications provided. References: pages /8 and /83 Dimensions: page /86 Schemes: page /87 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /8

266 Description (continued), characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 58 Options b Common options: the ready-assembled Altivar 58 supports the same options as thedrivesintheatv58range: v extension cards (see pages /4 and /4), v communication cards (see pages /4 and /43), v advanced PowerSuite dialogue solutions (see pages 3/ and 3/3), v braking module and resistors to be mounted externally (see pages /44 to /47). b Specific options for the COMPACT range (power ratings between.37 and 5.5 kw): v an IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal, v a prewired removable connector for the AS-Interface bus (to be mounted on 7), a prewired removable connector for connecting a sensor (to be mounted on 7), v an additional internal removable connector for remote control, v a line choke to be assembled externally. b Specific options for the ENERGY range (power ratings between 3 and 75 kw): v an IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal, v a line or downstream contactor, v asub-dcablegland. Characteristics The ready-assembled Altivar 58 has the same: - environmental, -drive, -electrical. parameters as the Altivar 58 with heatsink and on base plate, with the exception of those listed below. Degree of protection IP 55 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage C Operation C Shock resistance Conforming to IEC gn for ms References: pages /8 and /83 Dimensions: page /86 Schemes: page /87 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /8

267 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 58 for asynchronous motors from.37 to 75 kw or.5 to HP ATV 58EU9M ATV 58EDN4 Altivar 58 COMPACT (ready-assembled drives with power ratings from.37 to 5.5 kw) High torque applications (7 % Tn) Motor Line supply Ready-assembled Altivar 58 Power indicated on rating plate () Line current () Prospective line Isc Continuous Max. at U min. at U max. at U min. at U max. output current transient current (3) References to be completed (4) Weight kw HP A A ka ka A A kg Single phase supply voltage: 4 V (5) 5/6 Hz ATV 58EU9M ATV 58EU8M ATV 58EU9M ATV 58EU4M phase supply voltage: 4 V (5) 5/6 Hz ATV 58EU9M ATV 58EU4M phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (5) 5/6 Hz ATV 58EU8N ATV 58EU9N ATV 58EU4N ATV 58EU54N ATV 58EU7N ATV 58EU9N4 9.5 Altivar 58 ENERGY (ready-assembled drives with power ratings from 3 to 75 kw) High torque applications (7 % Tn) Motor Line supply Ready-assembled Altivar 58 Power indicated on rating plate () Line current () Prospective line Isc Continuous Max. at U min. at U max. at U min. at U max. output current transient current (3) References to be completed (4) Weight kw HP A A ka ka A A kg 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (5) 5/6 Hz ATV 58ED5N ATV 58ED7N ATV 58ED9N ATV 58EDN ATV 58ED6N ATV 58ED3N ATV 58ED8N ATV 58ED33N ATV 58ED46N ATV 58ED54N ATV 58ED64N ATV 58ED79N4. Standard torque applications ( % Tn) 3-phase supply voltage: 38 5 V (5) 5/6 Hz ATV 58ED8N ATV 58ED33N ATV 58ED46N ATV 58ED54N ATV 58ED64N ATV 58ED79N4. () These power ratings are given for a maximum permissible switching frequency of 4 khz in continuous operation without derating. For higher switching frequencies, the drive must be in intermittent operation or it must be set one rating lower (see special uses on the page /3). () Typical value without additional choke. (3) For 6 seconds. (4) Drive supplied with operator terminal. To obtain a drive without an operator terminal, add the letter Z at the end of the reference. Example: ATV 58EU9M without operator terminal becomes ATV 58EU9MZ. (5) Nominal supply voltages, U min U max. Note: please refer to the table summarising the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on pages /84 and /85. Presentation, characteristics: pages /8 and /8 Dimensions: page /86 Schemes: page /87 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /8

268 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 58 Special options IP 65 enclosure for the remote operator terminal The plug-in operator terminal can be used remotely, hand-held or fixed to the machine, using this IP 65 dust and damp proof kit. Description For drives Reference Weight kg Kit comprising: - cable fitted with connectors, length 3 m - IP 65 enclosure with flexible, transparent membrane - manual ATV 58E all ratings VW3 A M prewired plug-in connectors for the COMPACT range Description For drives Reference Weight kg 4-way straight male M connector for AS-Interface bus ATV 58EU power ratings between.37 and 5.5 kw VW3 A way female M connector for sensor ATV 58EU power ratings between.37 and 5.5 kw VW3 A Additional plug-in control terminal block for remote control Description For drives Reference Weight kg Internal terminal block, plug-in, terminals, maximum cross-section.5 mm ATV 58EU COMPACT range power ratings between.37 kw and 5.5 kw VW3 A5886. Line choke The line choke must be mounted externally for ready-assembled ATV 58E COMPACT range drives with power ratings between.37 and 5.5 kw. It is built into ready-assembled ATV 58E ENERGY range drives with power ratings between 3 and 75 kw. To select a line choke, see /49. "Line" or "downstream" contactor A slot is provided for mounting a contactor on ATV 58E ENERGY range drives with power ratings between 3 and 75 kw. The contactor is wired as a line or downstream contactor by the user, depending on requirements. To select a contactor, see pages /7 to /75. Potentiometer Description For drives Reference Weight kg IP 65 potentiometer. kω ATV 58E all ratings VW3 A SUB-D cable gland Description For drives Reference Weight kg SUB-D cable gland, plug-in, terminals ATV 58E ENERGY range power ratings between 3kWand75kW VW3 A Presentation, characteristics: pages /8 to /8 Dimensions: page /86 Schemes: page /87 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /83

269 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 ready-assembled Combinations (see pages /8 and /83) Altivar 58 COMPACT Supply Motor ATV 58 drive for application Options Supply voltage 5/6 Hz 4 V single-phase Power indicated on rating plate With standard torque ( % Tn) With hight torque (7 % Tn) Line choke extension or communication card IP 65 enclosure or remote operator terminal PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions Software workshop Magelis display and Pocket PC kw HP.37.5 ATV 58EU9M VZ L4M VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8.75 ATV 58EU8M VZ L7UM5 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8.5 ATV 58EU9M VZ L8UM VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8. 3 ATV 58EU4M VZ L8UM VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 4 V 3-phase 38 5 V 3-phase.5 ATV 58EU9M VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8. 3 ATV 58EU4M VW3 A6653 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8.75 ATV 58EU8N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8.5 ATV 58EU9N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8. 3 ATV 58EU4N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 3 ATV 58EU54N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58EU7N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58EU9N4 VW3 A6653 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 Altivar 58 ENERGY Supply Motor ATV 58 drive for application Options Supply voltage 5/6 Hz 38 5 V 3-phase Power indicated on rating plate With standard torque ( % Tn) With hight torque (7 % Tn) Line choke extension or communication card IP 65 enclosure or remote operator terminal PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions Software workshop Magelis display and Pocket PC kw HP 3 ATV 58ED5N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 4 5 ATV 58ED7N4 VW3 A665 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58ED9N4 VW3 A6653 VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 7.5 ATV 58EDN4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 5 ATV 58ED6N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 5 ATV 58ED3N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58ED8N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 3 ATV 58ED33N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 ATV 58ED8N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 3 4 ATV 58ED46N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 ATV 58ED33N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58ED54N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 ATV 58ED46N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58ED64N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 ATV 58ED54N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A ATV 58ED79N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 ATV 58ED64N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 75 ATV 58ED79N4 Integrated VW3 A58ppp VW3 A58864 VW3 A8pp XBT HM7A8 () In most cases this filter is of no advantage, as the ready-assembled drive can be placed very close to the motor. /84

270 Options (continued) RS 485 Additional Interconnection input filter () Output filter () Braking module IP braking resistor IP 3 braking resistor Plug-in connector for AS-Interface bus Plug-in connector for sensor Plug-in control terminal block for remote control VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A587 VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 VW3 A587 VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5874 VW3 A58733 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5874 VW3 A58733 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A584 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A587 VW3 A5873 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Intégré VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5886 VW3 A58863 VW3 A5886 Options (continued) RS 485 Additional Interconnection input filter () Output filter () Braking module IP braking resistor IP 3 braking resistor Plug-in connector for AS-Interface bus Plug-in connector for sensor Plug-in control terminal block for remote control VW3 A5836 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A5873 VW3 A58734 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5843 VW3 A5845 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5844 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58735 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5844 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58736 VW3 A5836 VW3 A5845 VW3 A58453 Integrated VW3 A58736 VW3 A5836 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5836 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5836 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5836 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5836 VW3 A664 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5836 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5836 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A58737 VW3 A5836 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5836 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5836 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5836 VW3 A6643 Integrated VW3 A6674 VW3 A5836 Integrated VW3 A6674 /85

271 Dimensions, setup recommendations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 58 Dimensions ATV 58EUpppp ATV 58EDpppp 4Ø G H b H b H c G a 4 c d G a 8xØ9 ATV 58E a b c G H Ø ATV 58E a b c d G G H H U9M, U8M ,5 D5N4, D7N4, D9N4, 5 7 3, , ,5 75 DN4, D6N4, D3N4 U9M, U8N4, U9N4, U4N ,5 D8N4, D33N4, D46N , , ,5 9 U4M, U54N4, U7N4, U9N ,5 D54N4, D64N4, D79N , , ,5 Setup recommendations ATV 58EUpppp ATV 58EDpppp Do not place the device near heating elements. Leave sufficient clearance to allow air circulation. The speed drive is cooled by an air flow from the bottom to the top. Description, characteristics: pages /8 to /8 References: pages /8 and /83 Schemes: page /87 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /86

272 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Ready-assembled Altivar 58 Schemes ATV 58EU9M, EU8M ATV 58EU9M, EU4M, EU8N4, EU9N4, EU4N4, EU54N4, ATV 58EU7N4, EU9N4 L L or3a L L L3 U L V L W RC RA +4 U AI LI LI COM LI3 AI LI4 + RA + RB Ð RC FW 4 4 AO 3 3 FW 3 U V V M 3 W W + Ð A + Ð PA PB K3 K4 3 U V W U V W L L L3 L L L3 FW PA PB 4 4 RC RA +4 LI COM AI + PA PB AO AI LI LI3 LI4 RA RB RC 4 4 U 3 U L V L W L3 RC RA AO +4 AI LI LI COM LI3 AI LI4 + RA PA RB PB RC VW3-A587 braking module if used Braking resistor if used U V V M 3 W W PA PB K3 3 3 Braking resistor if used K4 ATV 58ED5N4, ED7N4, ED9N4, EDN4, ED6N4, ED3N4, ED8N4, ED33N4, ED46N4, ED54N4, ED64N4, ED79N4 U V M 3 W Braking resistor if used Description, characteristics: pages /8 to /8 References: pages /8 and /83 Dimensions: page /86 Functions: pages /9 to /5 /87

273 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Combination of functions and applications Applications Special machines Packing/packaging Timber Mixers Dosing Hoop casing machines Palletizers machines Kneaders (pumps, screws, Bagging machines Depalletizers Textile Centrifuges dosing belts) Labelling machines machines 4 Drive functions Maximum frequency 5 Hz b (special motor) Switchingfrequency to6khz to6khz to6khz khz khz Noise reduction (random freq.) b b b b Skip frequency b Energy saving Automatic injection on stop b b b b Resistance braking b v b b Application functions Automatic adaption of the b b b deceleration ramp Automatic catching a spinning load b b b b (flying restart) Automatic restart Controlled stop on loss of AC supply b b v Lim. of the operating time at low speed S-shaped ramps U-shaped ramps v Adaptation of current limit Analogue inputs - Summing v v b - Torque limit v - PI regulator v -PTCprobe v v v v - Tachogenerator speed feedback v v b v Encoder input (speed regulation) v v v v Logic inputs - operating directions b b v b b - d.c. injection b -Faststop v - Freewheel stop b - Step by step (JOG) v v v v v - Preset speeds b b v b b - Ramp switching v -+/-speed v b v - Reference switching v - Motor switching v b - nd torque limit v Logic outputs and relays - Brake sequence b - Downstream contactor control v v v - Frequency threshold reached v b v v - HSP reached v - Reference reached v v v v - Current threshold reached v v - Thermal motor threshold reached v - Drive running v b v v Analogue output (torque, speed, v v v v v current, ramp) b Frequent or essential use v Occasional use Functions: pages /9 to /5 /88 b

274 Materials handling/hoisting Elevators Pumping/ventilation Continuous Cycle conveyors Hoisting Gates Winches Centrifugal pumps Fans (driers, conveyors, belt transfer tables, winches Screw compressors drying ovens, tunnels, conveyers, manipulation extractor hoods, air chain conveyors arms, overhead conditioning) cranes v khz khz khz 6kHz to6khz to6khz to6khz b b b v b b v v v v b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b v b b v b v v b v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v b b b b b v b v v v v v b b b b v v v v v v v v v v v v v b v v v v b b v v v b v v v b v v v v v v v v v v v v v v b v v v v v v v /89

275 Functions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 4 Summary of functions Principle of access to menus page /9 Macro-configuration programming page /9 Operating power range page /9 Operating speed range page /93 Acceleration and deceleration ramp times page /93 Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile page /93 Alternate ramp switching page /94 Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp page /94 Reduction of torque limit by logic input page /94 Reduction of torque limit by analogue input page /94 Reverse operation page /94 Disabling reverse direction page /94 Step by step (JOG) page /94 -wire control page /95 3-wire control page /95 +/- speed page /95 Save reference page /95 Brake sequence page /96 Motor switching page /96 Downstream contactor control page /96 Preset speeds page /97 Adjusting analogue input AI page /97 Summing inputs page /97 Reference switching page /97 PI regulator page /98 Speed feedback with tachogenerator page /99 Incremental speed feedback page /99 Incremental speed reference page /99 Controlled stop page /99 Controlled stop on mains power break page / Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection page / Automatic restart page / Maintaining the speed following loss of the 4- ma reference page / Limiting low speed operating time page / Fault reset page / General reset (inhibits all faults) page / Forced local mode page / External fault page / Fault relay, unlocking page / Motor thermal protection page / PTC probe protection page / Thermal protection of drive page / Switching frequency, noise reduction page / Energy saving page / Adaptation of the current limit page /3 Auto-tuning page /3 Skip frequencies page /3 Reassignable logic outputs page /3 Analogue outputs AO and AO page /3 Adjusting analogue outputs AO and AO page /3 Compatibility table for configurable I/O functions page /4 Summary table of the configurable I/O assignments page /5 Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /9

276 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Description of functions Powerup Initial power-up DIALOGUE ] Choice of dialogue language DISPLAY OF CURRENT MACRO- CONFIGURATION ESC DRIVE IDENTIFICATION ] Power, voltage DISPLAY MODE ] Display during operation MAIN MENU b Principle of access in the main menu with the operator terminal v With the terminal switch in position, the user can: - select the dialogue language, - display the macro-configuration, - identify the drive, - display the state of the drive, the electrical values and the fault register. v Withtheterminalswitchinposition,itispossibleto: - perform operations possible in position, - modify the settings. v With the terminal switch in position, the user can: - perform the operations possible in positions and, - change the macro-configuration, - modify the motor power, - modify all the configuration parameters, - enable control of the drive via the terminal, - store, load or protect the parameter files. b Principle of access in the main menu with the PowerSuite Pocket PC or with the PowerSuite software workshop There are no access restrictions, unless an access code has already been created. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /9

277 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b Macro-configuration programming A simplified menu can be used for preprogramming the drive to facilitate configuration and setup. There are 3 options available, which correspond to the various functions and applications: v handling, v general use, v variable torque. Selection of one of these macro-configurations will automatically assign the functions, parameters and I/O, even for any option cards which may be used. This menu also includes a guide to the most appropriate selection in each case. Preconfiguration carried out in this way can be modified at any time if necessary. In the factory configuration, the selection is set to the Handling macro-configuration. The preconfigured functions for each macro-configuration are: Type of macroconfiguration Handling General use Variable torque Basic I/O Logic input LI Forward Forward Forward Logic input LI Reverse Reverse Reverse 4 Logic input LI3 Logic input LI4 Analogue input AI Analogue input AI preset speeds 4 preset speeds Summing speed reference Summing speed reference Jog operation Freewheel stop Summing speed reference Summing speed reference Reference switching Injection braking Speed reference Speed reference Relay R Drive fault Drive fault Drive fault Relay R Downstreamcontactor control Motor thermal state reached Frequency reference reached Analogue output A Motor frequency Motor frequency Motor frequency Extension card I/O Logic input LI5 8 preset speeds Clearing faults Freewheel stop Logic input LI6 Clear fault Current limit Ramp switching Analogue input AI3 Summing speed Summing speed PI regulator or reference reference Encoder inputs Logic output LO Speed regulation Current threshold reached Speed regulation Downstream contactor control Speed regulation High speed reached Analogue output AO Motor frequency Motor frequency Motor frequency b Operating power range Enables use of the drive at optimum power, according to whether the application requires normal overtorque (standard torque applications,. Tn) or significant overtorque (high torque applications). Function suitable for drives with power ratings above 7.5 kw at 8 to 4 V and 5 kw at 38 to 5 V, where this type of optimisation offers significant cost reductions. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /9

278 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b Operating speed range Used to determine the frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by the machine under actual operating conditions. For all applications with or without overspeed. Three operating modes are possible: v Normal mode v Pedestal mode v Deadband mode f(hz) f(hz) f(hz) HSP HSP HSP LSP V xma 4mA V yma ma Reference LSP V xma 4mA V yma ma Reference LSP V xma 4mA V yma ma Reference LSP: low speed, from to HSP, factory setting HSP: high speed, from LSP to f max., factory setting 5/6 Hz x: configurable between and ma, factory setting 4 ma y: configurable between and ma, factory setting ma f(hz) b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics. For all applications. f(hz) 5/6 5/6 t t t t Setting for t and t between.5 and s, factory setting 3 s. Linear acceleration ramp Linear deceleration ramp b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference, following a linear ratio or a preset ratio which enables the ramp to be given an S or a U profile. - for applications such as materials handling, packaging, transportation of people: the use of S ramps takes up mechanical play and eliminates jolts, and limits non-following of speed during rapid transient operation of high inertia machines, - for pumping applications (installation with centrifugal pump and non-return valve) valve closing can be controlled more accurately if U ramps are used. Selecting linear or S, or U profiles will affect both the deceleration and acceleration ramps. v S-shape ramps v U-shape ramps f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP f(hz) HSP t t t t t t t t t t t t HSP: high speed The curve coefficient is fixed, with t =.6 x t. wheret=setramptime HSP: high speed The curve coefficient is fixed, with t =.5 x t. where t = set ramp time Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /93

279 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 HSP f(hz) Acc Dec b Alternate ramp switching Used to switch acceleration or deceleration ramp times, which can be adjusted separately. The function is enabled by reassigning logic input or by defining frequency threshold. Function suitable for: - materials handling with smooth starting and approach, - machines with fast steady state speed correction, - high speed lathes with limitation of acceleration and deceleration times above certain speeds. Forward or reverse LI4 Acceleration (Acc ) and deceleration (Dec ): - adjustment.5 to s - factory setting 3 s Acceleration (Acc ) and deceleration (Dec ): - adjustment.5 to s - factory setting 5 s HSP: high speed Acc Dec t t t b Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Used to automatically adapt the deceleration ramp if the initial setting is too low when the load inertia is taken into account. This function avoids the drive locking in the event of an excessive braking fault. Function suitable for all applications not requiring precise stopping and not using braking resistors. Adjustment: yes or no. The factory setting depends on the macro-configuration. Automatic adaptation must be cancelled if the machine has position control with stopping on a ramp and a braking resistor installed. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. b Reduction of torque limit by logic input Used to reduce the maximum motor torque, via a logic input LI to be assigned to this function. Adjustment: to % of the nominal motor torque for high torque applications. Function suitable for machines at risk of frequent jamming: transporters, grinders, extruders. Cutting to length with stopping and maintaining motor torque over a mechanical travel limit. Use with motor with lower power rating than the drive rating (switching motors). 4 Acceleration and deceleration Example of switching using logic input LI4 AI3 b Reduction of torque limit by analogue input Used to reduce the maximum motor torque via analogue input AI or AI3 to be assigned to this function. The I/O extension card with analogue input must be used. Function suitable for correction of torque or traction. V Tightening Drive internal limit Torque limiting by analogue input b Reverse operation Used to reverse the direction of operation via logic input LI, which is assigned to this function in the factory set-up. This function can be suppressed in non-reversing motor applications by reassigning input LI to a different function. This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. b Disabling reverse direction Used to: v inhibit operation in the opposite direction to that controlled by the logic inputs, even if this reversal is required by a summing or feedback control function, v inhibit reverse operation if it is requested using the REV key on the terminal. To be used if the direction of operation should not be reversed (example: fan). Forward or Stop f(hz) tm t t b Step by step (JOG) Used for pulse operation at minimum ramp times (. s), limited speed reference and minimum time between pulses. Enabled by means of an adjustable logic input LI, assigned to this function, and pulses given by the operating direction command. This function is suitable for machines with product insertion in manual mode (example: gradual movement of the mechanism during maintenance operations). JOG t Speed reference: - adjustment to Hz - factory setting Hz Minimum time tm between pulses - adjustment to s - factory setting.5 s Jog function Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /94

280 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b -wire control Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact. Enabled by means of or logic inputs (one or two directions). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. 3 operating modes are possible: v detection of the state of the logic inputs, v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs, v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority over reverse. Altivar 58 control terminals 4 V LI LIx LI: forward LIx: reverse Wiring diagram for -wire control f(hz) b 3-wire control Used to control the operating direction and stopping by means of pulsed contacts. Enabled by means of or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. Stop t Altivar 58 control terminals 4 V LI LI LIx LI: stop LI: forward LIx: reverse t Forward t Wiring diagram for 3-wire control Reverse 3-wire control t b +/- speed Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of or logic commands, with or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function). The maximum speed is given by the reference applied to the analogue inputs. For example, connect AI to the +V. Enabled by assigning or logic inputs. This function is suitable for centralised control of a machine with several sections operating in one direction or for control by a pendant control station of a handling crane in two operating directions. v With saving of the last reference and logic inputs v Without saving of the last reference and a single logic input ("+ speed") f(hz) f(hz) t LSP t Forward or Reverse t Forward t + speed t Reverse + speed t - speed t + speed t LSP: low speed Example of "+/- speed" with logic inputs Example with double action buttons Forward a b A B a and b: st press A and B: nd press Note: this type of "+/- speed" control is incompatible with 3-wire control. b Save reference This function is associated with +/- speed control. Select yes or no. Enables the new speed reference to be applied if the run command or line supply is lost. The save is applied the next time a run command is received. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /95

281 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 N Speed t b Brake sequence Used to manage control of a safety brakes in synchronisation with the starting and stopping of the motor to avoid jolts and load veering. Brake control sequence managed by the drive. Values that can be adjusted for brake release: frequency and current threshold, time delay. Values that can be adjusted for brake engage: frequency, time delay. Validation: R relay logic output must be assigned to brake control. Function suitable for materials handling applications with movements equipped with safety brakes (hoisting) and machines requiring a parking brake (unbalanced machines). Brake R t t Note: to ensure the safety of the machine and personnel, it is advisable to use the speed feedback function with the addition of an option card, or an external safety device. Make sure that the braking resistor is sized for the maximum load conditions of the machine. Make sure that the drive/motor connections cannot be interrupted by accident. T t t Direction of operation t: adjustable time delay on brake release time. t: adjustable time delay depending on the brake engage time. T: non-adjustable time delay. t 4 Brake sequence operation b Motor switching Allows two motors with different powers to be supplied successively by the same drive. Switching must take place with the drive stopped and locked, using an appropriate sequence at the drive output. The function can be used to adapt the motor parameters. The following parameters are switched automatically: v nominal motor current, v injection current, v brake release current threshold. Motor thermal protection is disabled by this function. Enabled by assigning logic input LI to this function. The associated parameter is the coefficient giving the relationship between the power of the smallest motor and the power of the drive:. to. With hoisting applications, this function enables a single drive to be used for vertical and horizontal movements. b Downstream contactor control Allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor. The request to close the contactor is made when a run command appears. The request to open the contactor is made when there is neither a run command nor a current present in the motor (freewheel stop, drive locked or braking terminated). Enabled by means of logic output LO or relay R. v This function avoids the need for frequency switching on the power circuit upstream of the drive (otherwise premature aging of the filtering capacitors will occur) and requires a specific connection diagram (see page /66). v This function must be used for cycles < 6 s with motor isolation on stopping. Otherwise, the excessive frequency of operation of the line contactor may destroy the load resistor in the drive. v On machines where operation requires power to the motor to be removed when there is a stop, this function prevents any possibility of an untimely restart (example: materials handling carousel where items are put down and picked up manually). This function can also be used to implement backup operation by direct supply of the motor via the mains supply (for machines requiring an emergency release function). The output can then be used both to control a downstream contactor and to authorise emergency operation ( bypass function). Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /96

282 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b Preset speeds Used to switch preset speed references., 4, or 8 preset speeds can be selected. Enabled by means of, or 3 logic inputs. The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of. Hz to Hz up to the maximum speed. Function suitable for materials handling and machines with several operating speeds. f(hz) The speed obtained with inputs LI3 and LI4 at state is LSP or the speed reference, depending on the level of analogue inputs AI and AI. LSP Factory settings: Forward or LI Reverse t t st speed: LSP (low speed or reference) th speed: 5Hz 3 th speed: Hz 4 th speed: HSP (high speed) LI3 t LI4 t Example of operation with 4 preset speeds. b Setting analogue input AI It is possible to modify the specification of analogue current input AI. Factory setting: 4- ma. Other values: - ma, -4 ma or X-Y ma by programming X and Y with a precision of. ma. b Summing inputs Analogue input AI (and/or analogue input AI3 with extension card) can be assigned as a summing input with AI corresponding to speed HSP. This function is suitable for machines on which the speed is controlled by a process controller signal on input AI. f(hz) HSP LSP t AI ou AI3 t AI V References summed t f(hz) AI AI Forward or Reverse LIx Example of reference switching t t t b Reference switching Allows analogue references to be switched by means of a logic command. This function avoids having to switch low level signals and makes the reference inputs AI and AI independent. Enabled by means of reassignable logic input LI. This function is suitable for all machines with automatic/manual operation. Automatic control via a sensor on input AI, enabled by setting the logic input to. Manual control by means of potentiometer on input AI (local control). LIx COM + 4 V - ma 4- ma -4 ma Adaptation to sensor Connection diagram for reference switching AI + AI Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /97

283 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b PI regulator Used for simple control of a flow rate or a pressure with a sensor which supplies a feedback signal adapted to the drive. This function is suitable for pumping and ventilation applications. PI reference PI feedback PSP FBS + PI PI inversion regulator PIC X± RPG RIG Ramp if PSP > Ramp if PSP = X AC DE ACC DEC Auto Man Reference Low-pass filter Multiplier Run command Manual reference ACC DEC Auto/man Ramp 4 ACC: acceleration AC: acceleration DEC: deceleration DE: deceleration FBS: PI feedback multiplication coefficient PIC: reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator PSP: used to adjust the filter time constant on the PI feedback RIG: PI regulator integral gain RPG: proportional gain of the PI regulator v PI reference: - line reference (serial link), - or or 4 preset references by logic inputs, - or analogue input AI (± AI, ± AI3). v PI feedback: - analogue input AI or AI3. v Manual reference (speed regulation operation) - analogue input AI3. v Auto/man: - logic input LI for switching operation to speed regulation (man) or PI regulation (auto). During automatic operation, it is possible to adapt the process feedback, to correct inverse PI, to adjust the proportional and integral gain and Ki, to allocate an analogue output for the PI reference, feedback and error, to apply a ramp (time = AC - DE) to establish the PI action on starting and stopping. The motor speed is limited to between LSP and HSP. Preset PI references: or 4 preset references require the use of or logic inputs respectively. preset references 4 preset references Assign: LIx to Pr Assign: LIx to Pr, LIy to Pr4 LIx Reference LIy LIx Reference Analogue reference Process max (= V) Analogue reference PI (adjustable) PI3 (adjustable) Process max (= V) Note: the PI function is incompatible with the preset speeds and step-by-step (JOG) functions, the PI reference can also be transmitted on line via the RS 485 serial link or via one of the communication cards. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /98

284 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 AI3B R Connection diagram for speed feedback via tachogenerator AI3A B Option card R b Speed feedback with tachogenerator Used for precise speed control, irrespective of the state of the motor load. Assigned to logic input AI3, with extension card/analogue input The maximum tachogenerator voltage must be between 5 and 9 V. If necessary, use an external divider bridge to set this value (). An accurate setting for adjusting this value can be found in the adjust menu. The coherence between motor frequency and speed feedback is monitored in the drive s fault menu. This function is suitable for all applications requiring exact speed irrespective of the load. () Example: motor 5 rpm at 5 Hz, tachogenerator.6 V/rpm, max. speed set to 75 Hz (speed 5 rpm) maximum voltage.6 x 5 = 35 V recommended tachogenerator current ma, therefore R + R = 35/ = 3.5 kω average voltage on the input = 7 V, therefore R = 7/ =.7 kω or 68 Ω, nearest standard value. R = R, or kω, nearest standard value exact voltage on AI3 = 35 x R/(R + R) = 35 x.68/.68 = 7.4 V Use appropriate power resistors (min. W). The speed feedback should be scaled exactly by programming (when the device is set up). b Incremental speed feedback Used for precise speed control, irrespective of the state of the motor load. Assigned to logic inputs A, A-, B, B- on the extension card/encoder inputs. NPN type open collector output, nominal voltage 4 V c Max. reading frequency 33 khz at max. speed HSP For use in operating direction with an inductive sensor or photoelectric detector: simple regulation (less accurate at low speed). v Use in operating direction v Use in or operating directions Option card A A B B COM + 4 A A Option card B B COM + NPN detector A A B B Incremental encoder V Power supply 4 V External Connection diagram with inductive sensor or photoelectric detector: simple regulation (less accurate at low speed) Connection diagram with incremental encoder for accurate regulation at low speed Consistency between the motor frequency and the speed feedback is monitored in the drive fault management system. This function is suitable for applications requiring accurate speed control irrespective of the load and a high level of immunity to interference. b Incremental speed reference Enables validation by assigning the logic inputs on the above extension card/encoder inputs to the summing inputs function. Synchronization of the speed of a number of drives. Nominal voltage 4 V c Max. reading frequency 33 khz at max. speed HSP f(hz) Fast stop d.c. injection stop 3 Normal stop on deceleration ramp 4 Freewheel stop Examples of controlled stops 3 4 t b Controlled stop Used to define stop modes in addition to the standard drive stops. These stop requests always have priority. Choice of three stopping methods: v freewheel stop: the drive locks and the motor stops in accordance with the inertia and the resistive torque, v fast stop: the motor brakes to a stop with the deceleration ramp time divided by a coefficient which can be set between and, v d.c. injection braking: adjustment of the time ( to 3 s, factory setting.5 s) and current (% to 36 % of the nominal drive current in high torque applications, factory setting 7%). Continuous braking is possible but is limited automatically to another adjustable value (% to % of the nominal motor current, factory setting 5%) after 3 s. Enable modes: v by means of reassignable logic input LI: active at for freewheel stop and fast stop, active at for injection stop, v automatic when stopping (frequency less than. Hz) for injection braking, as this function can be combined with the others. In this case, only the current after 3 s of injection can be adjusted. Applications: - freewheel stop for applications with locking using electrical safety devices, - fast stop for materials handling applications with emergency stop electrical braking, - d.c. injection braking for fans, for which this stopping mode does not generally require the addition of a braking resistor. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /99

285 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b Controlled stop on mains power break Used to control motor stopping on a mains power break, following a ramp which is self-adapting according to the restored kinetic energy. Function suitable for materials handling, machines with high inertia, continuous product processing machines. Factory setting: inactive b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection ("catchonthefly") Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events: v mains power break or simple switch off, v fault reset or automatic restart, v freewheel stop or injection stop with logic input, v uncontrolled loss of power downstream of the drive. On restarting, the effective speed of the motor is detected in order to restart on the ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. The speed detection time can be up to s depending on the initial deviation. Factory setting: active This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. This function is suitable for machines for which the loss of motor speed is negligible during the supply loss time (machines with high inertia), fans and pumps driven by a residual flux, etc. b Automatic restart Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart. This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts at 3 s intervals. If the drive has not restarted after 6 attempts, it will lock and the procedure is abandoned until it has been switched off and on again. Factory setting: inactive. 4 The faults permitting this restart are: v excessive braking, v mains overvoltage, v motor thermal overload, v drive thermal overload, v loss of 4- ma reference, v d.c. bus overvoltage, v external fault, v motor phase loss, v serial link fault, v mains voltage too low. For this fault, the function is always active, even if it is not configured. For this type of fault, the drive fault relay remains activated if the function is configured. The speed reference and the direction of operation must be maintained for this function. This function is suitable for machines or installations operating continuously or without supervision, which, when restarted, pose no danger to either equipment or personnel (pumps, fans, etc). b Maintaining the speed following loss of the 4- ma reference Enables the motor speed to be maintained following loss of the 4- ma reference. This function is suitable for applications which must not be interrupted. b Limiting low speed operating time (LSP) The motor is stopped automatically after an operating period at low speed (LSP) with zero reference and run command present. This time can be set between. and s or no limit. Factory setting 5 s. The motor restarts automatically on the ramp when the reference reappears or if the run command is broken and then re-established. This function is suitable for automatic stopping/starting on pressure-regulated pumps. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /

286 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b Fault reset Enables faults to be reset by means of a logic input LI which can be reassigned to this function. The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal power-up. Fault reset: overvoltage, overspeed, external fault, drive overheating, loss of motor phase, d.c. bus overvoltage, loss of 4- ma reference, load veering, motor overload if the thermal state is less than %, serial link fault. "Mains undervoltage" and "mains phase loss" faults are reset automatically when the mains supply is restored. Function suitable for applications where the drives are difficult to access, for example on moving parts in materials handling systems. b General reset (inhibits all faults) This function can be used to inhibit all faults, including thermal protection (forced operation) except short-circuit faults, to ensure operation unless irreparable damage has been caused in extreme operating conditions. Function suitable for applications where a restart can be vital (conveyor in a furnace, smoke extraction station, machine with hardening products which need to be removed). b Forced local mode Forced local mode switches the drive from serial link control to terminal control. A logic input LI can be reassigned to this function. b External fault When the input assigned to this function changes to, the motor stops in accordance with the parameter configuration and the drive locks in an "EPF external fault" fault. b Fault relay, unlocking The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty. It contains a C/O common point contact. The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways: v by powering down until the ON LED extinguishes then switching the power back on, v by assigning a logic input to the "reset faults function, v by the automatic restart function, if it has been configured. 6 hr t Hz Hz b Motor thermal protection Indirect motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its theoretical temperature rise. The drive is locked on a fault if this temperature rise exceeds 8% of the nominal temperature rise. min 4min min min Cold state v This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled or force-cooled motors. The microprocessor calculates the theoretical temperature rise of the motor based on various elements: - the operating frequency, - the current taken by the motor, - the operating time, - the maximum ambient temperature around the motor (4 C). Adjustment:.5 to.36 times the nominal current of the drive in high torque applications, factory setting.9 times the nominal current indicated on the motor rating plate. Hot state s I/In,7,8,9,,,3,4,5 Thermal protection characteristics (warm and cold) v Special applications Adaptation of thermal protection in the fault configuration menu: - applications with force-cooled motor: in this case, the tripping curves are those shown opposite for the nominal frequency 5/6 Hz, - suppression of thermal protection in harsh environments: temperature greater than 4 C around the motor, which may cause the cooling fins to become clogged (provide direct thermal protection via thermistor probes integrated into the motor), - motor thermal protection using PTC probes: see "PTC probe protection" function with option card, - if several motors are connected in parallel on the same drive, fit each motor starter with a thermal relay to reduce the risk of the load being distributed unevenly. Note: when the drive is switched off, calculation It is saved and the amount by which it has decreased is calculated. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /

287 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 b PTC probe protection Used for motor thermal protection (if the motor is fitted with PTC probes). Assigned to logic input AI3, with extension card/analogue input Maximum resistance of probe circuit at C: 75 Ω (3 x 5 Ω probes connected in series) Probe break and short-circuit faults are monitored. b Thermal protection of drive Enables the drive to be protected directly via a thermistor fitted on the heatsink, ensuring that components are protected in the event of poor ventilation or excessive ambient temperatures. Locks the drive in the event of a fault. b Switching frequency, noise reduction High frequency switching of the intermediate d.c. voltage can be used to supply the motor with a current wave with low harmonic distortion. The switching frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. In addition, the switching frequency is random in order to avoid resonance. This function can be disabled if it causes instability. This function is suitable for all applications which require low motor noise. 4 v Without derating, for continuous or intermittent duty (.5 and khz frequencies should be used for long cable lengths). Drives Configurable switching frequencies khz ATV-58pU9M to pdm ATV-58HD6MX and HD3MX ATV-58pU8N4 to pd46n4 ATV-58HD8N4X to HD46N4X ATV-58HD8MX to HD46MX.5-- ATV-58pD54N4 to pd79n4 ATV-58HD54N4X to HD79N4X v Without derating, with intermittent operating cycle or with derating by one rating in continuous duty (). Drives Configurable switching frequencies khz ATV-58pU9M to pdm 8--6 ATV-58pU8N4 to pd3n4 ATV-58HD6MX and HD3MX 8- ATV-58pD8N4 to pd46n4 ATV-58HD8N4X to HD46N4X ATV-58HD8MX to HD46MX 4-8 ATV-58pD54N4 to pd79n4 ATV-58HD54N4X to HD79N4X () In intermittent duty, automatic frequency reduction in the case of overheating. b Energy saving Enables the power consumption to be adapted according to the load, improving efficiency. Function suitable for variable or reduced torque applications. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /

288 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Ilimit % CLI Cold air 5 % CLI Hot air,5 Adaptation of the current limit f/fn HSP CLI: internal current limit HSP: high speed b Adaptation of the current limit The current limit can be adapted automatically according to the speed in order to avoid a motor overload fault. This function is suitable for ventilation applications in which the load curve changes according to the air density. b Auto-tuning Auto-tuning can only be performed by user intervention via the dialogue tools and by an assignable logic input. It is used to optimise performance. This function is suitable for use in all applications. b Skip frequencies Skip frequencies can be used to suppress up to three critical speeds which may be the cause of mechanical resonance. It is possible to prohibit the prolonged operation of the motor within a frequency band of 5 Hz over to 3 frequency bands adjustable over the speed range. Function suitable for lightweight machines, bulk product conveyors with unbalanced motor, fans and centrifugal pumps. b Reassignable logic outputs Relay R (or LO solid state output with I/O extension card): f(hz) Motor speed change depending on the reference with a skip frequency 5 Hz Reference v Remote signalling of the following information as required: - drive operating (running or braking), - frequency threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - nd frequency threshold reached, - frequency reference reached (motor frequency equal to the reference), - current threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - motor thermal threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - drive thermal threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - high speed reached, - loss of 4- ma reference. v Remote control of a downstream contactor. v Brake sequence (R relay only). b Analogue outputs AO (or AO with I/O extension card) Analogue outputs AO and AO (x-y ma) can be assigned to the following parameters: - motor current (y ma = twice the nominal current of the drive), - motor frequency (y ma = maximum frequency), - ramp output (y ma = maximum frequency), - motor torque (y ma = twice the nominal motor torque), - signed motor torque (x ma = - twice the nominal motor torque, ie. braking operation, - signed ramp (x ma = maximum reversing frequency, y ma = maximum forward frequency), - PI reference (x ma = minimum reference, y ma = maximum reference), - PI feedback (x ma = minimum feedback, y ma = maximum feedback), - PI error (x ma = maximum error <, y ma = minimum error >), - PI integral (y ma = integral saturated), - motor power (x ma = % of the nominal motor power, y ma = % of the nominal motor power), - motor thermal state calculated: (x ma = %, y ma = %), - drive thermal state: (x ma = %, y ma = %). Note: x and y can be set between and ma b Adjustment of analogue outputs AO (or AO with I/O extension card) Used to modify the characteristics of analogue current outputs AO and AO. Factory setting: - ma Other values: 4- ma, -4 ma or x-y ma by programming x and y with a definition of. ma. This function is suitable for use in applications with a signal other than - ma. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /3

289 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Compatibility table for configurable I/O functions b Configurable I/O Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. v Stop functions have priority over run commands. v Speed references via logic command have priority over analogue references. Functions d.c. injection braking Summing inputs PI regulator The choice of functions is limited: - by the number of drive I/O which can be reassigned: if necessary, add an I/O extension card, - by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another. +/- speed Reference switching Freewheel stop d.c. injection braking A A Fast stop Run Jog operation Preset speeds Speed regulation with tachogenerator or encoder Torque limitation by Al3 Torque limitation by LI Summing inputs PI regulator +/- speed A 4 Reference switching Freewheel stop X X Fast stop X A Jog operation X X Preset speeds A Speed regulation with tachogenerator or encoder Torque limitation by Al3 Torque limiting via LI Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time) X A The arrow indicates which function has priority. Example: the "fast stop" function has priority over the "d.c. injection braking" function. Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /4

290 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58 Summary table of the configurable I/O assignments Drive I/O Without option card With I/O extension cards Relay R Analogue input AI Analogue output AO 3 logic inputs LI-LI3-LI4 logic inputs LI5-LI6 Analogue input AI3 Logic output LO Analogue output AO Encoder inputs A-, A+, B-, B+ Functions Auto-tuning Reverse operation Alternate ramp switching Step by step (JOG) +/- speed Preset speeds Reference switching External fault Freewheel stop d.c. injection stop Fast stop Motor switching Forced local mode PI auto/man Fault reset General reset (inhibits all faults) Summing reference PI regulator nd speed reference Speed feedback PTC probes Torque limit reduction Downstream contactor control Frequency threshold reached High speed reached Frequency reference reached Current threshold reached Motor thermal threshold reached Drive thermal threshold reached Drive running Loss of 4- ma reference Brake sequence Motor current Motor frequency Ramp output (signed) Motor torque PI function outputs Motor power Motor thermal state Drive thermal state Possible assignments Presentation: pages / to /6 Characteristics: pages /7 to /9 References: pages /3 to /34 Dimensions, schemes: pages /6 to /7 /5

291 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor ESC ENT FWO REV RUN stop reset /6

292 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Applications Frequency converter for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors, the Altivar 58F flux vector control (FVC) with sensor complements the standard Altivar 58 range without sensor. It comprises functions which respond to applications requiring torque and accuracy at very low speed and increased dynamics, such as: - horizontal and vertical materials handling, - modular machines. Functions The main functions are as follows: - starting, closed loop speed control, dynamic braking and braking to a standstill, - possible open loop operation, - possibility of holding motor torque at a standstill, - energy saving, PID control, - brake logic, - +/- speed, S ramps, U ramps, preset speeds, jog operation (JOG), - automatic catching a spinning load with speed search (catch on the fly), - automatic limiting of low speed operating time, motor and drive protection, etc. Manufacturing variations The Altivar 58F is presented in the form of a drive (item ) with heatsink for normal environments and ventilated enclosures. The offer is also available with the drive mounted on a baseplate for ratings.75 to 5 kw. Fast programming using macro-configurations The Altivar 58F offers simple, fast programming using macro-configurations which correspond to various applications: materials handling, general use. Each of these configurations is fully adjustable. Dialogue functions The Altivar 58F has an RS 485 multidrop serial link with simplified Modbus protocol as part of the standard product. This serial link is used to connect PLCs (item 6 ), a PC or one of the available dialogue tools. There are 3 advanced dialogue solutions, with plain text display in 5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian) and storage of configurations: p Operator terminal, on the drive or enclosure door (item ) p PowerSuite Pocket PC (item 3 ): the Pocket PC is a tool which can be used during preparation, programming, setup and maintenance. The kit comprises a Pocket PC and connection accessories. p PowerSuite software workshop for PC (item 4 ): the PowerSuite software workshop is used to set up an Altivar drive from a PC in a Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT4 or environment. p Magelis display unit with matrix screen (item 5 ): this display unit can be used to monitor, diagnose and adjust up to 8 Altivar 58F drives. Customising the application It is possible to extend the functions by adding an extension card or communication bus (item 7 ). p I/O extension cards: -I/O and speed loop with analogue input or speed reference from encoder input. p Communication bus: -Fipio, Uni-Telway/Modbus, INTERBUS-S, Modbus Plus, AS-Interface, Profibus DP, Ethernet, CANopen, DeviceNet communication bus. Electromagnetic compatibility p Integrated EMC filters: ATV-58F drives are available with integrated EMC filters. Incorporating filters into the drives simplifies installation and provides an economical means of ensuring machine conformity for e marking purposes. They are sized to conform to the following standards: IEC/EN 68-3 for domestic and industrial environments. p Line chokes: ATV-58F drives with power rating 8.5 kw at 38 5 V are available with integrated line chokes which limit the line current to the motor nominal current value. Separate line chokes are available as an option for the other power ratings. Characteristics: pages /8 to /3 References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /7

293 Characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Environment characteristics Conforming to standards Altivar 58F drives have been developed to conform to National and International standards and the recommendations for electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN, NFC, VDE), notably: p Low Voltage EN 578 p EMC immunity: - IEC/EN 6-4- level 3 - IEC/EN level 3 - IEC/EN level 4 - IEC/EN level 3 - IEC/EN 68-3, environments and p EMC, conducted and radiated emissions: - IEC/EN 68-3, environments (industrial sector) and (public sector) with restricted distribution - EN 55 class A (drives with radio interference filters included) - EN 55 class B, with additional filters. e marking The drives have been developed according to the European low voltage (73/3/EECand 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives. For this reason, Altivar 58F drives are marked with the e European Community mark. Product certifications UL and CSA 4 Degree of protection IP and IP 4 on upper part (conforming to EN 578) Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC : p.5mmpeakfromto3hz p gnfrom3tohz Shock resistance Conforming to IEC : 5 gn for ms Maximum ambient pollution Degree conforming to IEC and EN 578 Maximum relative humidity 93 % with no condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC Ambient Storage C air temperature around the device Operation C ATV-58FHU8N4 to HU9N4 drives: p with no derating p Up to + 6 derating the current by. % per C over 5 C ATV-58FHDN4 to HD3N4 drives: p with no derating p Up to + 5 derating the current by. % per C over 4 C ATV-58FHD8N4 to HD79N4 drives: p with no derating p Up to + 6 with fan kit derating the current by. % per C over 4 C Maximum operating altitude m with no derating (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) Operating position Vertical Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /8

294 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Drive characteristics Output frequency range Hz 45 Configurable switching khz No derating, in continuous operation: frequency p for ATV-58FHU8N4 to HD46N4 drives p.5-- for ATV-58FHD54N4 to HD79N4 drives No derating with intermittent operating cycle or with derating by one power rating in continuous operation: p 8--6 for ATV-58FHU8N4 to HD3N4 drives p 8- for ATV-58FHD8N4 to HD46N4 drives p 4-8 for ATV-58FHD54N4 to HD79N4 drives Speed range closed loop with encoder feedback open loop or with tachogenerator speed feedback Speed precision For a torque variation from.tntotn ± % of the nominal speed, without speed feedback ±. % of the nominal speed, with tachogenerator speed feedback (option card) ±. % of the nominal speed, with encoder feedback (closed loop) Transient overtorque % of the nominal motor torque (typical value at ± %) for s 7 % of the nominal motor torque (typical value at ± %) for 6 s Braking torque 3 % of the nominal motor torque with no braking resistor (typical value). Up to 5 % with braking resistor as option Voltage/frequency ratio Flux vector control with or without sensor Electrical characteristics Power supply a.c. voltage V ATV-58FppppN4 drives: 38 - % to 5 + % Frequency Hz 5±5%or6±5% d.c. voltage V ATV-58FppppN49 drives: 54 - % to 7 + % Output voltage Electrical isolation Maximum voltage equal to mains voltage Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, supplies) Available internal supplies AI analogue inputs Protected against short-circuits and overloads + V supply - + % for the reference potentiometer ( kω), maximum current ma + 4 V supply (min 8 V, max 3 V) for control inputs, maximum current ma AIA, AIB: differential bipolar voltage analogue input: p ± V, impedance 4 kω in differential mode, kω in common mode p max permissible voltage ± 3 V p bit resolution + sign p accuracy ±.5 % of maximum value p linearity ±. % of maximum value p sampling time ms AI: analogue current input: p - ma input, reassignable to X-YmA by programming X and Y ( to ) p max permissible current 5 ma p resolution. ma p precision ± % of maximum value p linearity ±.5 % of maximum value p sampling time ms p impedance Ω Logic inputs LI to LI4 4 assignable logic inputs with impedance 3.5 kω, compatible with PLC level, standard IEC 665A-68 Maximum length of shielded cable: m Power supply + 4 V (min V, max 3 V) Stateif<5V,stateif V Sampling time: ms max Other inputs Seeoptioncards Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /9

295 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Electrical characteristics (continued) A current analogue output Logic outputs Other outputs Communication - ma output reassignable to X-Y ma, with X and Y configuration ( to ), load impedance 5 Ω maximum Resolution. ma Precision ± % of maximum value Linearity ±.5 % of maximum value Sampling time ms maximum relay logic outputs: R (fault relay) and R (assignable) C/O contact protected against overvoltages (relay R) N/O contact protected against overvoltages (relay R) Minimum switching capacity: ma for c 4 V Maximum switching capacity: p on a resistive load (cos ϕ =):5Afora 5 V or c 3 V p on an inductive load (cos ϕ =.4 and L/R = 7 ms):.5 A for a 5 V or c 3 V Seeoptioncards RS 485 multidrop serial link with simplified Modbus protocol as part of the standard product. Transmission speed: 9, bps no parity. Use: p connecting a terminal (option) or p connecting a microprocessor card or p connecting a PC (option) or p connecting one or more PLCs 4 Acceleration and Shape of ramps can be selected: linear or S or U or totally customizable. Factory-preset to 3 s. deceleration ramps Possibility of ranges of ramps which can be switched by frequency threshold or logic input Can be adjusted separately from. to s (definition. s or. s) Automatic adaptation of the deceleration times if the braking capacity is exceeded (configurable option) Braking to standstill By d.c. injection: p by a signal on an assignable logic input p automatically on stopping as soon as the frequency drops below. Hz, for a time adjustable from to 3 s or continuous Main protection and safety features of the drive Motor protection Short-circuit protection: p between output phases p between output phases and earth p on the outputs of internal supplies Thermal protection against excessive overheating and overcurrents Mains undervoltage and overvoltage Mains supply phase loss of phase (prevents single phase operation of 3-phase drives) Thermal protection integrated in the drive by continuous calculation of I t taking the speed into account: p saving of motor thermal state when drive is powered down p function can be modified using the terminal depending on type of motor cooling, force-cooled or self-cooled Protection against motor loss of phase Protection via PTC probes with option card Insulation resistance to earth MΩ > 5 (electrical insulation) Encoder feedback characteristics Power supply Voltage 5 V (maximum 5.5 V) Protected against short-circuits and overloads Maximum current ma Incremental logic inputs For incremental optical encoder with RS4 compatible differential outputs A, A, B, B Maximum 5 points/rev Minimum points/rev Maximum frequency khz with high-speed HSP Impedance 33 Ω Connection Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages /4 and /5 Viashieldedcablecomprising3twistedpairswithastepofbetween5and5mm Connect the shielding to the ground at both ends Minimum conductor cross-section for limiting line voltage drops Maximum length Maximum encoder Minimum conductor of cable current draw cross-section m ma. mm or AWG4 ma. mm or AWG4 5 m ma.5 mm or AWG ma.75 mm or AWG8 m ma.75 mm or AWG8 ma.5 mm or AWG6 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /

296 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below show the permanent torque and the transient overtorque available on a self-cooled motor or forcecooled motor. The only difference lies in the ability of the motor to provide high permanent torque at less than half nominal speed. Open loop applications T/Tn,75,7 3,5 Self-cooled motor: permanent useful torque Force-cooled motor: permanent useful torque 3 ransient overtorque for 6 s max.,5,95,5 4 4 Overspeed torque at constant power Available overtorque: % of the nominal motor torque for s and 7 % for 6 s.,5, N (Hz) Closed loop applications Self-cooled motor: permanent useful torque T/Tn,75,7,5,5, T/Tn,75,7,5,5,,5 N (Hz) Force-cooled motor: permanent useful torque 3 Transient overtorque for 6 s max. 4 Overspeed torque at constant power Available overtorque: % of the nominal motor torque for s and 7 % for 6 s., N (Hz) Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /

297 Operation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Special uses Power of the motor lower than the power of the drive The Altivar 58F drive can supply any motor with a power level lower than that for which it is designed. This solves the problem of applications requiring intermittent high overtorque. Examples: machine with very high starting torque. Note: in this case we recommend oversizing the drive to one size above that of the motor. Example: connecting an kwmotortoa5kwdrive. Power of the motor higher than the power of the drive A motor with a power level higher than that of the drive can be used as long as the current drawn by the motor is lower than or equal to the nominal current of the drive. This gives a self-cooled motor a greater speed range in continuous operation. Note: limit the power of the motor to one size above that of the drive. T/Tn,5 Example: connecting a. kw drive to a 3 kw motor (the 3 kw motor is to be used as a. kw motor with a speed rangeofto5hz). 4,95,75,5 3 Continuous motor torque Example:. kw Motor power = drive power Continuous motor torque Example: 3 kw Motor power > drive power,5 3. kw drive: nominal current N (Hz) Using a motor at overspeed The maximum output frequency of the drive can be adjusted from 4 to 45 Hz. Before using a standard asynchronous motor at overspeed, ask the manufacturer for the mechanical overspeed capabilities of the selected motor.,95 T/Tn,75,5 3 Above its nominal speed corresponding to a frequency of 5/6 Hz, the motor runs with decreasing flux and its torque decreases considerably (see curve opposite). The application must allow reduced torque operation at very high speed. Machine torque (decreasing torque),5 Machine torque (low motor torque) N (Hz) 3 Continuous motor torque Typical applications: woodworking machines, increasing the operational speed range of lightly loaded motors. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to/33 /

298 Operation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Special uses (continued) Using a motor at constant torque up to 87/4 Hz A 3/4 V motor can be used at constant torque up to 87 Hz with a connection with 4 V supply. In this special case, the initial power of the motor and the power of the connected drive are multiplied by 3 (adriveof suitable power must therefore be selected). Example: a. kw, 5 Hz motor with a connection supplies a power of 3.8 kw at 87 Hz with a connection (establish the overspeed capabilities of the motor). 4 U (V) 3 Altivar 58F, kw, kw 5 rev/min Identical motor 5 Hz 5 (6) 87 (4) f (Hz) Altivar 58F 4 kw 3,8 kw 6 rev/min - Operation with intermittent cycle and high switching frequency It is possible to operate with a high switching frequency () with no derating of power if the operating conditions are intermittent and within the following limits: Cumulative running time 36 s max per 6 s cycle (load factor 6 %). Presentation: pages /6 and /7 () Possible frequencies (in khz): for ATV-58FHU8N4 to HD6N4 drives, -8-forATV-58FHD8N4toHD46N4drives, for ATV-58FHD54N4 to HD79N4 drives. References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /3

299 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux vector control with sensor ATV 58FHU8N4 3-phase supply voltage: V () 5/6 Hz Motor Line supply (3) Altivar 58F Power indicated on rating Line current Max. prospective line Isc Max. drive nominal current plate at at at at () Umin. U max. Umin. U max. Max. transient current (4) Power dissipated at nominal load (5) Reference Weight kw HP A A ka ka A A W kg Drive with heatsink ATV 58FHU8N4 (6) ATV 58FHU9N4 (6) ATV 58FHU4N4 (6) ATV 58FHU54N4 (6) ATV 58FHU7N4 (6) ATV 58FHU9N4 (6) ATV 58FHDN4 (6) ATV 58FHD6N4 (6) ATV 58FHD3N4 (6) ATV 58FHD8N ATV 58FHD33N ATV 58FHD46N ATV 58FHD54N ATV 58FHD64N ATV 58FHD79N4 57. Driveonbaseplate ATV 58FPU8N4 (6) ATV 58FPU9N4 (6) ATV 58FPU4N4 (6) ATV 58FPU54N4 (6) ATV 58FPU7N4 (6) ATV 58FPU9N4 (6) ATV 58FPDN4 (6) ATV 58FPD6N4 (6) ATV 58FPD3N4 (6) 3.5 () Nominal supply voltage, U min U max. () These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive in continuous operation without derating ( or 4 khz depending on the rating). For higher switching frequencies: - derate the power by one rating in continuous operation, for example ATV-58FHDN4 for 5.5 kw, - if no power derating is applied, do not exceed the following operating conditions: Cumulative running time 36 s maximum per 6 s cycle (load factor 6 %). (3) Typical value for a 4-pole motor with no additional choke. (4) For 6 seconds. (5) These power levels are given for the maximum switching frequency permitted by the drive in continuous operation ( or 4 khz depending on the rating). (6) These drives are available with power supplied via the d.c. bus. To order these drives, add 9 at the end of the reference. Example: ATV-58FHU8N4 becomes ATV-58FHU8N49 with power supply via the d.c. bus. Nota : please refer to the table summarising the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on pages /6 and /7. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /7 to / Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /4

300 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux vector control with sensor Options Presentation The Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor supports the same options as the drives in the ATV 58 range: b I/O extension card. b Communication cards: v Fipio, v Uni-Telway, Modbus ASCII, Modbus RTU/Jbus, v INTERBUS-S, v Modbus Plus, v AS-Interface, v Profibus DP, v Ethernet TCP/IP, v CANopen, v DeviceNet. b Kit for remote operator terminal. b Advanced PowerSuite dialogue solutions (see pages 3/ and 3/3). b RS 485 connection kit. b Chokes. b Input filters. b Output filters. b Braking resistors. b Kit for mounting IP 3 air exchanger. b Control card fan kit. b Separate control circuit supply kit. b Removable power terminals. For more information about all of these options, see pages /35 to /53. Nota : the communication cards are fitted with terminals or connectors which are compatible with the corresponding communication buses or networks. Connect them using the appropriate PLC accessories. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /7 to / Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / Functions: pages /4 to /33 /5

301 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Supply Motor ATV-58F drive Options Supply voltage 5/6 Hz Power indicated on rating plate extension or communication card () See p. /4 Remote operator terminal kw HP See p. /43 See p. /38 See p. 3/ PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions Software workshop and Pocket PC Magelis display 38 5 V,75 ATV-58FpU8N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3-phase,5 ATV-58FpU9N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8, 3 ATV-58FpU4N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 ATV-58FpU54N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 5 ATV-58FpU7N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5,5 7,5 ATV-58FpU9N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 7,5 ATV-58FpDN4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5 ATV-58FpD6N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 5 ATV-58FpD3N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 8,5 5 ATV-58FHD8N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 4 3 ATV-58FHD33N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 3 4 ATV-58FHD46N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58FHD54N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58FHD64N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A ATV-58FHD79N4 VW3-A58ppp VW3-A583 VW3-A8pp XBT-HM7A8 () Except for specific customer cards VW3-A58p. /6

302 RS 485 Line Additional Output IP IP 3 Kit for Control Separate Plug-in Interconnection choke input filter braking braking mounting card control circuit power terminal filter resistor resistor IP 3 air fan kit supply kit block exchanger See See See See See See See See See See p. /39 p. /49 p. /5 p. /53 p. /46 p. /47 p. /35 p. /36 p. /36 p. /37 VW3-A5836 VW3-A665 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A665 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A665 VW3-A584 VW3-A5845 VW3-A587 VW3-A5873 VW3-A588 VW3-A586 VW3-A588 VW3-A5836 VW3-A665 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 VW3-A5873 VW3-A58734 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A665 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 VW3-A5873 VW3-A58734 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A6653 VW3-A5843 VW3-A5845 VW3-A58735 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5863 VW3-A5883 VW3-A5836 VW3-A6653 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 VW3-A58735 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A6654 VW3-A5844 VW3-A58453 VW3-A58736 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 VW3-A6654 VW3-A5845 VW3-A58453 VW3-A58736 VW3-A5884 VW3-A5864 VW3-A5836 Integrated VW3-A5846 VW3-A664 VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 Integrated VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 Integrated VW3-A5847 VW3-A664 VW3-A58737 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5885 VW3-A5836 Integrated VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 Integrated VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 VW3-A5836 Integrated VW3-A5848 VW3-A6643 VW3-A6674 VW3-A5887 VW3-A5886 /7

303 Dimensions, mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor ATV-58FHppppp c b = G = = H = a 4 ATV-58FH a b c G H Ø mm mm mm mm mm mm U8N4, U9N4, U4N U54N4, U7N4, U9N ,5 DN4, D6N ,5 D3N ,5 D8N4, D33N4, D46N D54N4, D64N4, D79N Options: see pages /6 and /63 Mounting recommendations Same as ATV-58HpppN4: see pages /76 and /77. ATV-58FH U8N4 U9N4, U4N4, U54N4 U7N4, U9N4, DN4, D6N4, D3N4 D8N4, D33N4, D46N4 D54N4, D64N4, D79N4 Ventilation rate not cooled 36 m 3 /hour 7 m3/hour 9 m3/hour 49 m3/hour Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Functions: pages /4 to /33 /8

304 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor The connection diagrams for Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control drives with sensor and for their options are the same as those for the ATV-58HpppN4 drives (see pages /64 to /7) except for speed setpoints and encoder feedback if fitted. Single pole speed setpoint -pole speed setpoint A + V AIA AIB COM ( V) AI A AIA AIB COM Reference potentiometer X - Y ma V + V Source ± V Speed setpoint using axis control A A A A B COM B AIA V AIB 5 V V + Reference ±V Axis control Closed loop control Encoder wiring + A A B B V Encoder 5 V Motor starter combinations for customer assembly: see pages /74 and /75, high torque applications. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Functions: pages /4 to /33 /9

305 C C C C 3 4 Schemes (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Example of connection with TSX CAYpp axis control module 8 TSX CAY 4 ++ Supply c 4 V ++ Telefast () ABE-7H6R TSX TAP MAS 9 A+ A B+ B Z+ Z V +5V Supply ref. To other drives 4 Enable Drive fault black blue brown A A A B B V LI LI4 RB RA AIA AIB COM ATV-58F speed drive () Axis Incremental encoder (3) 8 TSX CXP 3/63 cable equipped with connectors 9 TSX CDP 6 rolled ribbon cable equipped with connectors TSX CDP pp3 cableequippedwithconnectors 6 Cable equipped with connectors and VY-X4CA5 adaptor () To connect auxiliary I/O (for example: Emergency stop, reference point, etc), please refer to the axis control module catalogue. () The drive should be programmed as General Use Macro Configuration. (3) For more detailed information on Telemecanique encoders, please contact your Regional Sales Office. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Functions: pages /4 to /33 /

306 Principle, mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Electromagnetic compatibility Principle p Earth connections between drive, motor and cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality. p Use shielded cables with shielding connected to earth for a complete 36 at both ends of the motor cable, braking resistor cable (if used) and control-command cables. Conduit or metal ducting can be used for part of the shielding provided that there is no break in continuity. p Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable. Mounting: installation diagram Sheetsteelplate(supplied)tobefittedtothedrive(earthedcasing). Altivar 58F. 3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cables. 4 Non-shielded wires for the output of the fault relay contacts. 5 Attachment and connection to earth of the shielding of cables 6, 7, 8 and 9 as close as possible to the drive: -strip the shielding, -use cable clamps of an appropriate size to clamp the shielding to the mounting plate, tight enough to ensure good contact, -type of clamp: stainless steel. 6 Shielded cable for connecting the motor, shielding connected to earth at both ends. This shielding must be unbroken and, if there are intermediate terminals, they must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. 7 Shielded cable for connecting the encoder. The shielding must be connected to earth at both ends. This shielding must be unbroken and, if there are intermediate terminals, they must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. 8 Shielded cable for connecting the braking resistor, if used. The shielding must be connected to earth at both ends. This shielding must be unbroken and, if there are intermediate terminals, they must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. 9 Shielded cable for connecting the control/command. For applications which require a large number of conductors, small cross-sections must be used (.5 mm). The shielding must be connected to earth at both ends. This shielding must be unbroken and, if there are intermediate terminals, they must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. Notes: Although there is a high frequency equipotential earth connection between the drive, the motor and the cable shielding, it is still necessary to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each of the devices. If an additional input filter is used, it should be mounted behind the drive and connected directly to the line supply by an unshielded cable. Connection 3 is then made using the filter cable. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Functions: pages /4 to /33 /

307 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Combination of functions and applications Applications Special machines Packaging/packing Machines which require torque and Timber Modular Bagging machines Palletizers precision at very low speed Textile Labelling machines Depalletizers as well as a raised dynamic "Drive" functions 4 Maximum frequency 45 Hz b (special motor) Switchingfrequency to6khz to8khz to8khz to8khz Noise reduction (random frequency) v v v FVC closed loop v b v b Resistance braking b v b b Application functions Automatic adaptation of the b deceleration ramp Automatic catching a spinning load b (flying restart) Controlledstoponlossoflinesupply b b b Ramps can be customized as S or U v v b Analogue inputs - Summing v v - Torque limiting v - PID regulator b - PTC probes v v v v Logic inputs - operating directions b v v b -Faststop v - Freewheel stop b v - Step by step (JOG) b b b v - Preset speeds b b - Ramp switching v v - +/- speed v b - Reference switching v - nd torque limit v Logic outputs - Braking sequence b - Downstream contactor control v v v - Motor thermal state reached v - Motor current threshold reached v v - Drive running v v Analogue outputs (torque, speed, v v v v current, ramp, etc.) b Necessary or frequent use v Occasional use Functions: pages /4 to /33 /

308 Handling/lifting Elevators Horizontal Vertical Winches to8khz to8khz to6khz b v b b b b b v v b v b v v v v v b b b v v b b v v v v v v v b b b v v v v v v v /3

309 Functions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor The majority of functions for the Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor (FVC) are common to those of the Altivar 58. However, certain Altivar 58 functions are not available in the Altivar 58F, namely: - operating power range (use in high torque only), - motor switching, - incremental speed feedback with option card, - energy saving, - current limit adaptation. 4 Other functions are specific to the Altivar 58F. These are described on the following pages. All the assignable I/O functions are listed on pages /3 and /33. Common functions of the Altivar 58 and the Altivar 58F Principle of access to menus page /9 Operating speed range page /93 Alternate ramp switching page /94 Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp page /94 Reduction of torque limit by logic input page /94 Reduction of torque limit by analogue input page /94 Reverse operation page /94 Disabling reverse direction page /94 Step by step (JOG) page /94 -wire control page /95 3-wire control page /95 Downstream contactor control page /96 Preset speeds page /97 Adjusting analogue input AI page /97 Reference switching page /97 Speed feedback with tachogenerator page /99 Incremental speed reference page /99 Controlled stop page /99 Controlled stop on mains power break page / Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection page / Automatic restart page / Limiting low speed operating time page / Fault reset page / Forced local mode page / Fault relay, unlocking page / Motor thermal protection page / PTC probe protection page / Thermal protection of drive page / Switching frequency, noise reduction page / Auto tune page /3 Skip frequencies page /3 Specific functions of the Altivar 58F Macro-configuration programming page /5 Acceleration and deceleration ramp times page /6 Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile page /6 +/- speed pages /7 and /8 Save reference page /8 Motor fluxing page /8 Open/closed loop switching page /8 Summing inputs page /8 PID regulator page /9 Speed reference summing by encoder input page /9 Closed loop page /3 Brake sequence page /3 Reassignable logic outputs page /3 Analogue outputs AO and AO page /3 Adjustment of analogue outputs AO and AO page /3 Configurable I/O pages /3 and /33 Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /4

310 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor b Macro-configuration programming A simplified menu can be used for preprogramming the drive to facilitate configuration and set-up. There are options available, which correspond to the various functions and applications: v handling, v general use. Selection of one of these macro-configurations will automatically assign the functions, parameters and I/O, even for any option cards which may be used. This menu also includes a guide to the most appropriate selection in each case. Preconfiguration carried out in this way can be modified at any time if necessary. In the factory configuration, the selection is set to the Handling macro-configuration. The preconfigured functions for each macro-configuration are: Type of macro-configuration Handling General use Basic I/O Logic input LI Forward Forward Logic input LI Reverse Reverse Logic input LI3 preset speeds Jog operation Logic input LI4 4 preset speeds Freewheel stop Analogue input AI Summing speed reference Summing speed reference Analogue input AI Summing speed reference Summing speed reference Relay R Drive fault Drive fault Relay R Not assigned Not assigned Analogue output AO Motor frequency Motor frequency Extension card I/O Logic input LI5 8 preset speeds Clearing faults Logic input LI6 Clearing faults Current limit Analogue input AI3 Summing speed reference Summing speed reference or Encoder inputs Logic output LO Current threshold reached Downstream contactor control Analogue output AO Motor current Motor current Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /5

311 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to determine acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics, with intervals of. s or. s. For all applications. f(hz) f(hz) 5/6 5/6 t t t t t: acceleration ramp time. t: deceleration ramp time. t and t can be adjusted separately from.to999.9sor.to99.99s. Factory setting 3 s. Acceleration ramp Deceleration ramp b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference, following a linear ratio or a preset ratio which enables the ramp to be given an S or a U profile or to be customized. For applications such as materials handling, packaging, transportation of people, the use of S or U ramps takes up mechanical play and eliminates jolts, and limits non-following of the speed during rapid transient operation of high inertia machines. 4 Selecting linear or S, or U profiles will affect both the deceleration and acceleration ramps. v S-shape ramps f (Hz) HSP GV f (Hz) HSP GV t t t t t t HSP: high speed. The curve coefficient is fixed, with t =.6 x t and t: set ramp time. v U-shape ramps HSP GV f (Hz) f (Hz) HSP GV t t t t t t HSP: high speed. The curve coefficient is fixed, with t =.5 x t and t: set ramp time. v Customized ramps f (Hz) HSP GV f (Hz) HSP GV ta ta t ta3 ta4 t t t t: set ramp time. ta: adjustment from to % (of t). ta: adjustment from to ( % - ta) (of t). ta3: adjustment from to % (of t). ta4: adjustment from to ( % - ta3) (of t). Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /6

312 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor b +/- speed Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of or logic commands, with or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function). Enabled by assigning or logic inputs. Function dedicated to: - centralized control of a non-reversing machine which has several sections, - control, from a pendant control station, of a materials handling crane, in two operating directions. F(Hz) LSP LSP v Use of double action pushbuttons. Only one logic input assigned to + speed is required. Description: button pressed twice for each direction of rotation. Each action closes a contact. Forward Press b b Press a a a a a a a Reverse Press d Press c c Example of operation using double action pushbuttons Released (- speed) Press (speed maintained) Press (+ speed) Forward button Contact a Contacts a and b Reverse button Contact c Contacts c and d Wiring example: Altivar 58F control terminals LI LIx LIy + 4 V LI: forward LIx: reverse Lly : + speed b d a c This type of +/- speed is incompatible with 3-wire control. In this case, the - speed function is automatically assigned to the logic input with a higher index (for example: LI3 = + speed, LI4 = - speed). In this case, the maximum speed is given by the references applied to the analogue inputs: for example, connect AI to the + V. Reference LSP LSP Reference Ll + speed Ll - speed Ll forward Ll reverse F(Hz) t Example of operation using single action pushbuttons without reference saving (Str = No). t t t t v Use of single action pushbuttons. Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s). The input assigned to the + speed command increases the speed, the input assigned to the - speed command decreases the speed. This function accesses the STr save reference parameter in the Control menu. - The minimum rotation speed is limited to low speed (LSP). - - speed has priority over + speed. - If Str = No, RAM or EEP, the maximum rotation speed is fixed by the analogue references (for example, connect AI to the + V). If the reference decreases and drops below the rotation speed, the rotation speed follows the reference. The rate of increase is given by the valid acceleration parameter (acceleration, deceleration, acceleration or deceleration ). Wiring examples: LI LIx LIy LIz LI: forward LIx: reverse Lly : + speed Llz : - speed Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /7

313 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor F (Hz) Reference LSP LSP t b +speed/- speed (continued) v Use of single action pushbuttons (continued). Example using single action pushbuttons with reference saving: 4 Reference Ll + speed Ll - speed Ll forward Ll reverse Example of operation using single action pushbuttons with reference saving. F (Hz) HSP Reference SRP SRP LSP LSP Reference SRP HSP Ll + speed Ll - speed Ll forward Ll reverse Example of operation using single action pushbuttons without reference saving. t t t t t t t t t Str = RAM (saved in RAM): the reference is saved on each + speed / - speed falling edge. Thus, after a stop without the drive being powered down, when a run command appears, the frequency increases to the saved value if the + speed/- speed commands are not active. + speed / - speed still have priority. Str = EEP (saved in EEPROM): the reference is saved on each + speed / - speed falling edge. Thus, after a stop with or without the drive being powered down, when a run command appears, the frequency increases to the saved value if the + speed/- speed commands are not active. The + speed / - speed commands still have priority. Example using single action pushbuttons without reference saving: Str = SRE: the maximum rotation speed is fixed by the high speed (HSP). When the run command is issued, the drive changes to the setpoint reference following the acceleration and deceleration ramps. Pressing + speed/- speed varies the speed around this setpoint following the acceleration and deceleration ramps. + or - speed adjustment around the setpoint is limited by parameter SRP, which is a percentage of HSP. If the reference changes, the ratio between the reference and the setpoint resulting from the + speed/- speed correction is fixed. b Save reference F: motor frequency Run command LIx (save) ms ms ms Analogue reference Example of operation using reference saving. F (Hz) HSP t t t v Used to take into account and save the speed reference value of the analogue input using a logic input when the command lasts longer than. s. v Used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analogue setpoint and a logic input for each drive. v It is also used to confirm a line reference (serial link) via a logic input on several drives. This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is sent. v The setpoint is acquired ms after the rising edge of the request. A new reference is not then acquired until a new request is made. b Motor fluxing Used to obtain rapid high torque on start-up, the magnetic flux needs to be already established in the motor. v This function can be selected in open loop or closed loop operation. v In continuous mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up. v In non-continuous mode: - if an LI is assigned to the motor fluxing command, flux is built up when the command is confirmed. - if no LI has been assigned or if it is not active when a run command is given, the motor is fluxed when it starts up. v The flux current is equal to the drive limit current (l lim) when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor no-load current. b Open/closed loop switching LSP AI AI3 t Used to switch between open loop and closed loop mode. Switching must be carried out when the motor is stopped, and the drive locked. b Summing inputs AI V Example of operation using summing inputs. t t Analogue input AI (and/or analogue input AI3 with extension card) can be assigned as a summing input of AI with deadband corresponding to speed HSP. The frequency setpoints given by AI and/or AI3 can be summed and/or subtracted with AI: AI ±AI±AI3. This function is dedicated to machines on which the speed is governed by a corrector signal on input AI. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /8

314 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor b PID regulator Used to regulate a process with a reference and a feedback given by a sensor. A speed input gives an initial (or predictive) setpoint for start-up. Function dedicated to traction regulation on a winder. Speed input PID Reference Multiplier PID feedback PrG Integral shunting Manual reference Auto/man + Multiplier PSR reo Offset Filter + + Ramp ACC DEC AC DE ACC DEC ACC: acceleration, AC: acceleration, DEC: deceleration, DE: deceleration PID X Internal run command Deadband f(speed) Ramp PID Inversion AUTO MANU Reference v Speed input: line reference (serial link). v PID reference: reference via the line (serial link), or 4 references preset via logic inputs or analogue input AI (± AI, ± AI3). v PI feedback: analogue input AI or AI3. v Integral shunting: logic input LI. v Manual reference (speed regulation mode): analogue input AI3. v Auto/man: logic input LI for switching operation to speed regulation (man) or PI regulation (auto). In automatic mode, it is possible to: - adapt the reference input to the process feedback: GAIN (PrG) and OFFSET (reo), - correct PID inversion, - adjust the proportional, integral and derivative gain (Kp, Ki and Kd), - use the alarm on the logic output if a threshold is exceeded (Max. feedback, Min. feedback and PID error), - allocate an analogue output for the PID reference, PID feedback and PID error, limit the PID action in relation to the speed, with an adjustable base and ratio (see drawing below). Speed Deadband - apply a ramp (time = AC - DE) to establish the PID action when starting and stopping. The motor speed is limited to between LSP and HSP. It is displayed as a percentage. v Preset PI references: or 4 PID preset references require the use of or logic inputs respectively. preset references 4 preset references Assign: LIx to Pr Assign: LIx to Pr, LIy to Pr4 LIx Reference LIy LIx Reference Analogue reference Analogue reference Process max PI (adjustable) PI3 (adjustable) Process max b Speed reference summing by encoder input (I/O extension card encoder input) The reference provided by the encoder input is summed with analogue input AI. Function dedicated to synchronization of the speed of several drives. Parameter PLS in the drive menu is used to adjust the speed ratio of one motor relative to another. Reference by pulse generator. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /9

315 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor b FVC closed loop (control card encoder input) Operation using flux vector control with sensor (inputs A, A-, B, B-). This concerns the control card encoder. The encoder is used for precise speed regulation, independent of the load state, as well as optimized control (flux vector control mode in closed loop: FVC). v Consistency between the motor frequency and the speed feedback is monitored in the drive fault management system. v In the event of a missing encoder feedback signal (FVC mode) or inconsistency, the drive locks with a speed loss fault. v During operation, if the difference between the motor frequency and the speed feedback is greater than 5 Hz, the drive locks in speed loss fault mode. v If the brake sequence is active, the speed loss fault can only occur when the brake is released. If the speed feedback is greater than. x "max. frequency", the drive locks with an overspeed fault. b Brake sequence: can only be assigned to relay R Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive, for horizontal and vertical lifting applications, and for unbalanced machines (parking brake). Principle of the function dedicated to vertical hoisting movement: maintains motor torque in the upward direction during brake opening and closing, in order to hold the load, and start smoothly when the brake is released. Principle of the function dedicated to horizontal hoisting movement: synchronizes brake opening with the build-up torque on starting and brake closing at zero speed on stopping, in order to prevent jerking. 4 V: motor speed Speed reference Relay R Motor current Ibr F: motor frequency Speed reference ben brt bet tdc t t t t Example of brake sequence in open loop mode (see diagram opposite) Settings which can be accessed in the adjust menu: v brake release delay (brt), v brake release current (Ibr), v brake engage frequency (ben), v brake engage delay (bet), v d.c. injection braking time on stopping (tdc), v brake pulse (bip): - when set to YES, it always gives a motor torque in the up direction (vertical lifting), - when set to NO the torque direction corresponds to the requested operating direction (horizontal lifting). Ll forward or reverse t Brake state engaged released engaged V: motor speed Speed reference Relay R Motor current brt t t Example of brake sequence in closed loop mode (see diagram opposite) Settings which can be accessed in the adjust menu: v brake release delay (brt), v brake release current (Ibr), v zero speed maintenance time in stop mode (tdc), v brake engage delay (bet), v brake pulse (bip): - when set to YES, it always gives a motor torque in the up direction (vertical lifting), - when set to NO the torque direction corresponds to the requested operating direction (horizontal lifting). Ibr F: motor frequency Speed reference bet tdc t Ll forward or reverse t t Brake state engaged released engaged Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /3

316 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor b Reassignable logic outputs Relay R or output LO are used for: v Remote indication of the following information as required: - drive operating (running or braking), - frequency threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - nd frequency threshold reached, - frequency reference reached (motor frequency equal to the reference), - current threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - thermal threshold reached (higher than or equal to an adjustable threshold), - high speed reached, - PID error, - PID feedback alarm, - loss of 4- ma reference, v Remote control of a downstream contactor: - brake sequence (relay R only). b Analogue outputs AO and AO Output AO on the control card and output AO on one of the I/O extension cards are used to assign the analogue outputs x-y ma to the following parameters, as required: - motor current (y ma = twice the nominal current of the drive), - motor frequency (y ma = maximum frequency), - ramp output (y ma = maximum frequency), - signed ramp output (x ma = negative maximum frequency, y ma = positive maximum frequency), - motor torque (y ma = twice the nominal motor torque), - signed motor torque (x ma = - twice the nominal motor torque, ie. braking operation, y ma = + twice the nominal motor torque, - PID reference (x ma = min. reference, y ma = max. reference), - PID feedback (x ma = min. feedback, y ma = max. feedback), - PIDerror(xmA=-5%,ymA=+5%), - PID integral, - motor power: (x ma = % of the nominal motor power, y ma = % of the nominal motor power), - motor thermal state: (x ma = %, y ma = %), - drive thermal state: (x ma = %, y ma = %). Note: x adjustable from to. y adjustable from to. b Adjustment of the analogue outputs AO and AO The characteristics of analogue current outputs AO and AO can be modified. Factory setting: - ma Other values: 4- ma, -4 ma or x-y ma by programming x and y with a definition of. ma This function is dedicated to all applications with a signal other than - ma. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /3

317 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Compatibility table for configurable I/O functions b Configurable I/O Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. v Stop functions have priority over run commands. v Speed references via logic command have priority over analogue references. The selection of functions is limited by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another Functions d.c. injection braking d.c. injection braking Summing inputs PID regulator +/- speed Reference switching Freewheel stop A Fast stop Run Step by step Preset speeds Al3 torque limiting LI torque limiting Speed regulation with tachogenerator Reference saving Closed loop FVC Open/ closed loop switching Summing inputs PID regulator +/- speed A Reference switching 4 Freewheel stop X X X Fast stop A Jog operation X X Preset speeds A Speed regulation with tachogenerator Al3 torque limiting LI torque limiting Save reference Closed loop FVC A Open/closedloopswitching Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time) X A The arrow indicates which function has priority. Example: the "Freewheel stop" function has priority over the "d.c. injection braking" function. Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /3

318 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 58F Flux Vector Control with sensor Summary table of the configurable I/O assignments Drive I/O Without option card With I/O extension cards Relay R Analogue input AI Analogue output AO 3 logic inputs LI- LI3-LI4 Encoder inputs A-, A+, B-, B+ logic inputs LI5-LI6 Analogue input AI3 Logic output LO Analogue output AO Encoder inputs A-, A+, B-, B+ Functions Auto-tuning Reverse operation Alternate ramp switching Step by step (JOG) +/- speed Save reference Motor fluxing Preset speeds Reference switching Freewheel stop d.c. injection stop Fast stop Open/closed loop switching Second torque limit Forced local mode Auto/man PID PID integral shunting Preset PID references: Fault reset nd speed reference Summing reference PID regulator feedback Subtracting reference Manual PID reference PID speed reference Torque limit reduction PTC probes Speed feedback Downstream contactor control Frequency threshold reached High speed reached Frequency reference reached Current threshold reached Thermal threshold reached Drive running Brake sequence PID error PID feedback alarm Loss of 4- ma reference Motor current Motor speed Ramp output Motor torque Signed motor torque Signed ramp output PID reference output PID feedback output PID error output PID integral output Motor power Motor thermal state Drive thermal state Possible assignments Presentation: pages /6 and /7 Characteristics: pages /8 to / References: pages /4 and /5 Dimensions, schemes: pages /8 to / /33

319 Presentation, description Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38, 58, 58F Option: "Controller Inside" - programmable card Presentation The "Controller Inside" programmable card is used to adapt variable speed drives to specific customer applications, quickly and in an open-ended manner, by decentralizing the control system functions. It fits into Altivar 38, 58 and 58F variable speed drives. Theprogrammablecardcontains: b 8 I/O to be defined according to the application, including: v inputs which can be used as counter inputs v inputs which can be used as incremental encoder inputs b a communication interface for the CANopen bus which can be Master or Slave b aseriallinktoapc The card must have a separate power supply. 4 VW3 A583 The PS 3 software workshop (see pages /36 to /39) is used for card programming and setup. The CANopen bus configurator is integrated in the software workshop. This software workshop is already used for other Schneider Electric products (LEXIUM, TWINline). It conforms to international standard IEC b 6 programming languages are available: v Ladder language (LD) v Structured Text language (ST) v Grafcet language (SFC) v Instruction List language (IL) v Function blocks (DFB) v Continuous Flow Chart (CFC) b To assist programming, there are: v logic functions (AND, OR, etc) v mathematical functions (Cos, Sin, Exp, etc) v function blocks dedicated to drives, thus simplifying data exchanges between the drive and the programmable card (example: sending the speed reference). The application program is rebuilt and loaded into the "Flash" memory. The non-volatile memory (NVRAM) is used to save the application data when the card is not supplied with power. The various functions, such as displaying changes in variables, forced writing of variables, the possibility of placing breakpoints and executing the program step by step, are used to debug the application program. 4 Description The programmable card has 3 external connectors and 5 signalling LEDs. Connector with -way removable spring terminals, including: - 8 contacts which can be used as either inputs or outputs, of which can be used as counter or incremental encoder inputs. - Choices of input, output, or type of logic input are made by the program loaded in the card. - contacts are reserved for the 4 V c (min V c,max 8 V c), A external power supply. The external power supply must be ordered separately (). 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the CANopen bus. 3 8-way RJ45 type connector for connection to the RS485 serial link. Connection to the PC is via a cable and an RS485/RS3 adaptor included in the PowerSuite for PC connection kit. 4 5 LEDs, including: - 3 reserved for the application program - for the CANopen bus communication status 3 () Recommended power supply reference: ABL 7RE4. Please consult our "Phaseo power supplies and transformers" specialist catalogue. /34

320 Characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38, 58, 58F Option: "Controller Inside" - programmable card Environment characteristics () Conforming to standards Low voltage: EN 578, EMC immunity: IEC/EN 68-, IEC/EN 68-3 EMC, radiated and conducted emissions: IEC/EN 68-3, UL 58C e marking The drives have been designed to meet the requirements of the European low voltage (73/3/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives. Product certifications UL, CSA Max. ambient pollution Conforming to UL 58C Level 3 Maximum relative humidity Conforming to IEC % without condensation or dripping water Ambient air temperature See the respective drive characteristics. Electrical characteristics of the programmable card Supply voltage (provided by external power supply) Nominal V c 4 Maximum V c 8 Minimum V c External power supply current A (to be adapted according to the number of I/O used) () Power consumption No-load ma 8 Using logic output ma Logic inputs Maximum voltage V c 8 Switching thresholds V u for change from state to state < 5 for change from state to state Input resistance kω 3. ± 5Ω Counter or 5 khz limit frequency incremental encoder inputs Outputs Maximum switching voltage V 8 Maximum residual voltage mv Maximum current ma Connection of I/O Maximum capacity.5 mm (rigid cable u. mm or flexible cable with ferrule) Length of cable m y for cross-section.5 mm Type of contact spring Rebuilt program Maximum size Kb 3 Memory size of the variables Kb 8 NVRAM memory Memory size Kb 8 Lithium battery Life 8 years approx. References Description Use for drive/software version (3) Reference Weight kg Programmable card "Controller Inside" ATV 38 / u. VW3 A583.3 ATV 58 / u 4. ATV 58F / u 3. PowerSuite for PC connection kit ATV 38 VW3 A86. ATV 58 ATV 58F PS 3 software workshop (4) (5) supplied on CD-ROM Application programs (5) supplied on CD-ROM ATV 38 / u. (5). ATV 58 / u 4. ATV 58F / u 3. ATV 38 / u. (5). ATV 58 / u 4. ATV 58F / u 3. () These characteristics are in addition to those of the ATV 38, ATV 58, ATV 58F drives. Check the corresponding drive characteristics. () Recommended power supply reference: ABL 7RE4. Please consult our "Phaseo power supplies and transformers" specialist catalogue. (3) After disconnecting the operator terminal, check the software version indicated on the label attached to the drive control card. (4) The "PS 3 software workshop" CD-ROM includes: - the programming software workshop and associated manual - the function libraries for communicating with the drive and managing the CANopen bus - the online help file - program examples - the user and programming manuals for the ATV 38, ATV 58 and ATV 58F drives - the internal variables manual (5) The "PS 3 software workshop" and "Application programs" CD-ROMs are provided during training. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. /35

321 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38, 58, 58F Option: "Controller Inside" - CANopen CANopen The communication interface contained in the programmable card is used to connect the drive/programmable card device to the CANopen bus. The drive/programmable card device can be either Master or Slave on this bus. The CANopen configurator is included in the software workshop described on pages /37 to /39. It uses EDS description files for each of the Slaves. The drive address and communication speed on the bus are defined either by the program or by switches. The line termination resistor is integrated on the card. The signalling LEDs indicate the states of the CANopen bus in accordance with standard CIA DR 33, version.. CANopen bus configurator Architecture Example of Master architecture Example of Slave architecture 4 ATV 58 (Master) CANopen bus Premium CANopen bus ATV 38 ATV 3 Advantys STB distributed I/O FTB CN ATV 3 ATV 58 ATV 3 Tesys model U Lexium Tego Power Characteristics CANopen Structure Physical interface ISO 898 Access method CSMA/CA, multimaster, producer/consumer principle Transmission Data rate Kbps to Mbps Medium Double shielded twisted pair Physical configuration selection via program Physical configuration selection via switches Length of a segment according to the data rate Length of a segment according to the data rate Mbps 8 Kbps 5 Kbps 5 Kbps 5 Kbps 5 Kbps Kbps Kbps 5 m 5 m m 5 m 5 m, m,5 m 5, m Mbps 5 Kbps 5 Kbps 5 Kbps 5 m m 5 m 5 m Number of addresses Master CANopen The address can be configured from to 3 via the CANopen configurator Slave CANopen The address can be configured from to 63 via switches or via the program Number of Slaves 3 with a maximum of 9 PDOs per Slave Services supported (in accordance with DSP 45, DS 3) Master CANopen Slave CANopen Services supported: b NetWork Management Master b Boot-up messages b Emergency messages b Sync b Node guarding, consumer and producer Heartbeat b Status and error b Implicit exchange of Process Data Objects (PDO) on the network (this exchange is pre-programmed and does not require any special action) b Explicit exchange for each Slave of Service Data Objects (SDO), in read mode and in write mode b Compatibility with the standard device and communication profiles on CANopen. Services not supported: b Time stamp message b Transfer of SDO blocks b Event timer on PDO Services supported: b Boot-up messages b Emergency messages b Node guarding b Implicit exchange of Process Data Objects (PDO) on the network. Only asynchronous exchanges are supported. PDOs can be exchanged between Slaves. b Explicit exchange of Service Data Objects (SDO). Transfer of SDO blocks is not supported. /36

322 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38, 58, 58F Option: "Controller Inside" - PS3 software workshop Application components PS 3 software workshop The PS 3 software workshop conforms to international standard IEC 63-3, and includes all the functions used to program and set up the "Controller Inside" programmable card. It incorporates the configurator for the CANopen communication interface. The software workshop is already used for other Schneider Electric products (LEXIUM, TWINline). It is designed for Windows 98, Windows NT 4., Windows Millennium, Windows Professional and Windows XP operating systems. It benefits from the user-friendly interface associated with these operating systems: b pop-up menus b function blocks b online help The software workshop exists in English and German. The programming and debugging tools can be accessed via the application browser. This provides the user with an overview of the program and quick access to all the application components: - program editor - function blocks editor - variables editor - animation tables editor - runtime screens editor Modular structured programming The software workshop is used to structure an application into functional modules consisting of sections (program code), animation tables and runtime screens. Each program section has a name and is programmed in one of the six available languages. To protect know-how or prevent any accidental modification, each section can be write-protected or read/write-protected. Exporting/importing functional modules: It is possible to export all or part of the tree structure in functional modules. In this case, all program sections at the various module levels are exported. Cyclic task or startofperiod Acquisition of inputs on the programmable card and PDOs on CANopen Exchange of periodic data with the drive Program processing Updating the outputs on the programmable card and PDOs on CANopen Program structure and execution of an application The program structure is single-task. A single Master task is executed. It consists of several subroutines. Exchanges with the drive are performed by a function block available in the standard library. The cycle execution can be either cyclic, or periodic. A software "watchdog", which can be configured between 5 ms and 8 ms by the user, monitors the cycle time. b Cyclic execution: Once each cycle ends, execution of a new cycle begins. The cycle execution must last for at least 5 ms. b Periodic execution: The program is executed periodically, and the period can be set by the user to between 5 and ms. Cycle execution must be shorter than the defined period. Drive response in the event of the cycle time being exceeded can be managed by the program. End of period Example of cycle execution for a drive connected on a CANopen bus /37

323 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38, 58, 58F Option: "Controller Inside" - PS3 software workshop Example of Ladder language programming Programming languages b 6 programming languages are available: v Ladder language (LD) v Structured Text language (ST) v Grafcet language (SFC) v Instruction List language (IL) v Function blocks (DFB) v Continuous Flow Chart (CFC) Ladder language (LD) A Ladder language program consists of a set of rungs executed sequentially. A rung consists of several lines. A line consists of several contacts and a coil. The language objects can be entered and displayed as symbols or tags as required. The Ladder language editor enables the immediate call of entry help functions such as access to function libraries and access to the variables editor. 4 Example of Structured Text language programming Structured Text language (ST) Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language which is particularly well-suited to programming complex arithmetical functions, manipulating tables, message handling etc. Structured Text language enables direct transcription of an analysis based on a flow chart, and is organised in statements. Grafcet language (SFC) Grafcet language is used to describe the sequential part of control systems in a simple, graphic way. It corresponds to the SFC "Sequential Function Chart" language described in standard IEC Programs written in Grafcet (SFC) language consist of: b macro-steps which are the single representation of a set of steps and transitions b steps with which the actions to be performed are associated b transitions with which the conditions are associated b directed links connecting the steps and transitions Instruction List language (IL) Instruction List language is a language which represents, in text form, the equivalent of a Ladder diagram. It can be used to write Boolean equations and use all the functions available in the language. Each instruction consists of an instruction code and a bit or word type operand. As in Ladder language, instructions are organised in sequences of instructions (equivalent to a rung). Example of Grafcet language programming Function blocks (DFB) Function block programming is a graphic language. It consists of function blocks connected by a rung. The program is executed sequentially. Each block can be a logical or an arithmetical expression, a call to another function block, a jump or a go-back instruction. Continuous Flow Chart (CFC) "Continuous Flow Chart" programming is a graphic language. The rung connecting the various function blocks on the page is not necessarily sequential. The output of a function block may be looped back on its input or on the input of a block already inserted in the rung. Example of Instruction List programming /38

324 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 38, 58, 58F Option: "Controller Inside" - PS3 software workshop Functions User function blocks The PS 3 software workshop has pre-programmed function blocks and offers customers the option of creating their own function blocks. Once created in the library, these function blocks can be used by the program. User function blocks can be used to structure an application. They can be used once a program sequence has been repeated several times in the application. b Standard library In addition to the basic functions (comparator, OR, AND function, etc), function blocks are used to simplify writing the program. They are used to make exchanges between the drive and the programmable card as transparent as possible. Online help can be accessed for any library function. Example of a function block used to send the speed reference to the drive. SETDRIVE_VEL_LFR Example of function block programming iconsigne SetDrive_Vel_LFR b Library created by the user Theuserhastheoptionofcreatinghisownfunctionblocksinordertostructurean application. It is possible to create an instance of the function block which can be used in different subroutines. Debugging and running the application Debugging is performed by means of the debug functions in the full program: b use of breakpoints b step-by-step program execution b execution of the cycle only b direct access to the subroutines to be executed (call stack). Debugging is simplified: - by writing the variable values in the application program, even during operation - by designing display screens consisting of a set of data. The list of data (explanatory texts, realtime values, block diagrams, bitmaps) for debugging and monitoring the application is created using the tools described below. Variables editor All defined variables are automatically available to perform supervision. It is possible to track the change in a variable after a particular event. Animation table The animation table is used for modification and realtime monitoring of variables according to the state of the process. Runtime screen A runtime screen is incorporated in the software workshop. It is used to debug the program and to improve diagnostics of faults or malfunctions. Simulation A "simulation" operating mode is available in the software workshop. It is used to simulate the application program without being connected to the card. Example of runtime screen /39

325 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 5 /4

326 Presentation (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Applications A compact and robust speed drive for all types of high-power 3-phase asynchronous motors, the Altivar 68 incorporates the latest technological developments and its innovative functions meet the requirements of the most common applications, notably: - ventilation, air-conditioning, - pumping, - conveying, - grinding, - handling and lifting. The Altivar 68 has several application-specific preset configurations with few basic parameters, which can be modified using the programming terminal to create additional functions. It covers a range from 75 to 5 kw for high torque applications and from 9 to 63 kw for standard torque applications for a single voltage range from 4 to 5 V. In spite of its high performance, it is easy to adjust. The introduction of elements on the motor rating plate and autotuning on stopping make it possible to obtain high torque together with remarkable drive quality, even at very low rotation speeds (<.5 Hz). For applications which require exceptional speed precision even at very low speed, the speed drive can be supplied with an optional encoder feedback card. Functions The main functions are: - dual configuration ( motors), - integrated PID drive (flow rate, pressure, speed correction), - 7 possible preset speeds, - JOG operation, - brake release sequences for translational movement and hoisting, - user-definable analogue and logic inputs, - +/- speed, - skip frequencies, - comparator functions, - logic functions, - starting and speed regulation via flux vector control, - 4 energy saving levels for variable torque applications, - protection of motor and speed drive, - automatic catching of spinning load with speed search (catch on the fly), - high overtorque on start-up, - separate 4 Vc supply for control circuit. Programming terminal The Altivar 68 is supplied with a programming graphic terminal which is used to: - drive the speed drive in local mode, - configure the various parameters, - provide a remote display and indication of the speed drive status. Options Possible options: p additional I/O card 3, available, if there is no communication card, p PC-based setup software 4, p Profibus 5 and FipIo or Modbus Plus 6 communication cards via the optional module 7, p braking unit and resistors, p line chokes for protection against supply overvoltage and reduction of harmonic distortion, p radio interference input filters to comply with electromagnetic compatibility, p additional motor chokes to limit voltage surges on the motor terminals and when motor cables are very long, p remote mounting kit for programming terminal 8 which enables installation of the terminal on the door of the enclosure or operator panel, p DC bus connection in the form of a mechanical kit for connecting the braking module, several speed drives connected in parallel, or the optional external load circuit to the DC bus, p external load circuit to connect several speed drives in parallel, p earth fault detection kit in IT connection to protect the speed drive in the event of a short-circuit between phase and earth, p air ducting kit and fan for mounting in an enclosure. Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages/46 to /6 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /4

327 Characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Environment characteristics Conforming to standards Product certifications e marking Degree of protection Altivar 68 electronic variable speed drives have been designed to conform with national and international standards and to meet recommendations relating to industrial electrical control equipment (IEC, EN, NFC, VDE), notably: - low voltage: EN 578, - electrical isolation: conforming to EN 578, PELV, - EMC immunity: conforming to IEC 68-3, (IEC -4-, IEC -4-3, IEC -4-4), - EMC emission: conforming to IEC 68-3, - EMC radiated and conducted radio-electric frequency emission: optional suppression filters for industrial environments. UL OPEN DEVICE To ensure UL conditions, the short-circuit current of the speed drives should not exceed the values listed below: - ATV-68pN4 to p9n4 speed drives: A, - ATV-68p3N4 to p33n4 speed drives: 8 A, - ATV-68p43N4 to p63n4 speed drives: 3 A. These speed drives have been designed to comply with the essential recommendations of the following European directives: - Low Voltage Directive 73/3 EC, - EMC Directive 89/336 EC for industrial environments. To indicate this, Altivar 68 products are marked with the European community e marking. IP (with front panel protection) Requires the addition of a protective device to prevent direct contact by persons Maximum ambient pollution Level conforming to IEC 664- and EN Maximum relative humidity 95 % without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC and Environmental class 3K3, according to IEC Ambient air temperature around the device Storage C Operation C Without derating: (with a switching + 4: ATV-68pN4, p9n4, p33n4 and p63n4 speed drives frequency of.5 khz, + 45: ATV-68p3N4, p5n4, p3n4, p8n4, p43n4, and p53n4 speed drives for a higher frequency, With current derating of % per C: see below) :ATV-68pN4, p9n4, p33n4 and p63n4 speed drives :ATV-68p3N4, p5n4, p3n4, p8n4, p43n4, and p53n4 speed drives Switching frequency khz.5-5- To operate at a fixed frequency of 5 or khz, select the motor rating according to the derating values given in the table below Automatic adaptation of the switching frequency if the motor overheats Max. ambient Switching frequency Speed drive temperature.5 khz 5kHz khz Inv = max. nominal current ATV-68pN4 4 C Inv.8 Inv.45 Inv of the speed drive ATV-68p3N4 45 C Inv.95 Inv.78 Inv ATV-68p5N4 45 C Inv.85 Inv.58 Inv ATV-68p9N4 4 C Inv.8 Inv.5 Inv ATV-68p3N4 45 C Inv Inv.8 Inv ATV-68p8N4 45 C Inv.86 Inv.64 Inv ATV-68p33N4 4 C Inv.8 Inv.6 Inv ATV-68p43N4 45 C Inv Inv.8 Inv ATV-68p53N4 45 C Inv.86 Inv.64 Inv ATV-68p63N4 4 C Inv.8 Inv.6 Inv Maximum operating altitude m without derating (above this, derate the current by % per additional m up to m) Operating position Vertical References: pages /46 to /6 Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /4

328 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Drive characteristics Output frequency range Hz 3 Frequency stability: ±. % at 5 Hz Resolution:. Hz Speed range Speed precision Transient overtorque on start-up (in high torque configuration) Without encoder feedback card: - 3 % of nominal slip, speed > % of nominal motor speed, - 5 % of nominal slip, speed < 5 % of nominal motor speed. With encoder feedback in control mode: ±. % of high speed 8 % of nominal motor torque (typical value ± %) in high torque configuration Maximum transient current 4, 44 and 5 V: 5 % of nominal current in high torque operation for 6 s then % in continuous operation % of nominal current in standard torque operation (variable torque) for 6 s then % in continuous operation 46 V: 5 % of nominal current for 6 s, then % in continuous operation Current limitation depends on the heatsink temperature. If a speed drive is used outside its thermal capacity, the speed drive automatically lowers the switching frequency and if necessary the transient limitation current. Braking torque Voltage/frequency ratio Electrical characteristics Up to 3 % of nominal motor torque without braking unit (typical value) Up to 5 % with one or more additional braking units ATV-68CppN4: flux vector control without sensor; constant torque or variable torque with configurable energy saving ATV-68FCppN4: flux vector control with sensor for more accurate speed control 3-phase power supply 4 V ± 5 %, 5/6 Hz ± 5 % Voltage - frequency 44 V ± %, 6 Hz ± 5 % 46 V - % to 48 V + %, 6 Hz ± 5 % 5 V - 5 % + %, 5 Hz ± 5 % Maximum output voltage Maximum voltage equal to line supply voltage Speed drive noise level dba ATV-68pN4 to p9n4: 65 ATV-68p3N4 to p33n4: 7 ATV-68p43N4 to p63n4: 74 Efficiency Available internal supplies 97.5 % (including line choke losses), at 5 Hz at nominal load. + V output + % - %, ma maximum, with short-circuit protection + 4 V output + 5 % -5 % programmable as power supply voltage for logic inputs, 5 ma maximum or as logic output, with short-circuit protection. Analogue inputs AI AIV analogue voltage input V Impedance kω Precision ±.6 % of full scale ( V) Linearity error < -.5 % with a kω reference potentiometer -bit resolution (a mv) Limit of operation is programmable Acquisition time 5 ms AIC Electrical zero volts for control analogue current input: (4) ma Maximum load: 5 Ω Precision ±.9 % of full scale ma -bit resolution (a µa) Stability ±. % for a variation of C Zero current monitoring Limit of operation is programmable Acquisition time 5 ms The electronic zero can be isolated from earth but its potential with respect to earth must not exceed 35 V Analogue output AO analogue current output (4) ma with programmable operations Maximum external load 6 Ω -bit resolution Precision: - frequency, current, voltage: ±.5 %, - torque, apparent or actual power: ± 5 %. Acquisition time 5 ms Presentation: pages /4 and /4 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /43

329 Characteristics (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Electrical characteristics (continued) PTC input DI logic inputs For a maximum of 6 PTC thermistors in series (wiring must be shielded and separated from the motor cabling) Nominal value <.5 kω De-energisation resistance: 3 kω, reinitialisation value:.8 kω Short-circuit protection < 5 Ω Measured current approximately ma 4 bipolar inputs: positive or negative logic Programmable operations Minimum duration for acceptance: ms Consumption: approx. 8 ma at 4 V State above 5 V, state below 4 V Common Common for all logic inputs is situated on the base card. The level of voltage can float up to 35 V with respect to V and earth contact. Auxiliary power supply Used to supply the control circuit and option cards via an external + 4 V if the power supply is cut. Power supply 4 Vc. Consumption:approx..5A Separated from the internal power supply by a diode 5 Output relay Signalling Programmable relay Switching voltage: a 5 V, or c 3 V Switching power: 5 VA max., 5 W Max. DC current: 3 A Min. switched current (new relay): c 4 V, 3 ma In PELV conditions, the external power supply must also be PELV (4 V) Electrical isolation between the line supply and the relay power supply Via 3 indicator lamps on the display module: -driveready, -on, - faulty. Characteristics of the coder feedback card Power supply Voltage V +±7% Max. current ma Maximum operating frequency khz 3 Coder output configuration RS 4 supplied at 5 V, min. period 3 µs for electric 36 and a cyclic ratio of electric 8 ± % Input signals A, A, B, B (I and I) Recommended type of coder The selected incremental coder, for example XCC-4, XCC-5, XCC-9 () with type K output stage, must have an input voltage range of 8 to 3 V. Recommended number of points/ revolution on the coder according to the type of motor -pole motor: 3 to 48 points per revolution 4-pole motor: 6 to 496 points per revolution 6-pole motor: 9 to 496 points per revolution To obtain an accurate range, the encoder should have more than points/revolution Max. distance between coder and m at5khz drive according to the frequency at khz 5 at 3 khz Type of coder-drive cable AWG 4 (. mm), shielded twisted pair () Please consult your Regional sales office Presentation: pages /4 and /4 References: pages /46 to/6 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /44

330 Characteristics (continued), operation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque, either on a naturally-cooled or a force-cooled motor. The only difference is the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half nominal speed. High torque applications T/Tn,8 4,5 3,5,75 5,5,5 5/3 5/6 75/9 / f (Hz) Naturally-cooled motor: continuous useful torque Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque () 3 Transient overtorque () 4 Possible overtorque at low speed () 5 Overspeed torque at constant power () () Torque available at zero speed with encoder feedback card. () Warning: check with the manufacturer regarding the mechanical overspeed possibilities of the selected motor. Standard torque applications T/Tn,55,5,,,75,5,5 3 6 Naturally-cooled motor: continuous useful torque (adjustable internal protection) Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque 3 Overtorque available for max. 6 seconds 6 Typical continuous useful torque in variable torque 5/3 5/6 75/9 / f (Hz) Operation: special uses Motor power rating different from that of speed drive The speed drive can supply any motor which has a power rating between and % of that for which it is designed. Ensure that the current drawn does not exceed the continuous output current of the drive. Motors connected in parallel The speed drive rating must be greater than the sum of the motor currents to be connected to the speed drive. In this case, external thermal protection must be provided for each motor by probes (up to 6 motors) or a thermal overload relay. If the total length of the motor cables is greater than 5 m (shielded cables) or 8 m (unshielded cables), the fitting of a choke between the speed drives and the motors is recommended. Autotuning is necessary for applications which require a high start-up torque (conveyors, lifting). In this case, the motors should be mechanically coupled, should have the same power rating and the same cable length. Autotuning is not necessary for applications which do not require a high start-up torque (pumps, fans). In this case, the motor power ratings and the cable lengths may be different. Each motor can be isolated by a contactor during operation. On the other hand, the motor should be reconnected to the speed drive in accordance with the precautions described below: Coupling a contactor downstream of the speed drive. The nominal current set for the speed drive should be equal to the sum of the motor currents. Coupling a motor downstream of the speed drive Coupling on the fly is possible if the current peak of the motor to be connected is less than the maximum transient current of the speed drive. In all cases it is preferable to lock the speed drive before closing the contactor and unlock it after closing the main poles of the contactors. Connection to an IT network This type of connection is possible, but radio interference filters cannot be mounted. In addition, if the stray capacitance (or the filter capacitors) between the network and earth are excessive, there is a risk of premature wear on the speed drive in the event of a prolonged earth fault. For this type of network, it is advisable to use earth fault detection via toroid sensor, kit VW3-A689, see page /6,which will protect the speed drive in the event of an earth fault downstream of the speed drive. Mounting on DC bus The Altivar 68 can be mounted on a DC bus or with a common bus. These special applications require the use of a load circuit in parallel, VW3-A688, see page /6. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /45

331 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Standard High torque applications (5 % Tn) Motor Supply Altivar 68 Power Line Maximum Max. Power Reference Weight rating current drive transient dissipated on () nominal current at nominal motor current (3) load plate (4) () 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V kw HP A A A A A A A A A W kg 3-phase power supply 4 V - 5 % 5 V + % 5/6 Hz ATV-68CN ATV-68CN ATV-68C3N ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68C33N ATV-68C5N ATV-68C9N ATV-68C3N ATV-68C8N ATV-68C33N ATV-68C43N ATV-68C53N ATV-68C63N4 5. Standard torque applications ( % Tn) Motor Supply Altivar 68 Power Line Maximum Max. Power Reference Weight rating current drive transient dissipated on () nominal current at nominal motor current (5) load plate (4) () 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V kw HP A A A A A A A A A W kg 3-phase power supply 4 V - 5 % 5 V + % 5/6 Hz 9 (6) (6) (6) ATV-68CN4 6. (6) (6) (6) ATV-68C3N (6) 34 (6) (6) 3 35 ATV-68C5N (6) 8 69 (6) (6) ATV-68C9N4 95. (6) (6) (6) ATV-68C3N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68C8N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68C33N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68C43N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68C53N (6) 5 94 (6) (6) ATV-68C63N4 5. () Power values are given for a switching frequency of.5 khz in steady state. For switching frequencies of 5 or khz the drive must be derated, see page /4. () Typical value with additional choke for a 4-pole motor. The presumed short-circuit current for a 3-phase power supply of 4 to 5 V is, A. (3) For 6 seconds every minutes for a voltage of 4 V (corresponding to.5 times the maximum drive nominal current). (4) Power dissipated at maximum nominal current and switching frequency of.5 khz. (5) For 6 seconds every minutes for a voltage of 4 V (corresponding to. times the maximum drive nominal current). (6) At 46 V, only high torque is available. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /73 /46

332 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68F Flux Vector Control with sensor With integrated encoder feedback card High torque applications (5 % Tn) Motor Supply Altivar 68 Power Line Maximum Max. Power Reference Weight rating current drive transient dissipated on () nominal current at nominal motor current (3) load plate (4) () 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V kw HP A A A A A A A A A W kg 3-phase power supply 4 V - 5 % 5 V + % 5/6 Hz ATV-68FCN ATV-68FCN ATV-68FC3N4 95. ATV-68FC3N4 ATV-68FC33N ATV-68FC5N ATV-68FC9N ATV-68FC3N ATV-68FC8N ATV-68FC33N ATV-68FC43N ATV-68FC53N ATV-68FC63N4 5. Standard torque applications ( % Tn) Motor Supply Altivar 68 Power Line Maximum Max. Power Reference Weight rating current drive transient dissipated on () nominal current at nominal motor current (5) load plate (4) () 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V 4 V 44 V 46 V 5 V kw HP A A A A A A A A A W kg 3-phase power supply 4 V - 5 % 5 V + % 5/6 Hz 9 (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FCN4 6. (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FC3N (6) 34 (6) (6) 3 35 ATV-68FC5N (6) 8 69 (6) (6) ATV-68FC9N4 95. (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FC3N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FC8N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FC33N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FC43N (6) (6) (6) ATV-68FC53N (6) 5 94 (6) (6) ATV-68FC63N4 5. () Power values are given for a switching frequency of.5 khz in steady state. For switching frequencies of 5 or khz the drive must be derated, see page /4. () Typical value with additional choke for a 4-pole motor. The presumed short-circuit current for a 3-phase power supply of 4 to 5 V is, A. (3) For 6 seconds every minutes for a voltage of 4 V (corresponding to.5 times the maximum drive nominal current). (4) Power dissipated at maximum nominal current and switching frequency of.5 khz. (5) For 6 seconds every minutes for a voltage of 4 V (corresponding to. times the maximum drive nominal current). (6) At 46 V, only high torque is available. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 Dimensions, installation: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /73 /47

333 Presentation Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: reduction of harmonic currents The main solutions for reducing harmonic currents are as follows: p line chokes, p passive filters (), p active compensators, also called SineWave active filters. Please consult the Merlin Gerin catalogue (), p hybrid filters (), p twelve pulse connection (). All five solutions can be used on the same installation. It is always easier and less expensive to handle the harmonics at installation level as a whole rather than at the level of each individual unit, particularly when using passive filters and active compensators. Line chokes This is an inexpensive solution, which can be applied to each unit individually, but which is of limited effectiveness in reducing harmonics because too high an inductance will cause an unacceptable voltage drop. Example of currents and harmonic levels at 4 V (with line chokes) High torque applications, 4 V/5 Hz (Isc =, A, L supply = 33.4 µh) ATV-68 drives pn4 p3n4 p5n4 p9n4 p3n4 p8n4 p33n4 p43n4 p53n4 p63n4 Power kw Line current A H A H5 % H7 % H % H3 % Standard torque applications, 4 V/5 Hz (Isc =, A, L supply = 33.4 µh) ATV-68 drives pn4 p3n4 p5n4 p9n4 p3n4 p8n4 p33n4 p43n4 p53n4 p63n4 Power kw Line current A H A H5 % H7 % H % H3 % Harmonic levels at 4 V for harmonic orders H7 to H49 All drive ratings, for high and constant torque applications, 4 V/5 Hz (Isc =, A, L supply = 33.4 µh). Order H7 H9 H3 H5 H9 H3 H35 H37 H4 H43 H47 H49 Value (%) () For combinations with drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office. /48

334 Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: line chokes Presentation Line chokes are essential, except for the ATV-68pN4 to p33n4 ratings if the line or transformer impedance is greater than: -45µH for pn4 rating (Isc = 3), - µh for p3n4, p5n4 and p9n4 ratings (Isc = 6), -6µH for p3n4, p8n4 and p33n4 ratings (Isc =,). These chokes can be used to provide improved protection against overvoltages on the line supply and to reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive. The recommended chokes are used to limit the line current. The use of line chokes is also required for all ratings in the following cases: p close connection of several drives in parallel, p line supply with significant interference from other equipment (interference, overvoltages), p line supply with voltage imbalance between phases >.8 % of nominal voltage, p installation of a large number of frequency converters on the same line, p reductionofoverloadincosϕ correction capacitors, if the installation has a power factor correction unit. Characteristics Conforming to standards IEC 676 (with HD 398) Degree of protection IP Maximum ambient pollution Level 3 Ambient air temperature Storage C around the device Operation C + 45 Up to + 55 with current derating of % per C above 45 C. Isolation class F Clearancedistanceinair Conforming to IEC 6664 mm 5.5 Leakage distance in air Conforming to IEC 6664 mm.5 References Chokes for high torque or standard torque applications () Number For Choke characteristics Reference Weight of chokes drives Value Nominal Saturation Loss required per of current current drive choke µh A A W kg Power supply voltage 4 V - 5 % 5 V + 5 % ATV-68pN VW3-A ATV-68p3N VW3-A ATV-68p5N VW3-A ATV-68p9N VW3-A VW3-A685p ATV-68p3N VW3-A ATV-68p8N VW3-A ATV-68p33N VW3-A ATV-68p43N VW3-A ATV-68p53N VW3-A ATV-68p63N VW3-A () Chokes are supplied with additional mounting brackets for mounting on a vertical support. Dimensions: page /65 /49

335 Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: additional radio interference input filters Presentation Function Additional input filters should be installed if the surrounding environment is subject to electromagnetic interference and radio-electric frequencies above 5 khz. These filters are designed to reduce emissions conducted on the line supply. The motor cables should be shielded and not exceed the maximum length given in the table below. For the filter to operate efficiently, the installation conditions must be carefully respected. Use according to the type of network Characteristics Use of these filters is only possible on TN (connected to neutral) and TT (neutral to earth) type networks. These filters are not permitted on IT (impeding or isolated neutral) networks. Degree of protection IP Ambient air temperature Operation C around the device Up to + 55 with current derating of % per C above 45 C. Storage C Maximum operating altitude Without derating m (above this, derate the current by % per additional m) 5 References VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 No. of For drive Max. length of Nominal Max. filter Loss Reference Weight filters motor cable filter leakage required () current current per With Without On Contindrive motor motor power- uous choke choke up m m A ma ma W kg Power supply voltage 4 V (± 5 %) () ATV-68pN VW3-A684 () 5. ATV-68p3N VW3-A684 () 5.5 ATV-68p5N VW3-A684 () 5.5 ATV-68p9N VW3-A684 () 5.5 ATV-68p3N VW3-A6843 () 6. ATV-68p8N VW3-A6843 () 6. ATV-68p33N VW3-A6843 () 6. ATV-68p43N4 4 VW3-A6844 (3). ATV-68p53N4 4 VW3-A6844 (3). ATV-68p63N4 4 VW3-A6844 (3). Power supply voltage 44 5 V (± 5 %) () ATV-68pN4 5 8 (4) 6 38 VW3-A ATV-68p3N4 5 3 (4) 6 4 VW3-A ATV-68p5N4 5 3 (4) 6 4 VW3-A ATV-68p9N4 5 3 (4) 6 4 VW3-A ATV-68p3N4 5 6 (4) 6 65 VW3-A ATV-68p8N4 5 6 (4) 6 65 VW3-A ATV-68p33N4 5 6 (4) 6 65 VW3-A ATV-68p43N4 5 6 (4) 6 65 VW3-A ATV-68p53N4 5 6 (4) 6 65 VW3-A ATV-68p63N4 5 6 (4) 6 65 VW3-A () If motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account. The motor cable lengths are given for a modulation frequency of.5 khz. They should be multiplied by.6 for a frequency of 5 khz and by.3 for khz. If the motor cable is longer, the addition of a motor choke enables the length to be multiplied by.5, and the use of a single cable with a larger cross-section instead of several cables in parallel enables it to be multiplied by.5 or if it is not shielded. In this case the radiated emissions are not limited. () Filters VW3-A684 to 43 have parts: the line choke should be mounted between them. (3) Filter VW3-A6844 has 3 parts: parts similar to those of VW3-A684 to 43, the third comprising 6 busbars. The linechokeshouldbemountedbetweenthefirstandthethird. (4) Information not available. Dimensions: page /65 /5

336 Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: additional motor chokes Presentation The use of an output choke between the drive and the motor is recommended for motor cables which are longer than 5 metres (shielded cables) or 8 metres (non-shielded cables). This makes it possible to: p Limit dv within the following limits: dt -5V/µs at 4 V -75V/µs at 5 V p Limit overvoltages on the motor terminals to: - V at 4 V - 3 V at 5 V p Filter interference caused by opening a contactor placed between the filter and the motor, p Reduce the motor earth leakage current. U X Altivar 68 V W Y Z M 3 3 single-phase chokes Characteristics Ambient air temperature Storage C around the device Operation C + 45 Degree of protection IP References For drives Maximum Nominal Max. Reference Weight length of current loss motor cable () non-shielded shielded m m A W kg Power supply voltage 4 V ± 5 % VW3-A68553 ATV-68pN VW3-A ATV-68p3N VW3-A ATV-68p5N VW3-A ATV-68p9N VW3-A ATV-68p3N VW3-A ATV-68p8N VW3-A ATV-68p33N VW3-A ATV-68p43N VW3-A ATV-68p53N VW3-A ATV-68p63N VW3-A Power supply voltage 44 V - % 5 V + 5 % Dimensions: page /66 ATV-68pN VW3-A ATV-68p3N VW3-A ATV-68p5N VW3-A ATV-68p9N VW3-A ATV-68p3N VW3-A ATV-68p8N VW3-A ATV-68p33N VW3-A ATV-68p43N VW3-A ATV-68p53N VW3-A ATV-68p63N VW3-A () For longer cables, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Choke performance is ensured by not exceeding the cable lengths between the motor and the drive given in the table above. For an application with several motors connected in parallel, the cable length must include all cabling. If a cable longer than that recommended is used, there is risk of the motor chokes overheating. /5

337 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: braking units and resistors Presentation The braking unit and resistor are external modules. They enable the Altivar 68 to operate while braking to a standstill or during generator operation, by dissipating the braking energy in the resistor. Resistors are designed to be mounted on the outside of the enclosure, but should not inhibit natural cooling. Air inlets and outlets must not be obstructed in any way. The air must be free of dust, corrosive gas and condensation. Schematic diagram Altivar 68 Max. length =.9 m Braking unit Max. length = 5 m M Braking resistor 5 Characteristics of braking units Type of braking unit VW3 A VW3 A x VW3 A Ambient air temperature Operation C + 45 Storage C Degree of protection of IP enclosure Degree of pollution according to standard EN 578 Relative humidity without % Class 3K3 without condensation condensation Maximum operating altitude m Vibration resistance. gn Nominal supply voltage and V 4-5 % 5 V + % drive supply voltage (rms value) Pull-in threshold V c 66 8 ± % (adjustable value) Maximum DC bus voltage V c 9 Maximum braking power on 4 V z supply (79 V default setting) % conduction time at constant power at 69 V c 79 V c () kw V c () kw % at 8 kw 6 % at 3 kw 6 % at 6 kw 5 % at 4 kw 5 % at 5 kw 5 % at 5 kw 5 % at 8 kw 5 % at 5 kw 5 % at 3 kw Cycle time s Max. continuous power kw Braking power on a vertical movement (values given for a s cycle time) 8 kw s 8 kw 6 s kw s 5 kw s 3 kw 6 s kw s 3 kw s 6 kw 6 s kw s Thermal protection Integrated, via thermal probe Forced ventilation m 3 /h Flow 45 Flow 9 Flow x 9 Mounting Vertical Characteristics of braking resistors Type of braking resistor VW3 A6876 to VW3 A6878 Ambient air temperature Operation C + 5 Storage C Degree of protection of IP 3 enclosure Thermal protection Via thermal overload relay or via the drive () Braking unit engage threshold References: page /53 Selection: pages /54 to /57 Dimensions: page /66 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /5

338 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: braking units and resistors 5394 VW3 A UF 75 kw RF 3Ω Resistance at drive end =.5 Ω () RF 3Ω ATV 68 UF 75 kw Braking units () 4 V - 5 V nominal supply voltage Power Loss Cable (drivebraking unit) Cont. Max. at Pn Crosssection Max. length Cable (braking unit-resistors) Crosssection Max. length Reference Weight kw kw W mm m mm m kg x 5.9 x 5 5 VW3 A x 95.9 x 95 5 VW3 A Minimum resistance value according to drive Drive Braking unit Type Power High torque/ standard torque VW3 A kw unit VW3 A kw unit kw Ohm Ohm Ohm ATV68CN4 75/ ATV68C3N4 9/ ATV68C5N4 / ATV68C9N4 3/ ATV68C3N4 6/ ATV68C8N4 /5 3.3 (3)..5 ATV68C33N4 5/ (3)..5 ATV68C43N4 35/4 3.3 (3). (3).5 ATV68C53N4 4/5 3.3 (3). (3).5 ATV68C63N4 5/ (3). (3).5 Braking resistors 75 kw units () Ohmic value Power Rating of Reference Weight at C (4) (5) continuous thermal relay kw kg VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A VW3 A () For ratings ATV 68p3N4 to p63n4 braking units should be connected to the DC bus using the DC bus connection kit VW3 A688, see page /6. () For braking units in parallel, the value given corresponds to the resistance at the drive end. Example: a resistance of.5 Ω minimum corresponds to two 3 Ω resistors minimum on each braking unit (see diagram opposite). (3) Use possible, but not recommended (maximum braking unit power < maximum drive power). (4) Do not use a resistor with a value less than the minimum value given in the table. (5) Continuous power ohmic value in a C environment. Nota : to increase the braking power, it is possible to install several braking resistors in parallel on the same braking unit. In this case do not forget to take into account the minimum resistance value on each unit. Presentation, characteristics: page /5 Selection: pages /54 to /57 Dimensions: page /66 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /53

339 Selection Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: braking units and resistors Determining the braking unit and resistor Calculating the various braking powers makes it possible to determine the braking unit and the braking resistor. Presentation of the two main types of operation: A and B n Motor speed [rpm] n Motor speed during deceleration [rpm] T l Load torque [Nm] T b Braking torque [Nm] Pˆ b Peak braking power [W] Average braking power during t b [W] P b t b Braking time [s] A The braking power during deceleration is characterised by a peak power Pˆ b obtained at the start of deceleration, which decreases to in proportion with the speed. Example: stopping centrifuges, travel, change of direction, etc. n n T l t b t b T b t t B Braking power at constant speed n. Example: vertical downward movement, motor/generator test bench, gravity conveyors, etc. n +n -n T l t b t t P braking t b t P braking P b t P b 5 P b Note: both these types of operation can be combined. Type A operation Calculating the braking time from the inertia J ω π n ΣJ ( n t b = n ) ω = T T b + T r 6 b = Pˆ b = 9,55 t b T b n ,55 Pb Pˆ b = T b Motor braking torque [Nm] J Total inertia applied to the motor [kgm ] n Motor speed ahead of gearbox [rpm] n Motor speed after gearbox [rpm] t b Braking time [s] Pˆ b Peak braking power [W] P b Average braking power during time t b [W] T r Braking torque [mn] Motor n Gearbox n Machine J=J motor +J applied i = n n J applied J machine i Presentation, characteristics: page /5 References: page /53 Dimensions: page /66 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /54

340 Selection (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: braking units and resistors Type B operation Braking power of a load moving horizontally with constant deceleration (eg.: carriage) W Kinetic energy [Joule] w Weight [kg] v Speed [m/s] W w v W = Pf = ---- t b Pˆ b = Pb t b Braking time [s] Pˆ b Peak braking power [W] P b Average braking power during time t b [W] Braking power for an active load (eg.: test bench) T b Braking torque [Nm] n Motor speed [rpm] T b n Pb = , 55 g Acceleration 9.8 m/s a Deceleration [m/s ] 3 Braking power for a downward vertical movement v Linear downward speed [m/s] J Moment of inertia [kgms ] J ω ω Angular speed [rad/s] Pb = w g v Pˆ π n b = w ( g + a) v ω = t b 6 t b Downward stopping time [s] All the braking power calculations are only true if it is assumed that there are no losses (η = ) and that there is no resistive torque. To be even more precise, the following must be considered: b the losses and the resistive torque of the system, which reduce the necessary braking power, b the driving torque, for example the wind, which increases the braking power. The required braking power is calculated as follows: Pˆ br Maximum actual braking power [W] P br Continuous actual braking power [W] η total Total efficiency Pˆ br = ( Pˆ b P load ) η total PbR = ( P b P load ) η total P load Braking power connected with the resistive or [W] driving torque (not taken into account in the calculation). P load can be positive or negative. η drive Drive efficiency =.98 η total = η mec η mot,98 η mec Mechanical efficiency η mot Motor efficiency For braking, the value of the braking resistor is selected to match the required power and the braking cycle. U dc Braking unit engage threshold [V] In general: t c Cycle time [s] Pb Upward braking power, therefore zero [W] Continuous power is obtained by taking the operating cycle into account. t Upward movement time [s] ^ Pb Average braking power during downward [W] P f movement _ t Downward movement time [] P f _ Pˆ b Peak braking power [W] P f P b Average power during braking to a standstill [W] _ t Standstill braking time [s] P f P continuous Pb t + Pb t + Pb t = t c [W] U Pˆ dc U dc br = R = R Pˆ br t T t t The braking unit is selected taking the following into account: b the continuous power Pb b the average braking power during downward movement Pb b the peak powerpˆ b Selectthebrakingunitaccordingtothecharacteristicsonpage/5. The braking resistor is selected taking account of the same elements listed above but with the addition of a check to ensure that the resistance value will allow the peak power to be exceeded R U dc = Pˆ b Note: the resistance value must always be greater than or equal to the values given in the table on page /53. Presentation, characteristics: page /5 References: page /53 Dimensions: page /66 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /55

341 Selection (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Characteristics of braking resistors VW3 A6876 (P continuous = 5 kw) VW3 A6876 (P continuous = 8 kw) 5 Coef. Pmax Pmoy 5 Coef. Pmax Pmoy,5,5 7,5 5, t (s) 7,5 5, t (s) VW3 A6878 (P continuous = kw) VW3 A6879 (P continuous = 8 kw) () 5 Coef. Pmax Pmoy 5 Coef. Pmax Pmoy,5,5 7,5 7, , t (s) VW3 A687 (P continuous = 6 kw),5 () 5 () t (s) VW3 A687 (P continuous = 8.4 kw) Coef. Pmax Pmoy Coef. Pmax Pmoy VW3 A687 (P continuous = 3 kw) t (s) t (s) VW3 A6873 (P continuous = 47 kw) Coef. Pmax Pmoy 8 Coef. Pmax Pmoy, , t (s) t (s) P max/p av (6 s cycle) P max/p av ( s cycle) P max/p av ( s cycle) () Example: for a 6 s cycle, resistor VW3 A kw will take an overload of.5 x 8 for 5 s i.e. 45 kw for 5 s. Presentation, characteristics: page /5 References: page /53 Dimensions: page /66 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /56

342 Selection (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Characteristics of braking resistors VW3 A6874 (P continuous = 59 kw) VW3 A6875 (P continuous = 5 kw) 8 Coef. Pmax Pmoy 5 Coef. Pmax Pmoy t (s) VW3 A6876 (P continuous = 7 kw),5 7,5 5, t (s) VW3 A6877 (P continuous = 88 kw) Coef. Pmax Pmoy Coef. Pmax Pmoy 7,5 7,5 5 5,5, t (s) VW3 A6878 (P continuous = kw) t (s) Coef. Pmax Pmoy 7,5 5, t (s) P max/p av (6 s cycle) P max/p av ( s cycle) P max/p av ( s cycle) Presentation, characteristics: page /5 References: page /53 Dimensions: page /66 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /57

343 Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: I/O extension card Presentation The card comprises: - analogue input (4) ma, - analogue output (4) ma, - 4 logic inputs, - output relay with C/O contact, - output relay with N/O contact. All these I/O have identical characteristics to those of the basic drive. It is possible to mount I/O cards or I/O extension card and Profibus communication card on each drive. They are connected to the control card connector. Characteristics Analog input AI (differential amplifier) analogue current input: (4) ma Load: 5 Ω Precision ±. % of full scale ( ma) -bit resolution Stability ±. % for a C variation Zero current monitoring (detection at 3 ma) Programmable limit and operation Acquisition time 5 ms 5 Analogue output AO analogue current output: (4) ma with programmable limit and operation Maximum external load: 6 Ω -bit resolution Precision: - frequency, current, voltage: ±.5 % - torque, apparent or actual power: ± 5 % Acquisition time 5 ms Logic inputs LI 4 -pole inputs DI5 to DI8: positive or negative logic Programmable operation () Minimum recognition time: ms Consumption: approx. 8 ma at 4 V Relay outputs RL relay outputs RL and RL3 Programmable relay Switching voltage: a 5 V or c 3 V Switching power: 5 VA max., 5 W Max. DC current: 3 A Min. switched current (new relay): c 4 V, 3 ma In PELV conditions, the external power supply must also be PELV (4 V) Electrical isolation between the line supply and the relay power supply RL: changeover contact: N/C + N/O RL3: N/O contact References Description For drives Reference Weight kg I/O extension card ATV-68 VW3-A68. all ratings VW3-A68 () On the st I/O extension card, input DI5 is assigned to locking the drive. /58

344 Presentation, characteristics, references Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: communication cards Presentation The Altivar 68 can be adapted for communication by adding a communication card or module. The models are available for the following buses: Fipio, Modbus Plus, Modbus RTU and Profibus DP. The Fipio and Modbus Plus cards require the use of a connection kit. The Modbus RTU module requires connection cables. The Profibus DP card is connected directly to the drive. Functions common to the Fipio, Modbus Plus, Modbus RTU and Profibus DP cards and module p Control (accessible in read and write): run/stop, braking, frequency reference, fault reset, etc. p Signalling (only accessible in read): drive status register, motor speed, motor current, logic I/O status register, fault register, etc. p Authorisation of local control (via terminals) Characteristics Functions specific to the Profibus DP card p Configuration (accessible in read and write): line supply frequency, motor voltage, ramp profile, I/O assignment, etc. p Adjustment (accessible in read and write): DC injection time and amplitude, thermal protection, speed range, ramp time, current limitation, etc. Protocol Fipio Modbus Plus Modbus RTU Profibus DP Number of drives controlled Transmission speed 9. Kbps 9. Kbps. to 9. Mbps.5 Mbps References VW3-A683 or VW3-A683 Communication kits, module and cards For ATV-68 drives, all ratings Protocol Fipio : The kit comprises: - the FIPIO communication card, reference VW3-A583, equipped with a 9-way male SUB-D connector, which will take a TSX FP ACC removable connector with TSX FP CApp connecting cable or TSX FP CCpp tapcable() - the communication interface, reference VW3-A683, - the connecting cable, reference VW3-A6833. An external 4 V c, ma minimum, power supply must be provided Reference Weight kg VW3-A683.4 (type TBX SUP) to be ordered separately. Modbus Plus: The kit comprises: - the Modbus Plus card, reference VW3-A583, equipped with a 9-way female SUB-D connector, which will take a Modbus Plus tap cable equipped with connectors, reference 99 NAD or 99 NAD 3, to be connected to a Modbus Plus tap, reference 99 NAD 3, for connection to the Modbus Plus trunk cable, reference 49 NAA 7 pp () - the communication interface, reference VW3-A683, - the connecting cable, reference VW3-A6833. An external 4 V c, ma minimum, power supply must be provided (type TBX SUP) to be ordered separately. VW3-A683.4 Modbus RTU CommunicationmoduleequippedwithanRJ45connectoranda9-way female SUB-D connector, -wire RS 485 serial link. The module is supplied without cable or documentation, which should be ordered separately. Connecting cable from ATV 68 to the module. Connecting cable from the module to a Modbus T-junction box TSX SCA6 (). Documentation: user manual. ThemoduleconfigurationcanbemodifiedusingABCConfigurator software. An external 4 V c power supply must be provided. Profibus DP: The card is equipped with a 9-way female SUB-D connector for connection using cables equipped with connectors (please consult VW3-A VW3-A VW3-A VVDED364 VW3-A manufacturer s catalogue). () To order Fipio cables and Modbus Plus and Modbus RTU cables and connectors, please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" and "Modicon TSX Micro and PL7 software" catalogues. VW3-A6837 /59

345 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: programming terminal support, PC-based setup software, DC bus connection Programming terminal remote mounting kit The terminal is supplied with the drive. A terminal support option allows remote location of the drive terminal at a maximum distance of 3 metres. This mechanical option supports the control card, the programming terminal and any I/O cards. It is particularly suitable for mounting on the enclosure door. Description For drives Reference Weight kg Terminal support with ATV-68 VW3 A m remote location cable all ratings PC-based setup software VW3 A688 This option is available in the form of a kit for setting up an RS 3 C standard link between the Altivar and a PC operating in a Microsoft Windows environment. Minimum configuration: 486 PC with 8 Mb of RAM. Recommended configuration: Pentium with 3 Mb of RAM. Possible environment: Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT. Main functions: 5 - drive configuration, - configuration backup, - print out of complete parameter list, - ability to load a configuration from one drive to another, - oscilloscope mode for maintenance, - local control. Description For drives Reference Weight kg PC interconnection kit comprising: ATV-68 VW3 A a VW3 A6833 connection cable, all ratings length 3 m, with 9-way SUB-D socket andrj45datasocket, - 3 x 3" /.44 Mb disks, - a quick reference guide. DC bus connection This kit is used to connect the braking unit or external load circuit options to the drive s DC bus, and also to connect several drives in parallel. Description For drives () Reference Weight kg DC bus connection kit ATV-68p3N4 to p63n4 VW3 A688.5 comprising: - U-shaped copper bar, - mm thick copper bar with fixing nuts. () For the ATV-68pN4 drive, the DC bus is directly accessible on the power terminals. Dimensions: page /67 Schemes: page /74 /6

346 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Options: external load circuit, earth protection and IT connection, air ducting kit, fan External load circuit (degree of protection IP ) This circuit is used when connecting several drives in parallel on the DC bus, the total power of which must not exceed 5 kw (for high torque applications), in order to avoid a possible overload when powering up. Description For Reference Weight drives kg External load ATV-68 VW3 A circuit all ratings Earth fault detection in IT connection (isolated neutral) VW3 A688 This option protects the drive in the event of an earth fault between the drive and the motor, by measuring the differential current between the three phases of the line supply. It is connected to a - ma analogue input. VW3 A689 Description For Reference Weight drives kg Detection kit ATV-68 VW3 A689.5 for earth faults all ratings comprising: a current transformer with an integrated load block Air ducting kit (enclosure with IP 3 protection) This kit evacuates hot air from the power part to the outside when the drive is mounted in an enclosure with IP 3 protection. The temperature outside the enclosure must not exceed the maximum ambient temperature around the drive - 5 C, see drive characteristics, page /4 and installation recommendations, page /69. Description For Number of kits Reference Weight drives required per drive kg Kit comprises: ATV-68p3N4 to p9n4 VW3 A a tube, - an IP 3 protection grille. ATV-68p3N4 to p33n4 VW3 A688.5 VW3 A688 ATV-68p43N4 to p63n4 4 VW3 A688.5 External fan (enclosure with IP 3 protection) VW3 A688 The fan enables the drive to be mounted in an enclosure with IP 3 protection by increasing the evacuation or hot air to the outside. This is used to obtain a maximum temperature outside the enclosure equal to the maximum ambient temperature around the drive, see drive characteristics, page /4 and installation recommendations, page /69. Description For Number of kits Reference Weight drives required per drive kg Ventilation kit ATV-68pN4 to p33n4 VW3 A comprising: -afan, - anip3protectionunit. ATV-68p43N4 to p63n4 VW3 A Dimensions: page /67 Schemes: page /77 /6

347 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Combinations Line supply Motor ATV-68 drive for applications Options Supply Power standard high Line RFI input Motor Braking voltage indicated torque torque chokes filter chokes unit and 5/6 Hz on plate ( % Tn) (5 % Tn) 4 V 44 5 V resistor kw HP See p. /46 and /47 See p. /49 See p. /5 See p. /5 See p. /5 See p. / V 75 ATV-68pN4 VW3-A685 VW3-A684 VW3-A6845 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 3-phase 9 ATV-68pN4 VW3-A685 VW3-A684 VW3-A6845 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 9 5 ATV-68p3N4 VW3-A685 VW3-A684 VW3-A68435 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp ATV-68p3N4 VW3-A685 VW3-A684 VW3-A68435 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 5 ATV-68p5N4 VW3-A6853 VW3-A684 VW3-A68435 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 3 ATV-68p5N4 VW3-A6853 VW3-A684 VW3-A68435 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 3 ATV-68p9N4 VW3-A6854 VW3-A684 VW3-A68435 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 6 ATV-68p9N4 VW3-A6854 VW3-A684 VW3-A68435 VW3-A6855 VW3-A68ppp 6 5 ATV-68p3N4 VW3-A6855 VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 VW3-A68553 VW3-A68ppp ATV-68p3N4 VW3-A6855 VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 VW3-A68553 VW3-A68ppp 3 ATV-68p8N4 VW3-A6856 VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 VW3-A68553 VW3-A68ppp 5 5 ATV-68p8N4 VW3-A6856 VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 VW3-A68553 VW3-A68ppp 5 35 ATV-68p33N4 VW3-A6857 VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 VW3-A68553 VW3-A68ppp 35 ATV-68p33N4 VW3-A6857 VW3-A6843 VW3-A68465 VW3-A68553 VW3-A68ppp 35 5 ATV-68p43N4 VW3-A6855 ()VW3-A6844 VW3-A68465 ()VW3-A68554 VW3-A68ppp 4 ATV-68p43N4 VW3-A6855 ()VW3-A6844 VW3-A68465 ()VW3-A68554 VW3-A68ppp 4 6 ATV-68p53N4 VW3-A6856 ()VW3-A6844 VW3-A68465 ()VW3-A68554 VW3-A68ppp 5 ATV-68p53N4 VW3-A6856 ()VW3-A6844 VW3-A68465 ()VW3-A68554 VW3-A68ppp 5 8 ATV-68p63N4 VW3-A6657 ()VW3-A6844 VW3-A68465 ()VW3-A68554 VW3-A68ppp 63 ATV-68p63N4 VW3-A6657 ()VW3-A6844 VW3-A68465 ()VW3-A68554 VW3-A68ppp () Allow for chokes per speed drive. () Allow for filters per speed drive. /6

348 I/O Communi- Programming PC-based DC bus External Earth fault Air ducting External extension cation terminal remote setup connection load detection kit to exterior fan card cards mounting kit software circuit in IT connection of IP 3 IP 3 enclosure enclosure See p. /58 See p. /59 See p. /6 See p. /6 See p. /6 See p. /6 See p. /6 See p. /6 See p. /6 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A68 VW3-Ap83p VW3-A688 VW3-A6833 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 VW3-A689 VW3-A688 VW3-A688 /63

349 Dimensions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 ATV-68pN4 (Size ) ATV-68p3N4 to p9n4 (Size 3) () ,5 6 58, () () () () Air outlet Ø mm () Air outlet Ø mm ATV-68p3N4 to p33n4 (Size 4) ATV-68p43N4 to p63n4 (Size 5) () 39 () () Air outlet Ø mm () Air outlet Ø mm Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Schemes: pages /7 to /73 /64

350 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Line chokes VW3-A685 to A6857 Radio interference input filters VW3-A684 ( elements) () G c c b VW3- a b b c c G G H Ø Ø Ø A A A A A A A () 5 mm min. Radio interference input filters VW3-A684, A6843 ( elements) a 34 a G a M L L L ,5 H b 9 L L L VW3-A6844 (3 elements) ATV-68 LB LA LB LA L3B L3A 9 L L () L B L A L B 3 L A L3 B L3 A 8 75 L 9 95 L L3 L3 L L L3 L L L3 PE PE VW3- a a Ø () A x 5 bar A x 5 bar PE PE VW3-A6845 VW3-A68435 and A L M L L L ,5 5x5 L L L c Presentation: pages /48 to /5 Characteristics: pages /48 to /5 VW3- c L A A References: pages /48 to /5 /65

351 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Additional motor chokes VW3 A6855 VW3 A6855 Ø3 6 Ø9x3 4 9x > Additional motor chokes VW3 A68553 and VW3 A68554 Braking units VW3 A and VW3 A Ø b H 33 Ø7xØ5 c G a Ø a > VW3 a a b c G H Ø Ø A x A x3 9x 47 7x Braking resistors VW3 A6876 to VW3 A687 VW3 687 to VW3 A6878 a c a c b 4xØ3 a a c c b 4xØ3 a a c c VW3 a a a b c c c VW3 a a a b c c c A A A A A A A A A A A A A Presentation: pages /5 and /5 Characteristics: pages /5 and /5 References: pages /5 and /53 Schemes: pages /76 and /77 /66

352 Dimensions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Remote mounting kit for programming terminal VW3 A688 5 Cut-out for mounting support VW3 A6855 3, , Front plate Internal pivoting plate 3 Keyboard membrane 4 Terminal card 3,..., 38 External load circuit VW3 A688,5 5 Air ducting kit VW3 A = 39 = 96 Earth fault detection kit VW3 A External fan VW3 A VW3-A688 tube Drive size 4 (for size 5, 4 VW3 A688) tubes are necessary 3 Enclosure top cover 4 Additional cover grille 5 Cover grille 48 Cut-out for support VW3 A688 tube Drivesize3 3 Enclosure top cover 4 Additional cover grille 5 Cover grille = = = = Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /6 and /6 Schemes: pages /74 to /77 /67

353 Setting-up precautions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Installation recommendations for all ratings of ATV-68 Hot air outlet p Observe the minimum dimensions shown opposite when installing. p Install the Altivar in a vertical position (). p Make provision for evacuation of the hot air to the outside of the enclosure. p Make provision for an air inlet on the door of the enclosure. 5 5 () () Pay attention to the ambient temperature (see Characteristics, page /4). Avoid harmful environments such as those with high temperature and humidity levels as well as environments containing dust, dirt or corrosive gases. The location must be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight. Install the equipment against a vertical surface which is fireproof and vibration-free. () Clearances at the sides are only required for access during maintenance. If the equipment can be easily removed, these distances are not necessary. () To ensure convection cooling, the Altivar 68 drives are designed for vertical installation. Observe the minimum recommended clearances, especially if the equipment is enclosed. The ingress of objects during installation risks causing damage to the installation: ensure that no objects, wires, wire insulation, swarf or dust enter the equipment by covering it when it is not connected to the supply. Air inlet Installation recommendations for ATV-68p3N4 to p63n4 5 p The power block is accessed by tilting it forward, for ratings ATV-68p3N4 to p63n4. For maintenance provide a free space of. m in front of the Altivar. Power block Rotation axis Installing the ATV-68pN4 drive in an IP or IP 3 enclosure For a maximum ambient temperature of + 4 C outside the enclosure Air duct in order to avoid circulation of air from the power part inside the enclosure Open section to facilitate the circulation of air 3 Air inlet (without filter) 6 dm3 4 Fan ATV-68 Air flow: 45 m3/h 3 4 Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Schemes: pages /7 to /73 /68

354 Setting-up precautions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Installing ATV-68p3N4 to p63n4drivesiniporip3enclosures() For a maximum ambient temperature of C () outside the enclosure The grille in the upper part must be at least 6mm away from the roof of the enclosure and should guarantee air circulation on all sides. Mounting of separators 5 is essential if the fans of adjacent enclosures create back pressure. Circulation of air within the enclosure must not be obstructed by the presence of additional components (line chokes, motor chokes, etc., except for radio interference filters and wiring) mounted between the enclosure air inlet and the drive air inlet 4 in the lower part and between the drive air outlet and enclosure air outlet in the upper part. No heat source should be mounted under the drive! Surfaceareaofairinlet4 according to drive rating ATV-68 Surfaceareaindm (3) p3n4 to p9n4 7 p3n4 to p33n4 p43n4 to p68n4 Air circulation around the ventilation outlet should be around m/s (approx. 35 km/h) so that each air duct creates an increase in pressure. Air flow according to drive rating Top cover should be a minimum of 6 mm from the air outlets. Hot air evacuation duct (VW3-A688):, or 4 outlets in the upper part of the enclosure depending on the rating (internal diameter 95 mm with rubber seal). 3 Partition with holes for cables to pass through, do not obstruct. 4 Drive air inlet. 5 Compulsory separator. ATV-68 Flow in m3/h p3n4 to p9n4 6 p3n4 to p33n4 x6 p43n4 to p68n4 4x6 If another enclosure is mounted immediately adjacent to the drive, the enclosure partition 3 must be closed to avoid heat exchange. For a maximum ambient temperature of C outside the enclosure The additional fan avoids drive derating for an ambient air temperature outside the enclosure of C, see drive characteristics, page /4. Volume processed > 5 m 3 /h. The cooling air flowing through the enclosure fans is evacuated by the additional fan (air duct need not be used). Additional fan VW3-A688. () For IP 54 installation, please consult your Regional Sales Office. () To determine the maximum ambient temperature: see drive characteristics, page /4 and reduce by 5 C to take account of the temperature rise due to mounting in an enclosure. (3) Defined surface area without filter. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Schemes: pages /7 to /73 /69

355 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Wiring diagram for ATV-68pN4 to ATV-68p33N4 (supply voltage 4 V) Q Q T Q It is possible to replace circuitbreaker Q with an isolator or fused isolator KM Device FA IL FB + V reference voltage V Analogue inputs (4) ma Zero volts for control (4) ma analogue output Zero volts for control Thermistor input Thermistor zero Zero volts for control Logic input common Programmable logic input Programmable logic input Programmable logic input 3 Programmable logic input 4 4 V power supply/logic output External 4 V power supply Relay output (common) Relay output (N/C contact) Relay output (N/O contact) (4) ma differential analogue input (4) ma analogue output 5 + L L L3 U V W X + AIV AIC V AO V TH + TH V DIS DI DI DI3 DI4 + 4 P4 POV RL NC NO X AI + AI AO V DIS DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 RL NC NO RL3 A NO3 + + R PE R IM U V M 3 W () k (4) ma DIS/ () (4) ma (4) ma (4) ma (4) ma Zero volts for control Logic input common Logic input 5 - (4) Logic input 6 - Logic input 7 - Logic input 8 - Relay output Relay output N/C Relay output N/O Relay output 3 Relay output 3 N/O I/O extension card no. (3) Thermistors Volt-free contacts 4 V auxiliary supply Volt-free signalling output contacts Volt-free contacts Volt-free signalling output contacts NPN or PNP open collector NPN or PNP open collector Other connections to terminals X and X 4 V V V 4 V () Motor cable shielding is necessary if the environment is sensitive to radiated interference. At the drive end, fix and ground the shielding to the mounting plate using 36 contact stainless steel clamps. The main function of the motor cable shielding is to limit radio frequency radiation. Therefore use a 4-pole cable for the motor, connecting each end of the shielding. The protection material (copper or steel) is of less importance than the quality of the connection at both ends. An alternative is to use metal trunking of high conductivity ensuring continuity throughout. () Conductive mounting plate (in stainless or galvanised steel) to connect the motor cable shielding ground and to ensure ground equipotentiality between filter, drive and shielding. All connections should be marked --- representing the EMC equipotential required for the flow of high frequency interference: protection connections, ground connections to shielding plates and interconnection of shielding. They require low impedance at high frequencies; use machine ground wiring or, when this is not possible, large cross-section braiding (as short as possible). They can be in parallel with the normal protective conductor (green/yellow) which ensures safety. (3) It is possible to mount a second I/O card on the X3 connector. (4) Not programmable on the first I/O extension card assigned to: drive locking. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 /7 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Dimensions: page /64

356 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Components to connect to ATV-68pN4 to ATV-68p33N4 drives Label A Description ATV-68 pn4 to p33n4 drives FA - FB Radio interference input filters in parts, see page /5. Their IL line choke connections must be as short as possible. At 5 V, the filter is a single part, place it at FB. IL Line chokes, see page /49. IM Motor chokes, see page /5. KM LC-Fppp with suppressor (see pages /78 and /79). Optional contactor - Avoid frequent operation of contactor KM (risk of premature ageing of filter capacitors). Instead use the drive locking function. - In the case of cycles < 6 s, this is essential, to avoid risk of damaging the capacitator load card. - If the safety standards require motor isolation, install a contactor at the drive output and lock the drive when the contactor is closed. Q Circuit-breaker (see pages /78 and /79). Q GV-L rated at twice the primary nominal current of T. Q Isolator or fused isolator Fuse rating depends on drive and supply voltage Drive Supply voltage Maximum tripping value V 5 V It ATV-68pN4 A 6 A 75 x 3 A.s ATV-68p3N4 5 A A 45 x 3 A.s ATV-68p5N4 35 A 5 A 45 x 3 A.s ATV-68p9N4 4 A 35 A 45 x 3 A.s ATV-68p3N4 5 A 4 A x 3 A.s ATV-68p8N4 63 A 5 A x 3 A.s ATV-68p33N4 8 A 63 A x 3 A.s R - R Braking units, see pages /5 to /57. T Control supply transformer, depends on the application. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Dimensions: page /64 /7

357 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Wiring diagram for ATV-68p43N4 to ATV-68p63N4 (supply voltage 4 V) Q Q T Q It is possible to replace circuitbreaker Q with an isolator or fused isolator KM Device FA FB IL FC + V reference voltage Analogue inputs V (4) ma Zero volts for control (4) ma analogue output Zero volts for control Thermistor input Thermistor zero Zero volts for control Logic input common Programmable logic input Programmable logic input Programmable logic input 3 Programmable logic input 4 4 V power supply/logic output External 4 V power supply Relay output (common) Relay output (N/C contact) Relay output (N/O contact) (4) ma differential analogue input (4) ma analogue output Zero volts for control Logic input common Logic input 5 - (4) Logic input 6 - Logic input 7 - LA LA L3A LB LB L3B A + U5 V W X + AIV AIC V AO V TH + TH V DIS DI DI DI3 DI4 + 4 P4 POV RL NC NO X AI + AI AO V DIS DI5 IM U V W k (4) ma M 3 () () (4) ma (4) ma DI6 DI7 DI8 RL NC NO RL3 NO3 + + R R DIS/ PE (4) ma (4) ma Logic input 8 - Relay output Relay output N/C Relay output N/O Relay output 3 Relay output 3 N/O I/O extension card no. (3) Thermistors Volt-free contacts 4V auxiliary supply Volt-free signalling output contacts Volt-free contacts Volt-free signalling output contacts NPN or PNP open collector NPN or PNP open collector Other connections to terminals X and X 4 V V V 4 V () Motor cable shielding is necessary if the environment is sensitive to radiated interference. At the drive end, fix and ground the shielding to the mounting plate using 36 contact stainless steel clamps. The main function of the motor cable shielding is to limit radio frequency radiation. Therefore use a 4-pole cable for the motor, connecting each end of the shielding. The protection material (copper or steel) is of less importance than the quality of the connection at both ends. An alternative is to use metal trunking of high conductivity ensuring continuity throughout. () Conductive mounting plate (in stainless or galvanised steel) to connect the motor cable shielding ground and to ensure ground equipotentiality between filter, drive and shielding. All connections should be marked --- representing the EMC equipotential required for the flow of high frequency interference: protection connections, ground connections to shielding plates and interconnection of shielding. They require low impedance at high frequencies; use machine ground wiring or, when this is not possible, large cross-section braiding (as short as possible). They can be in parallel with the normal protective conductor (green/yellow) which ensures safety. (3) It is possible to mount a second I/O card on the X3 connector. (4) Not programmable on the first I/O extension card assigned to: drive locking. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 /7 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Dimensions: page /64

358 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Components to connect to ATV-68p43N4 to ATV-68p63N4 drives Label A Description ATV-68p43N4 to p63n4 drives FA - FB - FC Radio interference input filters in 3 parts, see page /5. Their IL line choke connections must be as short as possible. At 5 V, these are identical filters: one is connected at FC for LA, LA, L3A, the other at FC for LB, LB, L3B. IL Line chokes, see page /49. IM Motor chokes, see page /5. KM LC-Fppp with suppressor (see pages /78 and /79). Optional contactor - Avoid frequent operation of contactor KM (risk of premature ageing of filter capacitors). Instead use the drive locking function. - In the case of cycles < 6 s, this is essential, to avoid risk of damaging the capacitator load card. - If the safety standards require motor isolation, install a contactor at the drive output and lock the drive when the contactor is closed. Q Circuit-breaker (see pages /78 and /79). Q GV-L rated at twice the primary nominal current of T. Q Isolator or fused isolator Fuse rating depends on drive and supply voltage Drive Supply voltage Maximum tripping value 4 44 V 5 V It ATV-68p43N4 x 5 A () x 4 A () x 3 A.s ATV-68p53N4 x 63 A () x 5 A () x 3 A.s ATV-68p63N x 8 A () x 63 A () x 3 A.s R - R Braking units, see pages /5 to /57. T Control supply transformer, depends on the application () x 3-pole fuses as there are two input bridges. Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Dimensions: page /64 /73

359 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Connection of several drives in parallel on the DC bus Drives of different rating Q KM IL L L L3 VW3-A688 option F F L U L ATV-68 drive V L3 W + + U V ATV-68 drive W + U V ATV-68 drive 3 W + Braking units R R Braking resistor M M M3 Label Description Drive Drivesand3 Standard frequency inverter. The Altivar 68, connected directly to the mains supply, determines the maximum motor power possible for drives Drives powered by the DC bus. Protection should be provided by fast-acting fuses. Contactors on the c circuit are no use as the switching action may blow the fuses because of a high load current. 5 VW3-A688 option External load circuit option. This option is necessary to avoid overloading the Altivar 68 load circuits. This option can be used to load drive for a total power of 63 kw. (Standard torque of drives + + 3). F, F Fast-acting fuses for protection on the DC bus side, see table on opposite page. Braking unit Braking unit and braking resistor if necessary. Connection of several drives in parallel on the DC bus Drives of same rating KM Q Q Q3 IL F IL F IL F3 L U L ATV-68 drive V L3 W + L U L ATV-68 drive V L3 W + L U L ATV-68 drive 3 V L3 W + M M M3 Label KM Description Using a common line contactor, all Altivar 68 load circuits function in parallel and so cannot be overloaded. Warning: If one contactor per drive is used, the external load circuit option VW3-A688 should be connected to each drive. Q, Q, Q3 Line-side circuit-breakers for drive overload protection. Use the trip contacts acting on the external fault logic input or on the line contactor. The line contactor must only be energised if the three circuit-breakers are closed, otherwise there is a risk of drive deterioration. F, F, F3 Fast-acting fuses protection on the DC bus side, see table on opposite page. Drives, and 3 Generally the number and size of drives can be freely selected, but only drives of the same size or the first rating of the next size can be used together. Line chokes (IL) must be used. References: page /6 /74

360 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 DCbusfusesize(F,F,F3)accordingtodriverating Drive Fast-acting fuses () 4 and 44 V 46 and 5 V ATV-68pN4 5 A A ATV-68p3N4 35 A 5 A ATV-68p5N4 4 A 35 A ATV-68p9N4 5 A 4 A ATV-68p3N4 63 A 5 A ATV-68p8N4 8 A 5 A ATV-68p33N4 8 A 63 A ATV-68p43N4 A 8 A ATV-68p53N4 5 A A ATV-68p63N4 6 A 5 A () Nominal voltage of fast-acting fuse: 4 V: fast-acting 69 V 44 V: fast-acting 8 V 46 V: fast-acting 8 V 5 V: fast-acting 8 V Presentation: pages /4 and /4 Characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 and /47 Dimensions: page /64 /75

361 Schemes Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Encoder feedback card Drive combined with one braking unit and one braking resistor 3 a + V supply X5 + V A + Signal A A B + Signal B B I + I ATV-68FC N4 L L L3 Xbu ATV68 + U V W M 8 3 V TH Braking resistor + PA PB + 5 V A B Braking unit 5 Drive combined with two braking units 3 a L L L3 Xbu Xbu + ATV68 U V W M TH TH + PA + PA PB PB Braking unit no. Braking unit no. Presentation: page /5 Characteristics: pages /44 and /5 References: pages /47 and /53 Dimensions: page /66 /76

362 Schemes (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Drives combined with one or two braking units, wired to the same DC Bus 3 a 3 a L L L3 ATV68 + L L L3 ATV68 + U V W U V W M M + PA TH Braking resistor + PA TH Braking resistor + PA TH Braking resistor PB PB PB Braking unit Braking unit no. Braking unit no. External load circuit VW3-A688 Earth fault detection kit VW3-A689 IL IL VW3-A689 U V W L L L3 L L L3 + ATV-68 drive + VW3-A688 + L L L3 AI + AI X + AIV AIC V M 3 U V W M 3 References: pages /53 and /6 Dimensions: pages /66 and /67 /77

363 Combinations for customer assembly Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Motor starters Applications Circuit-breaker-contactor-drive combinations ensure service continuity of the installation with optimum safety. The coordination between the circuit-breaker and the contactor reduces maintenance costs in the event of a shortcircuit by minimising intervention time and the expense of replacing equipment. The combinations available provide type or type coordination. Type coordination: there will be no damage and no loss of settings after a short-circuit. The motor starter should be operational after the electrical fault has been cleared. Electrical isolation provided by the circuit-breaker is maintained after the incident. The risk of soldering the line contactor contacts is accepted, as these can easily be separated. Type coordination: electrical isolation provided by the circuit-breaker is maintained after the incident and parts other than the contactor are not damaged following the short-circuit. The circuit-breaker protects against short-circuits of power supply cables and internal drive cables. The contactor powers up the motor starter as well as isolating the variable speed drive from the line supply, when the motor stops. The drive controls the motor, protects against short-circuits between the drive and the motor, and protects the motor cable against overload. This protection against overload is ensured by the drive's thermal motor protection. If this is removed, external thermal protection should be provided. The cause of the trip should be cleared before the installation is powered up again. 5 NS5HMA + LC-F85pp + ATV-68p3N4 3-phase supply voltage 4 V Standard Circuit-breaker Line contactor Drive Line 4-pole Reference Rating In Irm Basic AC- Reference to be current motor to be completed at reference to at completed (3) with 5/6 Hz () 55 C be completed () 55 C choke P In max. (5) (4) kw A A A A A A For high torque applications Type coordination 75 4 NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68pN NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p3N4 6 8 NS5HMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p5N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p9N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p3N NS4pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p8N NS63pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p33N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p33N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p43N4 577 Type coordination C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p53N C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p63N CpSTR35ME 95 LC-F8pp 85 ATV-68p63N4 845 For standard torque applications Type coordination 9 7 NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68pN NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p3N NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p5N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p9N NS4pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p3N NS63pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p8N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p8N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p33N4 533 Type coordination C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p43N CpSTR35ME 95 LC-F8pp 85 ATV-68p53N CpSTR35ME 95 LC-F78pp 35 ATV-68p53N C5pSTR35ME 5 5 LC-F78pp 35 ATV-68p63N4 5 () Magnetic circuit-breaker marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Replace the point in the reference with the letter which corresponds to the circuit-breaking performance: Circuit-breaking performance in ka (at 4 V/44 V/5 V) Circuit-breaker N H L NS6pMA 35/35/3 7/65/5 3/3/7 NS5pMA 35/35/ 7/65/35 3/3/5 NS4pMA 7/65/5 3/3/7 NS63pMA 7/65/35 3/3/5 C8p to C5p 5/4/4 7/65/5 () In order to define the complete reference for contactors: auxiliary contacts, control circuit voltage, and if applicable, number of poles, please consult our catalogue Motor starter solutions. (3) Replace the point in the reference according to the type of drive required, see pages /46 and /47. (4) Line current corresponding to the maximum motor current for an ambient temperature of 4 to 45 C max. depending on the rating (see pages /4, /68 and /69). (5) In type coordination, circuit-breaker In at 55 C is higher than the circuit-breaker rating current. The drive limits current peaks on startup contrary to a direct startup from the mains. /78

364 Combinations for customer assembly (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Motor starters NS5HMA + LC-F85pp + ATV-68p3N4 3-phase supply voltage 44 V Standard 4-pole Circuit-breaker Line contactor () Drive Line current motor 5/6 Hz Reference to be Rating In at Irm Basic reference AC- Reference to be with P In max. completed () 55 C (5) to be completed at 55 C completed (3) choke (4) kw A A A A A A For high torque applications Type coordination 75 9 NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68pN NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68p3N NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p5N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p9N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p3N NS4pMA LC-F33pp 36 ATV-68p8N NS4pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p33N NS63pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p33N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p43N4 55 Type coordination 4 7 C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p53N C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p63N CpSTR35ME 95 LC-F8pp 85 ATV-68p63N4 785 For standard torque applications Type coordination 9 55 NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68pN NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p3N NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p5N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p9N NS4pMA LC-F33pp 36 ATV-68p3N NS4pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p8N NS63pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p8N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p33N4 483 Type coordination 4 78 C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p43N C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p53N CpSTR35ME 95 LC-F8pp 85 ATV-68p53N C5pSTR35ME 5 5 LC-F78pp 35 ATV-68p63N phase supply voltage 5 V For high torque applications Type coordination 75 3 NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68pN NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68p3N NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68p5N NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p9N NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p3N NS4pMA LC-F33pp 36 ATV-68p8N NS4pMA LC-F33pp 36 ATV-68p33N NS4pMA LC-F33pp 36 ATV-68p33N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p43N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p53N4 577 Type coordination C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p63N C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p63N4 68 For standard torque applications Type coordination 9 36 NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68pN NS6pMA LC-D5pp ATV-68p3N NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p5N NS5pMA LC-F85pp 75 ATV-68p9N4 6 3 NS4pMA LC-F65pp 3 ATV-68p3N NS4pMA LC-F33pp 36 ATV-68p8N NS4pMA LC-F4pp 43 ATV-68p8N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p33N NS63pMA LC-F5pp 58 ATV-68p43N4 556 Type coordination C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p53N C8pSTR35ME LC-F63pp 85 ATV-68p53N CpSTR35ME 95 LC-F8pp 85 ATV-68p63N4 86 () Magnetic circuit-breaker marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Replace the point in the reference with the letter which corresponds to the circuit-breaking performance, see opposite page. () In order to define the complete reference for contactors: auxiliary contacts, control circuit voltage, and if applicable, number of poles, please consult our catalogue Motor starter solutions. (3) Replace the point in the reference according to the type of drive required, see pages /46 and /47. (4) Line current corresponding to the maximum motor current for an ambient temperature of 4 to 45 C max. depending ontherating(seepages/4, /68 and /69). (5) In type coordination, circuit-breaker In at 55 C is higher than the circuit-breaker rating current. The drive limits current peaks on startup contrary to a direct startup from the mains. /79

365 Description Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Dialogue Presentation of the programming terminal The Altivar 68 has a programming terminal on the front panel which allows: - local control of the drive, - configuration of different parameters, - remote display and signalling of drive status. Presentation of the control keypad 5 A Display B C D I/O E Drive F Initial set-up Adjustment Diagnostic Home Language selection General functions Analogue inputs Drive overload Test-help Motor values Macro configuration Ramps Logic inputs Motor protection Factory settings Inverter values Motor data Speed range Analogue outputs Fault configuration Fault memory Reference values Auto tune PID configuration Logic outputs Control configuration Function blocks Time kwh Short menu Catch on the fly Encoder configuration Skip frequency Display configuration Communication menu Special functions Electronic potentiometer Switching frequency Code lock f +43. Hz Ref Hz P +45kW A Dist. Acceleration A Ready On Fault A RUN MENU PARAM 5 4 STOP RESET LOCAL REM. F F6 8 7 A summary table for moving around in the menus. Liquid crystal display screen. 3 "Run" key for local mode. 4 "Stop" key in local or remote mode, programmable for fault acknowledgement. 5 "Local/remote" key: choice of terminal or keypad control. 6 "Left" key for menu selection or to move the cursor left and to control reverse rotation in local mode. 7 "Down" key for menu selection or to decrement numeric values or the reference in local mode. 8 "Menu/Parameters" key accesses the parameter settings or exits adjust mode to return to the menu. 9 "Up" key for menu selection or to increment numeric values or the reference in local mode. "Right" key for menu selection or to move the cursor right and to control forward rotation in local mode. Drive status display: ready, running or faulty. Basic display menu and parameter storage. Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /8

366 Description (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Dialogue Presentation of the programming terminal (continued) The different menus The different menus A, B, C, D, E, F define groups of homogenous menus. Each menu contains a group of parameters. Menu A to A6 B to B6 C to C6 D to D6 E to E6 F to F6 Function Display Start-up Function groups Configuration of the I/O, speed feedback and motorised potentiometer Limiting and protection of the drive Service, help and factory settings, logic blocks and comparators A Display Home Motor values Inverter values Reference values Time kwh Display configuration B Initial set-up C Adjustment D I/O Language selection General functions Analogue inputs Macro configuration Ramps Logic inputs Motor data B3. B3. B3. B3.3 B3.4 Menu B3 group of parameters E Drive F Diagnostics Drive overload Test-Help Menu B3 Parameter number B3.3 Parameter name Nom. frequency Parameter identification VICB Set value Hz p Access the parameter menu with the MENU/PARAM key. p The A Home menu has a special function: It does not contain parameters, instead it contains the basic display. The modified values are only stored in the drive long-term memory when changing to the basic display (MENU/PARAM key). p Each menu can be accessed using the arrow keys. Local control To control the drive from the integrated terminal, local operating mode must be activated. The "Local/Remote" key allows this on exiting the basic display. In "local" mode, the following keys are active: Keys Basic display Menu Parameter group RUN Start-up STOP RESET Stop/Reset (Stop) / Reset (Stop) / Reset Increase reference Menu search Scrolls through the parameters or increases the value Decrease reference Menu search Scrolls through the parameters or decreases the value Rotate left Menu search Moves the cursor left Rotate right Menu search Moves the cursor left Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /8

367 Description (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Dialogue Presentation of the programming terminal (continued) Example of parameter setting Return to A basic display mode and store the modified parameters in the drive memory MENU PARAM f + 5. Hz Ref +5.Hz I=3 A A Local f=fref MENU PARAM Basic display Access to menus f + 5. Hz I=3 A A Home-basic display (Memo) Change menu to A Search through menu C f + 5. Hz C Ramps I=3 A 5 Exit parameter group MENU PARAM MENU PARAM Access to parameters of menu C Scroll through the parameters withina menu f + 5. Hz C Ramp s Accel. ramp C =.s I=3 A Scroll through the parameters within a menu f + 5. Hz I=3 A C Ramps Decel. ramp C3 =.s Move the cursor to the parameter number Move the cursor to the parameter value Parameter adjustment can be terminated with the MENU/PARAM key MENU PARAM f + 5. Hz C Ramps Decel. ramp C3 =.s I=3 A Move the cursor to the tens digit Modify the parameter value with immediate effect f + 5. Hz C Ramps Decel. ramp C3 = 5.s I=3 A Cursor = underlined number or letter Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /8

368 Functions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Summary of functions Control keypad key and corresponding function A Display A Display (basic display, Home function) A Display of motor values: current, speed, etc. A3 Display of drive values: thermal state, etc. A4 Display of references A5 Display of the number of operating hours and the KW used A6 Configuration of the basic display. Display of 3 parameterable values B Initial set-up B Language selection B Choice of application macro (preset according to the application, 4 possible choices). Storage of complete adjustment configurations possible with autotuning. B3 Adjustment of motor parameters Acceptance of reverse mode operation B4 Measurement of motor parameters on request B5 Access to the main settings in the short menu. This short menu groups all the parameters which are important for the application and different to the factory settings. C Adjustment C General functions: p Starting overtorque (up to 8%): - adjustment of the range starting overtorque. p Choice of stop mode: - freewheel, - decelerated, -fast. p Choice of braking mode: - no braking unit (standard), - with braking unit. When several ALTIVAR 68 and braking units are connected to a common DC bus, there is a function for distributing the braking power across all the braking units, - fast without braking unit. This type of braking is a low cost alternative for simple applications, mainly for fans, which avoids the use of an external braking unit. A 5 KW motor with a total inertia applied at the motor shaft of to 3 times its inertia can be fast-stopped in 4 seconds. There is an increase in loss in the motor and noise during braking (warning: braking torque is not constant). p Preset references p JOG p Energy saving, for variable torque applications (reduction of magnetising current on applications with quadratic torque) C Selection of acceleration and deceleration ramps: p ramps p Choice of ramp profile, S or U with curve adjustment p Adjustment of a threshold for switching from no. acceleration (deceleration) ramp to no. acceleration (deceleration) ramp. p Adjustment of a time delayed low speed threshold before stopping. This operation is obtained after a stop request. C3 Adjustment at low speed and high speed p Possible to phohibit a direction of rotation p Possible to reverse motor rotation phases without reversing the motor wiring C4 Simple PID drive or PID drive for reference correction: p Possible to use the PID drive reference as a process reference (eg pressure or flow reference) or as a speed reference (press applications). C5 Catchonthefly C6 Special functions: p Line contactor control p Brake logic suitable for hoisting with the brake release pulse, possible management of a closed brake contact, detection of speed deviation between the reference and the speed feedback (adjustment possible), anti-repeat p Brake logic suitable for translational movement p Adaptation of maximum speed as a function of the load (lifting applications). Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /83

369 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Summary of functions (continued) Control keypad key and corresponding function D I/O D Configuration of the analogue inputs and adjustment of max. and min. signal values on each input: p Frequency reference (automatic), standard choice p Manual frequency reference p PID reference p PID feedback p Reference correction p Torque limitation D Configuration of the logic inputs: p MAN/AUTO This command switches between the references : automatic reference or manual reference. p LOCAL/REMOTE. This command selects local or remote mode. Local corresponds to commands from the graphic terminal keypad and to logic signals sent by the logic inputs assigned to local mode: 5 RUN STOP RESET Remote corresponds to logic and analogue signals sent via the terminals (apart from those programmed in local mode) and via the line: - run/stop by stay-put control (-wire control), - run/stop by pulse control (3-wire control), - remote motorised potentiometer (+/- speed), - run/stop by local pulse control (3-wire control), - local motorised potentiometer (+/- speed), -JOG, - preset references (8 possible), - selection of ramps or, - selection of user macro. Allows control of a motor with completely different configurations or to alternately control motors. The user macro is a complete parameter configuration, including motor parameter measurement and thermal calculation, - drive locking, freewheel stop. p External event monitoring, with a display of fault type according to configuration: - external fault, - external motor fault, - external isolation fault, - external braking unit fault, - drive locking: this input allows monitoring and display on the terminal screen of the state of the accessories around the drive which may prevent the drive from starting (fuse, contactor, fan, etc.), -faultreset, - external torque limitation, - PID activation, - activation of PID drive gains, - speed regulation or open loop, uset to change from encoder feedback mode to open loop mode, - open brake contact handling, - Emergency stop management in the case of a line contactor controlled by a drive, - parameter locking (this command prohibits parameter modification from the keypad), - local forcing (commands are only possible in local mode). Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /84

370 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Summary of functions (continued) Control keypad key and corresponding function D3 Assignment of analogue outputs: p Output frequency (signed or not signed) p Motor current p Torque (signed or not signed) p Motor power p Motor voltage p Speed in rpm (signed or not signed) p Internal frequency reference p Torque limitation reference p PID reference p PID feedback p PID error p References from the line p Motor thermal state p Braking resistor thermal state D4 Assignment of logic outputs p Brake opening (brake sequence) p Selectionofusermacroor p External torque limit activation p Logic block output p Comparator block output p Different drive states: - ready, - running, - ready + RUN, -fault, -alarm, - generator mode, - line supply present, - local control mode, - DC bus charged, - manual control mode, - PID activated, - PID gain enabled, - drive in closed loop. p Monitoring: - reference frequency greater than motor frequency (adjustable hysteresis), - motor frequency greater than a set level, - drive command word, - drive heatsink thermal state higher than maximum limit, - voltage threshold limit of DC bus reached, which leads to a decrease in the motor stator frequency, - motor temperature calculated by the drive higher than maximum temperature, - active braking unit, - active motor heating. D5 Encoder feedback p Choice of control mode: - no slip compensation, - with slip compensation, and possibility of adjusting slip compensation range, - with encoder feedback, - with load balancing on several motors. For open loop operation only (without encoder feedback), - with balancing of motors. For closed loop operation only (with encoder feedback). The DMA function balances the torque for motors which are mechanically linked and controlled by different drives (provides the master/slave function). In encoder feedback mode, adjustment of the number of pulses per revolution and adjustment of the proportional, integral and derivative gain is possible. D6 Electronic potentiometer (+/- speed) p Choice of speed or torque reference p Adjustment of low speed, high speed and acceleration ramps p EEPROM reference storage after a mains power failure After a stop whether the drive is switched off or not, when a run command is given, the frequency increases up to the value of the stored reference (with the run command sign), if the +/- speed commands are not enabled. +/- speed has priority. p RAM reference storage on the disappearance of a run command After a stop without the drive being switched off, when a run command is given, the frequency increases up to the value of the stored reference (with the run command sign), if the +/- speed commands are not enabled. +/- speed has priority. In the case of a mains power failure, the reference is not stored. p Choice of +/- speed control at the terminals in local or remote mode p Choice of +/- speed control via the keypad or terminals Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /85

371 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Summary of functions (continued) Control keypad key and corresponding function E Adapting the drive to the installation requirements E Overload limitation : p Adjustment of maximum drive current (activation of limitation possible via logic input) p Adjustment of maximum motor torque (activation of limitation possible via logic input) E Protection adapted to the motor : p Use of a PTC probe p Thermal motor protection by calculating I t and UL thermal protection p Processing of a pump underload from the PID drive or from the estimated torque. p Thermal braking resistor protection p Stalled rotor detection, with frequency and stalling time adjustment p Overspeed protection p Detection of maximum motor speed Protection processing is possible as a default or in emergency. E3 Processing of external faults p Undervoltage fault: - an undervoltage fault need not be considered as a permanent fault or it may be considered as such only when the drive is running, - adjustment of time delay before acceptance of an undervoltage fault, - automatic restart (3 times in 5 minutes). 5 p 4/ ma loss When the 4 - ma signal is lost, it is possible to select either a fallback speed to a fixed reference, or the recorded rotation speed brefore the break. p Processing of external faults: - acceptance of a time before tripping, - configuration of acceptance conditions (drive running, normally closed or normally open contact, etc.). p Selectionoftypeofstoponfault E4 Selection of drive control modes: p Selection of frequency reference origin: - local and remote, - local, - remote. p Control mode: - local and remote, - local, - remote. p Origin of local and remote control: - keypad, -terminals. E5 Skip frequency p Hysteresis adjustment E6 Choice of switching frequency p.5 khz p 5kHz p khz Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /86

372 Functions (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 Summary of functions (continued) Control keypad key and corresponding function F Diagnostic F Test-help p Possible earth fault test p Control circuit test F Return to factory settings (except for motor data) p Return to motor data factory settings p Return to application program factory settings (all parameters except for motor data and language) F3 Fault memory p Fault counter p Selection of 6 most recent faults, 4 data items relating to the fault are displayed (time, output frequency, current, etc.). This information correspond to the real values ms before the appearance of the fault. F4 Logic function blocks The drive contains 4 comparator blocks (greater than, less than, equal to and different from) and logic function blocks (AND, OR, equal, different). Thefunctionblockoutputsignalscanbeoperatedwithatimedelay. The block input can be either an external signal or an internal data item from the drive. The block output can be either a logic output or a direct action on the drive. F6 Locking parameter modifications by an access code p Choice of lock : keypad, line or terminals p Choice of access code Presentation, characteristics: pages /4 to /45 References: pages /46 to /6 Dimensions: pages /64 to /69 Schemes: pages /7 to /77 /87

373 Presentation, characteristics Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 ready-assembled in enclosure Presentation 56 Altivar 68 variable speed drives can be supplied ready-assembled in an enclosure to facilitate installation and particularly to ensure optimum ventilation. The enclosure equipment can be split into two offers: a standard offer and a modular offer. The ATV-68Epppppp standard offer comprises an enclosure with non-modifiable hardware configuration only for 4 V power supply with IP 3 and IP 54 degrees of protection. The ATV-68EXpppppp modular offer comprises an enclosure with a selection of options linked to the drive rating and to the torque characteristics (high torque or standard torque) for line supplies of 4 V to 5 V, with IP 3 and IP 54 protection. For supply voltages over 4 V, order the 5 V option. The standard offer comprises: - a ready-assembled pre-wired enclosure, - an Altivar 68 drive, - a switch and fast-acting fuses (see pages /7 and /73), - line chokes (see page /49). The modular offer comprises: ATV-68EpCppN4 - a ready-assembled pre-wired enclosure, - an Altivar 68 drive, - a switch and fast-acting fuses (see pages /7 and /73), - line chokes and one or more options to be selected from the following list (see page /49). The Altivar 68 in the modular offer enclosures can be fitted with the same options as the ATV-68 range ATV-68EXpCppN4 Optionscommontoallratings: - I/O extension card, - Fipio, Modbus Plus, Profibus DP communication cards, - programming terminal remote mounting kit (IP 54 degree of protection), - earth fault detection in IT connection (isolated neutral). Options depending on the drive rating and/or torque characteristics (modular offer) (see pages /9 and /93): - protection circuit-breaker with handle extension (replaces the switch and fuses on ATV-A68 pn4 to p33n4 drives), - line contactor to be combined with a circuit-breaker, - line contactor to be combined with switches and fuses, - radio interference input filters, - additional motor chokes, - twelve-phase power supply option. Special options for mounting in enclosure (modular offer): - 5 V line supply, - external fan in IP 3 version, - access window to IP 54 programming terminal (), - switch handle extension, - enclosure lighting, - 4 V or 5 V/3V transformer, - voltage loss coil for 4 V circuit-breaker, - c 4 V supply for drive control circuit, - customised terminals, - emergency stop button, - anti-condensation heater (see pages /9 and /93), - enclosure baseplate (see pages /9 and /93). Characteristics Degree of protection of enclosure IP 3 IP 54 Maximum external temperature of enclosure Line supply connection Motor connection Control terminal connection Colour of 6 SAREL Spacial Cell Enclosures Air inlet via grille on enclosure door Air outlet on roof of enclosure, protected by a plate Air inlet via fan fitted with a filter for ATV-68pN4 to p9n4 drives Air inlet via grille located in the baseplate and via filtered and ventilated grille, located in the enclosure door, for ATV- 68p3N4 to p63n4 drives Air outlet via horizontal grille on front panel, located on enclosure roof + 35 CforATV-68EpC9N4, ATV-68EpC33N4 and ATV-68EpC63N4 (+ 5 C with external fan option) + 4 C for other ratings (+ 5 C with external fan option) Directly to switch or circuit-breaker, cable entry required at base of enclosure Directly to drive, cable entry required at base of enclosure Directly to drive Customised terminals option (4 contacts) RAL 73 () Without this option the programming terminal can be viewed through a fixed bakelized plastic window. References: pages /89 and /9 /88 Dimensions: page /9 Compatibility: pages /9 and /93

374 References Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 ready-assembled in enclosure 56 ATV-68EpCppN4 Standard ATV-68EpCppN4 offer for 4 V 5/6 Hz three-phase line supply in IP 3 and IP 54 enclosure Degree of protection Power in kw for applications standard torque high torque ( % Tn) (5 % Tn) With ATV-68 drive Ready-assembled enclosure reference Weight kg IP ATV-68CN4 ATV-68ECN ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68EC3N ATV-68C5N4 ATV-68EC5N ATV-68C9N4 ATV-68EC9N ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68EC3N ATV-68C8N4 ATV-68EC8N ATV-68C33N4 ATV-68EC33N ATV-68C43N4 ATV-68EC43N ATV-68C53N4 ATV-68EC53N ATV-68C63N4 ATV-68EC63N4 35. IP ATV-68CN4 ATV-68E5CN ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68E5C3N ATV-68C5N4 ATV-68E5C5N ATV-68C9N4 ATV-68E5C9N ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68E5C3N ATV-68C8N4 ATV-68E5C8N ATV-68C33N4 ATV-68E5C33N ATV-68C43N4 ATV-68E5C43N ATV-68C53N4 ATV-68E5C53N ATV-68C63N4 ATV-68E5C63N4 45. Modular ATV-68EXpCppN4 offer for 4 V to 5 V 5/6 Hz line supply in IP 3 and IP 54 enclosure () 56 ATV-68EXpCppN4 Degree of Power in kw for applications With ATV-68 drive Ready-assembled protection standard torque ( % Tn) high torque (5 % Tn) enclosure reference IP ATV-68CN4 ATV-68EXCN4 9 ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68EXC3N4 3 ATV-68C5N4 ATV-68EXC5N4 6 3 ATV-68C9N4 ATV-68EXC9N4 6 ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68EXC3N4 5 ATV-68C8N4 ATV-68EXC8N ATV-68C33N4 ATV-68EXC33N ATV-68C43N4 ATV-68EXC43N4 5 4 ATV-68C53N4 ATV-68EXC53N ATV-68C63N4 ATV-68EXC63N4 IP ATV-68CN4 ATV-68EX5CN4 9 ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68EX5C3N4 3 ATV-68C5N4 ATV-68EX5C5N4 6 3 ATV-68C9N4 ATV-68EX5C9N4 6 ATV-68C3N4 ATV-68EX5C3N4 5 ATV-68C8N4 ATV-68EX5C8N ATV-68C33N4 ATV-68EX5C33N ATV-68C43N4 ATV-68EX5C43N4 5 4 ATV-68C53N4 ATV-68EX5C53N ATV-68C63N4 ATV-68EX5C63N4 Weight kg () () For supply voltages over 4 V, order the 5 V option. () The weight depends on the options selected. The weights shown in the table on page /9 should be added to the standard offer weights. Presentation, characteristics: page /88 Dimensions: page /9 Compatibility: pages /9 and /93 /89

375 References (continued) Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 ready-assembled in enclosure Options common to all ratings (modular offer) Description For protocol Reference Weight kg I/O extension card VW3-A68E. Communication card Fipio VW3-A68E3.4 Modbus Plus VW3-A68E3.4 Profibus DP VW3-A68E37.3 Programming terminal remote mounting kit VW3-A68E8 3. Earth fault detection in IT connection (isolated neutral) VW3-A68E9. Special options for mounting in enclosure (modular offer) Description Voltage Reference Weight kg 5 V line supply option () VW3-A68E5V 5 External fan For IP 3 version: enables additional 5 C of ambient temperature without derating the drive (please refer to characteristics on page /88). Order fans for ATV- 68pC43N4 to pc63n4 drives. 4 V VW3-A68E V VW3-A68E8 7. Programming terminal access window VW3-A68E85 Switch handle extension on front panel of door VW3-A68E87 Enclosure lighting power supply z V - 4 V, W () VW3-A68E885 5 VA control transformer for ATV-68EXpCN4 to pc33n4 8 VA control transformer for ATV-68EXpC43N4 to pc63n4 4/5 V 3 V secondary 4/5 V 3 V secondary VW3-A68E VW3-A68E Voltagelosscoil for 4 V circuit-breaker V VW3-A68E86 3 V () VW3-A68E86 Supply for the drive control circuit () (Imax:.6 A) 4 V DC VW3-A68E887 Customised terminals (remote control terminals) VW3-A68E86 Emergency stop button Wired in sequence if contactor and circuit-breaker with voltage loss coil options are present 3 V VW3-A68E88 Anti-condensation heater 3 V () (3) activated by thermostat between + - C 5 W on ATV-68EXpCN4 to pc33n4 ratings.5 3 W on ATV-68EXpC43N4 to pc63n4 ratings.5 Enclosure baseplate (3) (4) Presentation, characteristics: page /88 Dimensions: page /9 () Reference VW3-A68E5V should be ordered for supply voltages > 4 V (fast-acting fuse characteristics, correct power supply for options). () If 3 V single-phase supply is not available (eg: non-distributed neutral), the control transformer option should be used. (3) Depends on drive ratings (please refer to compatibility on pages /9 and /93). (4) Please refer to the table of weights on page /9. Compatibility: pages /9 and /93 /9

376 Dimensions Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 ready-assembled in enclosure Dimensions Altivar 68 ready-assembled in enclosure c a b () ATV-68EppCppN4 offer for 4 or 5 V three-phase 5/6 Hz line supply, in IP 3 and IP 54 enclosures Degree of protection of enclosure Degree of protection of enclosure IP 3 IP 54 Reference a b c Reference a b c ATV-68EpCN ATV-68Ep5CN4 6 5 ATV-68EpC3N ATV-68Ep5C3N4 8 5 ATV-68EpC5N4 ATV-68Ep5C5N4 ATV-68EpC9N4 ATV-68Ep5C9N4 ATV-68EpC3N4 6 5 ATV-68Ep5C3N4 4 5 ATV-68EpC8N4 ATV-68Ep5C8N4 ATV-68EpC33N4 ATV-68Ep5C33N4 ATV-68EpC43N ATV-68Ep5C43N ATV-68EpC53N4 ATV-68Ep5C53N4 ATV-68EpC63N4 ATV-68Ep5C63N4 Additional dimensions of enclosures according to options selected (). Reference Motor choke Twelve-phase supply Baseplate Fan kit a a b b ATV-68EXpCN4 4 3 ATV-68EXpC3N4 4 3 ATV-68EXpC5N4 4 3 ATV-68EXpC9N4 4 3 ATV-68EXpC3N4 4 () 3 ATV-68EXpC8N4 4 () 3 ATV-68EXpC33N4 4 () 3 ATV-68EXpC43N4 6 () 3 ATV-68EXpC53N4 6 () 3 ATV-68EXpC63N4 6 () 3 () These dimensions should be added to those given for the enclosures in the above table. () For references ATV-68EX5C3N4 to ATV-68EX5C63N4, the height of the baseplate is already included in the height of the enclosure. Additional weights in kg according to the drive ratings and options selected. Reference Line contactor Radio interference input filters Motor choke Twelvephase supply Baseplate Fan kit 4 V 4 V 5 V 5 V IP 3 IP 54 St. torque High torque St. torque High torque ATV-68EXpCN ATV-68EXpC3N ATV-68EXpC5N ATV-68EXpC9N ATV-68EXpC3N ATV-68EXpC8N ATV-68EXpC33N ATV-68EXpC43N ATV-68EXpC53N ATV-68EXpC63N Presentation, characteristics: page /88 References: pages /89 and /9 Compatibility: pages /9 and /93 /9

377 Combinations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 68 in ready-assembled enclosure Combinations for ready-assembled enclosure on 4 V mains supply Options linked to the rating of the drive and the torque characteristic (standard torque/high torque applications) for the modular offer. IP 3 or IP 54 enclosure Circuit-breaker for applications Line contactor to be used with a circuit-breaker () () for applications standard torque high torque standard torque high torque ATV68EXpCN4 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 ATV68EXpC3N4 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 ATV68EXpC5N4 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 ATV68EXpC9N4 VW3-A68E864 VW3-A68E864 VW3-A68E874 VW3-A68E874 ATV68EXpC3N4 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E874 ATV68EXpC8N4 VW3-A68E866 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E876 VW3-A68E875 ATV68EXpC33N4 VW3-A68E867 VW3-A68E867 VW3-A68E876 VW3-A68E876 ATV68EXpC43N4 VW3-A68E868 VW3-A68E867 VW3-A68E879 VW3-A68E878 ATV68EXpC53N4 VW3-A68E869 VW3-A68E868 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E879 ATV68EXpC63N4 VW3-A68E86 VW3-A68E869 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 5 Combinations for ready-assembled enclosure on 5 V mains supply Options linked to the rating of the drive and the torque characteristic (standard torque/high torque applications) for the modular offer. IP 3 or IP 54 enclosure Circuit-breaker for applications Line contactor to be used with a circuit-breaker () () for applications standard torque high torque standard torque high torque ATV68EXpCN4 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E875 ATV68EXpC3N4 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E875 ATV68EXpC5N4 VW3-A68E8653 VW3-A68E865 VW3-A68E8753 VW3-A68E875 ATV68EXpC9N4 VW3-A68E8653 VW3-A68E8653 VW3-A68E8753 VW3-A68E8753 ATV68EXpC3N4 VW3-A68E8655 VW3-A68E8655 VW3-A68E8755 VW3-A68E8755 ATV68EXpC8N4 VW3-A68E8655 VW3-A68E8655 VW3-A68E8756 VW3-A68E8755 ATV68EXpC33N4 VW3-A68E8657 VW3-A68E8656 VW3-A68E8757 VW3-A68E8755 ATV68EXpC43N4 VW3-A68E8658 VW3-A68E8658 VW3-A68E8757 VW3-A68E8757 ATV68EXpC53N4 VW3-A68E8659 VW3-A68E8658 VW3-A68E8758 VW3-A68E8757 ATV68EXpC63N4 VW3-A68E866 VW3-A68E8659 VW3-A68E8759 VW3-A68E8758 () Consult the additional weights and dimensions (page /9). () If a single-phase 3 V power supply is not available (for example: non-distributed neutral), the control transformer option must be used. (3) Only for IP 3 enclosures. (4) The option makes it possible to connect to the transformer output with secondary windings. It consists of a 6-pole switch, fast-acting fuses, a power-up sequence and an additional line choke. The transformer must be ordered separately. (5) For ATV-68pC43N4 to pc63n4 drives the references of the line contactors to be used are: x LC-F4 for VW3-A68E878 and VW3-A68E8758, x LC-F5 for VW3-A68E879 and x LC-65 for VW3-A68E8757. Note: check the characteristics of the following: - circuit-breakers and contactors, pages /78 and /79, - radio interference input filters, page /5, - motor choke, page /5. Presentation, characteristics: page /88 /9 References: pages /89 and /9 Dimensions: page /9

378 Line contactor to be used with switches and fuses () () for applications Radio interference input filters Motor choke () Anti-condensation heater () Twelve pulse power supply option Baseplate standard torque high torque VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E4 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E5 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E4 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E6 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E87 VW3-A68E4 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E6 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E874 VW3-A68E874 VW3-A68E4 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E6 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E874 VW3-A68E43 VW3-A68E553 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E7 VW3-A68E893 (3) VW3-A68E876 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E43 VW3-A68E553 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E7 VW3-A68E893 (3) VW3-A68E876 VW3-A68E876 VW3-A68E43 VW3-A68E553 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E7 VW3-A68E893 (3) VW3-A68E878 (5) VW3-A68E878 (5) VW3-A68E44 VW3-A68E554 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E75 VW3-A68E894 (3) VW3-A68E879 (5) VW3-A68E879 (5) VW3-A68E44 VW3-A68E554 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E75 VW3-A68E894 (3) VW3-A68E879 (5) VW3-A68E879 (5) VW3-A68E44 VW3-A68E554 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E75 VW3-A68E894 (3) Line contactor to be used with switches and fuses () () for applications Motor choke () Anti-condensation heater () Twelve pulse power supply option (4) Baseplate standard torque high torque VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E5 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E6 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E8753 VW3-A68E875 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E6 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E8753 VW3-A68E8753 VW3-A68E55 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E6 VW3-A68E89 VW3-A68E8755 VW3-A68E8755 VW3-A68E553 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E7 VW3-A68E893 (3) VW3-A68E8756 VW3-A68E8755 VW3-A68E553 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E7 VW3-A68E893 (3) VW3-A68E8757 VW3-A68E8755 VW3-A68E553 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E7 VW3-A68E893 (3) VW3-A68E8757 (5) VW3-A68E8757 (5) VW3-A68E554 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E75 VW3-A68E894 (3) VW3-A68E8758 (5) VW3-A68E8758 (5) VW3-A68E554 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E75 VW3-A68E894 (3) VW3-A68E8758 (5) VW3-A68E8758 (5) VW3-A68E554 VW3-A68E88 VW3-A68E75 VW3-A68E894 (3) Presentation, characteristics: page /88 References: pages /89 and /9 Dimensions: page /9 /93

379 3/

380 Contents 3-PowerSuite software workshop PowerSuite software workshop b Presentation... page3/ b References... page3/3 b Compatibility... page3/3 3 3/

381 Presentation 3 PowerSuite software workshop Presentation The PowerSuite software workshop, for PC or Pocket PC, is designed for setting up Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. This single program is an easy-to-use interface for configuring Altistart and Tesys model U starters as well as all Altivar drives in a Microsoft Windows environment, in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish). Functions The PowerSuite software workshop can be used for preparing, programming, setting up and maintaining Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives PowerSuite with PC screen Installation management The PowerSuite software workshop can be used: b stand alone to prepare and store starter or drive configuration files, b connected to the starter or drive to: v configure, v adjust, v monitor (except for Altivar drives), v control (except for Altivar drives), v transfer and compare configuration files between PowerSuite and the starter or drive. The configuration files generated by the PowerSuite software workshop can be: b savedtoharddisk,cd-rom,floppydisk,etc... b printed, b exported to office automation software applications, b exchanged between a PC and a Pocket PC using standard synchronization software. PowerSuite PC and Pocket PC configuration files have the same format, b they are password protected. The software associated with the Altivar 3 has been enhanced to include: oscilloscope function, parameter name customisation, creation of a user menu, creation of monitoring screens, searching and sorting on different parameters. The PowerSuite software workshop has on-line contextual help PowerSuite with PC screen Monitoring screen PowerSuite with Pocket PC screen Connections b The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the terminal port on the starter or variable speed drives, via the serial port on the PC or Pocket PC. Two types of connection are possible: - either with a single starter or drive (point to point connection) - or with a group of starters or drives (multi-point connection). b The PowerSuite software workshop for PC can be connected to an Ethernet network (see pages 4/ to 4/5). In this case the starters and drives can be accessed using: - either an Ethernet-Modbus 74 bridge CEV 3, - or a communication option card VW3 A583 (for Altivar 38, 58 and 58F drives only). Hardware and software environment b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: v Microsoft Windows 95 OSR, Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Microsoft Windows NT4 X SP5, Microsoft Windows Me, Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows XP, v Pentium III, 8 MHz, hard disk with 3 Mb available, 8 Mb RAM, v SVGA or higher definition monitor b The PowerSuite for Pocket PC software workshop, version V.., is compatible with Pocket PCs equipped with Windows for Pocket PC or 3 operating system and an ARM or XSCALE processor. Performance tests for version V. of the PowerSuite software workshop have been carried out on the following Pocket PCs: v Hewlett Packard IPAQ, v Compaq IPAQ series 38 and 39, v Hewlett Packard Jornada series 56. 3/

382 References, compatibility 3 PowerSuite software workshop 3 References PowerSuite software workshop for PC or Pocket PC () Description Composition Reference Weight kg PowerSuite CD-Rom b Software for PC and Pocket PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish, b technical documentation and ABC configurator program. VW3 A PowerSuite upgrade CD b Software for PC and Pocket PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish, b technical documentation and ABC configurator program. VW3 A85. VW3 A84 PC connection kit b x 3 m connection cables with x RJ 45 connectors, b RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 58/58F/38 drives, b RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 68 drives, b converter marked RS 3/RS 485 PC with one 9-way female SUB-D connector and one RJ 45 connector, b converter for ATV drives, with one 4-way male connector and one RJ 45 connector. VW3 A Pocket PC connection kit () b x.6 m connection cables with x RJ 45 connectors, b RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 58/58F/38 drives, b converter marked RS 3/RS 485 PPC with one 9-way male SUB-D connector and one RJ 45 connector, b converter for ATV drives, with one 4-way male connector and one RJ 45 connector. VW3 A8.3 () To find out about the latest available version, please consult your Regional Sales Office. () These kits connect to the synchronization cable, which must be ordered separately from your Pocket PC supplier. VW3 A84 Compatibility Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with starters and variable speed drives Startercontroller TeSys model U Soft start/ Variable speed drives soft stop unit ATS 48 ATV ATV 8 ATV 3 ATV 38 ATV 58 ATV 58F PowerSuite software workshop for PC with serial link u V.4 u V.3 u V.4 u V. u V.. u V.4 u V. u V.5 ATV 68 PowerSuite software workshop for PC with Ethernet link u V.5 and Ethernet- Modbus bridge u V.5 and Ethernet- Modbus bridge u V.. and Ethernet- Modbus bridge u V.5 and Ethernet V communication card or bridge PowerSuite software workshop for Pocket PC u V.5 u V.3 u V.4 u V. u V.. u V.4 u V. Compatible products and software versions. Non compatible products. Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshops with Pocket PCs Operating system Performance tests carried out on models PowerSuite software version V.3 V.4 V.5 V.. Windows for Pocket PC 3 Hewlett Packard IPAQ no no no yes Windows for Pocket PC Compaq IPAQ series 38, 39 no no yes yes Hewlett Packard Jornada series 56 no yes yes yes Windows for Pocket PC Hewlett Packard Jornada series 55 yes yes yes no Windows CE Hewlett Packard Jornada4 yes no no no 3/3

383 4/

384 Contents 4-Communication Starters, drives and communication b Ethernet TCP/IP network.... page4/5 b Communication via Fipio bus... page4/8 b Communication via Modbus Plus bus... page4/ b Communication via AS-Interface cabling system... page4/5 b Communication via Modbus bus... page4/8 b Communication via Uni-Telway bus... page4/ b Communication via gateways LUF-P... page4/3 b Communication via gateway LA9-P page4/5 4 4/

385 Presentation, functions 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Ethernet TCP/IP network Presentation Nowadays, applications for distributed control systems can use a single communication network. The network should meet not only the demands for realtime performance on the factory floor, but also the need for open access to control/ monitoring software. It should be based on products using standard communication protocols or applications using Internet technology. Ethernet responds to these different needs in terms of data rate, capacity for open access on TCP/IP and flexibility in terms of topology. All these criteria are reinforced by the capacity of Schneider Electric to provide highlevel services which enable the user to reduce his development and operating costs. Ethernet communication is mainly aimed at applications for: b coordination between PLCs, b local or centralised supervision, b communication with production management software, b communication with remote I/O, b communication with industrial control products. The Altivar 58 drive connects to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via the VW3 A583 communication card. 4 This communication card supports: b a TCP/IP communication profile on Ethernet / Mbps, b the I/O Scanning function, b the integrated Web server function. I/O Scanning service Schematic diagram Ethernet TCP/IP %MW word table Read Write Drive input/ output words Momentum Premium Altivar 58 Altivar 58 Altivar 58 The Altivar 58 drive accepts the I/O Scanning service generated by: b automation platforms: v Premium equipped with a TSX ETY 4/5 module, v Quantum, v Momentum ME, b a PC equipped with Modbus communication software with I/O scanner function. This service is used to manage the exchange of remote I/O on the Ethernet network after simple configuration and without the need for special programming. The drive I/O are scanned transparently by means of read/write requests according to the Modbus Master/ Slave protocol on the TCP/IP profile. The Altivar 58 I/O Scanning service can be disabled. Please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. Control configuration The Web server Control configuration screen is used to: b enable the I/O Scanning service, b configure the I/O scanner (assignment of drive input words and drive output words to configurations, adjustments and signalling according to the requirements of the client application), b configure the communication functions. 4/

386 Functions (continued) 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Ethernet TCP/IP network Integrated Web server The Altivar 58 drive incorporates an integrated Web server, in English. The functions provided by the Web server require no special configuration or programming of the PC which supports the Internet browser. The Web server screens are predefined, with secure access (password). The integrated Web server provides access to the following functions: b Altivar Viewer, b Data Editor, b Statistics, b Security, b Web server for Pocket PC. Altivar Viewer function The Altivar Viewer screen is used to display: b the drive status, b the motor speed, b the drive I/O. 4 Data Editor function The Data Editor screen is used to access the drive configuration, adjustment and signalling functions. For safety reasons, the drive control function is not accessible. 3 Statistics function The Statistics screen gives the Ethernet network communication statistics. It also shows the product connected to the network (reference, software version, etc). 4/3

387 Functions (continued), connections 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Ethernet TCP/IP network 4 Security function The Security screen is used to modify the user name and passwords: b the HTTP password authorises access to the drive function display, b the Data Editor Write password authorises access to modification of the drive functions. 5 Altivar Viewer for Pocket PC function 4 The Altivar Viewer for Pocket PC screen is used to display a table of the main drive data. The Web browsers for Pocket PC do not provide access to the screens shown opposite. Connections Redundant fibre optic ring Mbps Full-duplex Switch Switch Transceiver Switch () Premium Optical fibre () Transceiver Quantum Fibreoptic loop () () () Quantum Magelis Altivar 58 Altistart 48 Altivar 38 Altivar 58 () Splitter block The communication card is incorporated in the Altivar 58 drive and is connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via a /baset interface (RJ45). See page 4/5 for accessories and connecting cables. 4/4

388 Characteristics, references 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Ethernet TCP/IP network Type of link Characteristics Ethernet Structure Type Industrial local area network conforming to ANSI/IEEE Std 8.3 (4th edition ) Topology Star network Transmission Mode Manchester baseband. Half-duplex or full-duplex Data rate / Mbps with automatic recognition Medium STP double shielded twisted pair impedance Ω ±5Ω for baset or category 5 Ethernet cable conforming to standard TIA/EIA-568A Configuration Number of device stations Point-to-point connection (via RJ45 standard connector) enabling formation of a star network (the stations are connected to concentrators or switches) 64 stations max. per network Length m max. between concentrator and terminal device Ethernet functions Access security HTTP password. Password for modifications I/O scanning Performed from a master Ethernet module control words (outputs), 9 of which can be configured signalling words (inputs), 9 of which can be configured I/P addressing IP configuration via the drive operator terminal or via BOOTP. DHCP not supported. TCP/Modbus Client/server mode. 8 simultaneous connections. HTTP server Simultaneous connection of 8 Internet browsers possible File transfer FTP not supported Network management SNMP not supported Conforming to standards The communication card conforms to the following standards: ISO/IEC 88.3, ANSI/IEEE Std 8.3 (4th edition ), UL 58C, CSA C. N4 M95, e marking, Drive standards NF-EN578, IEC 68-3 class A Ethernet network connection elements VW3 A NEH4 Communication interfaces Description Communication card Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP / Mbps For drives ATV 38 ATV 58 () ATV 58F All ratings Factory-installed Web server cannot be modified Ethernet/Modbus bridge with x Ethernet baset port (RJ45 type) Connecting cables Description Connectors Length m Shielded twisted pair cables Create the link between the communication card and the Ethernet network Wiring systems Description Reference Weight kg VW3 A CEV 3 () Reference.5 Weight kg RJ45/RJ45 49 NTW 5 49 NTW5 49 NTW 4 49 NTW NTW8 Type of Ethernet network Available ports Reference Weight kg TF splitter blocks Mbps 4 baset ports 499 NEH baset ports 499 NOH5.9 basefl ports Mbps 4 basetx ports 499 NEH4.45 TF switches (3) / Mbps 5 baset/basetx 499 NES7.45 ports basetx ports 5 basetx ports 499 NOS7.45 basefx ports () Compatible from version V.3 ie8 of the ATV 58 drive. () Please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. (3) At Mbps, connection of the VW3 A583 communication card on the Ethernet network via a switch only authorises data exchange in Half Duplex NES7 4/5

389 Presentation 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Fipio bus Presentation Premium () Fipio bus TBX Module Gateway ATV 58 ATV 38 ATS 48 ATV 68 4 The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control system components, and conforms to the World FIP standard. The bus arbitrator is a PLC (Premium, PCX, etc). b Once they have been declared with the predefined profile, the following Altivar speed drives can be connected to the Fipio bus: v ATV38,ATV58andATV58FviaaVW3A583orVW3A583 communication card v ATV 68 via a VW3 A683 communication kit b The Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit can be connected to the Fipio bus via the LUF P gateway. Once the predefined gateway profile has been declared, configure the control and monitoring variables using ABC Configurator software (see pages 3/ and 3/3). An application using Altivar variable speed drives and the Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit on the Fipio bus is developed by simply declaring the device using PL7 software. () Please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. Characteristics: page 4/7 References: page 4/8 Connections: page 4/9 4/6

390 Characteristics 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Fipio bus Characteristics Bus type Fipio bus Structure Type Industrial bus conforming to the World FIP standard Topology Access method Devices linked by extensions or tap junctions Bus management by an arbitrator Transmission Mode Baseband physical layer on shielded twisted pair, according to standard NF C Data rate Medium Mbps Shielded twisted pair 5 Ω. Optical fibre 6.5/5 with the use of electrical/fibre optic repeaters Configuration No. of devices per segment 3 connection points per segment Maximum No.ofsegments 64 over all segments (7 for Premium Fipio, 6 ATV type drives max.) Unlimitedintreeorstararchitectures Limited to 5 cascaded segments (4 cascaded repeaters) The link between devices may cross 4 electrical/fibre optic repeaters maximum Length of bus () m maximum without repeater for an electrical segment 5 m maximum between the furthest devices (5 segments) 3 m between fibre optic repeaters For starters and drives ATS 48 ATV 38/58/58F ATV 58/58F ATV 68 Interfaces LUF P VW3 A583 VW3 A583 VW3 A683 Profiles FEDC3 or FED C 3P FEDC3 FSDC8P FEDC3 Control Monitoring 6 configurable words () 6 configurable words () 5 predefined words 5 predefined words predefined word, 3 configurable references 8 predefined words 8 predefined words predefined word, 3 configurable words 4 Configuration and adjustments Read/write access to all ATS 48 functions via the PLC application program Read/write access to all ATV 38/58/58F functions via the PLC application program Read/write access to predefinedfunctions in the PL7 software screens () For the Fipio bus, distance of 5, m maximum, please consult your Regional Sales Office. () To extend the I/O capacity to 6 control words and 6 monitoring words, use the ABC Configurator. Presentation: page 4/6 References: page 4/8 Connections: page 4/9 4/7

391 References 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Fipio bus 535 Fipio bus connection elements with Premium PLCs Description Communication card The card is equipped with a male 9-way SUB-D connector which can take a TSX FP ACC mobile connector for ATV 38/58/58F or a TSX FP ACC for a ready-assembled ATV 58E. Used for ATV 58 ATV 58F ATV 38 ATV 58 ATV 58F Reference Weight kg VW3 A583.3 VW3 A583.3 VW3 A583 Communication kit The kit comprises: b the Fipio communication card, equipped with a male 9-way SUB-D connector, which can take a TSX FP ACC removable connector with a TSX FP CApp trunk cable or TSX FP CCpp drop cable, b the communication interface, reference VW3 A83, b the connecting cable. Fit an external power supply 4 V c ma minimum (to be ordered separately). ATV 68 VW3 A VW3 A683 Fipio Modbus gateway The gateway is equipped with: b a Fipio male 9-way SUB-D connector which will take a TSX FP ACC mobile connector for connection with A TSX FP CApp trunk cable or a TSX FPpp drop cable, b an RJ45 connector for Modbus for connection with the VW3 A836Rpp cable Fit an external power supply 4 V c ma minimum (to be ordered separately). ATS 48 LUF P.4 Fipio bus connection elements with Series 7 PLCs Description Used for Reference Weight kg Communication card The card is equipped with a male 9-way SUB-D connector which can take a TSX FP ACC mobile connector for ATV 58E or TSX FP ACC for ATV 58H and ATV 58P with atsxfpcapp trunk cable or a TSX FP CCpp drop cable. This card may only be used with Series 7 PLCs. ATV 58 VW3 A583 A.3 Documentation User's manuals Description Language Reference Weight kg Fipio card VW3 A58 3 French VVDED English Fipio card VW3 A58 3 French VVDED34.5 English ATV 68 Fipio French English VVDED33. "Internal communication variables" ATV 38/58/58F Technical manual International technical manual (ITM) () French English French English VVDED DCI CD () Library on CD-ROM containing: - manuals and quick reference guides for starters and speed drives, - user's manuals for communication gateways. Nota : to order connection cables for the Fipio bus, please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. LUF P Presentation: page 4/6 4/8 Characteristics: page 4/7 Connections: page 4/9

392 Connections 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Fipio bus Fipio wiring system 7 Premium 3 ATV 58 Micro 5 c 9 9 c 5 Module ATV 68 8 XBT c LUF P 5 4 ATV 58 4 ATS 48 TSXFPCAp Trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 5 Ω (8 mm diameter) for standard environments and inside buildings. TSXFPCRp Trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 5 Ω (8 mm diameter) for harsh environments or use outside buildings. TSXFPCGp Tap link cable for TSX FPP / PCMCIA module card for Micro/Premium PLCs, FTX 47-4 terminal and PC compatibles. The bus is connected on the TSX FP ACC 4 junction box 9-way SUB-D connector. 3 TSXFPCCp Drop cable, double shielded twisted pair 5 Ω (8 mm diameter) for standard environments and inside buildings. 4 TSXFPACC7 Line terminator, to be placed at the end of each segment. 5 TSXFPACC4 Junction box: creates a tap link from the trunk cable for connecting a device via a TSX FP CCp drop cable. It also has a female 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting any device which connects to the bus via a PCMCIA card. TSXFPACC4 Polycarbonate junction box. 6 TSXFPACC6 Electrical repeater: used to increase the number of stations (64 max.) and to increase the length of the network by creating additional segments of m maximum (4 cascaded repeaters maximum allowing a network length of 5 m). 7 TSXFPACC TSXFPACC Female 9-way SUB-D connector for Fipio extensions or tap junctions. 8 TSXFPACC8MFibre optic/electrical repeater: used to interconnect electrical segments via a fibre optic link (excellent resistance for crossing zones subject to interference) or connecting a fibre optic device. 9 TSXFPJF Fibre optic jumper (length m): used for fibre optic connection of the TSX FP ACC 8M repeater to a patch panel. Maximum optical fibre length (6.5/5) between repeaters: 3 m. TSXFPACC9 Network wiring test tool: used to test the continuity of segments and connections on the various devices, as well as to check that line terminators have been inserted correctly. Presentation: page 4/6 Characteristics: page 4/7 References: page 4/8 4/9

393 Presentation 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus Plus bus Presentation Modbus Plus bus Premium TBX Module ATV 38 ATV 68 ATV 58/ ATV 58F The Modbus Plus network is a token network which enables point-to-point communication between the various subscribers. Each subscriber listens and speaks at the token rotation speed. 4 Altivar 38/58/58F/68 variable speed drives are connected to the Modbus Plus bus via: b a VW3 A583 communication card for ATV 38/58/58F, b a communication kit for ATV 68. Modbus Plus communication profile Altivar 38/58/58F/68 variable speed drives on the Modbus Plus bus, controlled by a PLC, are accessed by simple configuration in the PLC using Peer Cop services and the Modbus Plus network global data database. Rapid exchange of the main drive registers is thus made possible. The PLC/drive communication speed is not affected by the number of drives on the network ( maximum with Peer Cop rapid exchange). The other parameters, which are used less frequently, can be accessed via the standard PLC function block (MSTR) only for Altivar 38/58 and Altivar 58F drives. Rapid exchange PLC writing to drive (Peer Cop) 3 words for ATV 38/58/58F Frequency references Control register Low and high speed Preset speeds Acceleration/deceleration and IR compensation Voltage/frequency profile (U/F) Slip compensation Etc 4 words for ATV 68 Control register References Drive writing to PLC (Global Data) 3 words for ATV 38/58/58F Reference frequency/applied frequency Status register Motor current/speed Supply voltage Drive/motor temperature Read discrete or analogue I/O Number of faults Current fault Etc 4 words for ATV 68 Status register Motor frequency Motor speed Motor current Characteristics: page 4/ 4/ References: page 4/ Connections: page 4/3

394 Characteristics 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus Plus bus Characteristics Bus type Modbus Plus bus Structure Type Industrial bus Topology Access method Point-to-point, bus and self-healing ring Plug and play Transmission Mode Baseband physical layer on shielded twisted pair Data rate Medium Mbps, useful data rate, words/s Shielded twisted pair W BELDEN 984. Optical fibre 5/5, 6/5, /4 mm with the use of electrical/fibre optic repeaters Configuration No. of devices per segment 3 connection points per segment Maximum Number of segments 64 over all segments Unlimited in tree or star architectures Limited to 4 cascaded routers (4 cascaded repeaters) The link between devices should cross 4 electrical routers and/or 3 repeaters maximum Length of bus 45 m maximum without repeater for an electrical segment 8 m maximum between the furthest devices (3 repeaters) 3 m between fibre optic repeaters Services Modbus Plus Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: bytes maximum, compatible with all Modbus/Jbus devices 4 Application-to-application Security Monitoring Point-to-point messages (Peer Cop): 64 bytes in read and write mode, 64 bytes in broadcast mode via the global database Each frame is protected by a CRC 6 and an acknowledgement of receipt conforming to layers,, 7, of the OSI model Network diagnostics are performed by the PC software or by the standard PLC function block (MSTR) For drives ATV 38/58/58F ATV 68 Functions Peer Cop control and 3 predefined words predefined word, 3 configurable references adjustment Global Data monitoring 3 predefined words predefined word, 3 configurable words MSTR configuration and adjustment Read/write access to all ATV 38/58/58F functions by the PLC application program Presentation: page 4/ References: page 4/ Connections: page 4/3 4/

395 References 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus Plus bus 5353 Modbus Plus bus connection elements Cards Description Used with Reference Weight kg Communication card ATV 38 The card is equipped with a female 9-way SUB-D ATV 58 connector which can take a Modbus Plus drop cable ATV 58F with connectors, reference 99 NAD or 99 NAD 3. This cable should be connected to a Modbus Plus tap, reference 99 NAD 3 for connection to the Modbus Plus trunk cable, reference 49 NAA 7pp. To order cables and sockets, please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. VW3 A VW3 A583 Communication card The kit comprises: b the Modbus Plus card, equipped with a female 9- way SUB-D connector, which can take a Modbus Plus drop cable with connectors, reference 99 NAD or 99 NAD 3, to be connected to a Modbus Plus tap, reference 99 NAD 3 for connection to the Modbus Plus trunk cable, reference 49 NAA 7 pp (), b the communication interface, reference VW3 A683, b the connecting cable, reference VW3 A6833 Fit an external power supply c 4 V, ma minimum, type TBX SUP (to be ordered separately). ATV 68 VW3 A683.4 Modbus Plus connection accessories Description Used Reference Weight kg Modbus Plus tee Trunk cable tap link 99NAD3 ().5 Modbus Plus tool For easier insertion of cables into the tee ().5 VW3 A683 Modbus Plus bus connecting cables Description Used Length Position of Reference Weight From To connector kg Cables for Communication Modbus.4 m Right 99NAD9 (). Modbus Plus card Plus tee 6 m Right 99NAD93 ().3.4 m Left 99NAD8 (). 6m Left 99NAD83 ().3 Documentation Description Language Supplied Reference Weight kg Altivar 38/58/58F Modbus Plus user's manual French English With the communication card VVDED Altivar 68 user's manual French English With the communication kit VVDED3.8 () Products sold under the Modicon brand. Presentation: page 4/ 4/ Characteristics: page 4/ Connections: page 4/3

396 Connections 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus Plus bus Modbus Plus wiring system Premium Quantum Modbus Plus - network # Network # Quantum ATV 58 ATV 68 ATS 48 99NAD3 Tee for Modbus Plus NWRR85 Repeater for Modbus Plus network (extension to 64 subscribers or extension to 45 m) 3 49NRP54 Fibre optic repeater for Modbus Plus network 4 99NAD8 99NAD83 99NAD9 99NAD NAD 99NAD3 Modbus Plus cable (length.4 m) with connector exiting on left Modbus Plus cable (length 6 m) with connector exiting on left Modbus Plus cable (length.4 m) with connector exiting on right Modbus Plus cable (length 6 m) with connector exiting on right Modbus Plus cable dedicated to the Quantum PLC (length.4 m) with connector exiting on left Modbus Plus cable dedicated to the Quantum PLC (length 6 m) with connector exiting on right 6 NWBP85 Modbus Plus bridge 7 49NAA7 49NAA7 49NAA73 49NAA74 49NAA75 Modbus Plus cable on a 3 m reel Modbus Plus cable on a 5 m reel Modbus Plus cable on a 35 m reel Modbus Plus cable on a 455 m reel Modbus Plus cable on a 55 m reel 8 NWBM85 Modbus Plus communication gateway to 4 Modbus master or slave ports Presentation: page 4/ Characteristics: page 4/ References: page 4/ 4/3

397 Presentation, description 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via AS-Interface line Presentation Premium/Micro XVA indicator bank ATV 38 drives ATV 58/58F drives XBL keypad LF/LF starter (contactorbreaker) ASI ABLpppp power supply ABE-8 interface AS-Interface line 4 The cabling system comprises a master station (Premium, Micro PLC) and a maximum of 3 slave stations. 4 inputs and/or 4 outputs can be connected to each device, giving a maximum of 48 I/O on each segment. The AS-Interface PLC module, which supports the AS-Interface M profile, interrogates the devices connected on the AS-Interface line one by one and stores the data (status of sensors/actuators, operational status of devices) in the PLC memory. Communication management on the AS-Interface line is totally transparent with regard to the PLC application program. An AS-Interface power supply must be used for powering the various components on the cabling system. Ideally, this PSU should be situated nearest to the components with the largest power demands. For more detailed information, please consult our "AS-Interface cabling system" catalogue. Description ATV 38/58/58F drives are connected to the AS-Interface line via the VW3 A5835 communication card. Any other drive or starter can be connected to the network via an ABE-8 discrete interface. The available functions then depend on the wiring between the ABE-8 interface module and the drive or starter and their I/O configuration. The functions available are: b control of logic commands: forward/reverse, enable preset speeds, b reading of states: drive fault, speed reached, etc. Start-stop commands via the AS-Interface line The AS-Interface line communication card is used to perform the following commands: forward, reverse, normal stop on deceleration ramp, fast stop, DC injection stop, freewheel stop, fault reset (to reset the drive). Speed commands via the AS-Interface line One of the following operating modes can be chosen: directions of operation with 4 preset speeds, direction of operation with 7 preset speeds, + speed/- speed. Selection is made via the AS-Interface line, using parameters. Speed commands via analogue input Inputs AI and AI can be used to accept a frequency reference. 4/4

398 Software setup, diagnostics, references Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via AS-Interface line 4 Software setup The AS-Interface line is configured using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. The utilities available are based on the principle of simplicity: b management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (this management is transparent to the user), b topological I/O addressing: each AS-Interface slave declared on the line is assigned a topological address on the line. This is transparent to the user, b each sensor/actuator on the AS-Interface line is treated as an in-rack input/ output by the PLC. Configuration of the AS-Interface slave devices using PL-7 Using the configuration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices ( to 3), i.e. all 48 I/O. The user selects the AS-Interface device reference from the various product families. This selection determines the AS-Interface profile and parameters associated with the device. Diagnostics Diagnostics performed using the display unit on the Micro/Premium PLC can be completedusingapccompatiblewithpl7microorpl7junior/pro. The terminal connected to the PLC is used for operational diagnostics of the master module, the AS-Interface line and the slave devices on the AS-Interface line. These diagnostics are performed using a single screen divided into four sections providing information on: Operational status of the AS-Interface module (RUN, ERR, I/O) Operational status of the AS-Interface channel connected to the module 3 Faulty slave 4 Data relating to any selected slave (profile, parameters, forcing, etc.) In the event of an AS-Interface module or channel fault, a second screen can be accessed, which clearly shows the type of fault, which may be at internal or external level References AS-Interface line connection elements Description Reference Weight kg ATV 58/58F communication card VW3 A Interfaces for discrete I/O with AS-Interface line for drive and starter Number Function Voltages Output Reference Weight of Type No. Inputs Outputs current/ channels channel V V A kg 8 Input 4 line ABE 8S44SBB.4 Output 4 c VW3 A5835 Connection accessories for AS-Interface flat cable Description Power supply Length m Flat cables for AS- Interface line For AS- Interface line (yellow) Reference Weight kg XZ CB.4 5 XZ CB Tap link for connection to a cable XZ CB 7. XZ CG.5 ABE 8S44SBB XZ-CBpp 4/5

399 Presentation, characteristics 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus bus Presentation Quantum TSX Premium TSX Micro Module ATV 3 ATV 58F ATV 58 ATV 58E ATV 68 4 The Modbus protocol is a master-slave protocol. Two exchange mechanisms are possible: b Question/answer: the requests from the master are addressed to a given slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been interrogated. Characteristics b Broadcast: the master broadcasts a message to all the slave stations on the bus, which execute the command without transmitting a response. Altistart 48 starters and Altivar 3/38/58/58F speed drives are connected to the Modbus bus via their terminal port. On Altivar 38/58/58F drives, the terminal port can be freed up by using a communication card. Altivar 68 speed drives are connected to the Modbus bus via a communication module. Type of connection Terminal port Module Communication card For starters and drives ATS 48 ATV 3/38/58/58F ATV 68 ATV 38/58/58F Structure Type Industrial bus Physical interface RS 485 Access method Master/slave type Transmission Mode RTU RTU or ASCII Data rate 9. or 9.6 Kbps p p p p 4.8 Kbps p p p.4 and. Kbps p Medium Double shielded twisted pair Configuration Number of devices 8, 7 or 3 slaves, depending on polarisation () Type of polarisation Pulldown resistors of 4.7 kω No pulldown Length of bus or 3 m excluding tap links, depending on polarisation () Tap link 3 or m maximum, depending on polarisation () Configurable No pulldown or pulldown resistors of 4.7 kω () See the configuration table on page 4/7. Configuration: page 4/7 4/6 Connections: page 4/7 References: pages 4/8 and 4/9

400 Configuration, connections 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus bus Configuration on the basis of polarisation The specification of the physical layer provided by standard RS 485 is incomplete. Various polarisation diagrams can therefore be applied, depending on the environment in which the equipment is to be used. Slave Without polarisation With polarisation 4.7 kω Master With polarisation 4.7 kω Configuration not recommended Uni-Telway type configuration 7 slaves Length of bus: m Tap link: m max. FitanRClineterminator With polarisation 47 Ω Jbus type configuration 3 slaves Length of bus: 3 m Tap link: 3 m max. Fit a line terminator (R=5 Ω) 8 slaves Length of bus: m Tap link: m max. Connections Connections via splitter blocks and RJ45 type connectors PLC () Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC 3 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 4 Modbus drop cable VW3A836Rpp 5 Line terminators VW3A836RC 6 Modbus T-junction boxes VW3A836TFpp (with cable) 4 Starters/drives Connections via junction boxes PLC () Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC 3 Modbus cable TSX CSA p 4 Junction box TSX SCA 5 5 Subscriber sockets TSX SCA 6 6 Modbus drop cable VW3A836 7 Modbus drop cable VW3A836D3 Starters/drives Connections via screw terminals In this case, use a VW3 A8 36 D3 Modbus drop cable and VW3A836DRCline terminators. () Please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. Presentation: page 4/6 Characteristics: page 4/6 References: pages 4/8 and 4/9 4/7

401 References 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus bus 5976 VW3 A6833 Communication module Description Reference Weight kg Communication module for ATV 68 fitted with an RJ45 connector and a female 9-way SUB-D connector VW3 A Connection accessories Description Junction box 3 screw terminals, RC line terminator Subscriber sockets female 5-way SUB-D connectors and screw terminals, RC line terminator Modbus splitter block RJ45 type connectors and screw terminal Line terminators () For RJ45 connector Unit reference Weight kg TSX SCA 5.5 TSX SCA 6.57 LU9 GC3.5 R=Ω, C =nf VW3A836RC. R=5Ω VW3A836R TSX SCA TSX SCA 5 For screw terminals R=Ω, C =nf VW3A836DRC. R=5Ω VW3A836DR. Modbus T-junction boxes With integrated cable (.3 m) VW3A836TF3 Connecting cables () Description Cables for Modbus bus Length m With integrated cable ( m) VW3A836TF Connectors Reference Weight kg 3 RJ45 connector VW3A836D3.5 and one end stripped 3 RJ45 connector VW3A836.5 and male 5-way SUB-D connector for TSX SCA 6 subscriber sockets.3 RJ45 connectors VW3A836R3.5 RJ45 connectors VW3A836R.5 Cable for module 3 RJ45 connectors VW3A836R3.5 3 male 9-way SUB-D connector and male 5- way SUB-D connector for TSX SCA 6 subscriber sockets VW3 A RJ45 connectors VW3 A RS 485 double Supplied without connector TSX CSA shielded twisted pair cables Supplied without connector TSX CSA 5 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 5 ()Soldinlotsof. () Use the table below to select the appropriate connection cables: Junction box TSX SCA 5 Subscriber sockets TSX SCA 6 Splitter block LU9 GC3 ATS 48 ATV 3 Cable VW3A836D3 Cable VW3A836 ATV 38/58/58F Terminal port Cable TSX CSApp + connector (3) Cable VW3 A58 36 Cable Cable VW3A836Rpp VW3 A8 36 D3 (3) Male 9-way SUB-D connector (to be ordered separately). ATV 38 Communication card Cable TSX CSApp + connector (3) Cable VW3 A58 33 (included in the kit) ATV 68 Cable TSX CSApp + connector (3) Cables VW3 A68 33 VW3 A68 36 Cable Cables VW3 A8 36 D3 VW3 A68 33 VW3A836D3 Presentation: page 4/6 Characteristics: page 4/6 Configuration: page 4/7 Connections: page 4/7 4/8

402 References (continued) 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Modbus bus Modbus bus connection kits Description Used for RS485 connection kit ATV 38/58/58F between a TSX SCA 6 subscriber in place of socket and the terminal port, the operator comprising: terminal b cable (length 3 m) with one male 9-way SUB-D connector and one male 5-way SUB-D connector b "RS485" user s manual b "Communication variables" user's manual For protocol Modbus RTU () Reference Weight kg VW3 A Communication kit ATV 58 comprising: with operator b communication card terminal equipped with a male 9-way SUB-D connector b x 3 m cable with: v male9-waysub-d connector for connection to the communication card and v male5-waysub-d connector for connection to a TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket Documentation Uni-Telway, Modbus ASCII Modbus RTU/Jbus VW3 A Description Format Reference Weight kg International technical manual (ITM) () CD-ROM DCI CD () Modbus RTU only, 8 drives maximum on the network, 96 bps fixed speed for the ATV 58, 96/9, bps adjustable speed for the ATV 3. () Library containing: - manuals and quick reference guides for starters and speed drives, - user's manuals for communication gateways. Presentation: page 4/6 Characteristics: page 4/6 Configuration: page 4/7 Connections: page 4/7 4/9

403 Presentation, characteristics 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Uni-Telway bus Presentation Premium Micro XBT ATV 58 ATV 38 4 The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication between control system components (PLCs, HMI terminals, supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical controllers, etc.). Characteristics Bus type Uni-Telway For drives ATV 38/58/58F Structure Type Industrial bus Physical interface RS 485 isolated Link Multidrop Access method Master/Slave type Transmission Mode Asynchronous transmission in baseband Data rate Kbps Medium Double shielded twisted pair It is suitable for architectures designed to pilot control and monitoring equipment via a PLC, or architectures used for HMI (supervision, etc). The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station (Premium, Micro) which manages the allocation of bus access rights to the various connected stations (known as slave stations) that can communicate with one another. Configuration Number of devices 8 devices maximum Length of bus m max. excluding tap links Tap links m maximum Service UNI-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation (question/response), of up to 4 bytes () initiated by any connected device Unsolicited point-to-point data without confirmation of up to 4 bytes () initiated by any connected device Broadcast messages of up to 4 bytes () initiated by the master device Other functions Security Monitoring Transparent communication, via the master, with any device in an X-WAY architecture Diagnostics, debugging, adjustment, programming of PLCs Check character on each frame, acknowledgement and, if required, repetition of messages ensure security of transmission Bus status table, transmission error counters and device status can be accessed by program in each device () Limited to 8 bytes with Micro/Premium PLC terminal port. 4/

404 Connections, references 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication via Uni-Telway bus Uni-Telway bus wiring system Premium Micro (TER terminal port) Adaptor 4 ATV 38 ATV 58 ATV 38 Premium + TSX SCP 4 (PCMCIA card) 535 TSX SCA ppp Bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be connected to the earth of each device. TSX SCA 5 Passive junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line. 3 TSX SCA 6 Passive -channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, used for coding the address of two connected devices, and matching the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line. 4 TSX SCP 4 PCMCIA card for connecting Micro ()/Premium PLCs to the Uni-Telway bus. 5 TSX SCY CU 653 Uni-Telway connecting cable between the integrated channel of the TSX SCY 6 module and the TSX SCA 6 subscriber socket. 6 TSX P ACC Connection box, used for connecting a Micro/Premium to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC terminal port. The connecting cable (length m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for distances > m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used to set the operation of the terminal port (Uni-Telway master/slave or character mode). 7 TSX SCP CU 43 Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP 4 PCMCIA card (on TSX P57 pm processor or TSX SCY 6 module) and the TSX SCA 5 junction box VW3 A5833 Uni-Telway bus connection elements Description Used with For protocol Reference Weight kg Communication kit ATV 38 comprising a communication card fitted ATV 58 with a male 9-way SUB-D connector, ATV 58F andone3mcablewithsub-d connectors: b male 9-way for connection to the communication card b male 5-way for connection to a TSX SCA 6 connector () To order other cables and connection accessories, please consult our "Modicon Premium and PL7 software" catalogue. Uni-Telway, Modbus ASCII, Modbus, RTU/Jbus VW3 A Extension card Connection via screw terminals RTV 74/ RTV 84 Uni-Telway, Modbus VW RZD.55 TSX SCA 6 () With TSX 37- PLC () The TSX SCA 6 junction box comprises female 5-way SUB-D subscriber sockets. 4/

405 Presentation, description, setting-up 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication gateways LUF P Presentation Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between Modbus and field buses such as Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet. After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by the Modbus bus and make this information available for read/write functions (command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses. An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a 35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus bus. Example of architecture LUF P Configuration of gateway by PC Model U starter-controllers 4 Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet () Modbus 565 ATS 48 ATV 3 ATV 38 ATV 58 ATV 58F () Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop. Description Front panel of the product LED indicating : - communication status of the Modbus buses, - gateway status, - communication status of the Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet bus. Connectors for connection to Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet buses Underside of product 3 RJ45 connector for connection on the Modbus bus 4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC 5 c 4 V power supply Software set-up For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software. For the Profibus DP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using ABC Configurator. This software is included: b in the PowerSuite software workshop for PC (see page 3/3), b in the TeSys model U user's manual. Characteristics, references : page 4/3 Dimensions : page 4/3 4/

406 Characteristics, references, dimensions 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication gateways LUF P Characteristics Bus type Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet Environment Conforming to IEC 664 Degree of pollution: Ambient air temperature Around the device C Degree of protection IP Electromagnetic compatibility Emission Conforming to IEC 58-: 993 Immunity Conforming to IEC 6-6-: 999 Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected y 8 Connection Modbus By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard To a PC By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit Field bus By SUB D9 female connector By SUB D9 female connector By 5-way removable screw connector Supply V External supply, c 4 ± % Consumption Max. ma 8 Typical ma Indication/diagnostics By LED on front panel Services Profile FED C3 or FED C3P Command 6 configurable words () configurable words 56 configurable words Monitoring 6 configurable words () configurable words 56 configurable words Configuration and adjustment By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW) () If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited to a total of 6 words. References Description For use with With bus type Reference Weight kg Connection accessories TSX FP ACC Communication gateways TeSys Model U starter-controllers, Altistart 48, Altivar 3, 38, 58 and 58F Description For use with Length m Fipio/Modbus LUF P.45 Profibus DP/Modbus LUF P7.45 DeviceNet/Modbus LUF P9.45 Connectors Reference Weight kg Connection cables Modbus () 3 RJ45 type connector and VW3A836D3.5 one end with stripped wires.3 RJ45 type connectors VW3A836R3.5 RJ45 type connectors VW3A836R.5 3 RJ45 type connectors VW3A836R3.5 Connectors Fipio SUB-D 9 male connector TSX FP ACC NAD 9 3 Documentation Dimensions Profibus mid line Profibus line end SUB-D 9 male connector 49 NAD 9 4 SUB-D 9 male connector 49 NAD 9 3 Description Medium Language Reference Weight kg User's manual for TeSys model U range (3) CD-Rom Multilingual : English, French, German, Italian, Spanish LU9 CD. () See pages 4/6 and 4/7. (3) This CD-Rom contains user's manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software, ABC Configurator. = = 75 7 Presentation, description : page 4/ Setting-up : page 4/ 4/3

407 Presentation, description, setting-up 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication gateway LA9 P37 Presentation Communication gateway LA9 P37 provides connection between the Profibus DP and Modbus buses. It is a Slave on the Profibus DP bus and Master on the Modbus bus. It manages information present on the Modbus bus to make it available for read/write functions in the Master PLC on the Profibus DP bus. Gateway LA9 P37 consists of a box which can be clipped onto a 35 mm omega rail. It manages up to5 Slaves on the Modus bus. Example of architecture Profibus DP Modbus LT6 P LT6 P ATS 48 ATV 3 Gateway LA9 P37, Tap-off cable VW3 P7 36 R, 3 Modbus splitter box LU9 GC3, 4 Cable TSX CSA p, 5 Tap-link cable VW3 A8 36 Rpp, 6 Tap-link cable VW3 A8 36 D3, 7 Line end adapter VW3 A8 36 RC. Description Gateway LA9 P37 comprises : A SUB-D 9-way female connector for connection to the Profibus DP bus, A line end adapter on the Profibus DP bus, 3 Gateway address coding on the Profibus DP bus, 4 Status signalling LED, 5 RJ 45 female connector for connection on the Modbus bus, 6 c 4 V power supply. Software set-up The gateway is configured using the standard software tools for the Profibus bus. For the Premium automation platform, use SYCON configurator software. The user's manual (.PDF) and the gateway description file (.GSD) are supplied on diskette with the gateway. Characteristics, references : page 4/5 Dimensions : page 4/5 4/4

408 Characteristics, references, dimensions 4 Starters, drives and communication 4 Communication gateway LA9 P Characteristics Environment Conforming to IEC 664 Degree of pollution: Ambient air temperature Around the device C Degree of protection IP Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected 5 Connection on Modbus RJ 45 connector Profibus SUB-D 9-way female connector Supply External supply, c 4 V ± % Consumption ma 5 on c 4 V Indication/diagnostics By LED Services Command 6 words Monitoring 6 words Configuration and adjustment By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW) References Description For use with Reference Weight kg Profibus DP/Modbus communication gateway LT6 P ATS 48 ATV 3/38/58/58F LA9 P37.6 Description For use with Length m RJ 45 cable with stripped wires Screw terminal block - T-junction box TSX SCA 5 - Y-junction subscriber socket TSX SCA 6 Reference Weight kg 3 VW3 A8 36 D3.5 4 SUB-D connector (to be ordered separately) -LT6P(SUB-D9female) - ATV 58 (SUB-D 9 male) 873 LA9 P37 RJ 45-RJ 45 cable ATS 48 ATV 3 Modbus splitter box LU9 GC3 VW3 P7 36 R.5 Connectors Profibus mid line 49 NAD NAD 9 3 Dimensions LA9 P37 Profibus line end 49 NAD ,5 35 Presentation, description : page 4/4 Setting-up : page 4/4 4/5

409 5/

410 Contents 5-Technical appendices and substitution Technical appendices b Speed drive v Technical and practical information... page5/ v Mechanical information... page5/3 v Conversion tables for standard units... page5/4 v Driving machines... page5/6 b Electronic speed drive v Cage asynchronous motors.... page5/ v Power circuits... page5/5 v Application examples.... page5/6 v Harmonics... page5/7 v Nominal load currents of cage asynchronous motors... page5/3 Substituting starters b ATS 3, ATS 3P... page5/4 b ATS page5/5 Substituting variable speed drives b ATV8,ATV6... page 5/6 b ATV page5/7 b ATV page5/7 b ATV page5/9 5 5/

411 General 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Technical and practical information Technical and practical information Units International System of Units (SI): MKSA Size - base units: - length l in metres - (m) - mass m in kilograms - (kg) - time t in seconds - (s) - electric current in amperes - (A) Basic formulae Kinematic Rectilinear motion Length: L Circular motion Θ l = - r (radian) r l Speed: LT - Angular speed: L T - dl l dθ Θ V = = - (m/s) ω = = --- (rad/s) dr t dt t ω πn = (N: rpm) Speed: LT - l v = - = rω t (ω: rad/s) (v: m/s) 5 Acceleration: LT - Angular acceleration: L T - dv γ = (m/s) d Θ dω (rad/s ) dt α = dt = dt Tangential acceleration: LT - γ = rα (m/s ) Dynamic Rectilinear motion Circular motion Force: MLT - Torque: ML T - F = mγ (N newton) T = Fr (Nm or J/rad) () r F Starting force F = mγ Starting torque T = J dω dt J: moment of inertia (kg.m ) Work: ML T - Work: ML T - W = FI (Joule) W = TΘ (Joule) Power: ML T -3 Power: ML T -3 W FI TΘ P = ---- = = F v (W watt) P = = T ω t t t (W watt) watt joule = second P = T πn Energy: the kinetic energy is determined by the speed of the object. W=/mv W=/mr ω =/Jω () In order to avoid confusion, you are advised not to use the symbol mn. 5/

412 General 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Mechanical information Mechanical information Old units Force Work Power Torque kgp = 9.8 N = approx. N = dan kgm=9.8nm=9.8j kgm/s = 9.8 Nm/s = 9.8 J/s = 9.8 W ch = 75 kgm/s = 75 x 9.8 = 736 W mkgp=9.8nm Other information Moment of inertia J (kgm ) J = mr = md 4 m=mass,inkg r = gyration radius (m) D = gyration diameter (m) Inertia is sometimes expressed in md, in which case the value of J can be obtained by dividing by 4. The moment of inertia J of a mass rotating at speed N connected to a shaft rotating at speed N is calculated as follows: J = J N N Gyration radius b Solid cylinder r = R R = cylinder radius r = gyration radius (or r =.77 R) 5 b Hollow cylinder r R + R = J mr m R + R = = R R Centrifugal force F = m ω r In circular motion at constant speed ω: F: N m: kg ω: rad/s r: m 5/3

413 General 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Conversion tables for standard units Conversion tables for standard units Length Units m in. ft yd metre(m) inch(in.or") foot(ftor') yard(yd) Area Units m sq.in sq.ft sq.yd square metre (m ) square inch (sq.in.) (in ) square foot (sq.ft.) (ft ) square yard (sq.yd) (yd ) Volume Units m 3 dm 3 cu.in. cu.ft cu.yd cubicmetre(m 3 ) cubic decimetre (dm 3 ) (litre) cubic inch (cu.in.) (in 3 ) cubic foot (cu.ft) (ft 3 ) cubic yard (cu.yd) (yd 3 ) Mass Units kg oz lb kilogram (kg) ounce (oz).8.65 pound(lb) Pressure Units Pa MPa bar psi pascal (Pa) or newton per square metre (N/m ) mega pascal (MPa) or newton per mm (N/mm ) bar(bar) pound weight per square inch ( lbf/in. )(psi) /4

414 General (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Conversion tables for standard units Conversion tables for standard units (continued) Angular speed Units rad/s rpm radian per second (rad/s) revolution per minute (rpm).5 Linear speed Units m/s km/h m/min metre per second (m/s) kilometre per hour (km/h) metre per minute Power Units W ch HP ft-lbf/s watt(w) metric horsepower (ch) horsepower (HP) ft-lbf/s Force Units N kgf lbf pdl newton(n) kilogram force (kgf) pound weight (lbf) poundal (pdl) Energy-Work-Heat Units J cal kwh BTU joule(j) calorie(cal) kilowatt-hour (kwh) British thermal unit (BTU) Moment of inertia Units kg.m lb.ft lb.in oz.in kilogram/square metre (kg.m ) pound/square foot (lb.ft ) pound/square inch (lb.in ) ounce/square inch (oz.in) /5

415 Principle 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Driving machines Driving machines Generally, the machine connected to the motor introduces a moment of inertia J (kg.m ) to which the moment of inertia of the motor, which may be significant, must be added. Calculating this total inertia enables transient states (starts and stops) to be analysed although it has no effect in steady state. Circular motion If the machine is being driven by a gearbox at speed N, its moment of inertia at the motor rotating at speed N is expressed using the formula: J machine at the motor =Jmachine N N Translatory motion If the machine of mass m (kg) moves at linear speed V (m/s), the moment of inertia at drive shaft level for the speed of rotation w (rad/s) of the drive motor is expressed using the formula: J machine m V ω m V 36 = = where 4π N ω πn = Starting In order to start within a specific time t (changing from stop to angular speed ω), the average accelerating torque required (Ta) can be calculated if the moment of inertia Jisknown. Ta (Nm) = J (kg m) dω(rad/s) = J (kg m) πn(rpm) dt (s) 6t (s) 5 ω N Tr Ta T ω N t The average accelerating torque Ta and the average resistive torque Tr due to the mechanics determine the average motor torque required during the starting time Ts. Ts = Tr + Ta Conversely, if an accelerating torque Ta is fixed, the starting time, for Ta constant, is determined by: Jω t = Ta In practice: - For d.c. Ts = ktn where Tn = nominal motor torque k = motor overload coefficient. It is connected to the overload time and the initial temperature. Its value is usually between. and.9 (see the motor manufacturer's catalogue). In this zone, the armature current and the torque may be approximately proportional. - For a.c. Please refer to the overtorque and overcurrent characteristics given in the motor manufacturer's catalogue and to the operating characteristics given in this catalogue. Stopping If the machine is left alone when the supply voltage is disconnected, the deceleration torque will be equal to the resistive torque: ω N ω N Tdec = Tr Tdec = Tr = J dω dt Tr T t The motor will stop after a period of time (t) has elapsed which is related to the moment of inertia by means of the ratio: t J = -----ω Tr if the value of Tr is more or less constant. 5/6

416 Principle (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Driving machines Driving machines (continued) Rheostatic braking If this stopping time is not acceptable, the deceleration torque must be increased by an electrical braking torque Tb such as: Tdec = Tr + Tb = J dω Tdec = Tr + Tb dt ω N ω N Tb Tr Braking may be rheostatic, but do remember that its effect will be proportional to the speed (Tb = kω). T t Regenerative braking Tb ω N Tr ω N Tdec = Tr + Tb Braking may be regenerative, which requires the use of reversible drives. If current limiting is applied, the braking torque remains constant until a stop is reached. T t The machine determines the size of the motor and the equipment, which must be suitable for both continuous and intermittent operation: frequent or fast stops, repeated load surges. Direction of operation Speed (N) nd quadrant st quadrant Torque (T) The illustration opposite shows the 4 operating options (4 quadrants) in the torque/speed range. They are summarised in the table below. 5 3 rd quadrant 4 th quadrant N T Rotation Machine operating Torque T Speed N Product TxN Quadrant st direction as a motor as a generator + nd direction as a motor + 3 as a generator + 4 As a general rule for all our products, applying a positive reference voltage will causethemotortorotateinaclockwisedirection( st quadrant) if the appropriate polarities are applied at the armature and at the field coil. Torque and power It is essential to determine the torque/speed characteristic of the various machines driven in order to select the correct motor/drive assembly. P.T.% Curve P.T.% Curve T 5 P 5 T P N % 5 5 N % Curve 3 Curve 4 P.T.% P P.T.% P 5 T 5 T In practice, all machines can be classified in 4 basic categories: - constant torque (curve ), - constant power (curve ), - torque increasing linearly with the speed T=kN, the power P varies in accordance with the square of the speed (curve 3), - torque increasing with the square of the speed T=kN, the power varies in accordance with the cube of the speed (curve 4). Some machines may have operating characteristics which are the result of a combination of these different categories. They are limited in number N % 5 5 N % 5/7

417 Principle (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Driving machines Driving machines (continued) Constant torque With the exception of pumps, 9 % of the machines used in industry are systems which operate at constant torque. The torque required by the machine is not determined by the speed. If the speed doubles, the power also doubles. On starting, the starting overtorque is often much greater than the resistive torque which is introduced subsequently. Constant power For machines operating at constant power, the power required is not determined by the speed and the torque will vary so that it is inversely proportional to the speed. This type of operation is most often found in machine tools and in winding systems. Drilling, cutting, milling and turning applications are usually performed at constant power, which means that the torque must be high at low speed and low at high speed. The motor must supply maximum torque at minimum speed, which usually requires the drive to be oversized in relation to the motor. Torque increasing linearly with the speed For these machines, the torque varies linearly with the speed, although the power will vary in accordance with the square of the speed. This may be found in certain helical positive displacement pumps and mixers. 5 Torque increasing with the square of the speed For these machines, the torque will vary in accordance with the square of the speed, although the power will vary in accordance with the cube of the speed. This type of operation is found in centrifugal pumps and fans. In some cases, the power required by a fan or an air blower will vary in accordance with the fifth power of the speed. This characteristic must be taken into account when selecting the motor and associated drives. In this configuration, when the speed doubles, the torque is multiplied by 4 and the power by 8. Operating range at constant torque The table below shows how different types of machine behave during starting and in continuous operation. Type of machine Starting torque or Drive selection overtorque during operation Machine with ball or roller to5% Normal bearings Machine with axle bearings 3to5% Normal High friction conveyor or machine Machine with jerky operating cycle (press, machine with cams or connecting rod systems) High inertia, machine with flywheel or rotating masses (centrifuge) 6to5% 5to6% Oversize the drive and, if necessary, the motor Oversize the drive and the motor Thesizeofthedrivewill depend on the time required for starting and/or braking 5/8

418 Principle (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Driving machines Driving machines (continued) Operating range at constant torque The power ratings given in the catalogues generally correspond to the nominal speed of the motors. The cooling of self-cooled motors is directly linked to their speed and is therefore reduced as the motor slows down. If continuous operation at nominal torque is required at low speed, you must select a motor with auxiliary forced cooling. Torque limiting The drives have a configurable function for limiting the current drawn and thus the torque applied by the motor. The maximum current value is I max. continuous, except in specific operating circumstances where this value may be exceeded temporarily. This method of limiting protects the motor and the machine being driven. Some drives have two-state limitation which permits temporary overloads on starting up to.3 times the nominal torque (Tn). Overloads are permitted on high-performance (e.g. static reversible) drives. Examples of theoretical applications Use the following information to determine the nominal power Pn of a motor: PD =8kg.m n = 3rpmin5s Ts = Tn Tr =. Tn Answer Pn = Tn ωn Ts = Tr + Ta thereforeta=ts-tr=tn-.tn=.9tn Ta therefore Tn = Ta J dω PD πn 8 π3 = = = = 5.6 Nm dt therefore Tn = = 66. Nm.9 Pn = 66. π = 757 W or kw 6 5 Pn Power of motor to be controlled = = = 4.5 kw with efficiency η.85 η =.85 Use the following information to determine the starting time of a machine: Pn on shaft = 5 kw N = 3 rpm Ts =.6 Tn Tr =.8 Tn J machine at the motor =. kg.m J motor =.63 kg m Answer J, total inertia = =.63 kg.m πn ωn = = 34 rad/s 6 Pn 5 Pn = Tn ωn or Tn = = = 6 Nm ωn 34 Ta = Ts Tr =.6.8 =.8 Tn =.8 6 =.8 Nm Ta = J dω or t J ωn 34 = = = 6.5 s dt Ta.8 5/9

419 Principle (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Speed drive Driving machines Driving machines (continued) Examples of theoretical applications (continued) Determine the starting time of a wheel driven by a motor (assume that the entire mass is concentrated on the rim): Wheel: r=6cm Mass: kg Nr = rpm Motor: Pn = 5 kw N = 3 rpm JM =.63 kg.m η Ts =.6 Tn Tr =. Tn Answer: Total inertia Jt = Jr + JM = mr =..6 =36kg.m Jr 36 JrM at the motor = K = =.4 kg.m 9 ΩM N where K = = = 3 Ωr Nr Motor Wheel r Jt = =.463 kg.m Pn πn Pn = Tnω or Tn = where ωn = = 34 rad/s ωn 6 5 Tn = = 6 Nm 34 Ta = Ts Tn =.6 Tn. Tn =.4 Tn Ta J dω Jω = or t = = dt Ta = s 5 Use the following information to determine the braking time and the number of stopping revolutions: Brakingtimetb=3tM where tm = motor time Θa =tmωo Braking torque Tb = 3 Tn N = 75 rpm Pn = 5 kw PD =kg.m PD Answer: J = = -- =.5 kg.m 4 4 πn ωo = ωn = = 83 rad/s 6 Pn 5 Tn = = = 8 Nm ωn 83 Tb = 3 Tn = 3 8 = 46 Nm J.5 83 tm = dω = =.37 s Tb 46 ta = 3 tm = 3.37 s whereta=stoptime Number of revolutions to stop: Θa = tm ωo = = rad or = revs π Use the following data to determine the Tr, Ts, Tn and Ta values of a machine: A solid coil weighing 5 kg rotating at 5 rpm, driven by a kw motor rotating at 8 rpm, time to implement = 6 s Ts = Tn Check that the data is compatible r = 46 Motor Answer: Coil R = 535 MR Jc = = = 5 kg.m J 5 Jc at the motor = JcM = K = =.6 kg.m R where K = --- r Ta J dω.6 9 = = =.7 Nm dt 6 Pn πn Tn = = =.5 Nm ωn = = 9 rad/s ωn 9 6 Ts = Tn =.5 = Nm Tr = Ts Ta =.7 = 9.3 Nm 5/

420 Characteristics 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Cage asynchronous motors Cage asynchronous motors Basic characteristics Depending on the speed, the torque for an asynchronous motor will vary in accordance with the square of the voltage. T φ Rωg = ko () R + L ω g or T = kφ at ωg constant ω ωr g = ω L = rotor inductance R = rotor resistance φ =flux ωg =ω ωr ωg = angular speed of field in relation to rotor ω = synchronous angular speed ωr = rotor angular speed g=slip p = number of pairs of poles The flux Φ will be proportional to U if the frequency remains constant. ω f = therefore T = KU π T g ω Operating zone The lower the stator voltage, the lower the torque for a given speed. The torque increases, exceeds a maximum value and stops at synchronous speed NS. The maximum torque is defined based on (). 5 NS N Divide the second part by R ωg: φ T = ko L ωg R R ωg The product of the two expressions with the new denominator is constant. The value of the denominator is minimum and that of the torque maximum if: R ωg L ωg = or R = L ω g where ωg = R R --- L The maximum value becomes: T = ko φ L which is independent of ωg and R. The operation of the motor is stable above the speed corresponding to the maximum torque. Below this, the motor is unable to drive the load and stalls. 5/

421 Characteristics (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Cage asynchronous motors Cage asynchronous motors (continued) Basic characteristics (continued) Current I 7 Id ,5,5,75 NS Torque T Current - Is = starting current - In = nominal current Torque - Ts = starting torque - Tm = maximum torque - Tn = nominal torque Speed - Ns = synchronous speed Ns 6 f = p - Nn = nominal motor speed, corresponds to the speed of the rotor for the nominal motor load gn = nominal slip Ns Nn gn = Ns Nn = Ns( gn) 5,5 Tm Ts,5 Tn,5 Tr,5,5,75 NS Nn Power - mechanical (useful output power on shaft) PU = Tω -electrical (electrical motor power) PE PU = η PE = UI 3cosϕ U = supply voltage I = rms current drawn by the motor Cos ϕ = power factor The torque/speed characteristic of single cage asynchronous motors (see curves below) indicates a low starting torque. Single cage T Double cage or deep slots T Resistive cage 3 N N Torque due to conducting cage Torque due to resistive cage 3 Resulting torque N Resistive cage Conducting cage Single cage Double cage Deep slots 5/

422 Operation 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Cage asynchronous motors Cage asynchronous motors (continued) To improve starting torque, modern motors have double cage or deep slot rotors. These include motors used with frequency inverters. Resistive cage motors are sometimes used when the speed range is relatively limited and the torque increases with the square of the speed. This is the case with fans connected to grading controllers. Operation at variable frequency Supplied with power by a frequency inverter, the operating characteristics of a constant load asynchronous motor are as follows: Below 5 Hz, T sω becomes dominant and the starting overtorque is limited naturally.,5 Tn Tn gω fs Hz Between 5 and 5 Hz, the supply voltage has a ratio U = kf. Therefore, the flux remains constant for the same number of slipped revolutions ωg and the torque does not change. It follows that the torque characteristics for all frequencies will remain parallel with those at 5 Hz. Above5Hz, the voltage U ceases to increase and the flux decreases by: f This has two consequences: - At constant slip g, the number of slipped revolutions gω increases by: In comparison, the motor torque falls by: - The maximum torque decreases by: f f f T Tn gω gω gω gω Hz Operating conditions The drive or frequency inverter has been designed to continuously supply the nominal current of the standardised power motor to which it is connected. The curve provides a typical illustration of the useful torque (Tu) which a self-cooled motor can supply continuously for the various display speeds between fmin and fn. T Tm Tn Tu fmin fn fs Hz fmin = between and 5 Hz depending on the type of drive fn = nominal output frequency: 5/6 Hz Tm = maximum torque Tn = nominal motor torque Tu = continuous useful torque For operation in continuous operation, the recommended torque Tu may vary between.8and.95tndependingonthetypeofdrive. For operation in transient operation, the maximum torque Tm may vary between.3 and.75 Tn depending on the type of drive. In both cases, observe the operating guidelines for each product, which can be foundinthecatalogue. 5/3

423 Operation (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Cage asynchronous motors Cage asynchronous motors (continued) Operation at variable voltage Squirrel cage asynchronous motor T Un = % Tr = kn Application on a load whose resistive torque is parabolic (ventilation). U = 85 % U = 65 % Curve T P3 Curve 3 4 Pi N Nmax Ns N N P Tr N N N Ns N Reducing the stator voltage reduces the available torque and operation continues based on the characteristics for decreasing torque (curve ). For example, when changing from to3,thespeeddropsfromn maximum to N (curve ). Above this, there is a risk of stalling because in 4, operation possible at Pi reaches the instability limit. Even a slight increase in the value of Tr will cause the speed to drop. The motor torque Tm will fall below the resistive torque Tr, which will causethespeeddroptoincrease up to P3. At this point, Tm will return toavalueequaltotrandthemotor will stabilise. 5 Resistive cage motor T The possible operating conditions described above can be avoided by using tricks to obtain the maximum torque at a very low frequency. 3 4 U Un For example, T max can be obtained for: R ωg = --- L Curve 3 U4 ua Un Nmax Ns N In order to increase ωs, the angular speed of the fields in relation to the rotor, simply increase the rotor resistance R. This will cause an increase in slip at maximum torque, thus increasing the operational stability zone of the motor. Wound rotor asynchronous motor T R3 R R R = Tr = kn The most common methods are: - using a resistive cage motor (curve 3), - using an appropriately ventilated wound rotor motor (curve 4) with external rotor resistors. Curves Tm = f (N) as a function of the resistance R introduced into the rotor circuit and at constant stator voltage. N3 N N R increased from R to R3 Curve 4 Nmax Ns N 5/4

424 Principle 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Power circuits Power circuits Pulse width modulator (PWM) The motor is supplied with power by a variable amplitude and frequency voltage wave. Every half-wave comprises a series of pulses of fixed amplitude and variable width. M 3 Fixed a.c./d.c. converter generally comprising one diode bridge Filter comprising one capacitor bank 3 a.c./d.c. pulse width modulator which can be used as: - a transistor commutator, - a GTO commutator (thyristor with built-in extinction circuit), - a thyristor commutator with an extinction circuit. U I t The shape of the voltage and current signals in the motor phases is illustrated in the diagrams opposite. This principle is used in Altivar drives, whose operating characteristics are described below by way of example. t In the drive, the PWM sinewave commutator comprises 6 transistors and 6 "freewheel" diodes. 5 Today, these components are IGBTs. This inverter bridge has been designed to supply the motor with a variable amplitude and frequency three-phase a.c. voltage system. The frequency variation in the voltage applied to the motor is obtained by varying the frequency of the control signals of transistors to 6. In order to eliminate torque transients, a special type of transistor control can be used to eliminate very low order harmonics. The resulting current is close to the sine wave. The voltage variation principle consists of modulating each base peak in order to obtain a voltage with an average value lower than that of the filtered d.c. voltage on each of the peaks. 3 5 L U L L3 4 6 V W M 3 Channel control 5/5

425 Selection 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Application examples Application examples Selecting a drive on a conveyor belt A conveyor belt whose load is more or less constant must operate in a speed range between and 3, which corresponds to a motor speed of 48 to 44 rpm. The resistive torque at the motor is 7 Nm. Answer TπN P useful required by the conveyor = Tωn = = = 55 W 6 6 Pmotor 55 Pusefultobesuppliedbythemotor = = = 8 W n gearbox.9 Determining the frequency at low speed 5 For 48 rpm, f = = 7 Hz 3 On the torque curve (below), the derating to be taken into account is.8. 8 Motor power = = 475 W.8 5 Torque T/Tn,75,5,5,95,75,5,5 The motor to be selected is a standard motor with a power rating that is immediately above.5 kw and supplied with power by a.5 kw Altivar drive. (5 Hz) (5 Hz) Selecting a drive on a fan Control of a fan at variable speed with a maximum flow rate of 5, m 3 /h at a pressure of 45 pascals and a speed of 3 rpm with efficiency of.68. Defining the motor Maximum useful output power drawn by the fan: Q M P Q=airflowinm 3 /s Pu = η M = air mass in kg/m 3 P = pressure in pascal or N/m Pu = = W Defining the drive Using an Altivar frequency inverter to power the motor requires the intended speed to be derated by.9. Pu 647 Pm = = = 788 W.9.9 or a standardised 7.5 kw motor. The drive selected should be the next highest rating, or, in this example, a 7.5 kw Altivar drive. 5/6

426 General 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Harmonics Harmonics Types of current drawn by the drives The currents drawn by the variable speed drives are not sinusoidal. The shape of these currents is illustrated in the curves below for different types of drive. Single phase Altivar drive,4,5,6,7,8 Three-phase Altivar drive (with additional line choke) ,6,7,8,9, These currents are therefore the result of the superimposition of a fundamental current (at the line frequency) and harmonic currents. 5 5/7

427 General (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Harmonics Harmonics (continued) Disturbance caused by harmonics The presence of harmonics in supply systems can cause numerous problems: b Overloading and aging of reactive power compensation capacitors b Overloading of neutral conductors due to the accumulation of third order harmonics generated by single phase loads b Distortion of the supply voltage which may disturb sensitive loads b Overloading of distribution networks due to an increase in the rms current b Overloading, vibration and aging of alternators, transformers, motors b Interference on telephone lines These types of disturbance may have serious consequences: b Premature aging of and irreparable damage to equipment b Oversizing of installations b Accidental tripping and downtime of installations All of these consequences have a considerable economic impact: costs incurred due to the oversizing of equipment or reduced service life, additional energy losses and loss of productivity. 5 Standards and recommendations The most important documents are as follows: b IEC 6-3- Electromagnetic compatibility; limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current 6 A per phase). This standard applies to electrical and electronic devices designed to be connected to low-voltage public distribution supplies. Limits for equipment with power ratings > kw used in professional applications are currently being developed. Variable speed drives are therefore not generally subject to the requirements of this standard. b IEC technical report Electromagnetic compatibility; limitation of emissions of harmonic currents in lowvoltage power supply systems for equipment with a rated current greater than 6 A. The recommendations contained in this document are valid for electrical or electronic equipment with a nominal current greater than 6 A designed to be connectedto5or6hzpublicsupplieswithamaximumvoltageequalto4v (single phase) or 6 V (three-phase). The purpose of this technical report is to provide recommendations for the connection of equipment which generates harmonics. Variable speed drives, when used with line chokes, generally comply with the limits prescribed in this document. If they do not, means of reducing harmonics must be used throughout the installation or a special agreement must be reached with the electricity supplier. 5/8

428 General (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Harmonics Harmonics (reduction of harmonic currents) Line chokes Line chokes are an inexpensive solution which can be applied to each device individually in order to reduce the harmonics emitted by Altivar drives. The inductances are calculated so that the value of the rms current drawn by the drive will not exceed that of the nominal current of the motor connected to the line supply. The inductance values are defined to create a voltage drop between 3 % and 5 % of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque at 5 Hz. The use of chokes is also recommended in particular under the following circumstances: b Line supply with significant disturbance from other equipment (interference, overvoltages) b Line supply with voltage unbalance between phases >.8 % of the nominal voltage b Drivesuppliedwithpowerbyalinewithverylowimpedance(inthevicinityof power transformers times more powerful than the drive rating) b Installation of a large number of frequency inverters on the same line b Reduction of overload in capacitors, if the installation has a bank to correct the power factor b Total power of all drives greater than % of the power of the installation Filter solutions The use of line chokes alone to reduce harmonic current emissions may not be enough to ensure the correct operation of the installation or to conform to strict harmonic distortion limits. 5 Filter solutions must also be provided if the power of all drives exceeds % to 3 % of the subscribed demand of the installation. Afiltermaybeinstalledforadrive,agroupofdrivesoranentireinstallation.Three types of filter are available: b Passive filters b Active sinewave compensators b Hybrid filters 5/9

429 General (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Harmonics Harmonics (continued) Passive filters The principle is based on "trapping" the harmonic currents in the L-C circuits connected on the harmonic orders to be eliminated. The filter is "stepped" - each step corresponds to a harmonic order. The fifth to seventh orders are most often filtered. The filter is selected on the basis of the harmonics generated and the line characteristics. This type of filter can also be used to reduce harmonic distortion already present in the electrical supply provided by the utility. I har M Harmonic generator Filter 5 5/

430 General (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Harmonics Harmonics (continued) Active Sinewave compensators Connected in parallel to the load and the line, these compensators measure the harmonic currents emitted by the load and generate opposing harmonic currents (Ica). The advantages are: b No dependency on the load or line characteristics b Auto-adaptation Is = Ich + Ica Is Ica Active comp. Ich Load 5 5/

431 General (continued) 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Harmonics Harmonics (continued) Hybrid filters The two previous types of device can be combined within a single device, creating a hybrid filter. This new filter solution enables the benefits of existing solutions to be combined in order to cover a wide range of power and performance. b Passive filter: v reactive power compensation, v high current filtering capacity. b Active compensator: v filtering on a broad frequency band. Is Ich If Ica Active comp. Load 5 5/

432 General 5 Technical appendices 5 Electronic speed drive Nominal load currents of cage asynchronous motors Nominal load current of cage asynchronous motors U V W 4-pole 5/6 Hz three-phase motors Power / 8 V V 3 V () 38 V 4 V 45 V 433/ 44 V 46 V () 5/ 55 V 575 V () 66 V 69 V 75 V V KW HP A A A A A A A A A A A A A A () NEC-compliant values (NEC - National Electrical Code). 5 These values have been provided by way of example and will vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer. 5/3

433 Substitution 5 Substituting starters 5 ATS 3, ATS 3P Old/new equivalence tables () These tables of equivalence can be used: - to substitute devices on the basis of line voltage and motor power, - to check the dimensions and position of connection terminals. The solutions offered are based on the equivalence between simple applications. For complex applications, check compatibility in the corresponding catalogue ATS 3 ATS 48 Old starters Reference Dimensions HxLxD mm ATS 3 or ATS 3P starters Line voltage V, 3-phase Position of the connection terminals Replaced by Reference Dimensions HxLxD mm ATS 48 starters Line voltage V, 3-phase Position of the connection terminals ATS 3 or ATS 3P U7N x 7 x 4 top and bottom ATS 48D7Q 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom DN 7 x 7 x 4 top and bottom ATS 48D7Q 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D6N 5 x 7 x 6 top and bottom ATS 48D7Q 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D3N 3 x 7 x 6 top and bottom ATS 48D3Q 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D44N 34 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48D47Q 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D7N 34 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48D75Q 9 x 9 x 35 top and bottom CN 39 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48CQ 9 x 9 x 35 top and bottom C5N 44 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48C4Q 34 x x 65 top and bottom C4N 685 x 374 x 69 bottom ATS 48C5Q 38 x 3 x 65 bottom C3N 685 x 374 x 69 bottom ATS 48C3Q 38 x 3 x 65 bottom C4N 95 x 4 x 353 bottom ATS 48C4Q 67 x 4 x 3 bottom C58N 95 x 4 x 353 bottom ATS 48C59Q 67 x 4 x 3 bottom C8N x766 x 353 bottom ATS 48MQ 89 x 77 x 35 bottom MN x766 x 353 bottom ATS 48MQ 89 x 77 x 35 bottom Line voltage V, 3-phase Line voltage V, 3-phase U7N x 7 x 4 top and bottom ATS 48D7Y 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom DN 7 x 7 x 4 top and bottom ATS 48D7Y 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D6N 5 x 7 x 6 top and bottom ATS 48DY 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D3N 3 x 7 x 6 top and bottom ATS 48D3Y 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D44N 34 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48D47Y 75 x 6 x 9 top and bottom D7N 34 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48D75Y 9 x 9 x 35 top and bottom CN 39 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48CY 9 x 9 x 35 top and bottom C5N 44 x 38 x 54 top and bottom ATS 48C7Y 34 x x 65 top and bottom C4N 685 x 374 x 69 bottom ATS 48C5Y 38 x 3 x 65 bottom C3N 685 x 374 x 69 bottom ATS 48C3Y 38 x 3 x 65 bottom C4N 95 x 4 x 353 bottom ATS 48C48Y 67 x 4 x 3 bottom C58N 95 x 4 x 353 bottom ATS 48C66Y 67 x 4 x 3 bottom C8N x766 x 353 bottom ATS 48MY 89 x 77 x 35 bottom MN x766 x 353 bottom ATS 48MY 89 x 77 x 35 bottom () For additional information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Selection guide: pages / and /3 5/4

434 Substitution 5 Substituting starters 5 ATS 46 Old/new equivalence tables () Old starters Reference Dimensions HxLxD mm ATS 46 starters Line voltage V, 3-phase Position of the connection terminals Replaced by Reference Dimensions HxLxD mm ATS 48 starters Line voltage V, 3-phase Position of the connection terminals ATS 46 ATS 48 ATS 46D7N 36 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48D7Q 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46DN 36 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48DQ 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D3N 376 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48D3Q 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D38N 376 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48D38Q 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D47N 33 x 4 x 67 top and bottom ATS 48D47Q 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D6N 33 x 4 x 67 top and bottom ATS 48D6Q 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46D75N 34 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48D75Q 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46D88N 34 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48D88Q 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46CN 39 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48CQ 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46C4N 44 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48C4Q 34 x x65 top and bottom ATS 46C7N 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48C7Q 34 x x65 top and bottom ATS 46CN 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48CQ 38 x 3 x65 top and bottom ATS 46C5N 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48C5Q 38 x 3 x65 top and bottom ATS 46C3N 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48C3Q 38 x 3 x65 top and bottom ATS 46C4N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C4Q 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C48N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C48Q 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C59N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C59Q 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C66N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C66Q 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C79N x 766x 353 bottom ATS 48C79Q 89 x 77 x 35 top and bottom ATS 46MN x 766x 353 bottom ATS 48MQ 89 x 77 x 35 top and bottom ATS 46MN x 766x 353 bottom ATS 48MQ 89 x 77 x 35 top and bottom Line voltage 8..5 V, 3-phase Line voltage V, 3-phase ATS 46D7N 36 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48D7Y 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46DN 36 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48DY 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D3N 376 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48D3Y 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D38N 376 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATS 48D38Y 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D47N 33 x 4 x 67 top and bottom ATS 48D47Y 75 x 6 x9 top and bottom ATS 46D6N 33 x 4 x 67 top and bottom ATS 48D6Y 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46D75N 34 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48D75Y 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46D88N 34 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48D88Y 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46CN 39 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48CY 9 x 9 x35 top and bottom ATS 46C4N 44 x 4 x 44 top and bottom ATS 48C4Y 34 x x65 top and bottom ATS 46C7N 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48C7Y 34 x x65 top and bottom ATS 46CN 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48CY 38 x 3 x65 top and bottom ATS 46C5N 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48C5Y 38 x 3 x65 top and bottom ATS 46C3N 685x374x69 bottom ATS 48C3Y 38 x 3 x65 top and bottom ATS 46C4N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C4Y 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C48N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C48Y 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C59N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C59Y 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C66N 95x4x353 bottom ATS 48C66Y 67 x 4 x3 top and bottom ATS 46C79N x 766x 353 bottom ATS 48C79Y 89 x 77 x 35 top and bottom ATS 46MN x 766x 353 bottom ATS 48MY 89 x 77 x 35 top and bottom ATS 46MN x 766x 353 bottom ATS 48MY 89 x 77 x 35 top and bottom () For additional information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 5 Selection guide: pages / and /3 5/5

435 Substitution 5 Substituting variable speed drives 5 ATV 8, ATV 6 Old/new equivalence tables () These tables of equivalence can be used: - to substitute devices on the basis of line voltage and motor power, - to check the dimensions and position of connection terminals. The solutions offered are based on the equivalence between simple applications (Forward, Reverse, Speed reference for V). For complex applications, check compatibility in the corresponding catalogue ATV 8 ATV ATV 6 ATV 58 Old drives Reference P motor kw Dimensions HxLxD mm Position of the connection terminals Replaced by Reference P motor kw Dimensions HxLxD mm Position of the connection terminals ATV 8 drives ATV drives Line voltage 4 V, single phase Line voltage 4 V, single phase ATV 8HU5M.8 3 x 7 x 9 top and bottom ATV HU5ME.8 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 58HU9M.37 3 x 7 x 9 top and bottom ATV HU9ME.37 4 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATV 8HU8M.75 3 x 7 x 3 top and bottom ATV HU8ME.75 4 x 7 x 38 top and bottom ATV 8PU5M.8 3 x 7 x 87 top and bottom ATV HU5ME.8 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 8PU9M.37 3 x 7 x 87 top and bottom ATV PU9ME.37 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 8PU8M.75 3 x 7 x 87 top and bottom ATV PU8ME.75 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 8HU5MX.8 3 x 7 x 9 top and bottom ATV HU5MU.8 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 8HU9MX.37 3 x 7 x 9 top and bottom ATV HU9MU.37 4 x 7 x 5 top and bottom ATV 8HU8MX.75 3 x 7 x 3 top and bottom ATV HU8MU ().75 4 x 7 x 38 top and bottom ATV 8PU5MX.8 3 x 7 x 87 top and bottom ATV PU5MU.8 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 8PU9MX.37 3 x 7 x 87 top and bottom ATV PU9MU.37 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 8PU8MX.75 3 x 7 x 87 top and bottom ATV PU8MU.75 4 x 7 x top and bottom ATV 6 drives (without application-specific option ATV 3 or ATV 58 drives (3) card) Line voltage 3 V, single phase Line voltage 4 V, single phase ATV 6U9M.37 6 x 5 x bottom ATV 3HO37M,37 45 x 7 x 3 bottom ATV 6U8M.75 6 x 5 x bottom ATV 3HO75M,75 45 x 7 x 4 bottom ATV 6U9M.5 x 8 x 44 bottom ATV 3HU5M,5 43 x 5 x 5 bottom ATV 6U4M. 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 3HUM, 84 x 4 x 5 bottom Line voltage 3 V, 3-phase Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase (4) ATV 6U9M.37 6 x 5 x bottom ATV 3HO37M3X,37 45 x 7 x bottom ATV 6U4M.75 6 x 5 x bottom ATV 3HO75M3X,75 45 x 7 x 3 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase ATV 6U8N4.75 x 8 x 44 bottom ATV 3HO75N4,75 43 x 5 x 5 bottom ATV 6U9N4.5 x 8 x 44 bottom ATV 3HU5N4,5 43 x 5 x 5 bottom ATV 6U4N4. 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 3HUN4, 84 x 4 x 5 bottom ATV 6U54N4 3 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 3HU3N x 4 x 5 bottom ATV 6U7N4 4 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 3HU4N x 4 x 5 bottom ATV 6U9N x x 5 bottom ATV 3HU55N4 5,5 3 x 8 x 7 bottom ATV 6 drives (with application-specific option ATV 58 drives () card) Line voltage 3 V, single phase Line voltage 4 V, single phase ATV 6U9M.37 6 x 5 x bottom ATV 58HU9M.37 6 x 3 x 67 bottom ATV 6U8M.75 6 x 5 x bottom ATV 58HU8M.75 6 x 3 x 67 bottom ATV 6U9M.5 x 8 x 44 bottom ATV 58HU9M.5 3 x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 6U4M. 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 58HU4M. 3 x 5 x 84 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase ATV 6U8N4.75 x 8 x 44 bottom ATV 58HU8N x 3 x 84 bottom ATV 6U9N4.5 x 8 x 44 bottom ATV 58HU9N4.5 3 x 3 x 84 bottom ATV 6U4N4. 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 58HU4N4. 3 x 4 x 84 bottom ATV 6U54N4 3 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 58HU54N x 4 x 84 bottom ATV 6U7N4 4 3 x x 5 bottom ATV 58HU7N x 4 x 84 bottom ATV 6U9N x x 5 bottom ATV 58HU9N x x 84 bottom () For additional information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. () Drive supplied with fan. (3) ATV 3 and ATV 58 drives do not have a separate control power supply. (4) Additional EMC input filters, see page /47. Selection guide: pages / and /3 5/6

436 Substitution 5 Substituting variable speed drives 5 ATV8,ATV66 Old/new equivalence tables () ATV 8 ATV 66 ATV 58 Old drives Reference P motor kw Dimensions HxLxD mm Positionof the connection terminals Replaced by Reference P motor kw Dimensions HxLxD mm ATV 8 drives ATV or ATV 3 drives () Line voltage 3 V, single phase Line voltage 4 V, single phase ATV 8U9M.37 8 x x bottom ATV HU9ME ATV 3HO37M ATV 8U8M.75 8 x x bottom ATV HU8ME ATV 3HO75M ATV 8U9M.5 84 x 49 x 45 bottom ATV HU9ME ATV 3HU5M ATV 8U4M. 5 x 85 x 58 bottom ATV HU4ME ATV 3HUM,37,37,75,75,5,5,, 4 x7 x5 45 x7 x3 4 x7 x38 45 x7 x4 4 x7 x56 43 x5 x5 4 x7 x56 84 x4 x5 Position of the connection terminals top and bottom bottom top and bottom bottom top and bottom bottom top and bottom bottom Line voltage 3 V, 3-phase Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase (3) ATV 8U54M 3 5 x 85 x 58 bottom ATV 3HU3M3X 3 84 x4 x5 bottom ATV 8U7M 4 5 x 85 x 58 bottom ATV 3HU4M3X 4 84 x4 x5 bottom ATV 8U9M x x 7 bottom ATV 3HU55M3X 5,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 8DM x x 7 bottom ATV 3HU75M3X 7,5 3 x8 x7 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase ATV 8U8N x 49 x57 bottom ATV 3HO75N4,75 43 x5 x5 bottom ATV 8U9N x 49 x 57 bottom ATV 3HU5N4,5 43 x5 x5 bottom ATV 8U4N4. 5 x 85 x 58 bottom ATV 3HUN4, 84 x4 x5 bottom ATV 8U54N4 3 5 x 85 x 58 bottom ATV 3HU3N x4 x5 bottom ATV 8U7N4 4 5 x 85 x 58 bottom ATV 3HU4N x4 x5 bottom ATV 8U9N x x 7 bottom ATV 3HU55N4 5,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 8DN x x 7 bottom ATV 3HU75N4 7,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 8D6N4 39 x 45 x9 bottom ATV 3HDN4 33 x45 x9 bottom ATV 8D3N x 45 x9 bottom ATV 3HD5N x45 x9 bottom ATV 66 drives ATV 58 () and ATV 68 drives Line voltage 3 V, 3-phase Constant torque application (high torque) Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase High torque application ATV 66U4M x x65 bottom ATV 58HU9M.5 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 66U4M.5 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 58HU9M.5 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 66U4M. 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 58HU4M. 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 66U7M 4 35 x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 58HU7M 4 86 x75 x84 bottom ATV 66U9M x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 58HU9M x3 x bottom ATV 66DM x 34 x 45 bottom ATV 58HDM x3 x bottom ATV 66D6M 45 x 34 x45 bottom ATV 58HD6MX 55 x4 x83 bottom ATV 66D3M 5 6 x 4 x8 bottom ATV 58HD3MX 5 55 x4 x83 bottom ATV 66D33M 6 x 4 x8 bottom ATV 58HD33MX 65 x35 x34 bottom ATV 66D46M 3 65 x 35 x3 bottom ATV 58HD46MX 3 65 x35 x34 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Constant torque application (high torque) Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase High torque application ATV 66U4N x x65 bottom ATV 58HU8N x5 x84 bottom ATV 66U4N x x 65 bottom ATV 58HU9N4.5 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 66U4N4. 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 58HU4N4. 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 66U54N x x 65 bottom ATV 58HU54N x75 x84 bottom ATV 66U7N x x 65 bottom ATV 58HU7N x75 x84 bottom ATV 66U9N x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 58HU9N x75 x84 bottom ATV 66DN x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 58HDN x3 x bottom ATV 66D6N4 45 x 34 x45 bottom ATV 58HD6N4 35 x3 x bottom ATV 66D3N x 34 x45 bottom ATV 58HD3N x3 x bottom ATV 66D33N4 6 x 4 x8 bottom ATV 58HD33N4 55 x4 x83 bottom ATV 66D46N4 3 6 x 4 x8 bottom ATV 58HD46N x4 x83 bottom ATV 66D54N x 35 x3 bottom ATV 58HD54N x35 x34 bottom ATV 66D64N x 35 x3 bottom ATV 58HD64N x35 x34 bottom ATV 66D79N x 35 x3 bottom ATV 58HD79N x35 x34 bottom ATV 66CN x 585 x39 bottom ATV 68CN x346 x355 bottom ATV 66C3N x 585 x 39 bottom ATV 68C3N4 9 x 396 x 45 bottom ATV 66C5N4 98 x 585 x 39 bottom ATV 68C5N4 x 396 x 45 bottom ATV 66C9N x 585 x 39 bottom ATV 68C9N4 3 x 396 x 45 bottom ATV 66C3N4 6 7 x 96 x 57 bottom ATV 68C3N4 6 3 x 75 x 45 bottom ATV 66C8N4 7 x 96 x 57 bottom ATV 68C8N4 3 x 75 x 45 bottom ATV 66C3N4 7 x 96 x 7 bottom ATV 68C33N4 5 3 x 75 x 45 bottom () For additional information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. () ATV 3 and ATV 58 drives do not have a separate control power supply. (3) Additional EMC input filters, see page /47. 5 Selection guide: pages / and /3 5/7

437 Substitution (continued) 5 Substituting variable speed drives 5 ATV 66 Old/new equivalence tables () These tables of equivalence can be used: - to substitute devices on the basis of line voltage and motor power, - to check the dimensions and position of connection terminals. The solutions offered are based on the equivalence between simple applications (Forward, Reverse, Speed reference for V). For complex applications, check compatibility in the corresponding catalogue ATV 66 ATV 38 Old drives Reference P motor kw ATV 66 drives Line voltage 3 V, 3-phase Variable torque application Dimensions HxLxD mm Position of the connection terminals Replaced by Reference P motor kw Dimensions HxLxD mm ATV 38 and ATV 68 drives Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Variable torque application Position of the connection terminals ATV 66U4M x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU9M.75 3 x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 66U4M.5 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU9M.5 3 x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 66U4M. 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU4M. 3 x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 66U4M 3 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU7M 3 86 x 75 x 84 bottom ATV 66U7M x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 38HU9M x 75 x 84 bottom ATV 66U9M x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 38HDM x 3 x bottom ATV 66DM 45 x 34 x 45 bottom ATV 38HD6MX 55 x 4 x 83 bottom ATV 66D3M 5 6 x 4 x 8 bottom ATV 38HD6MX 5 55 x 4 x 83 bottom ATV 66D3M x 4 x 8 bottom ATV 38HD8MX x 35 x 34 bottom ATV 66D33M 3 6 x 4 x 8 bottom ATV 38HD33MX 3 65 x 35 x 34 bottom ATV 66D46M x 35 x 3 bottom ATV 38HD46MX x 35 x 34 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Variable torque application Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase Variable torque application ATV 66U4N x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU8N x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 66U4N x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU9N4.5 3 x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 66U4N4. 95 x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU4N4. 3 x 5 x 84 bottom ATV 66U4N x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU54N x 75 x 84 bottom ATV 66U54N x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU7N x 75 x 84 bottom ATV 66U7N x x 65 bottom ATV 38HU9N x 75 x 84 bottom ATV 66U9N x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 38HDN x 3 x bottom ATV 66DN4 35 x 34 x 95 bottom ATV 38HD6N4 35 x 3 x bottom ATV 66D6N x 34 x 45 bottom ATV 38HD3N x 3 x bottom ATV 66D3N x 34 x 45 bottom ATV 38HD8N4 55 x 4 x 83 bottom ATV 66D33N4 6 x 4 x 8 bottom ATV 38HD8N4 55 x 4 x 83 bottom ATV 66D33N4 3 6 x 4 x 8 bottom ATV 38HD33N x 4 x 83 bottom ATV 66D46N x 4 x 85 bottom ATV 38HD46N x 4 x 83 bottom ATV 66D54N x 35 x 3 bottom ATV 38HD54N x 35 x 34 bottom ATV 66D64N x 35 x 3 bottom ATV 38HD64N x 35 x 34 bottom ATV 66D79N x 35 x 3 bottom ATV 38HD79N x 35 x 34 bottom ATV 66CN x 585 x 39 bottom ATV 68CN4 9 6 x 346 x 355 bottom ATV 66C3N4 98 x 585 x 39 bottom ATV 68C3N4 x 396 x45 bottom ATV 66C5N x 585 x 39 bottom ATV 68C5N4 3 x 396 x45 bottom ATV 66C3N4 6 7 x96 x 57 bottom ATV 68C9N4 6 x 396 x45 bottom ATV 66C3N4 7 x96 x 57 bottom ATV 68C3N4 3 x 75 x45 bottom ATV 66C8N4 7 x96 x 57 bottom ATV 68C8N4 5 3 x 75 x45 bottom ATV 66C3N4 5 7 x96 x 7 bottom ATV 68C8N4 5 3 x 75 x45 bottom () For additional information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. ATV 68 Selection guide: pages / and /3 5/8

438 Substitution 5 Substituting variable speed drives 5 ATV 45 Old/new equivalence tables () ATV 45 ATV 38 ATV 58 ATV 68 Old drives Reference P motor kw ATV 45 drives Line voltage 3 V, 3-phase Constant torque application Dimensions HxLxD mm Position of the connection terminals Replaced by ATV 4575M x 39 x 7 top and bottom ATV 58HU9M ATV 3HU5M3X ATV 45UM. 38 x 39 x 7 top and bottom ATV 58HU4M ATV 3HUM3X Reference P motor kw Dimensions HxLxD mm Position ofthe connection terminals ATV 3 (), ATV 38, ATV 58 or ATV 68 drives Line voltage 3/4 V, 3-phase,5,5,, 3 x5 x84 43 x 5 x 3 3 x5 x84 43 x 5 x 3 bottom bottom ATV 45UM 4 4 x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU4M3X 4 84 x 4 x 5 bottom ATV 58HU7M 4 86 x75 x84 bottom ATV 45UM x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HU55M3X 5,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 58HU9M 5,5 35 x3 x bottom ATV 45UM x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU75M3X 7,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 58HDM 7,5 35 x3 x bottom ATV 45DM 555 x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HDM3X 33 x45 x9 bottom ATV 45DM x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HD5M3X 5 33 x45 x9 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Constant torque application Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase High torque application ATV 4575M x 39 x 7 top and bottom ATV 3HO75N4,75 43 x5 x5 bottom ATV 58HU8N4,75 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 45U x 39 x 7 top and bottom ATV 3HU5N4,5 43 x5 x5 bottom ATV 58HU9N4,5 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 45U. 4 x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HUN4, 84 x4 x5 bottom ATV 58HU4N4, 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 45U3 3 4 x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU3N x4 x5 bottom ATV 58HU54N x75 x84 bottom ATV 45U4 4 4 x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU4N x4 x5 bottom ATV 58HU7N x75 x84 bottom ATV 45U x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU55N4 5,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 58HU9N4 5,5 86 x75 x84 bottom ATV 45U x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HU75N4 7,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 58HDN4 7,5 35 x3 x bottom ATV 45D 555 x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HDN4 33 x45 x9 bottom ATV 58HD6N4 35 x3 x bottom ATV 45D x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HD5N x45 x9 bottom ATV 58HD3N x3 x bottom ATV 45D 595 x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 58HD33N4 55 x4 x83 bottom ATV 45D x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 58HD46N x4 x83 bottom ATV 45D x 484 x 365 top and bottom ATV 58HD54N x35 x34 bottom ATV 45D x 484 x 365 top and bottom ATV 58HD79N x35 x34 bottom ATV 45D x 595 x 365 top and bottom ATV 68CN x346 x355 bottom ATV 45D x 595 x 365 top and bottom ATV 68C3N4 9 x 396 x 45 bottom Line voltage 4 V, 3-phase Variable torque application Line voltage 38 5 V, 3-phase High torque and standard torque application (ATV 3), variable torque application (ATV 38) ATV 45VU. 38 x 39 x 7 top and bottom ATV 3HU5N4,5 43 x5 x5 bottom ATV 38HU9N4,5 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 45VU x 39 x 7 top and bottom ATV 3HU5N4,5 43 x5 x5 bottom ATV 38HU9N4,5 3 x5 x84 bottom ATV 45VU3 3 4 x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU3N x4 x5 bottom ATV 38HU54N x75 x84 bottom ATV 45VU4 4 4 x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU4N x4 x5 bottom ATV 38HU7N x75 x84 bottom ATV 45VU x 39 x 9 top and bottom ATV 3HU55N4 5,5 3 x8 x7 bottom ATV 38HU9N4 5,5 86 x75 x84 bottom ATV 45VD 45 x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HDN4 33 x45 x9 bottom ATV 38HD6N4 35 x3 x bottom ATV 45VD x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 3HD5N x45 x9 bottom ATV 38HD3N x3 x bottom ATV 45VD 595 x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 38HD8N4 55 x4 x83 bottom ATV 45VD x 34 x 68 top and bottom ATV 38HD46N x4 x83 bottom ATV 45VD x 484 x 365 top and bottom ATV 38HD54N x35 x34 bottom ATV 45VD x 484 x 365 top and bottom ATV 38HD79N x35 x34 bottom ATV 45VD x 595 x 365 top and bottom ATV 68CN4 9 6 x346 x355 bottom ATV 45VC 88 x 595 x 365 top and bottom ATV 68C3N4 x 396 x 45 bottom () For additional information, please consult your Regional Sales Office. () Additional EMC input filters, see page /47 5 5/9